Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutEXTERIOR GLAZING & PANEL REPLACEMENT/RA LEE REC CENTER/2006EXTERIOR GLAZING & PANEL REPLACEMENT/ ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER/ 2006 ~~~ t ~ ~- ~x-~e~r`~o~r G (c~zi r.G ~ `~Cn-e. l ~lcec~e.meri-}- ~ ~obex~- -A. ~~e.. 7-_MA~- Ob_ ~.QSO~vI~~ 0ra.. Ob_- ~o ~ _ 5.~ n cs. ~.~_~i L __-'t~tc.r~,n oh 1 ~.-_~ t__`~i?°~O ----. ~ ~ ~__.-~ _ __ _ _ _p~ _ ca~- ~r _-E-~.~ ~~~s-~-ru.~-.~- ~r,. o~ -~e.~ ~o~er-E- _A_. ~..~e.~ - _ _ -~~.r~v~_ ~~r~t~s~_.__~,k-~~r~-or- G_~_A.z,~~g t__~~~-~ _ .t-~IQc.ern~.rt.~' __ ___ ~J _ I r r"Q ~~T ~~r`~4.5~~.nQ ~~T ~~2~"K .~ y~(~L~~1~~_. ~'1L7~'.L~ Ort" SiR.~~ _. _. _. --__ _ _ ____ ,} _ J _ _ Ax'~n~_ ~__~_;_~~;_,~ C_a_ ! En~c it'+_~G~-~'_~tz. _~ ~Q,C.e. Sc~;~_ ~_1C~hS _ _ -__ _ _ ` _ Dt~,-- _ _ __ _ __ __ _ ((~~ (~ _ _ __ N, t~~- F c-c _ ~'t"' ~i.~-.~j l ~ C- t~ f..0. r" ~ r1_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ `_\S \.._~Kl_... \''"~. ~Or. `ice\~.~ _.. ~Or' ~~C~`i.~f ~-UK~. ~..,~...-t~_q.--.. .~_-._~G.Y~.iR.i` _. _._ .. (~ ~ J \1-~;,Q~ c~. c,~x~. si.,n'~ _ ~~ ~ J ~,,, ~ . ~ S-~ ~ Corr r ~.. ~.~ ~~ ~o (~ y __ J _ _. __ __ / _ __ `f a ~ _ ~sn l~i e~-- ol~ ~` /a 4 rs~ i,n~ _~1~nst S~e~.:--~; s~,-~~ a~-us~ ~o r m T r ll// _ __ _ _ Cp,C~ ~ _ 2~'- rn~ ~t C?4S~' ~Or ~-a cons- ~r~i p -1 a~ ~h-~ ,~ , I f~ - ~'~' ~- ~~Q ~2~+~'2.0.-~if~~ ~~Y ~--~'~"2r~~.QY' ~?~CCZc i'iQ ~i _ ~n~~ ~~ tape me.-.,c}- -~rq j ~ec~- ~s-~~a l'• s l~i,_n~ , c~rr~o~'~ b~ ,~ ~c~ erur-~ -~-fl ~tcc~r~~~y. ~ ~~ c~-~ ~~re~c..~~_~,~ C,-~f C~~er~ -~ _ ~~P 1 ~~ 5 ~ ~U~ Y~iS~NriQ_n T~ '~9 v _ ~ ~ ~ ~` _ ~f-~k F . n~ _ ~ m ,c. ~~1 _ ~ (~c_e. -~o,~' recce, ~-~- ~-~` -~ : ~ s . - __ _ _ _ ~kk ~e.r ~~ oY' Cj ~ c-c ~(~~ ~ ~ a, \` Gin-e.,~ ~ `~1Q ~ ~ ~- -e~r~. ~.h~ ~U1D-~.r~ ~, , `--¢~. ~\-¢,L'C e,~Ti p~ ~~`~ l-'z r _ ~ O C? __ ___ __ __. __ _ _ __ _ _ __ a - m q - 0 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~. J v~ «.~ ~ off--, ~~ ~ ~ `~ c~,. ~ a r ~ ~ k~. ~ ~ w Q,r a C J __ _ __ ~- n_ G~w`~-~!ZoY~ Z~ _ __ ~C.re.~o~h m~_ ~e_--r f=x-l~ r~ or ~ la Z; -~.~ ~~ - ~ -~ o$ _ Rasolu.~; e'y1 0 ~ -- !ab Q~r+~ ~ tt)Q.Y k _~~ ~ Lee n Re~'Qa-~ ~ v~-. C~ ~ ~4.,, c~ ~ r, c~c~ ~ ~ 't''an.¢. l ta~ex~+-tK-~-- f i ~~-. ~~ ~~ Prepared by: Kumi Moms, Engineering, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240, (319)356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. ph_~~ RESOLUTION SETTING A PUBLIC HEARING ON APRIL 4, 2006 ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE OF SAID HEARING, AND DIRECTING THE CITY ENGINEER TO PLACE SAID PLANS ON FILE FOR PUBLIC INSPECTION. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA: That a public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-mentioned project is to be held on the 4~' day of April, 2006, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. 2. That the City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. That the copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the City Engineer in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. Passed and approved this 7th day of March , 20 06 MAYOR ATTEST: ~r~~r~ ~S - ~t~yt~ CI LERK pproved by / ~~/O~ Ci y Att rney's Office 3C( ~9~ pwenglres/setph-RbtLee-ext.doc Resolution No. Page 2 It was moved by Champion and seconded by Bailey the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: x Bailey ~ Champion x Correia x Elliott x O'Donnell _~ Vanderhoef x Wilburn NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City. Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Robert A. Lee Recreation Center Exterior Glazing and Panel Replacement Project in said City at 7:00 p.m. on the 4th day of April, 2006, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK pweng/nph-RbtLee-ext.doc -- FI~_FD f~~~ ~~R 2s ~~ s: zo - PROJECT MANUAL _ FOR ~ ~:~ ,-,; ~-~-.,. ~ ~~ ~_.t_~:r-5~~ _ ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION 1~~~T~~1'~ ~`~~~~A EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY OWNER: ARCHITECT/ENGINEER: BIDS DUE: OPTIONAL PREBID MEETING: ISSUED FOR BID: City of Iowa City 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Shive-Hattery, Inc. 2834 Northgate Drive Iowa City, Iowa 52245 May 2, 2006 10:00 a.m. Local Time City of Iowa City 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 April 18, 2006 9:00 a.m. Local Time Robert A. Lee Community Recreation Center Meeting Room A 220 South Gilbert Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 March 28, 2006 END OF DOCUMENT 00001 105191-1 00001-1 DOCUMENT 00005 CERTIFICATIONS PAGE .FI~.F~~ ~GD~ ~~~i 28 Ali 8~ 2 ~; I hereby certify that the portion of this technic ~i~si~rh-~~K described below was prepared by me or under ire~~ ~Y I~~~ ~pg•J.: G UCy~ supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Registered oc>; ~ ••. ;.per Architect under the laws of the State of Iowa. ~~ 5 0 0 3 ~' ``~ IOWA ~ Signature: 9~; ~•.• .~ i~v~ Name: ou las J. DuCharme AIA ~~`~~EREO •~~~'~`~ Date Issued: March 28, 2006 Pages, Sheets, or Divisions covered by this seal: Divisions 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 12 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by ESSIO me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly Q~OF •...... ,!~q~~ licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. ~4;~ s?c - f /, z TIMOTHY R. 2 v fEHR ; nm, Signature: j s~• 12871 f; ~° Name: Timothy R. Fehr, P.E. Date: March 28, 2006 •'' •• ••••'••••~ My license renewal date is December 31, 2007. ~ • IOWA pages, sheets, or Divisions covered by this seal: Division 15 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by OFESSIp me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly QQ••....••••••..;~q~ licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. ~c • • JAKEJ. •F2c =Z ~ = HENKLE s'-T; Signature: =' s 12668 ~ Name: Jak . Henkle, P.E. Date: March 28, 2006 ~•.•'l111NA'•••~ My license renewal date is December 31, 2006. Pages, sheets, or Divisions covered by this seal: Division 16 END OF DOCUMENT 00005 105191-1 00005-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00001 PROJECT MANUAL TITLE PAGE - - 00005 CERTIFICATIONS PAGE 00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00015 LIST OF DRAWINGS ~~~ ~D ~°~~ ~~R ~s ~~ . C/]~`~ 8 ~ (~;`i ' i ~. I(~~n~q BIDDING DOCUMENTS CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00130 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00200 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 00210 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00220 PRE-BID SUBSTITUTIONS 00410 BID FORM 00430 BID BOND 00500 AGREEMENT 00611 PERFORMANCE BOND 00612 PAYMENT BOND 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS CC CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 01210 ALLOWANCES 01230 ALTERNATES 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01330 SUBMITTALS 01330-A SUBMITTALS PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST 01351 REMODELING PROJECT PROCEDURES 01450 QUALITY CONTROL 01520 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION 01610 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01610-A PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST 01705 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01750 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01787 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DIVISION 2 -SITE WORK 02775 SIDEWALKS DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03001 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 105191-1 00010-1 FILED TABLE OF CONTENTS -, DIVISION 5 -METALS Zafl~ M~R 28 AM 8' 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING '~- ~ `~ .;--.,,, :NIA DIVISION 6 -WOOD & PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY DIVISION 7 -THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07260 VAPOR RETARDERS 07410 METAL WALL PANELS 07551 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED ROOFING 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07920 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8 -DOORS & WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08210 WOOD DOORS 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08710 HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING 08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS DIVISION 9 -FINISHES 09100 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES ~-, 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ~ J 09651 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES 10210 WALL LOUVERS DIVISION 12 -FURNISHINGS 12241 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 105191-1 00010-2 -- - TABLE OF CONTENTS ,~~ ~ ~ ~-, ~j DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL ZD06 ~~R 2$ A~1 $~ Z ~ 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ~~ ~ ~~~ ~,~y~'~ 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION IOWA ~,~-~-~~, IO~a 15105 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15106 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15107 PIPE SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND GUARDS - 15110 VALVES 15120 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15810 DUCTWORK _ 15830 FANS 15851 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 15910 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DD C 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL -- 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16060 GROUNDING 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16130 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY __ 16421 MOTOR STARTERS 16441 VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16445 DISCONNECT SWITCHES _- 16491 FUSES 16511 LIGHTING END OF DOCUMENT 00010 105191-1 00010-3 Sheet A1.01 A2.01 A2.02 A5.01 A5.02 A5.03 A5.04 M1.01 M 1.02 E1.01 E 1.02 Drawings COVER DOCUMENT 00015 LIST OF DRAWINGS Drawings are not bound in this book. FLOOR PLAN & ENLARGED PLANS EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DOOR SCHEDULE GLAZING ELEVATIONS DETAILS DETAILS DETAILS DETAILS MECHANICAL PLANS MECHANICAL SCHEDULES, DETAILS, AND ENLARGED PLAN ELECTRICAL PLANS ELECTRICAL PHOTOS AND SCHEDULES END OF DOCUMENT 00015 ~~! ~~ 2005 MAR 28 A~! 8; 2 t (ow~z c~c`~~r~~ T~' Inl,~fA 105191-1 00015-1 Division 0 Bidding and Contract Requirements ~~~ ~~ 1r~p~ ~Q~,, c'8 ~~, 8: Z ~ r~~~~ Di~~ision ~ ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER ~'~ ~1'`1 EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL CC-~~ REPLACEMENT PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 10 A.M. on the 2"d day of May, 2006, or at a later date and/or time as determined by the Director of Public Works or designee, with notice of said later date and/or time to be published as required by law. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 18~' day of May, 2006, or at such later time and place as may be scheduled. The Project will involve the following: Removing and replacing all exterior glazing and metal panels in phases. Associated elements such as egress and public entry doors are to be replaced. The project will include modifications of related HVAC system. A Pre-bid Conference to be held on Tuesday, April 18 at 9 a.m., at the Robert A. Lee Recreation Center, in meeting Room A at 220 South Gilbert Street in Iowa City. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Shive-Hattery, Inc. of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, sepazate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days until a contract is awarded, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabula- tion of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and 20U6 HER 28 A~1 8:21 C17)~ ~~~Rf~ ~~~~ ~l ~% IC?~r~q 105191-1 00130-1 labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from FILED all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for 206 BAR 28 AN 8t 2 ~ a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City. CITY CLER' The following limitations shall apply to this Project: IOWA CITY, It. Specified Start Date: August 7, 2006 Completion Date: Completion in phases, refer to summary of work in specifications Liquidated Damages: $100 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Iowa City Reprographics of Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $50.00 non-refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Iowa City Reprographics. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the Contractor shall furnish documentation of all reasonable, good faith efforts to recruit MBE's. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721. By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Reciprocal Preference Act applies to the contract with respect to bidders who are not Iowa residents. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive techni- calities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Pweng/adbids/adbids-rectr.doc 3/06 105191-1 00130-2 ,. _ DOCUMENT 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AIA, A701-1997 --- Z~~6~l~P, ?$ ~i~1 $~ 22 I. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. AIA Document A701 Instructions to Bidders (1997 Edition), is the I~[,~~t~o ~F~ ~ nd is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound-h~erem.~~i~ o Cah be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows: AIA Iowa 1000 Walnut Street, Suite 101 Des Moines, IA 50309 - phone: 515-244-7502 fax: 515-244-5347 Contact: Kerry Allen -- kallen@aiaiowa.org www.aiaiowa.org - II. SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Refer to Document 00210 for additions and amendments to these Instructions to Bidders. END OF DOCUMENT 00200 105191-] 00200-1 - DOCUMENT 00210 C SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS f - J ~~ ~`' AIA A701-1997 The following Supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "Instructions to Bidders," Amer~can~n~ti~u~~f Architects (AIA) Document A701 - 1997. Where any Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or clau~('~iYpi~i~reof __ is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the unaltered portior~~f~at~r~~ ep~~~A Paragraph, Subparagraph or clause or portion thereof shall remain in full effect. ARTICLE 1; DEFINITIONS No Supplements ARTICLE 2; BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS No Supplements ARTICLE 3; BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 Copies Add the following to Subparagraph 3.1.1: A bidder receiving a contract award may retain the bidding documents and his deposit will be refunded. Successful subcontractors and material suppliers may retain their bidding documents and their deposit --- will be refunded if the Architect receives written notification within the 30 calendar day period following receipt of bids. Delete Subparagraph 3.1.2. Add the following Subparagraph: 3.1.5 Copies of the reports and drawings that are not included with Bidding Documents may be examined at the Engineering Division at the Civic Center, Iowa City, Iowa during regular business hours __ or may be obtained from the Owner at the Owner's reproduction cost plus handling charge. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which the Contractor may rely as identified and established above are incorporated therein by reference. The Contractor is not entitled to rely upon other information and data utilized by the Owner and the Owner's Architectural/Engineering Consultant in the preparation of Drawings and Specifications. ARTICLE 4; BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 Preparation of Bids 4.1.1 Add the words "in duplicate" following the word "bid." 204165-0 00210-1 (L C Q DOCUMENT 00210 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2006 MAR 28 AM 8:22 AIA A701-1997 CE.r.,~ ~;~~~Kollowing Subparagraphs 4.1.8, 4.1.9, and 4.1.10 ~~WA ~1T1~8 fi~W~Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid in accordance with local law as outlined in 1109.07 of the IDOT Standard Specifications. The City of Iowa City does issue tax exemption certificates to preclude the payment of sales tax. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. If tax exemption certificates are not issued, prior to project acceptance by the City Council, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a statement of taxes paid, including all information required by the State of Iowa for reimbursement of taxes. The City will reimburse Contractor for taxes approved and reimbursed by the State of Iowa. Reimbursement to the Contractor will occur within 30 days of the City receiving reimbursement from the State. Tax statements submitted after the project has been accepted by the City Council will not be accepted or reimbursed. 4.1.9 The Contractor shall take note and comply with all governing laws, rules, and regulations affecting the Work. This may include such laws, rules, and regulations as: 1. Licensing of Contractors for special requirements, e.g. hazardous waste removal. 2. Requirements for special construction permits. 3. Exclude sales tax in bid. 4. Wage rates and employment requirements as required by the Special Conditions, by law or by Owner. 5. Local labor requirements. 6. Non-discriminatory hiring practices. -- 7. Targeted small business participation. 8. WBE/MBE 4.1.10 No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the date of opening. 4.2 Bid Security Subparagraph 4.2.1 Delete Subparagraph 4.2.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph: 4.2.1 Each Bidder shall accompany the bid with a bid security, in a separate envelope, as security _ that the successful Bidder will enter into a Contract for the work bid upon and will furnish after the award of the Contract, a corporate surety bond or bonds, acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of the Contract, in an amount equivalent to 100% of the amount of the Contract. The Bidder's security shall be in an amount equivalent to (10% of the Bid amount, and shall be in the form of a bid bond from a corporate surety satisfactory to the Owner. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. ~~ 4.3 Submission of Bids Delete Subparagraph 4.3.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph 4.3.1: 204165-0 00210-2 ~- - DOCUMENT 00210 (''~ SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ~ ~ ~. ~ L,~ AIA A701-1997 Zg06 hl~R 28 AM 8~ 22 All copies of the Bid and other documents, not including the bid security, required to be submitted with the Bid, shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope, the bid security, if any, ~"I~+b~~i~ed in a __ separate sealed opaque envelope. Each envelope shall bear the return addre~s ~I~ie~B,~Z~Cr ~~11 be addressed to the Owner clearly identifying the Project. ___ Each bidder who is not a Targeted Small Business (TSB) and who will be using a TSB subcontractor or supplier shall submit with the bid on a Targeted Small Business Participation Form, the name(s) of Iowa Targeted Small Business(es) to which a subcontract will be awarded, a description of the work to be performed, and the dollar amount assigned to the work to be performed. If a prime contractor fails to meet the Targeted Small Business(es) (TSB) participation goal indicated, the prime contractor shall provide a list of Targeted Small Business(es) contacted on the Targeted Small Business Contact Form provided herein. If the Bid, the bid security, if any, and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid are sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mail envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. Change subparagraph 4.4.1 under paragraph 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID, to read as follows: -- 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder for a period of thirty (30) days following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. ARTICLE 5; CONSIDERATION OF BIDS No Supplements ARTICLE 6; POST-BID INFORMATION Add Subparagraph 6.1.1 as follows: __ 6.1.1 Out-of-state-bidders shall furnish documentation prior to execution of the Agreement that confirms the Bidder is in compliance Chapter 91C Construction Contractors and Chapter 490 Business Corporation Division XV Foreign Corporations of the Code of Iowa. Add the following sub-subparagraph under subparagraph 6.3.1: 6.3.1.4 The successful bidder, within 24 hours of receipt of bid submittal shall provide to the Owner a list of all Subcontractors selected to perform work on this project. The Subcontractor list shall include each firm's name and address. ARTICLE 7; PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND No Supplements 204165-0 00210-3 DOCUMENT 00210 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AIA A701-1997 ARTICLE 8; FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 8.1 Execution of Agreement Add the following Paragraph 8.1 Execution of Agreement: 8.1 The selected Bidder shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award, sign and deliver the required number of executed counterparts of the Agreement along with any required attached documents. Within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of executed documents from the selected Bidder, the Owner shall deliver one fully executed counterpart to the Contractor. END OF DOCUMENT 00210 N ~ ~ ~~ ir tt i r ~ ~ N U~ ~ ~ ~~ ~~ c N 0 204165-0 00210-4 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 DOCUMENT INCLUDES A. Pre-bid Substitutions BIDDER'S OPTIONS SECTION 00220 PRE-BID SUBSTITUTIONS ~I~..~D 2Q06 8AF 28 A~1 8~ 22 Cil i ~ ~i~._~i~{~ IOWA CITY 10WA A. For products specified only be reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select one of products and manufacturers named which complies with the technical Specifications. No substitutions will be allowed. C. For Products specified by naming several products or manufacturers and stating "or equivalent," "or equal," or "or Architect approved equivalent," or similar wording, submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named for review and approval. D. For products specified by naming only one product/manufacturer, there is no option and no substitution will be allowed. SUBSTITUTIONS A. Base Bid shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Substitutions for products may be made during the bidding period by submitting completed substitution request form and substantiating product data/literature aminimum often (10) calendar days prior to the Bid Date to the Architect. 2. The Architect will consider requests utilizing this section from the Bidder for substitution of products in place of those specified. 3. Requests submitted ten (10) calendar days prior to Bid Date will be included in an addendum if acceptable. 4. Substitution requests may be submitted utilizing a facsimile machine (FAX) if substitution request forms and substantiating data are submitted. B. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literate, identifying: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. 105191-1 00220-1 FI LEA SECTION 00220 PRE-BID SUBSTITUTIONS ` ~~~~5 ~A~ Z$ aM $' ~ Samples, as applicable. __ _ d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used and date of (~~ TY CLERK each installation. - towA can ~~wA 2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified, listing significant variations. 3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 4. All effects of substitution on separate contracts. ~__ 5. List of changes required in other work or products. 6. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 7. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials. C. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. 2. In judgment of the Architect, do not include adequate information necessary for a complete evaluation. D. The Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions. 1.04 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION A. In making formal request for substitution the bidder represents that: 1. The bidder has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equivalent to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. The bidder will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified. ^' 3. The bidder will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. . 4. The bidder waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 1.05 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Issue an addendum to identify accepted substitutions. C. No verbal or written approvals other than by Addendum will be valid. 1.06 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM A. The form is attached to this Section. B. Substitutions will be considered only when the attached for-n is completed and included with the submittal with back-up data. ]05191-1 00220-2 --- - - __ _ _ _ ~, --- SECTION 00220 F I ~ F D PRE-BID SUBSTITUTIONS - TO: Shive-Hattery, Inc. ZG~6 MAC 2$ AEI S~ 22 2834 Northgate Drive Iowa City, Iowa 52245 C~ I Y C~ ~~ i~ ~QV!Ir ~ Ci~ Y IOWA We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item: DRAWING NO. DRAWING NAME SPEC SECT. SPEC NAME PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM Proposed Substitution: -- Attach complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. -- Submit with request necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. - The undersigned certifies that the function, appearance and quality are of equal performance and assumes liability for equal performance, equal design and compatibility with adjacent materials. ~_ Submitted By: __ Signature Title Name Firm Address -- Telephone Date Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally - binding signature will result in retraction of approval. For use by the Architect Recommended Recommended as noted - Not Recommended Received Late Insufficient data received gy date - For use by the Owner Approved Approved as noted Not Approved Received Late Insufficient data received gy date 105191-1 00220-3 PRE-B D SU STITUTIONS F~L.ED Filtin Blanks Below: ZdQ~ MQR 2$ Q~ $~ 22 A. Does the substitution affect dimensions indicated on the Drawings: C~~/ GL~~~{ Yes No If yes, clear indicate changes. (~w'A C~~ ~Q~A B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused f by the requested substitution? Yes No If no, fully explain: C. What effect does substitution have on other Contracts or other trades? D. What effect does substitution have on construction schedule? E. Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different. Explain: F. Reason for Request: G. Itemized comparison of specified item(s) with the proposed substitution; list significant variations: H. Designation of maintenance services and sources: PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED (Attach additional sheets if required.) EN D OF SECTION 00220 105191-1 00220-4 DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM PROJECT: Robert A. Lee Recreation Center Exterior Glazing and Panel Replacement Project City of Iowa City BID TO: City of Iowa City Civic Center 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, IA 52240 ~~~ ~~ 1006 ~1QR 28 ~~ 8~ 22 Ci r Y CL~Rl~ IOVI~~i CITY dQWq BID FROM: (Legal Name) -- NOTE: Submit one original and one copy of this Bid Form. All blanks shall be completed. Only bids on this form will be accepted. Submit Bid Security, if required, in separate envelope. Bidder shall carefully review the Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders prior to completing this form. 1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid Price and within the schedule indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement for Bids and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 30 days after the day of Bid opening. _,__ 2. If a Notice to Proceed or if a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the 30-day period, the undersigned will, within ten days of such receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award and will execute and deliver the Agreement, the Performance, Labor and _ Material Payment Bonds, the certificate of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before the date indicated in the Advertisement for Bids. The undersigned Bidder submits, herewith, bid security in accordance with the terms set forth in the Advertisement for Bids. 4. The Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged: Date Number BIDDER has visited the site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. BIDDER is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. 105191-1 -- 00410-1 DOCUME~ Q04~~ . -_ BID F 7. BIDDER will complete the Work in accordan~~vi~~2$id~g~ogr~nents as follows: __ BASE BID: CITY CLERK IQWA CITY ~QWA TOTAL PRICE 1. All work indicated in the Bidding Documents $ 2. Contingency Allowance $25,000 TOTAL BASE BID $ (sum of Items 1 - 2) TOTAL BASE BID (sum of Items 1 - 2) in words: Amount shall be indicated in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount indicated in words shall govern. ALTERNATE BIDS: Bidder agrees to perform all the work for each Alternate as described in the proposed Contract Documents. Amount shall be indicated in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount indicated in words shall govern. ALTERNATE NO. 1: Provide Area F (balcony) enclosure as identified in the Contract Documents. ADD the Sum of: DOLLARS ALTERNATE NO. 2: Integrate fin tube controls in meeting rooms with existing digital control system. ADD the Sum of: DOLLARS ($ ALTERNATE NO.3: Provide a variable speed drive, related controls at the existing pool exhaust fan. ADD the Sum of: DOLLARS ($ 105191-1 00410-2 DOCUMENT 00410 ~~ ~~ ~~ BID FORM 1t1Q6 MAR 2$ ~~ g: 22 8. This Bid is submitted on , 2006. CI1`( C;L~~K 9. State Contractor License No. ~(~1,~/H (~~~~/ '~~A 10. BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the times specified in the Agreement. The parties hereto expressly stipulate and agree that time is of the essence of this contract. In the event that the work and the final completion items as stated in the Supplementary Conditions are not completed within the time herein before stipulated, or within such extension of time as may be granted as provided in accordance with the General Conditions, it is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall pay to the Owner as agreed as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, $100.00 for each day which may elapse between the date as herein provided and the date of actual completion of the work, said sum being expressly agreed upon as a measure of damage to the Owner by reason of delay, and it is further expressly agreed that to estimate the actual damages sustained by the Owner in such event would be impractical and difficult, and the Contractor agrees and consents that the amount of all such liquidated damages may be deducted and retained by the Owner from any monies then due or thereafter becoming due to the Contractor. 11. Bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, without collusion or in connection with any other ____ person, organization or corporation bidding on the work. Bidder certifies that this proposal is made in conformance with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between the conditions of the bidder's proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by Architect/Engineer, _ _ the provisions of the latter shall prevail. 12. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid: a. Required Bid Security in the amount of five percent and in the form of SUBMITTED IN A SEPARATE ENVELOPE. b. Targeted Small Business Contact and Participation forms. It is hereby agreed that when submitting this bid to the City of Iowa City the Contractor warrants that it has taken documented steps to encourage the participation in TSBs for the purpose of subcontracting and supplying of materials. The proper forms must be attached to this bid. 13. The bidder shall not make any revisions to the bid forms or the Schedule of Bid Prices and shall not devise any -- alternates other than those provided. Any such notes, revisions, or comments shall be grounds for rejection of the bid as not being responsive. 14. The bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids, waive irregularities or technicalities in any bid, and accept any bid which meets the requirements of the bid documents. __ 15. The undersigned bidder certifies that a) the bidder's detailed examination of the drawings and specifications has turned up no ambiguities which need clarification, b) only authorized data have been used to arrive at the bidder's bid figure, and c) the experience and capabilities of the bidder's firm, the bidder's workmen and the _ bidder's subcontractors are particularly well-suited to the construction of this type of project. 16. Complete the applicable item(s) listed below. If this Bid is submitted by an agent of BIDDER, attach a current Power-of-Attorney certifying the agent's authority to bind the BIDDER. 105191-1 00410-3 If BIDDER is: An Individual BY (Signature of Individual) Doing Business As Business Address Phone No. A Partnership By DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM FiL~D 2006 MAR 28 AM 8~ 22 CITY CLERK laWA CITY IOV1(A (Firm Name) (Signature of General Partner) (Typed or Printed Name) Business Address Phone No. A Corporation By State of Incorporation By (Typed or Printed Name) (Corporation Name) Attest Business Address (Signature of Person Authorized to Sign) (Typed or Printed Name and Title) (Secretary) Phone No. END OF DOCUMENT 00410 105191-1 00410-4 - - DOCUMENT 00430 BID BOND __ I. BID BOND A. Where it is provided in the Instructions to Bidders that the Bidder may submit a bid bond as the bid security, the Bidder shall use AIA Document A310 "Bid Bond." AIA Document A310 is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows: AIA Iowa 1000 Walnut Street, Suite 101 Des Moines, IA 50309 -- phone: 515-244-7502 fax: 515-244-5347 Contact: Kerry Allen kallen@aiaiowa.org www.aiaiowa.org END OF DOCUMENT 00430 O ~n rv `~ f -~ -~" rv ...~ ~., f" :r`f ~~ ~ ~ r.,_ '~ _"''Cl '. A. ~ r-~"t~ ~/ / ~ A ~ N N 105191-1 -- 00430-1 DOCUMENT 00500 AGREEMENT __ I. AGREEMENT A. AIA Document A101 "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor" where the basis of payment is a stipulated Sum (1997 Edition) forms the basis of the contract between the Owner and Contractor and is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. All provisions which are not amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows: AIA Iowa 1000 Walnut Street, Suite 101 Des Moines, IA 50309 phone: 515-244-7502 fax: 515-244-5347 Contact: Kerry Allen kallen@aiaiowa.org www.aiaiowa.org END OF DOCUMENT 00500 0 N ~ d -~ ~ ]Sr .'~! C~ ~7 --~-~ I =-.t C~ N co ;'_. :-< t`-- ri'i ~, F ~ S D` ~ N N 105191-1 00500-1 DOCUMENT 00611 PERFORMANCE BOND I. PERFORMANCE BOND A. AIA Document A312 "Performance Bond " is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. All provisions which are not amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects sta te office as follows: AlA Iowa 1000 Walnut Street, Suite 101 Des Moines, IA 50309 phone: 515-244-7502 fax: 515-244-5347 Contact: Kerry Allen kallen@aiaiowa.org www.aiaiowa.org _ O ~ n ° D ~ O'~ '~ -, END OF DOCUMENT 00611 '"~ ^`` ~„ -~-1 N ~ r.,_ti : ~ ~.... r_. ~ rr~ ~~ A• g D a o v r N 105191-1 00611-1 DOCUMENT 00612 PAYMENT BOND I. PAYMENT BOND A. AIA Document A312 "Payment Bond" is hereby made a part of the se Documents to the same extent as __ if bound herein. All provisions which are not amended or supplemented remain in full and extent. This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows: _ _ AIA Iowa 1000 Walnut Street, Suite 101 Des Moines, IA 50309 phone: 515-244-7502 fax: 515-244-5347 Contact: Kerry Allen ~ o kallen@aiaiowa.org ~ °' www.aiaiowa.org ~' (~ -`- ~ - (Tt A ~ END OF DOCUMENT 00612 ~~ ~-° T' ~,~, N 105191-1 00612-1 - DOCUMENT 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS I. GENERAL CONDITIONS A. AIA Document A201 "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" (1997 Edition), is the General Conditions between the Owner and Contractor and is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. The document can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows: AIA Iowa 1000 Walnut Street, Suite 101 Des Moines, IA 50309 phone: 515-244-7502 fax: 515-244-5347 Contact: Kerry Allen -- kallen@aiaiowa.org www.aiaiowa.org - - II. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS A. Refer to Document 00800, Supplementary Conditions, for amendments to these General Conditions. END OF DOCUMENT 00700 _ ~ ~n ~ 4 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ I-T1 ~~ a ~ Y N N 105191-1 00700-1 ___ DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 The following Supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A201 - 1997 Edition. Where a portion thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Instructions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. - - Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. ARTICLE l: GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Basic Definitions 1.1.3 After the word "equipment" add the following: "tools, transportation, services, taxes, insurance." N O 1.1.3 Add new sentence as follows: "The Contractor shall provide all worldC~mate°tals which any part of the Contract Documents require him to provide." -~ ~. ~ ,_,~ -~ --4 ~ -- ARTICLE 2: OWNER ~ ~ ~ ~ -~ c--- T1 x• 2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner ;~ ~ ~ Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 and substitute the following Subparagraph: ~' cNa 2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished free of charge 25 copies of Drawings and Project Manuals returned after bidding for use in execution of the Work. Half-size sets of drawings or additional copies will be furnished at the cost of reproduction, postage, and handling. 2.4 Delete Subparagraph 2.4.1 and substitute the following: __ 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within aseven-day period after written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case the Owner may deduct from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the entire cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses and heating, engineering, accounting, consulting services and attorneys' fees and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect, - - or failure. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Owner's actions pursuant to this Subparagraph shall not operate as a release of any obligation of a surety. 105191-1 00800-1 DOCUMENT 00800 _ __ SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ~~( ~~ GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTR j6 01-1997 2006 MAR 28 AM 8~ 23 ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR CITY CLEf~K 3.2 Delete Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 and substitute the followir}~>~/~ (~+~ ~~WA 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3 and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and failed to report it to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity involving a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for such performance and shall bear costs for correction. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures 3.3.2 Following the word "Subcontractors," add the following: "Sub-subcontractors, materialmen and suppliers." 3.4 Labor and Materials 3.4.1 Add the following sentence at the end of Subparagraph 3.4.1 as follows: "Should the Contract Documents require work to be performed after regular working hours or should the Contractor elect to perform work after regular hours, the additional cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor." 3.4.2 At the end of the Subparagraph, add the following words to the sentence: "or Construction Change Directive." Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.4 through 3.4.6: 3.4.4 Whenever any provisions of the Contract conflict with any agreements or regulation of any kind in force among members of any trade association, unions or councils, which regulate what work shall be included in the work of particular trades, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to - - reconcile any such conflict without delay or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. 3.4.5 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the general requirements. 3.4.6 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor: 3.4.6.1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. 105191-1 00800-2 - DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ~! ~ ~~ GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 -- 1D~6 MAR 2~ ~~ ~' t~~ 3.4.6.2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the su sti uti n the Contractor would for that specified. (~,,nnC~~-~-~a,~ ~~(_E(,K 3.4.6.3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includ ~s4'a7tr're'1~~ ost~r this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and 3.4.6.4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 3.5 Warranty In the first sentence of Subparagraph 3.5.1., delete the words "not inherent in the quality required or permitted." 3.6 Taxes Delete Subparagraph 3.6.1 and substitute the following: -- 3.6.1 Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid in accordance with local law as outlined in 1109.07 of the IDOT Standard Specifications. The City of Iowa City does issue tax exemption certificates to preclude the payment of sales tax. The Contractor shall submit -- the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. If tax exemption certificates are not issued, prior to project acceptance by the City Council, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a statement of taxes paid, including all information required by the State of Iowa for reimbursement of taxes. The City will __ reimburse Contractor for taxes approved and reimbursed by the State of Iowa. Reimbursement to the Contractor will occur within 30 days of the City receiving reimbursement from the State. Tax statements submitted after the project has been accepted by the City Council will not be accepted or reimbursed. 3.7 Permits, Fees and Notices At the end of Subparagraph 3.7.1, add: The Owner, through the Architect, will submit for review and approval Drawings and Specifications to the appropriate public authorities and governmental agencies having jurisdiction over the Project. 3.7.2 Delete the word "comply" and substitute with: "perform the Work in compliance." 3.7.4 Delete the word "attributable," and add "or replacing such Work" to the end of the sentence. 3.9 Superintendent Add Subparagraph 3.9.2 to Paragraph 3.9: 3.9.2 CONTRACTOR shall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per day, -- seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. CONTRACTOR shall provide to the Architect and Owner the phone number and/or paging service of this individual. 105191-1 00800-3 DOCUMENT 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS T ~~ ~~~ GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUC I 01-1997 2006 MAR 28 AM 8~ 23 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples CITY CL.ERI~C Add Subparagraph 3.12.11 to Paragraph 3.12: I~VIIA CITY InWA 3.12.11 The Architect's review of Contractor's submittals will be limited to examination of an initial submittal and two (2) resubmittals. The Architect's review of additional submittals will be made only with the consent of the Owner after notification by the Architect. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect for evaluation of such additional resubmittals. 3.13 Use of Site Add the following to Subparagraph 3.13.1: "The Contractor acknowledges that the property on which the Project and Work are located will be occupied and in use by the Owner during the execution of the Work. The Contractor shall perform and coordinate its work in such a manner that the portions of the property occupied and in use will not be encumbered or the use interfered with or interrupted." 3.17 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17.1 Add the following to the end of the Subparagraph: "and the Owner in writing." 3.18 Indemnification Delete Subparagraph 3.18.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph: 3.18.1 The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the City of Iowa City and its _. officers, employees, and agents from any and all liability, loss, cost, damage, and expense (including reasonable attorney's fees and court costs) resulting from, arising out of, or incurred by reason of any claims, actions, or suits based upon or alleging bodily injury, including death, or property damage rising out of or resulting from the Contractor's operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or herself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. , Add the following Subparagraph 3.18.3: 3.18.3 Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City of Iowa City, Iowa. ARTICLE 4: ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 Architect Delete Subparagraph 4.1.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph: 4.1.1 The "Architect" is defined in this Contract as the Engineer or Architect lawfully licensed by the State to practice architecture or engineering or an entity, licensed by the State to lawfully practice architecture or engineering identified as such in this Contract and as is referred to throughout the Contract documents as if singular in number. The term "Engineer," "Architect/Engineer," "Engineer/Architect," "Architect's authorized representative," "Engineer's authorized representative," or "ArchitecdEngineer's authorized representative" shall mean "Architect" as defined in this paragraph. 105191-1 00800-4 - DOCUMENT 00800 '' SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS F~ 1 ~~ GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 -- 2~~6 liAR 28 AM 8~ 23 4.1.2 Delete the word "Contractor." 4.2 Architect's Administration of the Contract r'f ~ ~~ ~~..E~{~ - IOWr^~ Ci i `! IC~1~JA 4.2.1 In the first sentence, add the words "as provided herein" following the words "Owner's representative." 4.2.3 Add the words "and the Owner" to all references to the Architect. 4.2.5 Delete the word "certify" and replace with "recommend to the Owner." 4.2.6 Add the words "recommend to the Owner to" following the words "authority to." 4.2.10 Delete the last sentence. 4.2.11 Delete Subparagraph 4.2.11 and substitute the following Subparagraph: 4.2.11 The Architect will make recommendations to the Owner regarding matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and. within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which recommendations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then the Architect shall furnish such recommendations within such reasonable time after the request is made that allow sufficient time in the professional judgment of the Architect for review. 4.2.12 Delete the word "decisions" and replace with "recommendations" in all locations. 4.3 Claims or Disputes Delete Subparagraphs 4.3.1 through 4.3.3 and substitute the following Subparagraphs: - 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the Parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment of interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other similar relief with respect to the administration of the Contract during the performance of the Work. The __ term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. Nothing in this Article is intended to limit __ claims by the Owner related to the performance of or quality of the Work. 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim relating to the same subject matter made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered and is deemed waived by the Contractor. 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim, unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner - shall continue to make payments for sums not in dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents. 105191-1 00800-5 Ff LSD DOCUMENT 00800 -- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 200 IyA1~ 28 ~~ ~; ~ Ad e of Ming Clauses 4.3.7.3 and 4.3.7.4 to Subparagraph 4.3.7: CITY CLERK 4.3.7.3 Claims for increase in the Contract Time shall set forth in detail the circumstances _ IOWA CITY In~Athat form the basis for the Claim, the date upon which each cause of delay began to affect the progress of the Work, the date upon which each cause of delay ceased to affect the progress of the Work and the number of days' increase in the Contract Time claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay. The Contractor shall provide such supporting documentation as -- the Owner may require including, where appropriate, a revised construction schedule indicating all the activities affected by the circumstances forming the basis of the Claim. 4.3.7.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to a separate increase in the Contract Time for each one of the number of causes of delay which may have concurrent or interrelated effects on the progress of the Work, or for concurrent delays due to the fault of the Contractor. - 4.4 Resolution of Claims and Disputes Delete Subparagraphs 4.4.5, 4.4.6, 4.4.7, 4.4.8, Paragraph 4.5 Mediation, and Paragraph 4.6 Arbitration, and substitute the following subparagraph: 4.4.5 The Architect/Engineerwi1l approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefore and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection shall be subject to litigation, or any other alternative dispute resolution process selected by the Owner. Add new paragraph 4.4.6 as follows: 4.4.6 The Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 5: SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work Delete Subparagraph 5.2.1 and substitute the following: 5.2.1 The Contractor shall provide, within 24 hours of the bid opening, a list of those persons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it proposes/intends to enter into a subcontract regarding this project as required on the Bid Form and the Agreement. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the Contractor shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. 105191-1 00800-6 - DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ~~ ~_. ~~,~ GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 - 2Q05 M,~R 28 ~M 8:23 5.3 Subcontractual Relations (;~ 1'1/ C~ ~~h IOU~~~ ~~~~',~~V'~~A 5.3.1 Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 5.3.1: "All warranties prove e ` Subcontractors, including all express and implied warranties in the Contract Documents and the agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors and all warranties provided by law, shall run to and be for the benefit of the Owner, and the Owner shall have a direct right of action against the Subcontractors for any breach of said warranties." ARTICLE 6: CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts Delete Subparagraph 6.1.4 in its entirety. 6.2 Mutual Responsibility Delete the word "wrongfully" from Subparagraph 6.2.4. ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.2 Change Orders Delete Subparagraph 7.2.1 and substitute the following: 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Contractor and approved by the Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: Add Subparagraph 7.2.3 as follows: 7.2.3 A Change Order is conclusively presumed to include all adjustments in Contract Time and Contract Sum necessary to complete the changes to the Work and related parts of the Work. Add subparagraph 7.2.4 as follows: 7.2.4 In all Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, the allowance for Overhead and profit to be included in the total cost to the Owner shall not exceed the following amounts: 7.2.4.1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. 7.2.4.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Subcontractor. 7.2.4.3 For each Subcontractor, orSub-subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by such contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. 7.2.4.4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Sub-subcontractors, five percent (5%) of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor. 105191-1 00800-7 FILED DOCUMENT 00800 -.-- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 ZQ06 MAR 28 AM R• 7'2.~~ In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except ~I~ ~LEI~ ose so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a I~Wa CITI! I~ plete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. In no case will a __ ge involving over $200.00 be approved without such itemization. 7.2.4.6 Unless otherwise agreed, costs to which overhead and profit are to be applied shall be those costs listed in Subparagraph 7.3.6. ARTICLE 8: TIME 8.1 Definitions Add the following Subparagraph 8.1.5: 8.1.5 Contractor shall comply with phase of work deadlines identified in Section 01100 -Summary of Work. 8.2 Progress and Completion 8.2.3 Add the following to the end of the Subparagraph: "The Contractor shall bear all costs for overtime and all additional expense which may arise in order to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time." Add the following Subparagraph 8.2.4: 8.2.4 If, upon the recommendation of the Architect, it becomes necessary at times during .__ construction for the Owner to accelerate the work, each Contractor or subcontractor when ordered and directed by the Owner, shall cease work at any point and shall transfer his men to such points and execute such portion of his work as may be required to enable others to properly engage in and carry on their work. --' 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time Delete Subparagraph 8.3.1 and substitute the following: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner, with the advice of the Architect, may determine. Such delays shall not be a basis for damages. An extension of the Contract Time is the Contractor's sole remedy for such delay. Delete Subparagraph 8.3.3 in its entirety. 105191-1 00800-8 - -~ SUPPLEM NTARY CONDITIONS ~ ~ ~ ~ ~J GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 __ ZOOb ~kR 28 A~ 8~ 23 ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION CI ~ C~ ~~K IOWA CIT'rt I;~I~IA 9.3 Applications for Payment Delete Subparagraph 9.3.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph: 9.3.1 At least thirty (30) days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance -- with the Schedule of Values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers. If the Contract Documents require the Owner to retain a portion of the payments until some future time, the Applications for Payment shall clearly state the percentage and the amount to be retained. Add the following to paragraph 9.3.1.4: "The first payment application shall be accompanied by Contractor's partial waiver of lien only, for the full amount of the payment. Each subsequent monthly payment application shall be accompanied by the Contractor's partial waiver and by the partial waivers of Subcontractors and Suppliers who were included in the immediately preceding payment application to the extent of that payment. Application for final payment shall be accompanied by final waivers of lien from the Contractor, Subcontractor and Suppliers who have not previously furnished such final waivers." Add the following Subparagraph 9.10.3 to Paragraph 9.10: 9.10.3 Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in this Contract, final payment of the retainage due the Contractor will be made not earlier than 31 days from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa, 2005, as amended. 9.4 Certificates for Payment Add the following to Subparagraph 9.4.1: "Nothing herein shall be construed as requiring the Architect -- to reduce the retainage to be applied to payment applications. All certifications and payments, including those pursuant to a pending claim, shall be tentative and conditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to this effect." Add Subparagraph 9.4.2.1 as follows: _ 9.4.2.1 The Architect's determination as to the issuance of or withholding of or the amount of payment reflected on Certificates of Payment shall subject the Architect to no liability whatsoever to the Owner, Contractor, Surety, or any other person. 105191-1 00800-9 DOCUMENT 00800 -- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ~~ ~~~~~~ GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201- 9 7 2006 MAR 2 8 AM 8: ~ ~ ~- , 9.6 Progress Payments Cf.~ GLC~K Delete Subparagraph 9.6.1 and substitute the following: ~~W~i C~~ ~(~~//~ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make partial payments to the Contractor on or about the 15`h day of each month. To ensure proper performance of the Contract, the Owner will retain 10% of each payment amount or such larger amount as will ensure that there always remains a sufficient balance to complete the work, such retainage to be held until Final Acceptance of Work and shall so notify the Architect. -- Add the following Paragraph 9.11 to ARTICLE 9: 9.11 Liquidated Damages 9.11.1 The Contractor and the Contractor's surety shall be liable for and shall pay the Owner One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) as liquidated damages for each calendar day from the established date of ~ l substantial completion for each of the project phases, and for each calendar day from the established date of substantial completion for the final phase and the entire project. 9.11.4 The Owner shall give written notice to the Contractor of intent to assess liquidated damages pursuant to provisions of this Article. Calculation of the amount of liquidated damages shall commence on the date established for Substantial Completion. -- 9.11.5 Liquidated damages assessed in accordance with these provisions are exclusive of other monetary damages to which the Owner may be entitled as a direct result of the Contractor's failure to achieve final completion of the Work, in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. These liquidated damages are not intended to be exclusive of Owner's right to terminate this Contract based on Contractor's failure to comply with the terms and provisions of the Contact. 9.11.6 Partial performance of the Work of this Contract shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for liquidated damages. 9.11.7 Contractor's liability for liquidated damages shall cease upon Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work of the Contract. 9.11.8 Amounts assessed to the Contractor as liquidated damages may be deducted by the Owner from any money payable to the Contractor pursuant to this Contract. The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of a claim for liquidated damages prior to the date the Owner deducts such sum from money payable to the Contractor. 105191-1 00800-10 - -- DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ~ ~ ~_, ~ C1 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 -- 2006 B~~R 28 Ate 8~ 23 ARTICLE 10: PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY CI-~-•~ {~~~! ~l< 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property ~~W'7 C~ 1 ~; 1~WA Add Subparagraph 10.2.8 as follows: 10.2.8 When required by law or for the safety of the Work or building occupants, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, and protect other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. 10.4 Add the following sentence to Paragraph 10.4. No product containing asbestos or Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB) shall be incorporated into the Work. ARTICLE 1 L INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance Delete Subparagraph 11.1.1.5 and substitute the following: 11.1.1.5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury or destruction of tangible property, including explosion, collapse and damage to underground utilities and loss of use resulting therefrom; Delete Subparagraph 11.1.2 and substitute the following: 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 1 l.l.l shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. - Coverage shall be written on an occurrence basis and shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.13 Delete the words "and are reasonably available" from the third sentence. 11.1.3 Delete the words "in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief' from the last sentence. Add the following Subparagraphs and Clauses to Paragraph 11.1: 11.1.4 Informal Project Specs: Class I (under 1M) Type of Coverage a. Comprehensive General Liability Each Occurrence Aggregate 1) Bodily Injury & Property Damage $500,000 $1,000,000 b. Automobile Liability Combined Single Limit 1) Bodily Injury & Property Damage $500,000 105191-1 00800-11 DOCUMENT 00800 __ . FI ~~ SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 2006 MAR 2$ AM 8: 2~ Worker's Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. CITY ~~~~~ The Contractor's insurance carrier shall be A rated or better by A.M. Best. In addition, the I~~A ~~ +~on r~a~i shall be required to comply with the following provisions with res ect to insurance covers e: P g 11.1.6 The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits, identified in the policy and in the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be available to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liable, or for which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction or set off by virtue of investigation or defense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. 11.1.7 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the Owner, Contractor's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self-insured retention. 11.1.8 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. 11.1.9 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. The Contractor shall include the City as additional insured on all policies except workers compensation. 11.1.10 The Owner reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. J The Owner also reserves the right to reject Contractor's insurance if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that basis to either award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and seek specific performance or termination, as the case may be. 11.1.11 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on .- Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, or in the event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's _, liability insurance, then in that event the Owner may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.12 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the Owner. If policy is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. 11.1.13 All liability policies which include the Owner as an additional insured shall include a Governmental Immunities Endorsement, pursuant to Chapter 670.4 of the Iowa Code, which endorsement shall include the following provisions: 105191-1 00800-12 -- -.- DOCUMENT 00800 FI ~ _ ~` ~ SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 -- Z~~6 I~A~ 28 A~9 8~ ~1~.13.1 Nonwaiver of Government Immunity: The insurance carrier expressly agrees ~~ -,~ and states that the purchase of this policy and including the Owner as an Additional Insured C' ~ ~ ~`E~"~ oes not waive any of the defenses of governmental immunity available to the Owner under ~01Ar~'1 ~~ I { ~~V~~wa Code Section 670.4 as it now exists and as it may be amended from time to time. 11.1.13.2 Claims Coverage: The insurance carrier further agrees that this policy of - insurance shall cover only those claims not subject to the defenses of governmental immunity under Iowa Code Section 670.4 as it now exists and as it may be amended from time to time. - - 11.1.13.3 Assertion of Government Liability: The Owner shall be responsible for asserting any defense of governmental immunity, and may do so at any time and shall do so upon the timely written request of the insurance carrier. 11.1.13.4 Non-Denial of Coverage: The insurance carrier shall not deny coverage or deny any of the rights and benefits accruing to the Owner under this policy for reasons of __ governmental immunity unless and until a court of competent jurisdiction has ruled in favor of the defense(s) of governmental immunity asserted by the Owner. 11.1.13.5 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self- insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the Owner. If policy is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of - - coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. -- 11.1.14 The Contractor shall name the Owner and the Architect/Engineer as additional insured on a primary basis on all policies for this project except Workers Compensation policies. A copy of the policies, if requested, shall be filed with the Owner evidencing this coverage. 11.3 Project Management Protective Liability Insurance Delete Paragraph 11.3 Project Management Protective Liability Insurance. 11.4 Property Insurance Delete Subparagraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4.10 and substitute with the following: 11.4.1 Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the --- amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: __ 11.4.1.1 include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Owner's Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of _ each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; 105191-1 00800-13 DOCUMENT 00800 -. F~~~~ENERAL CONDITION OF THE ONTRACTOFOR ONSTRUCTION, A201-]997 2006 MAR Z8 AM 8t 23 11.4.1.2 be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or.special causes of loss CITY CLERK policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, IOWA CITY {~~/q temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 11.4.1.3 include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of architects and engineers); 11.4.1.4 include $500,000 for materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, ~ -_ provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Owner; 11.4.1.5 allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; 11.4.1.6 include testing and startup; and 11.4.1.7 be maintained in effect until final payment is made. 11.4.1.8 Such coverage shall not include coverage for losses or damage caused by the ~- negligent acts or omissions of Contractor or Subcontractors, or for damage to material or equipment while under the control of or stored by Contractor prior to installation or prior to inclusion of such material or equipment in construction. Contractor shall maintain appropriate insurance for such risks or occurrences. 11.4.2 Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance which shall specifically cover such insured objects or additional property insurance as may be required by Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Owner's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. _~ 11.4.3 All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions. 11.4.4 Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amounts. 11.4.5 If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner. 105191-1 00800-14 --- DOCUMENT 00800 ~~~ ~~ SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION A201-1997 - ~fl~b ~iqR 28 q~ g: 23 11.5 Performance and Payment Bond '~~ ~ i ~1, a C~ ~~~~ Delete Subparagraph 11.5.1 and substitute the following: ~ ~/q 11.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond - from a surety using the form included in the Contract Documents, each in an amount equal to the contract Price. Cost of such Bonds shall be included in the base bid. Each alternative bid shall include the additional Bond cost. Contractor shall deliver the required Bonds to the Owner prior to the signing of the -- Agreement. Add the following Subparagraphs 11.5.1.1 through 11.5.1.6: 11.5.1.1 The Performance, Labor and Material Bond shall be executed in conformity with the American Institute of Architect's Document A-312 (1984 Edition), with coverage __ provided by a surety having a policy holder's rating of "A" and a minimum class of I S financing rating in the Best Insurance Guide, latest edition. 11.5.1.2 Whenever the Contractor shall be and is declared by the Owner to be in default -- under the Contract, the Surety and Contractor are each responsible to make full payment to the Owner for any and all additional services of the Architect as defined in the Owner/Architect Agreement which are required as a result of the Contractor's default and in --- protecting the Owner's right under the agreement with the Contractor to remedy the Contractor's default or honor the terms of the Performance Bond. __ 11.5.1.3 These Bonds shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall remain in full force and effect until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. The Contractor agrees and will cause the Surety to agree to be bound by each and every provision of all the Contract ___ Documents. 11.5.1.4 The Surety shall give written notice to Owner, within seven (7) days after receipt of a declaration of default, of the Surety's election either to remedy the default or defaults -- promptly or to perform the work promptly or to pay to Owner the penal sum of the bond, time being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction of each omitted item of work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the work. The Surety - shall not assert solvency of its Principal or its Principal's denial of default as jurisdiction for its failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the work. ___ 11.5.1.5 The Principal and Surety further agree as part of this obligation to pay all such damages of any kind to person or property that may result from a failure in any respect to perform and complete the Work including, but not limited to, all repair and replacement costs necessary to rectify construction error, architectural and engineering costs and fees, all consultant fees, all testing and laboratory fees, and all legal fees and litigation costs incurred by the Owner. 105191-1 00800-15 DOCUMENT 00800 ~~~~~ENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACTOFOR ONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 2~6 MAR 2$ AM 8% 23 11.5.1.6 The Surety agrees that other than as is provided in the Bond it may not demand of the Owner that the Owner shall (a) perform any thing or act, (b) give any notice, (c) furnish (~~~ G~ERK any clerical assistance, (d) render any service, (e) furnish any papers or documents, or (f) take _, ~~WA (;~~! ((~~A any other action of any nature or description which is not required of the Owner to be done under the Contract Documents. Add the following Subparagraph 11.5.3 11.5.3 Surety shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall be authorized to do business in the state of Iowa. ARTICLE 12: UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK No Supplements ARTICLE 13: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.3 Written Notice 13.3.1 Delete the words "delivered at or." 13.5 Tests and Inspections Add the following to Subparagraph 13.5.1: "Copies of all reports, data and other documents related to tests, inspections and approvals shall be provided to the Architect as soon as practicable." 13.6 Interest Delete Subparagraph 13.6.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph: 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date the payment is due and shall bear interest at the.rate established by Section 573.12, Code of Iowa, latest revision. 13.7 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period Delete Subparagraphs 13.7.1 through 13.7.1.3. Add the following Paragraphs 13.8 and 13.9 to Article 13: 13.8 Employment Practices 13.8.1 Neither the Contractor nor his/her subcontractors, shall employ any person whose physical or mental condition is such that his/her employment will endanger the health and safety of themselves or others employed on the project. 13.8.2 Contractor shall not commit any of the following employment practices and agrees to include the following clauses in any subcontracts: 105191-1 00800-16 -- DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A201-1997 13.8.2.1 To discriminate against any individual in terms, conditions, or privileges of employment because of sex, race, color, religion, national origin, sexual orientation, gender identity, marital status, age or disability unless such disability is related to job performance of such person or employee. 13.8.2.2 To discharge from employment or refuse to hire any individual because of sex, race, -- color, religion, national origin, sexual orientation, gender identity, marital status, age, or disability unless such disability is related to job performance of such person or employee. 13.9 Contract Compliance Program (Anti-Discrimination Requirements) 13.9.1 The Contractor shall abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is attached to the end of this Specification section beginning on page CC-1 through CC-7. ARTICLE 14: TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause Delete Subparagraph 14.2.1.4 and substitute the following: 14.2.1.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents; or -- Add the following Subparagraph 14.2.1.5: 14.2.1.5 fails or refuses to provide insurance or proof of insurance as required by the Contract Documents. Add the following to Subparagraph 14.2.4: "The Contractor shall bear all testing, design professional fees, accounting, and legal expenses made necessary as a result of termination of the Contract." END OF DOCUMENT 00800 Q N ~~ q c C~ ~ 7- -..y ,' ~ ...~., :~ ~, ~ ~.' r- ~~1 ~~ ~ D ~, r v w 105191-1 - 00800-17 FI~~C~ 2006 F1~R 28 A~ 8~ 23 C1~1~Y ~~;LEs sK iOW,q C iTY,, IOWA Contract Compliance Program ~~ CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION I -GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT -- It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors, consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to race, color, creed, religion, national origin, __-- sex, gender identity, sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. PROVISIONS: 1. All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the City must submit an Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract. -- 2. All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $25,000 or more (or less if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this provision at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract, all _ contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors, vendors, and consultants are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Program reporting responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms. A notification of requirements will be included in any request for proposal and notice of bids. 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC-2 and CC-3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. 5. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. 6. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead," and instead use gender neutral signs. 7. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontractors abide by the City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at Iowa City City Code section 2-3-1. O 0 ~n ~ ~~ v ~ ~- =-=1 t ; c~ l '~ m ,~„ ~ ~z ~ ~ ~ ~ D N W CC-1 SECTION II -ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES 2 THROUGH 3 OF THIS SECTION TO THE CONTRACTWG DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor" shall include consultants and vendors.) a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affn7native efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. b. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C. § 1608 et seJc .)and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. 3. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement. Where is this statement posted? 4. 5. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? (Please print) _ Phone number Address The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in obtaining the necessary posters. M CV Q _ st [:[~ t!J ~ ..._.~ ~ N ~U LL _ ~ ~ .o Q ~ --- ~•., CC-2 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you --- are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? The above responses to questions 1 through 6, are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. Business Name Phone Number Signature Title Print Name Date Q N O _~ ~~1 .~ ---i tiJ ~ 2A N .~~..Jj ~~ !"~..' ~ S~` ~ ~' N W CC-3 SECTION III C~~TED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES COMPAN~'~~~~Y28 ~~ 8: ~3 Determine your~~ttacy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicu la tit is known to all your employees. Furthermore, disseminate the policy to all potential soar f~s{~(of,~nd to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices. In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising. 2. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. ~_, 3. INSTRUCT STAFF Your staff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Opportunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees or are involved in such actions should be trained and required to comply with your policy and the current equal employment opportunity laws. 4. RECRUITMENT (a) Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer. This can be done by identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportunity employer". (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pools. Word-of--mouth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your workforce. Send recruitment sources a letter "-' annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse applicant pools. (c) Analyze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate discriminatory -- barriers. (d) Select and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards and to support equal employment opportunity goals. (e) Review periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job functions. Review education and experience requirements to make sure they accurately reflect the requirements for successful job performance. (f) Review the job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this f information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for?" Only use job-related tests which do not adversely affect any particular group of people. (g) Monitor interviews carefully. Prepare interview questions in advance to assure that they are only job related. Train your interviewers on discrimination laws. Biased and subjective judgments in personal interviews can be a major source of discrimination. (h) Improve hiring and selection procedures and use non-biased promotion, transfer and training policies to increase and/or improve the diversity of your workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for l selecting candidates for promotion, transfer and training are based upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record. Furthermore, all companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional .opportunities and encourage all qualified employees to bid on them. . - CC-4 FI!~FC~ 2QDb MAR 28 RM 8~ 23 Gf~~r c;fw~r~< IOt~JF; ~fTY, fQUVA ~ r ~ui~ ~ w ~®'~~ ~O City of ~~ C` Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 - 3 - 1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance under a contract with the City. CC-5 2-3-1 ~~~~~ 2006 MAR 28 AM 8~ 23 G~~' CLERK IOWA ~~L~Ti6~dV/q , CHAPTER 3 2-3.1 DISCRIMINATORY PRACTICES 2-3-1: Employment; Exceptions 2-3-2: Public Accommodation; Exceptions 2-3-3: Credit Transactions; Exceptions 2-3-4: Education 2-3-5: Aiding Or Abetting; Retaliation; Intimidation 2-3-1: EMPLOYMENT; EXCEPTIONS: A. It shall be unlawful for any employer to refuse to hire, accept, register, classify, upgrade or refer for employ- ment, or to otherwise discriminate in employment against any other person or to discharge any employee be- cause of age,. color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. B. It shall be unlawful for any labor orga- nization to refuse to admit to member- ship, apprenticeship or training an applicant, to expel any member, or to othervvise discriminate against any applicant for membership, apprentice- shlp or training or any member in the privileges, rights or benefits of such membership, apprenticeship or train- ing because of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation of such ap- plicant or member. C. It shall be unlawful for any employer, employment agency, labor organiza- tion or the employees or members thereof. to directly or indirectly adver- tise or in any other manner indicate or publicize that individuals are unwel- come, objectionable or not- solicited for employment or membership be- cause of age, color, creed. disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) D. Employment policies relating to preg- nancy and ohlldbirth shall be governed by the following: 1. A written or unwritten employment. policy or practice which excludes from employment applicants or employees because of the employee's pregnancy is a prima facie violation of this Title. 2. Disabilities caused or contributed to by the employee's pregnancy, miscar- riage, childbirth and recovery there- from are, for all job-related purposes, temporary disabilities and shall be treated as such under any health or temporary disability insurance or sick leave plan available in connection with employment or any written or unwrit- ten employment policies and practices involving terms and conditions of employment as applied to other tem- porary disabilities. E. It shalt be unlawful for any person to solicit or require as a condition of employment of any employee or pro- Iowa City CC-6 89~ 2-3-1 ~~ ~ ~ ~ 2-3-1 - spective employee a test for ~ 2$ ~~ $?~t~n employer or employment agency ence of the antibody to the human w Bch chooses to offer employment or immunodeficiency virus. An a ~ advertise for employment to only the ment between an employer, ~~TY sabled or elderly. Any such employ- f~ f m lo ff t h ment agency, labor organiz r p or o er o e n yment s all not their employees, agents or members discriminate among the disabled or and an employee or prospective em- elderly on the basis of age, color, -- ployee concerning employment, pay creed, disability, gender identity, mari- or benefits to an employee or pro- tai status, national origin, race, reli- spective employee in return for taking gion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. _ a test for the presence of the antibody 95-3697, 11-7-1995) to the human immunodeficiency virus, is .prohibited. The prohibitions of this 3. The employment of individuals for subsection do not apply if the State work within the home of the employer - epidemiologist determines and the if the employer or members of the Director of Public Health declares family reside therein during such em- through the utilization of guidelines ployment. ___ established by the Center for Disease Control of the United States Depart- 4. The employment of individuals to ment of Health and Human Services, render personal service to the person that a person with a condltlon related of the employer or members of the - to acquired Immune deficiency syn- employer's family. drome poses a significant risk of transmission of the human immunode- 5. To employ on the basis of sex in _ ficlency virus to other persons in a those certain instances where sex is a specific occupation. bona fide occupational qualification F. The following are exempted from the provisions of this Section: 1. Any bona fide religious institution or its educational facility, association, corporation- or society with respect to any qualifications for employment based on religion when such qualifica- tions are related to a bona fide reli- gious purpose. A religious gtaalifica- tion for instructional personnel or an administrative officer, serving in a supervisory capacity of a bona fide religious educational facility or reli- gious institution shall be presumed to be a bona fide occupational qualifica- tion. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) es~ Iowa City CC-7 reasonably necessary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted nar- rowly. 6. A State or Federal program de- signed to benefit a specific age classi- fication which serves a bona fide pub- lic purpose. 7. To employ on the basis of disability in those certain instances where pres- ence of disability is a bona fide occu- pational qualification reasonably nec- essary to the normal operation of a particular business ar enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shalt be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-i 994) __ D~v~s~o« ~ Fl! ~ J Gcncra[ Rcquircmcnts ZQ~6iI~~2$ ,~~ CiT`r' C~~I__C~'I; I)ivis~on 1 SECTION 01100 F SUMMARY OF WORK Za~~ ~~~ ~~ A'~ ~~ 24 - PART 1 GEN ERAL 1.01 SEC TION INCLUDES CIl ~ Lf--C~f~ 1011~A Ci~~Y, fC;WA A. Project Description. B. Work by Owner. C. Contractor use of site and premises. - - D. Work sequence. E. Owner occupancy. F. Work restrictions. G. Specification conventions. 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION -- A. General Project Description: Selective demolition of building components, temporary security measures, and installation of new window and door systems, and related work identified in the Contract Documents, and as indicated in the Advertisement for Bids. B. Coordination __ 1. The Contractor shall plan, schedule and coordinate his operations in a manner that will facilitate the simultaneous progress of the Work under the various Sections of this Contract. __ 2. The Work shall be coordinated with the Owner to minimize interference with operation of the regular building activities. C. Schedule and Progress Meetings 1. Contractor shall schedule and hold regular progress meetings at least bi-weekly and at other times as requested by the ArchitectBngineer or required by progress of the Work. Contractor, ArchitectBngineer, and all major subcontractors active on the site shall be represented at each meeting. Contractor may at his discretion or at the request of the Architect/Engineer have representatives of suppliers, manufacturers and other - subcontractors attend meetings. 2. Contractor shall preside at the meetings and provide for keeping and distribution of key decisions. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the Work, __ _ maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in schedule and resolve other problems that may arise. ___ D. Land for Construction Purposes 105191-I 01100-1 ~~ ~'C ~ SECTION 01100 CC SUMMARY OF WORK ZOOfi MAR 28 AF~.g: Z4Contractor will be permitted to use available areas belonging to the Owner, on or near the site of the Work, for construction purposes and for the storage of materials and equipment. CITY CLERK Blocking of traffic lanes or drop-off/pick-up areas is prohibited. 1.03o~'A W~OIfKI~YVOWNER A. The Owner may perform work within the building and on the property. Contractor shall coordinate work activities with Owner's Representative. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. 1. Testing and balancing of HVAC work provided under this contract. 2. Asbestos abatement of perimeter window sealants and other locations, as needed, as deemed by the Contractor to be suspect and subsequently testing positive as ACM. B. Contractor shall provide adequate advance notice to Owner of conflicts and sequencing requirements that may affect Owner-performed work. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. The Owner has a strict year-round no smoking policy for all persons on City property. B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated at the Pre-bid Conference. C. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to immediate vicinity of work in areas or areas within the Contract limits. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is ~-- indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to: a. Limit staging area to enclosed area south of pool windows. Provide egress path to existing east side gate at all times. b. Limit construction activities to area immediately adjacent to new work with a maximum of 10' beyond building perimeter. Provide all temporary barricades and signage to direct the public around work areas. Provide directional signage for temporary closure of building entrances on east and west sides of building. Maintain one main entrance in full operation at all times with maximum closure duration. c. Sequence work so a maximum of one (1) opening is disturbed or undergoing renovation at one time. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. 105191-1 01100-2 -- ~ ~ ~~ ~ SECTION 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK __ 2~~6 ~~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~; ~ (~ b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. C+ ~~ ~~",~"'~~~ of Existin Buildin Maintain existin buildin in a weatherti ht and secure condition ~17~+r~ ~"' `' `~} hr~ou hout constructiong.eriod. Re air dama a caue d b construcgon o erations. Protect g p P g Y P building and its occupants during construction period. E. Contractor access to the building shall be limited to periods in which Owner custodial personnel are in attendance, per the following schedule: During the year: weekdays from 6:30 a.m. through 11:00 p.m. The Owner will consider weekend access only after full use of available weekday hours is exhausted, and as subject to restrictions identified below. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct Work in phases to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements during the construction period. Comply with deadlines identified in phasing requirements indicated in Tables at end of this section. Coordinate day-to-day construction schedule and operations with Owner allowing for reasonable time for the Owner to remove and set up the contents of each disturbed space. B. The Work shall be constructed in two phases in the following order, with each phase substantially complete before beginning the next phase: 1. Phase 1: Removal of existing window and door systems, erection of temporary enclosures, - and installation of new window and door systems at South Pool Patio in the Contract Documents (Area "A", Sheet A1.01). Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within 30 days after commencement of construction of this phase. - - 2. Phase 2: The remaining Work shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy at time of Substantial Completion for the Project. C. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit a schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates, and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all phases of the Work. D. The work shall be accomplished according to the indicated phasing schedule, attached. The activity finish date provided in the phasing requirements is the established substantial completion date for each phase. At Contractor's option, activities for each phase may start before the activity start date given that building operations and activities are not disrupted and that the construction activities are coordinated with the Owner. C. The Owner reserves the right to alter the phasing/sequence of the schedule for either the --- Contractor's or Owner's benefit. The Owner may consider Contractor proposed modifications of the schedule provided the format of the request is acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. The Owner, however, is under no obligation to authorize a deviation from the schedule. D. Other areas not specifically defined in a Phase may be accomplished, at the Contractor's proposed option, subject to the approval of the Owner. Other areas not specifically defined in this section 105191-1 01100-3 F~ ~~~ SECTION 01100 _ -. SUMMARY OF WORK ust be substantially complete by the latest date indicated for the phase or sub-phase unless 20061~AR 28 AM 8~ ~ecifically indicated otherwise in the contract documents. G~~ G`-,ERK Maintain at least one set of automatic operational main entrance doors during regular operational fOWA C4 , ~~~l~ours, unless otherwise approved by Owner. 1.06 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period with the exception of immediate interior areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 3. Provide protective measures around work areas to deter unauthorized access. B. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work such as an individual opening to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of the building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of the building. 1.07 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working hours of 6:30 a.m. to 11:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated. 1. Weekend Hours: Normal operational hours of the facility.. 2. Early Morning Hours: In accordance with local noise ordinance. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: As approved by Owner. 105191-1 01100-4 ~~~~ i_1 SUMMAR OF WORK -- Z~iQ~ ~1~ ~~ EtiBg~Jtjility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or _ others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide Cf ~y' ~,~~rary utility services according to requirements indicated: IOWA CfTY IntiN 1. -Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. 1.08 SPECIFICATION CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. PART2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED 105191-1 01100-5 SUMMAR OF WORK ~~ ~~ V PHASE 1 REQUI S Activi Activi~Start Activi Finis omments Submit Shop Drawings Upon contract May 30, 200 Submit for long-lead items as first priority. & Submittals award Window/Door August 6, 2006 September 4, 2006 Note: Contractor shall work with building Replacement Work in administration to develop a mutually location identified as acceptable schedule for work in the pool Area "A" area. PHASE 2 REQUIREMENTS Submit Shop Drawings Upon contract May 30, 2006 Submit for long-lead items as first priority. & Submittals award Window/Door Not later than November 30, 2006 Note: Contractor shall work with building Replacement Work in September 4, 2006 administration to develop a mutually location identified in the acceptable schedule for work in the Contract Documents occupied areas. Work can proceed in at most one work area at a time. HVAC Work September 4, 2006 November 30, 2006 Complete in conjunction with new window and door work by work area. Within 30 days following scheduled activity finish date for each subphase, only work acceptable to be underway during this period is the completion of punch list, final HVAC balancing, and controls commissionin . Site Restoration March 1, 2007 May 1, 2007 Remove all contractor materials prior to commencing restoration of pool patio area used for sta in activities. First Draft of Project November 1, 2006 November 15, 2006 Closeout Documents Final version of Project December 15, 2006 December 30, 2006 All paperwork to close out the project Closeout Documents (Substantial submitted, including application for final Com letion a ment of retains e. END OF SECTION 01100 105191-1 01100-6 - SECTION 01210 I 1 ~~LJ ALLOWANCES 1 PART 1 GENERAL z~~6 ~~~ ~$ A~ Q: 24 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CC i~ Y (;~_~ fi!~ A. Administrative and procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of: 1. Contingency Allowances. 1.02 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE - A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. _ B. Include in the Bid and Contract, stipulated sums in the following amounts as a contingency allowance for use upon Owner's instruction. 1. General $25,000 C. Contractor's related costs for Products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, and similar items will be included in Change Orders authorizing ~- expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowances. D. Funds will be drawn from Contingency Allowance only by Change Order, which will include - Contractor's related costs and reasonable or contractual overhead and profit margins. E. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by -- Change Order. PART2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01210 105191-1 01210-1 SECTION 01230 ~~ ~c~J ALTERNATES C. PART 1 GENERAL 206 ~~tR Z 8 AM $~ 2 ~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CfTY CL~i;K IOWA, CITY IQUVA _- A. Definition of Alternate. B. General. C. Coordination of Work. -- D. Submission procedures. E. Schedule of Alternates. 1.02 DEFINITION A. An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain construction -- activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described - in Contract Documents. 1.03 GEN ERAL A. The proposal price for each Alternate shall cover all Work listed in, incidental to or reasonably implied in connection with the subject and nature of the Alternate such as miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not specifically mentioned as part of the Alternate. No revisions in Alternate proposals, if accepted, will be allowed by reason of the failure of the Contractor to include all items of Work incidental to or reasonably implied by the description of each Alternate bid. B. The provisions of the Base Bid Specifications apply to all items of labor, materials, workmanship, installation, etc., in connection with the Alternate bids, except as may be specifically shown or noted to the contrary. C. Work contained in additive Alternate bids which follow is not included in Base Bid, but only in the - Alternate bids. D. In Alternate bids for different makes of equipment, the alternate equipment must conform to the - specified requirements and characteristics, and must fit within the available space. 1.04 COO RDINATION A. Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the Project. 105191-1 01230-1 SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES 1.05 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Submit Alternates identifying the effect on adjacent or related components. B. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. C. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate. 1.06 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate Bid No. 1 -Provide Area F (balcony) enclosure as identified in the Contract Documents. B. Alternate Bid No. 2 -Integrate fin tube controls in meeting rooms with existing digital control system. C. Alternate Bid No. 3 - Provide a variable speed drive, related controls at the existing pool exhaust fan. PART2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01230 o N ~, ~~ ~ ~ ~' ~ ~~ °° r-- ~ ~. m ~ ~ ~ 3> rv 105191-1 0123 0-2 SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PARTI GENERAL ~i~ ~~ ~~C6l~k~ 28 A~1 $~ 24 C`-,1~ ~~`~'~~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES I~~~r~ G~ IY ~~Wld1 A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for payment. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. B. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Application for Payment form. 3. List of subcontractors. 4. Schedule of alternates. 5. List of products. 6. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 7. Schedule of submittals. C. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect/Engineer at the earliest feasible date, but in no case later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment. D. Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. E. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: 1. Project name and location. 2. Name of the Architect/Engineer. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Date of submittal. F. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: 1. Generic name. 2. Related Specification Section. 105191-1 01290-1 PAYMENTIP OCEDURES f l ~~ V 3. Name of subcontractor. ZOO6 MAR 2$ aM ~~ 2~ 4. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. C~~ ~~ERK 5. Name of supplier. ~~~ C~~ ~~wA 6. Change Orders (numbers) that have affected value. 7. Dollar value. 8. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-tenth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. G. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. Break out labor costs from material costs. 1. If scheduled value exceeds $2,500, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. f 2. Material/labor breakdown for each Specification section's scope of work by each work area. 3. Apportion general or administrative costs in proportion to value of the individual work areas of phases. H. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall be equivalent to the Contract Sum. I. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. J. For each part of the Work where an Application for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. K. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to the extent that such items will be listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule -~ of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin. L. At the Contractor's option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense in proportion to the value of the work area involved. -_ M. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 105191-1 01290-2 - -~ - SECTION O l 290 ~~ ~, F (y~ PAYMENT PROCEDURES - A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications~~ -ia~enls8~ 24 certified by the ArchitectBngineer and paid for by the Owner. ~y~Cf~ Y `a_Er,K B. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time d~-bRt'~5tanrt~~ilY ,~)U~/~ Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. __ C. Payment Application Times: Each progress payment date is as indicated in the Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application or Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. -- D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Form G702 -Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 -Continuation Sheet. -- E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. F. Transmittal: Submit 3 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the ArchitectlEngineer by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours; one copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required. G. Transmit each copy of each Application for Payment with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. H. Waiver Delays: Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of work covered by the application who could lawfully be entitled to a lien. I. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to Owner. 1.04 INITIAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Approved Schedule of Values. 105191-1 01290-3 FI ~ SECTION 01290 t.... L,~ PAYMENT PROCEDURES 2006 MAR 28 A~ ~: 24 Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). GfTY ~LER~. Schedule of principal products. ~OWA ~`~~! ~(~~/A Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. ._ . 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report ofpre-construction meeting. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds (if required). 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. --_ 1.05 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. B. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with the application include: 1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. 2. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. 3. Tesdadjustlbalance records. __ 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Meter readings. 6. Start-up performance reports. 7. Change-over information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance. 8. Final cleaning. 9. Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety. 105191-1 O l 290-4 - SECTION 01290 ~-- PAYMENT PROCEDURES F~ ~~ _ 10. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. ~~~~ ~~~ Z s ~~ $. 2 4 11. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to A~}~i~ct~r~~~er's Certificate of Substantial Completion. (~1J11,c1, C~-(-Y ~~WA 1.06 FINAL PAYM ENT APPLICATION A. Admin istrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following: - 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. 4. Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue delay. 5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. -- 6. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid. 7. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 8. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01290 105191-1 01290-5 -- SECTION 01310 ~ ~ L PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 2QOb P4A~ 28 ~P~ 8~ 24 -- PART 1 GEN ERAL 1.01 SEC TION INCLUDES C~ ~ ~ Ci-~ ~~~ _ I~?1(~4q CITv I~UVA A. Coordination. B. Preconstruction Meeting C. Progress Meetings. D. Preinstallation Meetings. 1.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of the Contract Documents to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as --- closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. - D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. _.__ E. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and _ Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect/Engineer will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. -- B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, Contractor and Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Requirements and schedule for Contractor's submission of list of Subcontractors, list of _ Products, schedule of values, project schedule, bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Designation of responsible personnel representing the Owner, the Contractor and the -- Architect/Engineer. 105191-1 01310-1 SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION .. FI ~~~ 4. Review construction schedule: 2~Q~ MAR 2$ AM $~ ~~ Official contract start date CITY CLERK Substantial completion deadline ID~A CITY, IOWA Final completion deadline Critical dates during Construction Equipment deliveries and priorities Critical Work sequencing 5. Procedures and processing of: Field decisions Shop Drawings Product Data Samples Substitutions Applications for payment Construction change directive Change Orders Contract close out 6. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 7. Requirements and procedures for testing. 8. Safety. 9. Security. 10. Contractor's field office. I1. Housekeeping. 12. Working hours. 13. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 105191-1 01310-2 -- ~ ("'1 SECTION 01310 (- I ~ CJ - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION - 14. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. ~'~~~ ~A~ ~$ A~1 $: ~'~ 15. Procedures for maintaining record documents. C~~ `Y~ L;~~(-~~ _-- i0VV~3. C+TY lOWA 16. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 17. Review and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 18. Other items of discussion. -- 1.04 PRO GRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. _ C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. - 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. _._ 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to the Architect/Bngineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 105191-1 - 01310-3 SECTION 01310 - , PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION FILED 1.05 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 2006 MAR 28 AM $~ 24 - - A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a prein~tic t~r~e~~g at work site prior to commencing work of the section. ,IOWA ~I-~-Y f~~A __ B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect/Bngineer four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. 3. Review existing building conditions on the exterior and interior. ~ f E. Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 days after meeting to participants, with 2 copies to ArchitectBngineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01310 105191-1 01310-4 r--, -- SECTION 01330 ~~y ~ SUBMITTALS - __ PART 1 GENERAL 7~~6 ~~~ 28 ~'~~ ~' 24 1.01 SEC TION INCLUDES CI-hr' C~_~R~C -- IOV'J~ CITY, IOUVA A. Submittal Procedures. B. Construction Progress Schedules. C. Proposed Products List. D. Shop Drawings. E. Product Data. F. Samples. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. H. Manufacturers' Certificates. - - 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with Architect/Engineer accepted form. Each specification section shall be --- submitted under separate cover. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential - alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and _ _ specification section number, as appropriate. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer. Coordinate -- submission of related items. F. For each submittal for review, allow seven (7) working days excluding delivery time to and from the contractor. G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be _ detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. I. Revise and resubmit, identify changes made since previous submission. J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report inability -- to comply with provisions. 105191-1 01330-1 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 SUBMI TALS Fi L.~I...J K. ~ Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processedZa06 ~A~ 2$ QM 8, 2~ CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES ('~ Cp-~ C~~ER(}K A. Submit initial schedule in duplicate within seven (7) days of d~`Ce~of bw~'±-e~rYC ~nlra~ct~or Agreement. B. Revise and resubmit as required. C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. D. Submit a computer generated, horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week. E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and required by Allowances. PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST ~-- A. Within fi8een (15) days of the date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit Document 01330-A Proposed Products List listing major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade ~ - name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for review. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with the SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01780 -CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. - PRODUCT DATA - A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer. 105191-1 01330-2 SECTION 01330 I- f ±Y-~ ("~~ SUBMITTALS I_ ! t~ B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, an~8~~~a~$ S>a~l~a~j~ manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. CiT4'' CLEf~K C. Indicate Product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connectic~ir~r r~s, ~ation of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. After review, distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article above and provide copies for record documents described in Section 01780 -CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 1.07 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer selection. C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. D. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; two of which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification sections. 1.08 MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect/Engineer in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Submit two copies for information only. C. Indicate conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and the Contract Documents, special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.09 MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer to ArchitectlEngineer, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer. 105191-1 01330-3 - SECTION 01330 FILE SUBMITTALS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2006 MAR 28 AM $ 24 NOT USED (;~~( CLERK PART 3 EXECUTION IOWA CITY IOWA NOT USED END OF SECTION 01330 105191-1 01330-4 - __ - ~. - DOCUMENT 01330-A SUBMITTALS PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST PROJECT: Robert A. Lee Recreation Center A/E: Shive-Hattery, Inc. Exterior Glazing & Panel Replacement Project 2834 Northgate Drive _ _ City of Iowa City Iowa City, Iowa 52245 CONTRACTOR: OWNER: City of Iowa City - By: 410 East Washington Street DATE: Iowa City, Iowa 52240 MAJOR PRODUCTS PROPOSED FOR USE: Attach additional pages, if necessary. Identify major differences between equipment scheduled and equipment submitted (lead time, dimensions, weight, performance, etc.). Specification Section No. Name of Manufacturer Trade Name Model No. N C1 C~ ~' rv r= ~-- ~ -~ ~~ ~ v D iv r 105191-1 01330-A-1 SECTION 01351 [-~ f ~~ REMODELING PROJECT PROCEDURES I~ L __ PART 1 GENERAL 7006 MAR 2 $ l~M $; Z 5 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES C~ ~ ~'` l.~_E~K Iowa c'n Iowa A. Perform remodeling construction as indicated on the Drawings and as herein specified. B. Coordinate work of employees and subcontractors. C. Schedule elements of remodeling and renovation work to expedite completion. D. Schedule noisy or hazardous work to avoid problems with Owner's operations. E. In addition to demolition specified in individual Specification Sections, and shown on drawings, cut, move or remove existing construction to provide access or to allow remodeling and new work to proceed. F. Patch, repair and refinish existing items to remain, to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new construction. 1.02 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULES A. Submit separate detailed subschedule for alteration work, coordinated with Construction Schedule. Show: 1. Each stage of work; occupancy dates of area. 2. Date of Substantial Completion for each area of alteration work. 3. Crafts and subcontractors employed in each area. 1.03 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION A. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster or metals, by methods to terminate surfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division. B. Protect existing and new work from weather and temperature extremes. 1. Maintain existing interior work above 60 degrees F. 2. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control to prevent damage to remaining existing work and to new work. C. Provide exterior and/or interior temporary enclosures specified in Section 01520, CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES, to separate work areas from existing building and from areas occupied by the Owner, and to provide weather protection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SALVAGED MATERIALS 105191-1 01351-1 SECTION 01351 '~~D REMODELING PROJECT PROCEDURES 2D06 Ma ~:~8 l~l`®,gQ3~fficient quantities of cut or removed materials to replace damaged work of existing CI~ ~~~ onstruction, when material is not readily obtainable on current market. RK ~~~~ CtT}! ~~~ Use particular care in removal and salvage of Brick. 2. Store salvaged items in a dry, secure place on site. 3. Items not specified for use in repair work remain the Owner's property. 4. Do not use salvaged or used material in new construction except with prior written authorization from Architect/Engineer or as indicated in drawings. " 2.02 MATERIALS FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING A. Ensure that work is complete: 1. Provide same materials or types of construction as that in existing structure, to patch, extend or match existing work. a. Contract Documents may not define products or standards of workmanship present in existing construction. b. Determine products by inspection and testing. c. Determine workmanship by use of existing as sample of comparison. 2. Presence of a product, finish or type of construction requires that patching, extending or matching be performed to make work complete and consistent to identical quality standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. A. Remove existing construction as required to complete the new construction work as shown and detailed on the drawings and as specified. 3.02 PERFORMANCE. A. Patch and extend existing work using skilled craftsman capable of matching existing quality of workmanship. B. For patched or extended work, provide quality equivalent to that specified for new work. 3.03 DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch and replace all portions of existing finished surfaces found to be damaged, lifted, discolored f or showing other imperfections, with matching material. 1. Provide adequate support prior to patching the finish. - 105191-1 01351-2 - FI ~ ~ ~ REMODELING PRO ECT PROCEDURES - ZQ~6 ~,~~ ~ $ 2A~ 8: ~~finish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to produce uniform color and texture over entire surface. CI i',' ~;LEFK ___ ~~~~ ~~ ~~i3. ~~W~When existing surface cannot be matched, contact Owner and Architect/Engineer for alternative course of action prior to commencing work in area under question. 3.04 TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW WORK A. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance as closely as possible. 1. When finished surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface in a neat manner along a straight line at a natural line of division, and provide trim appropriate to finished surface, as satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. B. Restore exposed finishes of patched or repaired areas, and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken portion containing the patch or repair, after the affected area has received primer and intermediate coat(s). 3.05 CLEANING A. At completion of work of each craft, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive crafts. B. At completion of remodeling/alteration work in each area, provide final cleaning in accord with Section 01780, CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, and leave spaces in a condition suitable for use of Owner. END OF SECTION 01351 105191-1 01351-3 SECTION 01450 QUALITY CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality Assurance -Control of Installation. B. Tolerances. C. References. F~!_EC~ 2006 l4~R 28 ~M 8~ 25 C1~- Y ~~LERK IOWA C[TY, InWA D. Manufacturers' Field Services and Reports. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE -CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from ArchitectBngineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. G. The Contractor is the inspector for the project. The Contractor shall review the work and verify that it is in conformance with the contract documents. Any work found not to be in conformance shall be corrected by the Contractor, so that it does conform. As a minimum, the Contractor shall reply, within 7 days of the discovery of work found not to be in conformance with the contract documents, with a written plan of the corrective action required to bring this work into conformance. 1.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor tolerance control of installed Products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust Products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing Products in place. 105191-1 01450-1 SECTION 01450 FI~.FD QUALITY CONTROL ~./ 1.04 ..,REFERENCES 2~~6 ~~~ ~s aM 8~ ZS A. For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, o}}'' t)4e~ c~in~e>~indards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid regd~t~r~p~t~or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except _ where a specific date is established by code. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by product specification sections. D. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect/Engineer shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. E. Contractor will employ and pay for all other testing required under the Contract Documents. 1.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Bngineer 30 days in advance of required observations. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Submit report within 30 days of observation to ArchitectlEngineer for information. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION "_- NOT USED END OF SECTION 01450 105191-1 01450-2 SECTION 01520 ~I~ FD CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES -- PART 1 GENERAL 2D06 PEAR 28 AM $~ 25 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES C.iI I Y ~~. ~{'~ IOWA. Ci ~ `( IC~1NA A. Temporary Utilities: Electrical (etc.), ventilation and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and protection of the Work. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Contractor(s) may utilize Owner's utilities as required, including but not limited to electrical for normal job operations. B. Provide telephone access to supervisory field personnel at all time. C. Design and construct enclosures to resist typical natural force including, but not limited to, wind loads on temporary pool area opening (48' x 22'). 1.03 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. Areas in which welding, torch-cutting, concrete cutting, coring, jackhammering etc. is being conducted shall be provided with positive ventilation to the exterior. B. Supply equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Existing facilities within building may be used during interior construction operations. 1.05 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary (and insulated during heating season) weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. B. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure in all work areas. 1.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. 105191-1 01520-1 CONSTRUCTIOONOFACILITIES ~~ ~C LJ 1 C:, Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills~~d~~~i~'8f ~n5 D. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. I~ic~~~ty is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or ~ r~S~'d+al ~t~acturer. _. E. Prohibit traffic over landscaped areas. 1.07 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL _ A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. -- B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site daily. 1.08 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. _~ B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED - END OF SECTION 01520 105191-1 01520-2 SECTION 01580 FI( c-"1 LL11 LL I i _ ... PROJECT IDENTIFICATION -- PART 1 GENERAL Z~~6 MAR 28 AM $~ 25 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES C~ { Y ~~LERK ~~WA C~TY ~~~~A A. Project identification sign. B. Maintenance. C. Removal. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr wind velocity, anchored below local frost line. B. Sign Painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum three years. C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 -Submittals: Shop drawings. B. Show content, layout, lettering, color, foundation, structure, sizes, and grades of members. C. Sign Permit: Submit copy of permit, if required by local jurisdiction having authority over the - Project. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: New treated wood, structurally adequate. B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints, or rigid panel of synthetic materials. C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized, aluminum or brass. -- D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality commercial grade, minimum three total coats; sign background of color as selected. __ E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint colors as selected. 2.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. One painted sign (4'x8') of construction, design, and content shown on the Drawings. B. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: Designated by Architect/Engineer. See Drawings. 105191-1 01580-1 PROJECT DENTIFICATION FI~.ED PART 3 EXECUTION 2006 hAR 2$ AM 8~ 25 3.01 INSTALLATION ' ~~((~.//r~~ Y((~~ (~~;''yyLE~K~~~~~~~~ A. Install project tdenhficahon sign wtthm 15 days after date of Owner-Contra`~~br''A~~rlfe~t. B. Erect at designated location approved by Owner. C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings. D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely. E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing. 3.02 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain signs and supports clean and plumb. Repair deterioration and damage. 3.03 REMOVAL A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project, backfill excavation with approved backfill material, and restore the area. END OF SECTIQN 01580 105191-1 01580-2 SECTION 01610 ~~~~~ PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 20Dd M~ PART 1 GENERAL R 28 AP9 8:25 1.01 SEC TION INCLUDES ~~~ i ~ f~~~t ~t~Y ~ ~~wa A. Products. B. Transportation and Handling. C. Storage and Protection. D. Product Selection. E. Product Options. F. Substitutions. 1.02 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for components being replaced. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled enclosures. C. Fabricated products, requiring exterior storage, shall be placed on sloped supports, above ground. D. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. 105191-1 01610-1 ~.~ L,~.~ SECTION 01610 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ZOOb MAR 28 ~M 8~ ~a~lver Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Product. CITY G~ER~. IQW)~ l~,(T~. IC3~/~tore loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in awell-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. H. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 1.05 PRODUCT SELECTION A. Provide products that comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise noted, unused at the time of installation. B. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for the installation and for the intended use and effect. C. Standard Products: Provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar conditions on other projects. D. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, or where "No substitution" is indicated, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. E. Semi-Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers are _ named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. F. Where products are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or approved equivalent", comply with provisions for "Substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. G. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product, listing characteristics required, without use of a brand name, furnish a product that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with requirements. H. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications stipulate compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply and are recommended for the application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in product literature, or by certification of performance. I. Visual Selection: Where requirements include the phrase "... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, provide a product that complies with designated requirements. The Architect/Engineer will select color, pattern, and texture from the approved product line. J. Compliance with Standards: Where Specifications require compliance with a standard, select a product that complies with the standard specified. 105191-1 01610-2 SECTION 01610 ~~ ~ C PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS f~ ~~ - K. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching a sample, the A~iQ~lt~~~~nea~ $; 25 decision on whether a proposed product matches will be final. Where no product matches and complies with other requirements, comply with provisions for "Product Subst t[yr't~d~fis~o~~ction of a matching product in another category. ~~~/fS~ r~TY ~~WA 1.06 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any Product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Request for substitutions shall be governed by applicable provisions of the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions, in accordance with the stipulations specified governing Product Selection, and as specified. B. Request for changes in products, materials, equipment and methods of construction required by Contract Documents, proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract, are considered requests for "Substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: Substitutions requested by bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions. 2. Revisions to Contract Documents request by the Owner or Architect/Engineer. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 4. The Contractor's compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. C. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received within 30 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 30 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer. D. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration using the following Document 01610-A, Product Substitution Request. Submit request in the form and in accordance with procedures required for Change Order proposals. 105191-1 01610-3 FlL~D SECTION 01610 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ZO(J6 MAR ~~. AM ~x~'~e data including the product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance an st data adequate for evaluation of the request (including applicable UL and FM approval C,"~'Y C~~R ata) and identify the applicable portions of such data. Include related Project Specification ~QWA ~'~-)-Y ~(~ tions and Drawing numbers. Provide documentation showing compliance with the irements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate and applicable: 1. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 2. Request is timely, documented and properly submitted. 3. Request is directly related to an "or approved equivalent" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 4. Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the specified product or method cannot be provided because of the Contractor's failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 5. Specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. _ 6. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect/Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. 7. Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 8. Specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 9. Specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents, and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution will provide the required warranty. F. The Contractor's submittal and Architect/Engineer's review of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not, of themselves, constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, and the Architect/Engineer's action does not constitute approval of a substitution not otherwise properly requested. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED 105191-1 01610-4 PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED SECTION 01610 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS END OF SECTION 01610 ~~~~~ ZQ~6 NkR 2$ A~4 g: 25 ~ow~ c~~i ~~K nWA 105191-1 01610-5 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ~~ ~ ~ ~~ PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST . :7DQ6 MAR 28 Q,'1 8~ 2S To: fTY C~E~?K ~, ~ WA PROJECT: Robert A. Lee Recreation OWNER: City of Iowa City A/E: Shive-Hattery, Inc. Center -Exterior Glazing and 410 East Washington Street 2834 Northgate Dr. Panel Replacement Project Iowa City, IA 52240 Iowa City, IA 52245 BID DATE: We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project: DRAWING NO.: DRAWING NAME: SPEC SECT. SPEC NAME PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM Proposed Substitution: Attach complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Submit, with request, all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. CERTIFICATION OF EQUAL PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR EQUAL PERFORMANCE The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by: Signature Firm: Title Address: Telephone: Date: Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind the firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval. 105191-1 01610-A-1 DOCUMENT 01610-A F! ~~~ - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUF~'~6 P9AR ~$ AM S~ Z5 For Use By Owner: ~ CLE~~ Accepted Accepted as Noted Not ~~~ ~~~~~1Received To Late By: Date: II FILL IN BLANKS BELOW A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? Yes No If Yes, clearly indicate changes: B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? Yes No . . If No, fully explain: C. What effect does substitution have on other Contracts or other trades? D. What effect does substitution have on construction schedule? E. Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different (Explain on Attachment) F. Reason for Request: G. Itemized comparison of specified item(s) with the proposed substitution. List significant variations: _ . H. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified: I. Designation of maintenance services and sources: (ATTACH ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF REQUIRED) 105191-1 01610-A-2 -- SECTION 01705 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT F ~ ~ ~ C~ ~...4. _ _ PART 1 GENERAL 20Q6 MAR 2$ A~1 ~~ ~5 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~ - ~ ~~ 1 ~`~ C L~RI~ A. Project closeout procedures. ~Q~r"alr; CITY, 10'J'JA B. Substantial completion. C. Final acceptance. - 1.01 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Project closeout includes the following activities: 1. Substantial Completion: Preparation for request of the Substantial Completion inspection, the inspection, and issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 2. Final Acceptance: Preparation for request of the Final Inspection, the final inspection, and issuance of the Notice of Acceptance. B. Substantial Completion may be for the entire project or, when approved by the Owner, for individual parts of the project that are substantially complete at different dates. 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Prior to requesting Owner's Substantial Completion inspection, complete the following and list known exceptions in request: 1. List incomplete work, value of incomplete work, and reasons for being incomplete for inclusion in "Certificate of Substantial Completion." 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, agreements, final certifications and similar documents. See Section 01330 -Submittals. 4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Owner. See Division 2 through Division 16 for specific requirements. 5. Complete final cleaning. __ B. Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following the inspection, the Owner will either prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior to issuance of certificate, and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch list" for final acceptance. 105191-1 01705-1 FI ~~~ SECTION 01705 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT ZO06 n ~ 8 ATT- i3+ ~~CCEPTANCE CITY ~. LEAK Prior to requesting Owner's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, ~~WA ~MTY '~WAas required by General Conditions, complete the following: 1. Submit final payment request. 2. Submit copy of Owner's final punch list of work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit project record documents, specified warranties, and operation and maintenance data, as required by specific Specifications Sections. 4. Submit proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been paid. Submit Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance "Contractor's Statement" (Form 35-002) for sales tax refund. 5. Submit proof to the Owner that all keys borrowed during the course of the project have been returned. 6. Submit TSB Payment, if applicable. 7. Submit release from the Iowa Department of Revenue if the Contractor is not a resident of the State of Iowa. B. Final Inspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been completed, including punch list resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, Owner will perform the Final Inspection. Upon completion of the Final Inspection, Owner will either prepare Certificate of Final Acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated. C. Reinspection Costs: Should the Owner be required to perform additional Final Inspections because of failure of work to comply with original certifications of Contractor, Contractor will compensate Owner for additional services and deduct amount paid from final payment to Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01705 105191-1 01705-2 SECTION 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. F~~ Zflfl6 ~i~~ 2 8 A~9 8~ 2 5 c11~~` ~~~E~K i0~~'f-~ SIT`! IOWA 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety-related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or results in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect/Engineer's judgment, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities or result in visual evidence of cutting or patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent -- surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance will be equivalent to or surpass that of existing materials. _ _ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas of interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 105191-1 01732-1 CUTTING AND PATCHING ~ ~~~,,,.~~ D, Take precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe~$~(~~~g~ac~r~$ ng the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been ma~e to bypass them. CITY CLERK 3:03 PERFORMANCE I~w~ C«Y ~nWA A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. B. Cut existing construction only where required to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities, and perform the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. C. Cut masonry and concrete with water cooled, diamond blade machines. Dust must be kept at a minimum. Block off all passages of dust migration in area where working. Provide separate means of exhausting air from area using temporary ductwork and powered fans. Contain slurry during cutting operations and protect finished surfaces from stains. Remove slurry immediately and wash surfaces after cutting operations are complete. D. Execute cutting, fitting and patching to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. E. Execute Work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. F. Restore Work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; seal voids. I. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect/Engineer for decision or remedy. J. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. K. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken portion containing the patch, after the patched area has received primer and second coat. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Clean exposed piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION 01732 --, 105191-1 01732-2 SECTION 01750 STARTING AND ADJUSTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting Systems. B. Demonstration and Instructions. C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.02 STARTING SYSTEMS F~ ~F_C~ 2Q~5 MAR 28 Aid 8~ 25 CITY GL~~K IOWA. CIT'~ IOWA A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect/Engineer 7 days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. 1.03 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at designated location. D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. E. The amount of time required for instructions on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections. 105191-1 01750-1 STARTING AOND ADJUSTING ~~ ~, 1.04. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 10Q6 MAR 28 AM 8~ 25 A. Owner shall appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent i~rn~hr~~~ring, ._ adjusting and balancing of HVAC equipment. W~ (;~~ ~n~A B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 15950. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01750 105191-1 01750-2 SECTION 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ~f ~,._~~ PART 1 .GENERAL 20~~ MAR 2 8 A~ 8~ 2 S 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES C~~~^~~ ~,;LEf~K A. Final Completion and Closeout Procedures. (~~1~` C~~Y ~~~A B. Final Cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project Record Documents. E. Operation and Maintenance Data. F. Warranties. G. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 1.02 FINAL COMPLETION AND CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES -" A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's review. B. Provide submittals to Architect/Bngineer that are required by governing or other authorities. - - C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. Along with or prior to the submittal of the final Application for Payment submit the documents required in Section 01290 -Payment Procedures. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean equipment and fixtures with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. C. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. __. D. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. E. Remove project identification and signs, waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 1.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 105191-1 01780-1 1.05 1.06 CLOSEOUTOSUBMITTALS ~ILE~7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ZOQS MAR 28 AM $: 25 A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record(~~~i,Al ~~/> to the Work: IOWA CITY !C}WA 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract Documents. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: -. 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Clearly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Details not on original Contract drawings. G. Submit documents to Architect/Engineertyith claims for final Application for Payment. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x t 1 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. ._ 105191-1 01780-2 -- SECTION 01780 ~~~~~~ • CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS __. B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTEN~~ 28 INSTRUCTIONS", title of project. ~~ ~' 25 C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, log'>pr ~~A described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic to s. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Bngineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by - specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: __ a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties. E. Submit one draft copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of all documents as required prior to final submission. F. Submit (2) sets of revised final volumes, within 20 days after final inspection unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Provide notarized copies. 105191-1 01780-3 SECTION 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ~'I ~~Q B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontra~ttcu~~~~p~>~rsA~~+ Z~ manufacturers. [[UUUU~b C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder witll~p~d,~l~ ~a ~cX4~er. v~~////~a ~lTl! IQVIIA D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.08 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS ~- A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. - - B. Deliver to location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01780 105191-1 01780-4 PROJECT RE ~ I ! ~ ~J CORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL Z~Q~ ~€~~ 2s AI~ ~; 26 1.01 SEC TION INCLUDES Ci I Y vLERK IOV~JA CI~~Y, IOWA A. Storing record documents. B. Quality assurance. C. Recording changes in contract drawings. D. Recording changes in project manual. E. Recording changes in shop drawings and product data. F. Product sample submittal. 1.02 STORING RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Following award of Contract, promptly secure from Architect, at no charge to Contractor, one complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract for recording of changes during construction. These documents shall not be used for construction purposes. B. Maintain one copy of the following at the project site: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Project Manual. 3. Addenda. 4. Approved Shop Drawings, product data and product samples. 5. Request for Information (RFI). 6. Construction Change Directive (CCD). 7. Change Orders. C. Documents shall be available at all times for inspection by Architect/Engineer and Owner. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delegate the responsibility of maintenance of record documents to one person on the Contractor's staff: B. Accuracy of Records: 105191-1 01787-1 F1 ~~ 1'"~ SECTION 01787 i L1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2006 MAC 28 ASS 8t~~ Thoroughly coordinate changes within the record documents, making adequate and proper . entries on each page of the Specifications and each sheet of the Drawings and other CITY CLERK documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. IOWA CITY IOWA 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. C. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 1.04 RECORDING CHANGES IN CONTRACT DRAWINGS - . A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in 2-inch high letters printed in red ink. B. Keep record documents current. Legibly mark to record actual construction. C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. -- 1. Document the location of all valves installed outside of a building. a. The valve may be located by swing ties from easily identifiable and relatively permanent points on campus. Building corners are the preferred points, but light poles and street and sidewalk intersections are acceptable if building corners are not close or easily accessible. b. The valve(s) may also be located by use of north and east coordinates. These coordinates shall be based on the Iowa State Plane Coordinate System (South ,- Zone) NAD 27. -- D. Mark with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. E. Date all entries. F. Call attention to the entry by drawing a "cloud" around the area. G. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing "field" condition fully and accurately; however, where shop drawings are used for mark-up, record across-reference at corresponding location on working drawings. .- . H. Document new information which is recognized to be of importance to the Owner, but was for some reason not shown on either Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. _, I. Note related RFI or ITC numbers where applicable. 1.05 RECORDING CHANGES IN PROJECT MANUAL A. Label Project Manual "PROJECT RECORD" in 2-inch high letters printed in red ink. 105191-1 01787-2 ~-~ PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS FI ~.~~ _ B. Keep record documents current. Legibly mark to record actual constructi~6 BAR 28 Ali $: 26 C. Mark changes with red erasable pencil. ~~J~C! ~~~I~ ~.yy~~~(n~~~ttAAl!ee D. In each Section, indicate manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and s'p~p[ie~ofeacH'pi(ad~~f` and item of equipment actually installed. E. Record changes made by RFI or ITC. 1.06 RECORDING CHANGES IN SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Document work that varies from approved submittals. - B. Document variations in products as delivered to site and variations from manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. -- C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. D. Note related RFIs and ITCs and changes to Record Drawings and Specifications. 1.07 PRODUCT SAMPLE SUBMITTAL - A. Immediately prior to date(s) of Substantial Completion, Owner will meet with Contractor at site and determine which submitted samples are to be transmitted to Owner for record purposes. B. Comply with Owner's instructions for packaging, identification marking (including supplier, manufacturer, pattern, style, color and finish), and delivery to Owner's sample storage space. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED -- PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 01787 105191-1 01787-3 Division 2 F~~.F -- Site Work 7006 BAR 28 ~~ 8~ 26 CI~I~'~` C~ FRK - IOVVr~ CiTI; InWA Division 2 - SECTION 02775 C SIDEWALKS I ~ ~.,.~I~ __ PART 1 GENERAL ZOa6 MAR 2$ AM 8~ 26 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES (;~ 1 ~t, ~.~RK A. Construction of Portland cement concrete sidewalks. ~~~/^~ L~TY E~~A 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Allowable Tolerances: Flatwork true to plane 1/8-inch (3mm) in 10 feet (3m). - PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Materials and mixing shall conform to Iowa Department of Transportation Specifications Articles 2301.03 through 2301.06 for air-entrained Type C-4 mix. 1. Twenty-eight day compressive strength of moist-cured laboratory samples: 4,000 psi (27,580 kPa). ~- B. Expansion Joint Material: 3/4-inch (191mm) thick, full depth, preformed, asphaltic joint filler. C. Plastic Subgrade Film: Conform to Iowa Department of Transportation Specifications 4107. PART 3 EXECUTION __ 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Minimum Thickness: As shown on the Plans. 2. Construct to line, grade, and widths designated on the Plans. B. Subgrade Preparation: Prepare in general accordance with Iowa Department of Transportation Specifications 2511.03 and 2511.05. C. Expansion Joints __ 1. Install at all points where walk meets other walks, curbs, and fixtures in the surface, other structures and at intervals not greater than 50 feet (I Sm). D. Placing Concrete 1. Moisten surface or cover surface with plastic film. -- 2. Deposit concrete at full depth in one operation. 3. Consolidate concrete. 105191-1 02775-1 SECTION 02775 ~~~~~ SIDEWALKS 4. ~ Thoroughly spade concrete full depth in all areas. 2OQ6 MAR 2$ AM $t 2$ E. Finishing CITY CLARK 1. Strike concrete to level surface. I~WA CITY In~/ 2. Minimize the use of floats. 3. Score joints across walks at intervals equivalent to width of construction to provide square sections or as directed by Owner's Representative. 4. Edge all joints and corners. 5. Trowel surface, upon disappearance of water sheen, to a hard dense, smooth surface. --, 6. Discontinue troweling upon appearance of excess water. 7. Brush troweled surface to obtain non-slip surface, shall be finely ribbed with no coarse grooves. Use fine brush with frequent cleaning. F. Curing 1. Use approved spray on cure medium or impervious paper or mats. G. Sealant 1. Use approved sealant over expansion joint where sidewalk abuts against building. 3.02 PROTECTION A. During curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, water flow, loading, shock, extreme temperature changes, and vibrator. END OF SECTION 02775 105191-1 02775-2 - Division 3 F~ ~ ~~ Concrete C1~1~~~' ~;LL~6< iOV~J,~~ CITY lQWA Division 3 SECTION 03001 FII ED CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE -- PART 1 GENERAL 2006 MAR 28 AM 8~ 26 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CI~ ~~ ~L~RK -- IOWA CITY IOWA A. Provision and installation of formwork, reinforcing steel, and cast-in-place concrete detailed and described on the drawings and hereinafter specified. B. Provision and installation of all related items described on the drawings or hereinafter specified. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 5 -Metal Fabrications to be Cast in Concrete. - 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards and Codes: Comply with the provisions of the following Codes, Specifications, and __ Standards except as otherwise indicated. 1. ACI 211.1 -Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal Weight __ Concrete. 2. ACI 301 -Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings. -- 3. ACI 304 -Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. - 4. ACI 305 -Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 306 -Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 318 -Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 7. ACI 347 -Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. 8. CRSI -Manual of Standard Practice. 9. CRSI -Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. 10. CRSI -Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications, and -- Nomenclature. 11. CRSI -Recommended Practice for Reinforcing Bar Splices. 12. ASTM A82 -Standard Specifications for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 13. ASTM A185 -Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 14. ASTM A615 -Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 105191-1 03001-1 SECTION 03001 ~~ ~~("`~^~ LJ CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 15. AWS D12.1 -Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts, and Connections in Reinforced X006 MAR 28 AM 8:2 6 Concrete Construction. CITY CLERK 16. ASTM C31 -Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 10WA CITY iQWA 17. ASTM C33 -Concrete Aggregates. 18. ASTM C39 -Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 19. ASTM C42 -Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 20. ASTM C94 -Ready-Mixed Concrete. 21. ASTM C143 -Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. 22. ASTM C150 -Portland Cement. 23. ASTM C 171 -Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 24. ASTM C172 -Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete. 25. ASTM C 192 -Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 26. ASTM C231 -Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 27. ASTM C260 -Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 28. ASTM C309 -Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 29. ASTM C494 -Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 30. AASHTO M 182 -Specification for Burlap Cloth made for Jute or Kenaf. B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances, and finishes. C. Tests for Concrete Materials 1. Testing of concrete materials will be performed by an independent firm selected by the Owner and paid for by the Owner. 2. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at any time during the process of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense, including the retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. D. Concrete Quality Control Testing During Construction 105191-1 03001-2 f { d_.[~..~ CAST-1N PLACE CONCRETE __ ZQ~~i ~~~ ~ ~ ~,~ ~: ~ ~ 1. An independent testing laboratory will be retained under provisions of Section 01450 to perform all quality control tests and to submit test reports to the Architect/Engineer. CITY C' f ~--~~A 2. Concrete will be sampled and tested for quality control during the placement of concrete as -~~ ~(~'v'V~'+ ~'~~ ~' ~'" ~ ~~ follows: a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C 172. b. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test on concrete taken at point of discharge for each set of compressive strength test specimens. c. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. d. Compressive Test Specimen: ASTM C31, one set of three standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; one specimen tested at seven days and two specimens tested at 28 days. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer and testing laboratory 24 hours in advance of each placement of concrete in order that concrete tests maybe scheduled. 4. Report test results in writing to the Architect/Engineer on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of Contractor, name of concrete supplier and truck number, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both seven day tests and 28 day tests. 5. Additional Tests: Additional tests of in-place concrete will be required when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Tests to determine the adequacy of the concrete shall be by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: For information only, submit manufacturer's data and instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joints systems, and others. 105191-1 03001-3 AILED X046 ~tAR 28 AM 8~ ~6 GiTY C~.~RK IOWA CIIY, IQWA SECTION 03001 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330. 1. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangements of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete. 2. Accompanying the shop drawings, submit steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile and bend tests for reinforcing steel. C. Certificates of Compliance: Certificates of material properties and compliance with specified requirements shall be submitted if requested by the Architect/Engineer. Certificates of compliance must be signed by materials producer and the Contractor. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms maybe of wood, plywood, concrete-form-grade hardboard, metal or other acceptable material, which will produce smooth, true surfaces. B. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side of tight fit. C. Metal forms shall have smooth surfaces free from any pattern, irregularities, dents, and sags. D. Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compound. E. Form Ties 1. Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spatting concrete surfaces upon removal. 2. For concrete that will be exposed, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1-1/2" inside concrete. 3. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than one inch in diameter in concrete surfaces. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing bars ASTM A706 -Grade 60, for reinforcement to be welded. ASTM A615 -Grade 60, allowed for all sizes. ASTM A36 -For tie rods, turn buckles, plates and nuts. 105191-1 03001-4 - _ SECTION 03001 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE -- B. Steel Wire: ASTM A82, plain, cold-drawn, steel. C~~J~ ~~~~ 2$ ~~ $; 26 C. Welded Wire Fabric (WWF): ASTM A185, in coiled rolls, plain finish. C(T'~r~ Ll~ ~~K D. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide wire bar-type supports for reinforceent includi~figf~o~stefs, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and __ welded wire fabric in place. All devices shall be plastic-coated or hot-dipped galvanized steel type, sized and shaped as required. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. B. Aggregate: Fine and coarse aggregate for concrete shall comply with ASTM-33 (concrete aggregate). 1. Maximum aggregate size: 3/4". C. Water: Clean, potable, and free from injurious amount of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances. D. Admixtures 1. Air-entraining: ASTM C260. 2. Water-reducing: ASTM C494, Type A. Water-reducing agents shall be applied at the dosage rates recommended by the manufacturer. Absolutely no chlorides will be permitted. 2.04 RELATED MATERIALS A. Curing compound shall meet the moisture retention requirements of ASTM C309. The compound shall be Kure-N-Seal, produced by Sonneborn Building Products Division, or Masterseal, produced by Master Builders, or approved equivalent. B. Concrete repair compound: Sonopatch Series, produced by Sonneborn Building Products Division, or Emaco Series, produced by Master Builders, or approved equivalent. C. Preformed joint filler shall be Closed -Cell Backer Rod for rod applications and Expansion-Joint Filler for flat applications, produced by Sonneborn, or approved equivalent. D. Joint sealant compound for slab control joints and expansion joints shall be: 1. Sonolastic by Sonneborn or approved equivalent. E. Non-shrink grout shall be Sonogrout l OK, produced by Sonneborn, Set Grout, produced by Master Builders, or approved equivalent. 105191-1 03001-5 SECTION 03001 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ~ILEC~ 2.05 PRO PORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES 2006 MdR 28 AM $: 25 A. Proportion mixes by the laboratory trial batch method using materials i blo~dro~a,~t~.ie project U for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211. A C~~ '~~A 1. Required 28-day compressive strength of all concrete is 4000 psi. 2. Slump: Reinforced walls and footings...........5" max., 2" min. Slabs-on-grade .....................................4" max., 2" min. Slabs-on-deck ...................................:..5" max., 2" min. B. Laboratory Trial Batches: An independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect/Engineer will be employed at the Contractor's expense to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C192, and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C39, specified in ACI 301. C. Submit written reports of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed. D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Laboratory test data for revised mix designs and strength results must be submitted and approved before using in the work. No change in contract price will be allowed for these changes. E. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing: 6 to 7% for maximum 3/4" aggregate F. Water reducing agents maybe used as determined by the mix design organization with the approval of the Architect/Engineer. 2.06 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94 as herein specified. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted. B. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C94 may be required. C. When the air temperature is between 85°F and 90°F, reduce the mixing and delivery time from . . 1-1 /2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90°F, reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 105191-1 03001-6 - SECTION 03001 ~~ L~C~ CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE -- PART 3 EXECUTION ~~76 ~~~ Z $ ~~'~ ~' Z ~ 3.01 FORMS CITY Ci ~F~K __ IOWn C~ i~; I;~UJA A. Design, erect, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage, to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Chamfer exposed corners and edges using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. D. Accurately place and secure in position, prior to placing concrete, all anchors, bolts, inserts, and other items to be embedded in concrete; including items furnished under other sections of the Specification and for other contractors on the project. E. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from those trades involved. F. Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces without written approval of the Architect/Engineer. G. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.02 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with aform-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. _ _ B. Thin form-coating compounds only within thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Coat steel forms with anon-staining, rust preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.03 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND TEMPORARY BRACING A. Formwork not supporting concrete, such as sides of wall, beams, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after curing at not less than 50°F for 24 hours after placing, provided that: 1. Concrete is sufficiently hard not to be damaged by form removal operations. 2. Curing and protection operations are maintained. 105191-1 03001-7 ~~~~~ CAST-IN PLACE CONCRETE "B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beams,s~~.~al~t~?moved until: 1. The concrete has attained 75% of the minimum 28-da~~h~(,( 141NA CITY InWA -- 2. 14 days has passed since pouring the concrete. 3.04 REU SE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. _^ B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces. 3.05 REINFORCING A. Fabricate and place to shapes and dimensions indicated or required to carry out intent of drawings and Specifications. Clean off rust, ice, or other coatings that would reduce bond. Do not use reinforcing reduced in section. Field bending of bars is not allowed without Architect/Engineer's permission. B. Tagging shall be with metal, linen, or rope fiber tags filled in with machine or waterproof ink. f^ Paper tags shall not be used. 3.06 PLACEMENT OF REINFORCING A. Accurately place all reinforcing steel as shown on the drawings. Fasten rigidly so that it cannot be displaced during the construction operation. r-- B. The minimum cover of concrete for all reinforcement shall conform to the dimensions shown on the drawings, which indicate the clear distance from the edge of the reinforcement to the concrete surface. Where not otherwise specified or shown by the written dimension, the minimum coverage of the concrete over the steel shall be as follows: 1. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth 3 inches 2. Formed concrete exposed to earth or weather 2 inches 3. Concrete in beams and columns not exposed to ground or weather 1-1/2 inches 4. Concrete slabs and walls not exposed to weather 1 inch - C. Splices shall be lapped as shown on the drawing. Those not shown shall have a minimum lap of 30 bar diameters. D. All reinforcing steel, including welded wire mesh, shall be accurately located and held in position by the use of proper reinforcing steel supports, spacers, and accessories in accordance with the 105191-1 03001-8 SECTION 03001 ~~ ~.~U CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE U drawings and Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing ~c~a~a~r-e~tr~~ures ACI 315. Tie bars securely at intersections. C~~_ I! L~~~~K 3.07 EMBEDDED ITEMS ~~~'1/,q {,,;~T~ 1~~~~A A. The Contractor shall provide for the installation of all items embedded in the concrete such as coil rod inserts, anchor bolts, etc. as shown on the drawings or as provided for in other Divisions of this Specification. 3.08 DRILLED AND GROUTED DOWEL INSTALLATION A. Drill hole in existing concrete as specified by grout manufacturer. Incline the hole in the concrete such that the non-shrink grout will be retained in the hole. B. Fill hole with epoxy grout. Epoxy grout shall be Epogel by Sonneborn, Sikadur 33 by Sika, or approved equivalent. C. Immediately place dowel bar into grouted hole. D. Allow grout to take initial set before disturbing dowel bar. 3.09 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood - - forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. 2. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. Control rate of placement so as not to exceed structural capacity of forms. 3. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by - -- hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with the recommended practices of ACI 309, to suit the type of concrete and project conditions. 4. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate the placed layer of concrete and at least six 105191-1 03001-9 SECTION 03001 -- ~IL„~~ CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2005 MAR 2$ ~ AM 8t ~6 inches into the preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to CITY Ct~ERK consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded 10WA CITY, IOWA items without causing segregation of the mix. _ 5. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 6. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 7. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or barbies to smooth the surface, leaving it flee of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. 8. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. C. Cold Weather Placing 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40°F, uniformly heat all water and aggregates before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50°F, and not more than 80°F at point of placement. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in writing by the Architect/Engineer. D. Hot Weather Placing 1. When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality and strength of _ concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90°F. - Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice maybe used to control the concrete temperature, provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing water. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 105191-1 03001-10 SECTION 03001 ~~ CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accep~r~~c~~i~rl~ 8~ z6 3.10 PLA CING CONCRETE BY PUMPING CI~Y Cl_E~K -- ~ol'~~~ c~T~; to~vA A. Cast-in-place concrete at the Contractor's option maybe placed by pumping in accordance with ACI 304. B. Design Mix 1. Submit separate design mix for pumping concrete. 2. Note fine aggregate gradation and water and cement content are more critical and different from the regular concrete mix. 3. Slump maybe increased by one inch for individual batches at point of discharge. _ C. Pumping Equipment and Placement 1. Do not convey through aluminum or aluminum alloy pipes. 2. The loss of slump in pumping equipment shall not exceed two inches. 3. The mortar used for lubricating the pumping equipment shall be discarded. 4. Slump and air tests shall be taken at both points of delivery to pump equipment and at point of discharge from the line. 5. Concrete cylinders shall be taken at the point of discharge from the line. ___ 3.11 JOINTS IN SLABS A. Construction Joints 1. Provide construction joints as indicated on the drawings or as to least impair the strength of the structure. -- 2. Provide beveled keyways at construction joints. 3. Thoroughly clean the face of joint before placing adjacent slabs. Wet the surface and coat - with a neat cement grout immediately before placing the second slab. B. Control Joints 1. Provide control joints as indicated on the drawings, as necessary to least impair the strength of the slab or as otherwise directed by the Architect/Engineer. 2. Provide 1/4-inch wide saw-cut control joints to a depth equivalent to 1/4 the slab thickness. 3. Cut not less than eight hours or more than 24 hours after slab is placed. 105191-1 03001-11 CAST-IN PLAOCE CONCRET~I~~~ 4. Clean joint slot and fill with sealant. ZQ06 ~~~ 2$ AM ~~ ~6 C. Expansion Joints (~!~ Cl..~~t'K ITY l~WA - ~~WA C . 1. Provide where exterior pavements abu e exterior walls and where otherwise shown on the plans. 2. Install 3/4-inch thick expansion strip the full depth of the slab set with the top of the joint material 3/8-inch below the surface of the concrete in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.12 FINISHING, CURING, AND SEALING OF INTERIOR FLOOR SLABS A. Finishing 1. Finish concrete floor/surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. 2. Uniformly spread, screed, and float concrete. 3. Steel trowel surfaces which will be exposed. 4. Maintain surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8-inch in 10 feet. 5. Slope finish surface to drains as indicated on plans. B. Curing and Sealing -Non-Topping Areas 1. Apply a membrane cure material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations following final finishing operations. C. Curing and Sealing -Topping Areas 1. Area to receive a topping (tile, grout or Terrazzo) shall be cured with wet burlap/visqueen method or other approved non-membrane forming method. 3.13 FINISHING AND CURING OF EXTERIOR SLABS A. Slabs shall be floated, troweled, and fiber broom finished with edges tooled. B. Concrete slabs shall be sealed with a curing membrane as soon as the finishing operation is completed. Application shall be in strict compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Surface defects, including tie holes and honeycomb, unless otherwise specified by the contract documents, shall be repaired immediately after form removal. B. All honeycomb and other defective concrete shall be removed down to sound concrete with edges perpendicular to the surface or slightly undercut. No featheredges will be permitted. The area to 105191-1 03001-12 ~~ ~ ~~ ~~ CAST-IN PLACE CONCRETE - ~~~~ ~'~ ~ $bet~ne~ End an area of at least six inches wide surrounding it shall be dampened to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. A bonding grout shall be prepared using a mix of (;(`~ ~' ~p~~~imately one part cement to one part fine sand passing No. 30 mesh sieve, mixed to the - I V~f~; + C i~n~~' of thick cream, and then well brushed into the surface. C. The patching mixture shall be made of the same materials and of approximately the same _ proportions as used for the concrete, except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted and the mortar shall consist of not more than one part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by damp loose volume. White Portland cement shall be substituted for a part of the gray Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to produce a color matching the color of the surrounding concrete, as determined by a trial patch. Quantity of mixing water shall be no more than necessary for handling and placing. Patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, without addition of water, until it has reached the stiffest consistency -- that will permit placing. D. After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, the bond coat shall be well brushed -- into the surface. When the bond coat begins to lose the water sheen, the premixed patching mortar shall be applied. The mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated into place and struck off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage, it shall be --- left undisturbed for at least one hour before being finally finished. The patched area shall be kept damp for seven days. Metal tools shall not be used in finishing a patch in a formed wall which will be exposed. E. After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, tie holes shall be filled solid with patching mortar. F. Concrete slab surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability, strength, or appearance, shall be repaired by a method approved by the Architect/Engineer or they shall be replaced. 3.15 PATCHING EXISTING CONCRETE A. Clean surfaces to be patched of all loose particles, oils, grease, etc., and roughen surfaces as required. B. Predampen surfaces before application of patching compound. C. Mix, apply, finish, and cure patching compound in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 03001 105191-1 03001-13 Division 5 - Metals FI~~~ 2~i r Ci~ `~' i~LE~t< Division 5 - SECTION 05400 C! { COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING f i L.. 1 __ PART 1 GENERAL Quo ~~~~ Z8 A?~ $' ~~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CI ~~~ CLARK 1~i~J,^-, CITY, !C'J'JA A. Miscellaneous formed steel section, thickness and lighter for loa bearing and non-load bearing framing with floor and ceiling track, bracing, furring, bridging, for assembly generally using mechanical fastenings. 1.02 REFERENCES --- A. ASTM A36 -Structural Steel. B. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. C. ASTM A446 -Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Physical (Structural) Quality. D. Industrial Fasteners Institute IFI-113, Steel Self-Drilling Tapping Screws. E. ASTM A307, Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR EXTERIOR WALLS A. Member Properties: 1. A.I.S.I. Specifications for Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. A.I.S.I. Cold Formed Steel Design Manual. B. Design Calculations: Performed by qualified engineer registered in State of Iowa and copy shall be stamped, signed and submitted to Architect along with shop drawings. If computer is used to perform calculations, a clear explanation of program used and printed results shall be submitted. C. Designs: Provide in accordance with applicable codes and standards to safely support project dead loads, live loads and lateral wind loads without excessive stress or deflection with following stipulation: 1. Steel Studs: 6 inches deep, formed from galvanized steel sheets not less than 16 gauge in thickness unless noted otherwise. 2. Spacings of Studs: Not over 16 inches on centers. 3. Lateral Deflection of Studs Under Design Loadings: Not over 1/360 of their unsupported height. 4. Bridging: Provide for walls that will be unsheathed. 105191-1 05400-1 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ~ t~ ~ ~.,, 1.04 SUBMITTALS ZOO6 i~AR 2 $ AM $~ ~ $ A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with(~5 p(~0(~3~.RK - 1. Indicate component details, framing openings, bearing ahcl'fd a~e,~~~r~g, temporary bracing, welds, type and location of mechanical fasteners and accessories, or items required of other work for complete installation. 2. Detail framing layouts showing numbers and spacings and references to assembly and -.- connection details. B. Provide calculations by registered Professional Engineer. C. Manufacturer's Instructions and Product Data: -- 1. Descriptive data illustrating cold formed framing system components including fasteners and accessories. 2. Erection instructions containing sequence of operations and requirements for temporary bracing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection and Quality Control: Steel framing manufacturer shall provide qualified -~ representative for periodic on-site review of fabrication and installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Welding: Use qualified welders and comply with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.3, "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel ". C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for fire- ^ resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction. _ . 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off ground in dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproofing coverings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Structural C Studs shall be one of the following approved products and manufacturers or an equivalent approved in advance by the Architect/Engineer: _ . 1. Incor Type C steel studs by Incor, Ina 105191-1 05400-2 ~ - -- SECTION 05400 ~~ ~ I` IJ _ COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING - 2. Super C steel studs by United States Steel. lOt~~ ~9AR 28 'ki`f $~ ~~ 3. ST16 steel studs by United States Gypsum. CIT`f !~~ C~r( ~,~ ~~~~~ CITY IOWA 2.02 FRA MING MATERIALS A. Studs: Formed galvanized sheet steel, shaped sections, 16-gauge. B. Studs: Shape as detailed, depth to provide total wall thickness shown in conjunction with finish surfaces or cladding indicated. Thickness as required for design conditions, galvanized. C. Track: Formed galvanized steel, channel shaped, same width as studs for tight fit, solid web steel properties and gauge shall match studs. 2.03 ACC ESSORIES __ A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed galvanized sheet steel, gauges as required with 20-gauge minimum. B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Galvanized formed sheet steel, gauge as required for conditions encountered, manufacturer's standard shapes. 2.04 FASTENERS A. Self-drilling self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, and washers, hot dip galvanized, ASTM A153. - B. Anchorage Devices: Power driven or powder actuated, drilled expansion bolts, or screws with sleeves. __ C. Welding: AWS D1.1. D. Sill Flashing: Galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A526 or A527, G-90 coating, both sides prime painted. 2.05 FINISHES - A. Galvanizing: Studs, track, bridging, bracing and accessories shall be formed from steel having G-60 galvanized coating meeting requirements of ASTM A525. - B. Primer: FS MIL-P-26915A touch-up for galvanized surfaces. Use Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound. __ 2.06 FABRICATION A. Galvanize, touch-up, and prime paint metal materials used on exterior wall and soffit framing, roof framing. B. Fabricate assemblies of sizes and profiles required, with joints fitted, secured, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements. 105191-1 05400-3 F1 L~~ COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 206 I~AR 28 SAM 8~ Qb~nponents may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Prefabricated panels shall be square, with components attached by welding to prevent racking. Handling and lifting of CETY (1~L!ER~ panels shall be done in manner as to not cause distortion. I©~~ ~~ D. ~~WC~ut framing components square for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for angular fit against abutting members. Hold members positively in place unit properly fastened. E. Assemble studs in manner which will assure that stud ends are positioned against inside track web prior to stud and track attachment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Clean surfaces which will be in contact after assembly. B. Position members plumb, square and true to line. C. Install flashing under sill track where bottom track is set flush with foundation wall. Seal laps watertight. D. Seat studs in track with stud web and flange abutting track web. E. At intersection or abutting track joints, securely anchor abutting pieces of track to structure or "_ " splice them together. F. Framed wall openings shall include properly designed lintel and multiple studs at edges of opening to compensate for those removed. G. Perform welding in accordance with ASW D1.1. , __ H. Erect studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design requirements. I. Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. J. Align top and bottom tracks, locating to wall layout. Secure in place with screws, anchors or welding as required. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. K. Set studs plumb at 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated and not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clips and ties, screws, or welding, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. L. Construct corners using minimum 3" studs. Double studs at door, window and sidelight jambs. M. Provide deflection allowance below supported horizontal building framing in ceiling or head track for non-load bearing framing. 105191-1 05400-4 -- SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING - N. Attach cross studs or furring channels to studs for attachment of items anchored to walls. Install 16 gauge galvanized steel straping for fastening of metal panels. ___ O. Erect studs one-piece full length. Splicing and wire tying of framing components is not permitted. P. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. Q. Make provision for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanizing with galvanizing repair paint. END OF SECTION 05400 o :~ ~~ ~' a,- rn ~ rn ~- ~ ~ co D N J 105191-1 05400-5 Division 6 Wood & Plastics ~5~~~ 0 CfT`~' Cl_i~~~< i~`~Nr~ CITi', I~~'~A Division 6 SECTION 06100 F ~ ~ (~ ROUGH CARPENTRY __ PART 1 GENERAL 2006 ~~R 28 A~ 8~ 2~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CI I Y' CLtRK ___ 1~V~1,~ Ci - Y, I~U'JA A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. B. This section includes rough carpentry for nailers, blocking, furring and miscellaneous wood required to complete the project. -- 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards for lumber shall comply with PS-20. B. Standards for plywood shall comply with PS-1. C. Grading Requirements 1. All materials with nominal thickness of 3" or less shall be kiln dried. Moisture content shall not exceed 19%, or 15% for preservative pressure treated wood. 2. Grade and trademark will be required on each piece of lumber (or bundle in bundled stock). Use only the recognized official marks of association under whose rules it is graded. Grade and trade marks will not be required if each shipment is accompanied by certificate of inspection issued by association. 3. Lumber shall be sound, thoroughly seasoned and free from warp that cannot be corrected in process of bridging or nailing. Woodwork exposed to view on outside of building or in finished interior spaces shall be dressed. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place materials in area protected from weather. B. Store materials a minimum of 6" (150 mm) above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation or ventilation. C. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of the building. D. Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 105191-1 06100-1 FI ~~ ~ SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY ZDD6 ~lAR 2$ `4AM 8:Iber, General CITY CLERK 1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as IOWA CI-f`Y IOWA required by PS-20. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 3. At time of dressing, maximum moisture content for all pieces of construction lumber shall be 19% and mark DRY, except lumber with wood preservative shall be 15%. B. Lumber 1. Non-load bearing members shall be Standard or Stud Grade, Douglas Fir, Western Larch, Western Hemlock (WWPA or WCLA) or No. 2 Dimension Southern Pine (SPIB). C. Miscellaneous Lumber and Boards Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes shown or specified, worked into shapes shown, and which is construction grade light framing size lumber or any species or board size lumber (SPIB or WWPA). D. Glass-Fiber-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing Board. Proprietary product surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass fiber mats and alkali-resistant coating, and with unsurfaced square edges; thicknesses and sizes as indicated, complying with ASTM C 79 for board with water-resistant core, type and product as follows: 1. Type: Regular 2. Product: "DensGlass Gold Exterior Guard", Georgia-Pacific Corp., or approved substitute. ~ _. E. Air Infiltration Barrier 1. Woven polyolefin sheet, 0.005-inch thick with a moisture vapor transmission rate of 70 grams/sq. meter/24 hours per ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and a flame spread not exceeding 25 per ASTM E 84. Provide one of the following: a. "Barricade Building Wrap"; Simplex Products Div., Anthony Industries, Inc. b. "Tyvek Housewrap"; Fibers Department, Du Pont Company. F. Miscellaneous Materials 1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. 105191-1 06100-2 -- ~-- SECTION 06100 ~~ ~ I- ~~ ROUGH CARPENTRY __ Z~~~ ~~ ~ r rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact or in area of high ~~ l~~e humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with ahot-dip zinc coating -- 2.02 IO~V"6~~~~TT A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood 1. Pressure impregnate lumber and plywood where indicated with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27; identify "fire-retardant-treated wood" with appropriate classification marking of UL, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, Inc., or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide fire-retardant-treated wood for which a current model code valuation/research report exists that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and that evidences compliance of fire-retardant treated wood for applications indicated. 3. Provide Interior Type A for interior applications, and Exterior Type for exterior locations, where indicated. 4. Inspect each piece of treated lumber after drying, and discard damaged or defective pieces. - - 5. Subject to compliance with requirements shown and specified, provide one of the following products: - a. Interior Type AFire-Retardant-Treated Wood: 1) "Dricon", Hickson Corporation 2) "Pyro-Guard", Hoover Treated Wood Products 3) "Flameproof LHC-HIT", Osmose Wood Preserving Co., Inc. b. Exterior Type Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: --- 1) "Exterior Fire-X", Hoover Treated Wood Products or approved substitute. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION __ A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. 105191-1 06100-3 FILED SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 2~~6 Mai 28 A~• 8; 2 '~ecurely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. G~TY CLK `a~A ~~~ ~A Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required. E. Prior to installation, all field cuts and holes in preservative pressure treated wood shall be treated in accordance with AWPA M4. 3.02 NAILERS AND BLOCKING A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Nailer(s) Attachment: Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Loss Prevention Data 1-49 (Factory Mutual Systems, June 1985) contains recommendations for the spacing and sizing of fasteners. 3.03 WOOD FRAMING A. Rough carpentry work shall be installed to comply with NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction" Form E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide -Residential & Commercial. B. Cover wall sheathing with air infiltration barrier in compliance with manufacturer's printed directions. END OF SECTION 06100 105191-1 06100-4 -~- SECTION 06200 ~~~ ~(-~ FINISH CARPENTRY LJ -- PART 1 GENERAL ~~~~ ~~~~ ZS APf g; 2 ~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES C1T~' CLERK _-- IOWA C1T~' InVt/q A. Plastic-laminate countertops and casework. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings _" Submit shop drawings for approval, showing plan view, elevations, and end view of all countertops, appropriately scaled details of all joinery; notations of special features; and any drawings required to illustrate deviations from the contract requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS __ A. C.S. 236-66 Commercial Standards: Matte-Formed Wood Particleboard. B. Fed. Spec. FF-N-105 B and Am-3, Nails, Brads, Staples, and Spikes. C. ANSI A161.2 for Plastics Laminates D. Association and Institute Publications 1. AWI -Quality Standards, Section 100 -Lumber Grades; Section 200 -Plywood and Particleboard Grades; Section 400 -Casework. - 2. NFPA -National Forest Products Association. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS _ A. Subject to meeting the specifications, the following manufacturers are approved for material hereinbefore specified: 1. Solid stock lumber: As specified. - 2. Particleboard: Formica, Weyerhauser, U.S. Plywood Corporation. 3. Plastic laminate shall be one of the following approved products and manufacturers or equivalent, approved in advance: a. Formica Brand by Formica Corporation b. Wilson Art by Ralph Wilson Plastics - c. Lamin-Art Division of Eagle-Picher Industries, Inc. 4. Adhesive: As specified. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Particleboard shall conform to C.S. 236-66 (Type 1-B-2) backing for plastic laminate. 105191-1 06200-1 F ~ ~G ~ SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 2Q06 ~A~ 28 BQt''~ 8'I~astic laminate shall be General Purpose type, 0.050-inch thick for horizontal surfaces and 0.028- inch thick for vertical surfaces. Backing sheet shall be 0.020-inch thick. CITY CLERK ~d~A C~N ~(~~ All colors and patterns will be selected by the Architect/Engineer from the manufacturer's available products. C. Rough Hardware: Nails, screws, bolts, and similar fastening devices required for completing finish carpentry work as shown or required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Scribing and joining shall be done accurately and neatly so as to produce concealed and permanently tight joints, in a uniform plane for best appearance. B. Attach countertops securely to base units. Spline and glue joints in countertops; provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint. Provide cutouts and reinforcing for fixtures and appliances. 3.02 METHOD OF FASTENING Fasten carpentry items to building construction as required to provide a secure, permanent installation. END OF SECTION 06200 105191-1 06200-2 Division 7 -- Thermal & Moisture Protection ~~~~~ - 1006 ~~A~ 28 A~1 8~ 27 CIT`! CLLI=~1~ IOWA, CITY 1O'JVA Division 7 BUILDING INSULATION ~t ~..~~~I PART 1 GENERAL 2OO6 I~AR Z $ ~~ $; 2 ~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~~ (~' (~`~(~~~ Iowa c~rY Iowa A. Perimeter foundation insulation B. Batt insulation 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in the original, unopened package or bundles bearing the name of the brand of the manufacturer. B. Keep materials dry until ready for use. C. Store in such a manner as to prevent deterioration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Perimeter insulation shall be one of the following products and manufacturers or an equivalent, approved in advance. 1. Styrofoam Tongue & Grove manufactured by Dow Chemical Company. 2. Formular 250 manufactured by U.C. Industries of Owens Corning Fiberglass. B. Batt insulation shall be one of the following products and manufacturers or an equivalent, approved in advance. 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation 2. Schuller International, Inc. 3. Certain-Teed Corporation 4. U.S.G. Interiors, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Perimeter Insulation 1. Rigid, extruded polystyrene, minimum two inches thick, unless otherwise noted on drawings. 2. Comply with ASTM C578 Type IV. B. Batt Insulation 1. Batt insulation shall be semi-rigid mineral wool or glass fiber products. 2. Batt insulation at exterior and interior locations shall be friction fit without vapor barrier facing. 105191-1 07210-1 ~~ ( ~("'1 -~ SECTION 07210 - 1,..,. CL.JJ BUILDING INSULATION 2006 MAR 2$ AM :8% ~•7 Nominal thickness and/or R value shall be equivalent to R-19 for glass fiber and R-12/5 for semi-rigid mineral wool or as indicated on the drawings. CITY CLER((K~~AA4• Insulation shall be in batts or rolls as required to suit the project conditions. (OPWAART 3I~~XECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Rigid insulation 1. All materials shall be installed complete, attached securely and permanently in place as specified herein and per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Sweep and wipe down surfaces to remove loose materials. 3. Remove fins and projections left after removal of concrete forms to provide an even surface. 4. After surfaces have been prepared, adhere insulation to foundation walls in a horizontal position, closely butted and with staggered vertical joints. Apply adhesive in continuous ribbons in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Insulation boards shall be routed or grooved as required to be installed beneath or over horizontal or vertical runs of any conduit and piping. 6. Cut out installation as required for items which penetrate through the insulation. Keep the cutout area to minimize size. Patch cutouts as required to maintain thermal integrity. B. Batt Insulation 1. All materials shall be installed complete, attached securely and permanently in place as specified herein and per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Do not install batt insulation until all ducts, conduit, pipes, etc. are in place. 3. Batt insulation of the friction fit type (without vapor barrier) shall be packed tightly about voids at frames, ducts, pipes, etc. which occur during construction, and where indicated on drawings. 4. Batt insulation at exterior walls shall be installed full height and width within structural metal studs in such a manner that voids or openings do not occur. Installation shall be done at such a time so as not to expose insulation to weathering. 5. Insulation will be required for full width between studs, including the cavity of each stud. Secure insulation with staples or wire tying to prevent slippage during or after installation. Install spandrel insulation hangers per spandrel manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 07210 105191-1 07210-2 SECTION 07260 c I ~ C VAPOR RETARDERS (__ C PART 1 GENERAL 2~Ob N~3R 28 AI"1 8~ 27 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES C!T>' C~ ~~( _ - IOWA CiT~Y, IOV'JA A. Vapor Retarder 1. All exterior insulated furred walls shall have vapor retarder installed. 2. All other areas detailed to receive vapor retarders. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS __ A. Sheet membrane material for vapor retarder shall be 6 mil clear polyethylene. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Stud Wall Vapor Retarder 1. Install vapor retarder over studs and insulation just prior to installing interior wall material. 2. Lap all vertical joints across a minimum of two studs. -- 3. Install in large enough sheets to avoid horizontal joints. Where horizontal joints cannot be avoided, lap a minimum of 24". END OF SECTION 07260 105191-1 07260-1 --- SECTION 07410 ~) ~ _ ~ j+~ METAL WALL PANELS I I __ PART 1 GENERAL ZQQ~ ~~R Z8 k~ ~: 2~ 1.01 SCOPE CITY CI~ERK -_ IOw'~ CITY InU'JA A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and supervision necessary to furnish and instal: 1. Exterior composite metal wall spandrel and fascia panels. 2. Interior metal spandrel panels. 3. Provide all associated trim, supports, insulation and accessories as required to complete above system. --- 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08411 -Aluminum-Framed Entrances, Storefronts and Curtain Walls. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard detail drawings, and - installation instructions for metal wall panels. Include manufacturer's certification or other data substantiating that the materials and finishes comply with the requirements. - B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings showing the profiles of metal wall panel units and the details of --- forming, jointing (gaskets if any), internal supports, anchorages, trim, flashing and accessories. Show details of weatherproofing at edges and terminations of the metal panel work. Show small-scale layout and elevations of entire work. C. Samples: 1. Provide samples of finishes of the actual materials for color selection. D. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty. -- 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erection: Erection of the panels shall be by either the panel manufacturer or an experienced --- erection firm licensed by or acceptable to the panel manufacturer. B. Panels shall exhibit performance characteristics outlined in specified manufacturer's product literature. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exterior Metal Panels: 105191-1 07410-1 SECTION 07410 ~~ ~_C ~ METAL WALL PANELS 2006";MAR 28 AM g: ~ ~ Aluminum Composite Panels (ACM: C~-I-Y ~L~RK a. Composition: Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a core of extruded (~W~ C~~ f n~A thermoplastic formed in a continuous process without the use of glues or adhesives _, between dissimilar materials. Bond integrity testing to adhere to ASTM D1781- 76. 1) Texture: Smooth 2) Finish: Manufacturer's standard 3-coat fluoropolymer finish b. Aluminum face sheets: Aluminum alloy 3003, thickness: .020". c. Panel thickness: 4mm (.157"). , d. Panels weight: 1.121bs/square foot. e. Tolerances: 1) Panel bow: Maximum 0.8% of panels dimension (width or length). 2) Panel lines: Breaks and angles to be sharp and true; all breaks will be back supported with aluminum extrusion angles, surface to be free from warp or buckle. f. Outside corners shall be mitered (no panel joint). g. Colors (equal to Alucobond colors): 1) Color 1- Series A Platinum A 2006-M ,~ 2) Color 2 - Series C Image Red C 3011-DXLE - 3) Color 3 - Series C AL Pewter C3012-DXLE h. Approved manufacturers (wet seal systems): 1) Alucobond, Alcan Composites USA, Inc. 2) SL-1000, Sobotec, Ltd. 3) Universe 2000, Universe Corporation 4) Sobotec Ltd. 5) Approved equal B. Interior Metal Panels 1. Composition: 0.032", Aluminum with 1/8" fire-resistant hardboard backing 105191-1 07410-2 ~-- SECTION 07410 ~~ ~ (- METAL WALL PANELS !- - a. Texture: Smooth Z~~6 ~~-~~ 2$ A~ 8; Z~ b. Finish: Manufacturer's standard Kynar Coating SysteriCl I~ CLERK - IO1~~A CITY IO~t/A 2. Color shall be selected by the Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's standar selection. Match Una-Clad colors. 3. Locations: At spandrel panel backpans in Rooms 151, 204, 206, 208, 210A, 210B, 210C, and 212. 4. Approved manufacturers: a. Mapes Industries, Inc. b. Approved equal __ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with panel manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation and erection of metal panels, flashing and sealants. B. Anchor component parts of the metal panels securely in place, providing for necessary thermal and structural movement, in accordance with manufacturer's standard practice. - C. Fasteners shall be concealed. 3.02. CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of metal panels promptly after installation. END OF SECTION 07410 105191-1 07410-3 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED RO'0~~~~ -- PART 1 GEN ERAL ~~~~ ~~~ ZS aly $: 27 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CI I Y CLERK _ IOWq CfTY I~Wq A. Modified Bitumen Sheet Roofing (SBS). B. Membrane Flashings. C. Other accessories as required. -- D. Membrane Manufacturer's Warranty. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 41 Specification for Asphalt Primer Used In Roofing and Waterproofing. _ B. ASTM D 312 Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. C. ASTM D 451 Method for Sieve Analysis of Granular Material Surfacing for Asphalt Roofing Products. D. ASTM D 4586 Specification for Non-Asbestos Asphalt Roof Cement. -- E. ASTM D 4601 Specification for Asphalt Impregnated and Coated Glass Felt Base Sheet. F. ASTM D 5147-91 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous --- Sheet Material. G. ANSWL 790 Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials. H. CGSB 37-GP-56M Standard for: Membrane, Modified, Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced for Roofing. I. FM 1-49 Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data-Perimeter Flashing J. NRCA NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. K. NRCA Bulletin #2-91, Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene) modified bitumen sheet roofing reinforced with a fiberglass mat __ meeting the requirements of Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) Standard 37-GP-56M and Underwriters Laboratories Class A Fire Resistance Rating for the installed slope. Surface membrane shall have factory applied mineral granules. Base sheet materials shall be adhered with _ hot asphaltic bitumen meeting the requirements of ASTM D 312, Type IV. Cap sheet material shall be heat welded. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 105191-1 07551-1 SECTION 07551 FI L„~D MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED ROOFING ZQQ~ MaR ~ gy ~.t,, 8; .~t:t~mit under provisions of Section 01330 -Submittals. _. CITY CL'~RK All submittals shall be subject to the Owner's review and approval. IOWA CITYB: I~Wl~anufacturer's Product Data: ] . Most recent copy of manufacturer's literature applicable to products and specifications to be used, including material characteristics, test data, installation recommendations, material safety data sheet (MSDS), and complete flashing details of system. MSDS sheets shall be submitted directly to the Owner. 2. Specimen copy of manufacturer's warranty. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Most recent copy of manufacturer's installation instructions for applicators detailing products and specifications to be used, including procedures for installation of membrane and flashing. D. Manufacturer's Certificates: 1. Copy of completed contractor's application form for manufacturer's warranty to be submitted to the Architect/Engineer at the same time as original is submitted to the membrane manufacturer. 2. Copy of the contractor-submitted manufacturer's warranty form approved by the manufacturer. Note: The Contractor will not be permitted to start work until the approved warranty form is submitted to the Architect/Engineer. E. Shop Drawings: __ 1. Roof Plan and Details: By submittal of a bid for this project, the Contractor certifies that the project plans and specifications have been reviewed, and that the proposed roof system . will be installed in accordance with these plans and specifications. If, after award of contract and upon review of existing field conditions, the Contractor wishes to modify the roof plans and/or details, the proposed change shall be submitted as a shop drawing for review by the ArchitectlEngineer. f 2. Sheet Metal Fabrication: Reference Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim for requirements. F. Manufacturer's Field Services and Reports: 1. Reference Section 01450 -Quality Control for requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE _ A. Applicator shall be certified by manufacturer to install specified products. 105191-1 07551-2 - SECTION 07551 C~ t~ (~ MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED ROOFING 1- I ~[!J B. The entire installation of roofing, insulation, flashing and sheet metal wor~~~ ~he~a$ty2 required for acceptance by the membrane manufacturer to obtain the warranty specified in this section. IQ4~/~~CITY IO C. Comply with the requirements of the regulatory agencies as specified herein. wA D. As an approved applicator, all items required by the membrane manufacturer in the installation of the manufacturer's system will be included in the work. E. The roofing contractor shall assure that all roofing materials (i.e., membrane, insulation, fasteners, asphalt, adhesives, sealants, etc.) are compatible with each other and the substrates which they will be in contact with. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: 1. Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a minimum of five (5) years documented experience. 2. Company certified by the membrane manufacturer for a minimum of three (3) years as an approved applicator of the products specified in this section. 3. Company having workmen trained by the membrane manufacturer. These trained workmen shall perform the work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store materials under provisions of Section 01610. B. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work. C. Coordinate delivery of materials with Owner so that minimal interruption of Owner's operations occurs. D. Materials shall be stored in their original, tightly sealed containers or unopened packages, and shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's brand name and such identifying reference numbers as are appropriate. Deliver materials to job site on pallets. Do not stack pallets. E. Materials shall be stored in a neat, safe manner, so as not to exceed allowable live load of the storage area. Contractor shall not load pallets of material onto the roof deck without approval from the Architect/Engineer prior to loading. Disperse materials on roof deck to avoid concentrated loading. F. Store materials in dry, protected areas in an upright position. Control temperature of storage areas in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Protect materials from freezing. G. Follow manufacturer's guidelines for required temperatures of material prior to application. 105191-1 07551-3 SECTION 07551 ! MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED ROOFI~t~.,,~~ H. Any materials damaged in handling or storage are not to be used. 2OOb MAR 2$ AM $; 27 I. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and ~~i~ee~~aterials stored on Owner's premises. ~D~q CI-r.l, ~n~/A J. Store roll goods on ends only. Discard rolls which have been flattened, creased, or otherwise damaged. K. Remove wet material from project site. L. Comply with fire and safety regulations. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply roofing in dry weather. B. If the newly constructed roof or existing insulation becomes wet due to rainstorms, faulty water _ cutoffs, or other reasons, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of all wet materials, dry the affected roof area, and reconstruct the roof in accordance with these specifications at no cost to the Owner. C. Coal tar base, oil base, or plastic roof cements are not to be used in direct contact with steam or steam source. D. All bonding, splicing and sealing surfaces must be free of dirt, moisture and any other contaminants. E. The roof surface shall be free of ponded water, ice, snow, or algae prior to installing the new roof system. F. Ensure roof deck is structurally sound to support construction traffic. Notify Owner or Architect/Engineer immediately of any conditions that are not structurally sound. 1.08 SAFETY A. All application, material handling, and associated equipment shall conform to and be operated in conformance with OSHA safety requirements. B. Comply with federal, state, local and Owner fire and safety regulations. C. Advise Owner and Architect/Engineer whenever work is expected to be hazardous to Owner's operations or occupants. D. Maintain a crewman as a floor area guard whenever roof decking is being repaired or replaced. E. Maintain fire extinguisher within easy access whenever power tools, roofing kettles, and torches are being used. 105191-1 07551-4 ~ " ('''~ SECTION 07551 FI (._~I_.1v1ODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED ROOFING 2~~5 ~~~ 2 $ f~o$: r~a~ufacturer's and the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA) recommended safety measures for torch applied membranes. CI r Y ~~::L.E~~< '(~~~. (J~~A ~ade shall be erected around the kettles to prevent unauthorized access to the area. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty and guarantee under provisions of Section 01780. B. Provide to the Owner the membrane manufacturer's twenty-year (no-dollar limit) material and workmanship warranty effective from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. C. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner a notarized written warranty assuring that all roofing -- work including caulking, flashing, and sheet metal to be watertight for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of the work. Warranty shall include all materials and workmanship required to repair any leaks that develop as a result of the work. Refer to sample provided at the end --- of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED EQUIVALENT A. Contractor must submit to the ArchitectBngineer aminimum of 7 days before the bid date any product not specified in order for product to be considered for approval. The ArchitectlEngineer will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. Reference Section 01610 for Product Requirements. 2.02 MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET ROOFING A. Modified Bitumen Roofing and Flashing Membranes I . Acceptable Manufacturers a. SiplastlICOPAL Product: Paradiene 20 HT TG/Paradiene 30 FR TG Specification: 2030 IT-263 5 -- Flashings: Paradiene 20 HT TGNeral Aluminum b. Firestone Building Products Company - Product: SBS Glass Torch Base/SBS FR Torch Specification: I-46-41-M Flashings: SBS Glass Torch Base/SBS FR Torch c. Johns Manville Roofing Company Product: SBS DynaWeld Base/SBS DynaWeld Cap FR Specification: 2FID-HW Flashings: SBS DynaWeld Base/SBS DynaWeld Cap FR 2. Requirements 105191-1 07551-5 F) ~ ~~ SECTION 07551 - - - MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRA N „ NE TORCH APPLIED ROOFI G 206 MAR 28 AM 8.27 a. Roof system is classified by Underwriters Laboratories to meet the requirements of Class "A" Fire Resistance. - CITY CLERE< '~~~ ~'~~ ~~~~ b. Roofing system is classified by Factory Mutual to meet the requirements~of _ FRMRC Windstorm Resistance Classification 1-90 minimum. 3. Materials and Properties a. Membrane sheet shall be granulated with white mineral aggregate. Granule embedment loss shall be less than two grams per square foot. b. Base plies shall comply with ASTM D 2178, Type G1. B. Rel ated Materials . 1. Asphalt primer: Shall meet requirements of ASTM D 41. Primer shall be as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. _ 2. Flashing membrane: Shall be modified bituminous material as recommended and furnished by the membrane manufacturer. 3. Roof cement: Shall meet requirements of ASTM D 4586 (asbestos-free) and be recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 4. Loose roofing granules: Shall meet requirements of ASTM D 451 and be recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Color shall match color of granulated membrane sheet. Size shall match size of granules on the membrane. 5. Nails and Fasteners: Non-ferrous metal or galvanized steel, except that hard copper nails shall be used with copper; aluminum or stainless steel nails shall be used with aluminum; -- and stainless steel nails shall be used with stainless steel. Fasteners shall be self-clinching type or penetrating type as recommended by the manufacturer of the deck material. Nails and fasteners shall be flush-driven through flat metal discs of not less than 1-inch diameter. Metal discs may be omitted when one piece composite nails or fasteners with heads not less than 1-inch diameter are used. 6. Wood Nailers: Roofing nails for wood nailers shall be 11 gauge, barbed, zinc-coated nails with 7/16 to 5/8-inch diameter heads. Nails shall be long enough to penetrate into the wood nailers at least 5/8 inch. 7. Metal Discs: Flat discs or caps ofzinc-coated sheet metal not lighter than 28 gauge and not less than 1-inch in diameter. Discs shall be formed to prevent dishing. Bell or cup-shaped caps are not acceptable. -- PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE 105191-1 07551-6 _ _- SECTION 07551 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED ROOFING ~! ~ --~ -- A. 'Prior to the start of roofing work, a meeting will be held at the job site f~~~~ o$~v~w~,h~ materials, methods and procedures to facilitate proper and timely construction of the roofing system. Reference Section 01310 -Project Management and Coordination fc(,r'~~(ii e ~~ -- IOWA CITY IQWA 3.02 REFERENCE __ A. The current product specification guide published by the membrane manufacturer shall be considered part of this specification and shall be referred to for more specific application procedures regarding roofing insulation, membrane and base flashing. When a difference between this specification and the manufacturer's product specification guide is encountered, the provision which is more stringent shall govern. 3.03 INSPECTION OF SURFACES A. Examine surfaces for adequate anchorage, foreign materials, moisture, and other conditions which would adversely affect the roofing application and performance. B. The roofing contractor shall be responsible for preparing adequate surfaces to receive insulation, roofing, and flashing. 3.04 APPLICATION -GENERAL A. Install in accordance with the accepted roofing manufacturer's written specifications and recommended details now on file in the ArchitectBngineer's office. B. Protect building wall area with tarpaulins or other durable materials at staging and kettle areas. C. Roof surfaces shall be thoroughly dry before application of roofing. D. Inspection of the roofing shall be made by a responsible representative of the roofing manufacturer during application and after completion. Reference Section 01450 -Quality Control for requirements. E. Roofing insulation shall be dry when installed and shall be protected from the weather during installation. All materials which become wet shall be removed and replaced with new dry materials. F. Membrane shall be installed over membrane manufacturer approved insulation. Install recovery board as required by the membrane manufacturer although details on the plan may not show it. G. When application of roofing is begun, the total roofing system in that area shall be completed before the end of the day and before being wet by the elements. Phase construction may be done as -- approved by the manufacturer. Written approval from the membrane manufacturer is required for phase construction. H. Install temporary water cutoffs at the completion of each day's work and remove upon resumption of the work. Any leaks and damage due to insufficient water cut-offs shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 105191-1 07551-7 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED RO~~D I. Precautions shall be taken to protect the membrane from p~~~~~ 2$ AM $: ~$ J. If materials are stored on the roof, the materials will be protecteFL'~~o~n ~b~.ng roof. ~owA cfn iowA --- K. Special care will be taken to prevent distress on the building structure when handling materials for the project. L. Apply loose roofing granules in asphalt bleedout at side and end laps in accordance with membrane manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Notify the Owner and Architect/Engineer 48 hours before the first day of construction. B. Install all base flashing and/or fascia system fasteners and metal work, at least throughout the anticipated working area, as soon as possible after roofing application. C. Complete all specified carpentry and wood component installations, at least throughout the anticipated working area, as soon as possible after any roofing application. D. Surfacing and installation of loose granules shall be completed within the time period as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 3.06 PREPARATION A. Priming of Surfaces. 1. Prime flanges of metal gravel stops, edging strips, flashing collars and accessories as recommended by manufacturer prior to stripping into the roofing system. " 3.07 APPLICATION OF MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET A. Apply base ply over substrate as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Reference Section 07220 -Roof and Deck Insulation for installation requirements of roof insulation. Apply bitumen at the coverage rate and temperature as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Phased application is not permitted. All plies shall be completed each day. - C. Application of base ply should result in a smooth, even substrate in order to firmly bond membrane onto. --~ D. Align base plies so manufacturer's minimum specified end and side laps are maintained. E. When base ply has laying lines, the lines shall be used to position the subsequent plies for compliance with nominal lap requirement. For products without laying lines, conform to manufacturer's lap requirement. F. Should misalignment of the sheet occur during application causing a variation from minimum lap requirements, the sheet should be cut and realigned to satisfy minimum lap requirements. 105191-1 07551-8 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED ROOFI~~~~~ G. Clean and prepare base ply for application of membrane. ~~~~ ~~~ ~$ A~ $: Z$ H. Apply surface membrane over base ply as recommended by the men n~ii~urer. APP1Y bitumen at the coverage rate as recommended by the membrane r~a j~ct~~~Y !(7~fA I. All layers of roofing shall be laid free of wrinkles, creases or fishmouths and shall be laid at right angles to the slope of the deck so the direction of flow of water is over and not against the laps. Sheets shall be laid directly behind the asphalt applicator. K. Sufficient pressure shall be exerted as recommended by the membrane manufacturer on the roll during application to ensure prevention of air pockets, and proper embedment. L. Lap base ply and surface membrane the minimum distance as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. M. Stagger laps between the plies so the base ply lap is not within two inches of the membrane ply lap. N. During inspection if there is insufficient lap width, a membrane strip no narrower than twice that of the required lap shall be installed over the deficient lap using the appropriate attachment method. O. Torching -- 1. Torch-apply to substrate by heating membrane in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Application between membrane plies shall be such as to produce voidless coverage. Embed plies in the bitumen. Do not walk on plies while the bitumen is still fluid. 3. Asphalt flow of a minimum 1/4 inch beyond lap line shall result during application. Apply loose granules in asphalt flow immediately to ensure proper embedment. Roll lap with a 20# steel roller. Roller shall not be more than 5 feet behind torch during welding process. 4. The completed roofing system shall be free of voids and blisters. Defects in the application such as voids, fishmouths, physical damage, loose or dry laps, non-approved materials, etc. shall be repaired by the Contractor as recommended by the membrane manufacturer at no cost to the Owner. 3.08 APPLICATION OF MODIFIED BITUMEN FLASHING MEMBRANE A. Provide modified bitumen flashing in the angles formed where the roof deck abuts walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes and other vertical surfaces, and where necessary to make the work watertight. Modified bitumen flashings are as recommended and provided by the membrane manufacturer. B. Apply one-ply of modified bitumen base ply and one ply of modified bitumen surface membrane at all flashing locations. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Apply flashing by method (torch applied) as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 105191-1 07551-9 SECTION 07551 CC MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED ROQ~F~Q C. Install modified flashing in accordance with the details show~(j~ ~'~~1~ o~~it$;tl~ manufacturer's published standards whichever is more stringent. D. All perimeter flashings shall conform to Factory Mutual (FM)f~rtio~~~-VV~heet 1-49. E. Hot asphalt shall flow a minimum of 1/2" beyond edge of lap for bitumen aTTp~'plication or 1/4" beyond edge of lap for torch applications. F. Side and end laps shall be overlapped a minimum of 4". All flashings shall extend a minimum of 6" onto the field of the roof. Selvage edge of membrane shall not be exposed. G. Flashing membrane should not be stretched when applied. H. All curbs and walls shall have cants. I. Curb and parapet flashings shall be fastened at top at 6" o.c. with 1"diameter cap nails. J. All flashing materials shall be 100% bonded to walls, curbs, edges, and other surfaces being flashed. K. All raised flashings shall be a minimum of eight (8) inches above the surface of the finished roof surface. L. All raised flashings shall have acounterflashing. M. All metal, masonry, and concrete in contact with flashing shall be primed and allowed to dry. No metal flashing shall be set in hot bitumen. N. A layer of roof cement shall be used to separate any membrane from contact with sheet metal ' " flashing elements. O. Bed set-on accessories in a thick coating of roof cement extending under entire metal flange of each accessory item. P. Wall and Curb Flashing Detail: 1. Attach cant using hot steep asphalt, flashing cement or mechanical fasteners. 2. Run specified roofing plies minimum of 2" above cant and adhere to wall. 3. Embed flashing in hot steep asphalt or by torch from top of wood nailer to a point at least 4" beyond termination of roofing plies. Maintain a minimum 3" side lap and a minimum specified flow of bitumen beyond all edges. 4. Nail plies 1" below top edge, maximum 6" o.c. using minimum 1"diameter cap nails. 5. Requires counterflashing. 3.09 FIELD TESTS 105191-1 07551-10 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED ROOFING I~~`-' - A. Schedule L~t~~ ~~~~ 28 ~~ $: 2$ 1. Perform field tests in the presence of the Contractor and Archi~~n'~Ciotify the __ Contractor and Architect/Engineernne working day prior tl~llbl~p~rr>~i ~~„t~ts. 3.10 PROTECTION OF APPLIED ROOFING: A. Protection Against Moisture Absorption: When precipitation is imminent and at the end of each day's work, provide protection as follows: - 1. Water Cutoffs: a. Water cut-offs shall be installed to prevent water from flowing beneath the roof -- system during inclement weather. b. When the existing roof is not being removed, gravel surfacing shall be spudded __ completely off the felts a minimum of four-feet for the cut-off seal. c. When the application of the insulation and roofing system is resumed, cut the strips __ of felt along the vertical edges of the insulation, exposing the edges of the insulation, and remove the cutoff felts and materials. 2. Temporary Flashing: a. Provide temporary flashing at curbs, walls, and other penetrations and terminations of roofing felts until the roofing membrane is complete and permanent flashings are applied. b. Remove temporary flashing before applying permanent flashing. B. Damaged Work. 1. Restore work damaged during construction to original condition or replace with new materials. 3.11 SHEET METAL WORK (REFERENCE SECTION 07620) A. Counterflashings, copings and other perimeter or penetration metal work shall be properly fastened and sealed by the roofing contractor or others, and it shall be their responsibility to maintain this work in a watertight condition. Care should be taken to assure the membrane is not in contact with sharp edges and is not unsupported in an area greater than 1/4-inch. 3.12 TEST CUTS A. Provide test cuts when requested by Architect/Engineer or Owner of completed roof system under provisions of Section 01450. Test cuts shall be provided to Architect/Engineer or Owner. 3.13 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY INSPECTIONS 105191-1 - 07551-11 SECTION 07551 MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE TORCH APPLIED ROOFING A. Inspections shall be in accordance with Section 01450 -Quality Control. B. After the work has started, an inspection shall be made by a field technical representative of the membrane manufacturer. The representative shall review materials, methods, and procedure to _. facilitate proper and timely construction of the roofing system. Upon completion of the inspection the Contractor shall submit the Architect/Engineer awritten report of the field technical representative's findings. C. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by a field technical representative of the membrane manufacturer to ascertain that the roofing system has been instal led according to the manufacturer's current published specifications. Upon completion of the inspection, the Contractor shall submit to an Architect/Engineer awritten report of the field technical representative's findings. N 0 O ~~ ~ ~' `~ ~ TI r ~~ ~ rn s. a ~ co N 105191-1 07551-12 Fl! .~C~ ROOF MAINTENANCE WARRANTY iu~~ ~"~~~ Z8 Aid 8~ 28 Ci1'Y rL~~~< PROJECT: Panel and Window Replacement Project -Robert A. Lee Community Recreation Cetxt~f,~ji~ C~ rY ~~~~~A This agreement between ,hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and , hereafter referred to as CONTRACTOR, is entered into to provide maintenance on the roof of ,located at ,Iowa ,for years beginning , 20_ and ending , 20_ For the purpose of this agreement, maintenance is defined as the repair of roof membrane and flashing defects, and the replacement of roof membrane and flashing components that threaten the viability of the roof system to keep the building free from externally caused leakage through the roof. Warranty shall include all materials and workmanship required to repair any defects that develop during the warranty period at no expense to the OWNER. Specifically excluded from the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this agreement are any and all damages to said roof, the building or contents caused by the acts or omissions of other trades or contractors; lightning, winds in excess of a strong gale as defined by the Beaufort scale, hailstorm, flood, earthquake or other unusual phenomena of the elements. The component parts of this agreement are: 1. A yearly comprehensive inspection of the roof during which time all defects that need to be repaired and all components that need to be replaced will be identified by the inspector. 2. Should defects be found during inspection that are not covered by this agreement, the CONTRACTOR will notify the OWNER in writing as to the cause (who or what was responsible), and the estimate of the cost to return the roof to its condition before the problem occurred. Written approval to proceed with the work must be granted by the OWNER. 3. Completion of all repairs and replacement in a manner consistent with the highest standards of the roofing industry. Work shall be in compliance with the membrane manufacturer's written specifications and warranty, so as not to void warranty. 4. A follow-up inspection of the completed maintenance work. 5. Response within 24 hours of all requests for repair of leaks or other emergencies that are part of this agreement. 6. This maintenance warranty covers CAULKING for the listed project and shall be included along with the roofing warranty. The undersigned CONTRACTOR will repair or replace defective caulking work and other work damaged thereby during the warranty period at no expense to the OWNER. The following type of failures are considered defects: Leakage, hardening, cracking, crumbling, melting, shrinkage, running or staining adjacent work. 7. This maintenance warranty covers FLASHING for the listed project and shall be included along with the roofing warranty. 8. This maintenance warranty covers SHEET METAL for the listed project and shall be included along with the roofing warranty. OWNER: CONTRACTOR: Name Name Title Title ~1 ~~~ MODIFIED BITUMENOMEMBRANE ROOFING 2006MAR Z8 ~M 8:28 _ END OF SECTION 07551 IOIN CI11;E nWA 103156-3 07551-14 -~ SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM F I ! E - ~ -- PART 1 GENERAL 7~~6 ~~E+q 2 8 AM 8~ 2 $ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CI { ~' (.,~~,~r~f -- i ' ^,~' ^~ C"~, IOWA A. Provide sheet metal flashing systems, complete, in-place as detail-ec~ on the drawings and as specified herein. This section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1. Exposed Trim and Fascia -- 2. Metal Counterflashings 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A446-91 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip Process. B. ASTM B209-92 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. C. FM (Factory Mutual) Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1 - 49. D. FS QQ-L-201 Specification for Lead Sheet. E. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual __ 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failing. B. Fabricate and install flashing at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet I-49 for the following wind zone: Wind Zone 2: Wind Pressures of 21 to 30 psf --- 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRII'TION A. At all locations noted in the drawings. Colors shall be selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors. 1.05 SUBMITTALS -- A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Manufacturer's Product Data 1. Metal material characteristics and installation recommendations. 105191-1 07620-1 ~I ~~~ SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ZOQ6 MAR: 28 AM 8~ ~8 Color chart for pre-finished metal. Submit color chart prior to material ordering and/or fabrication. CITY CLERK (OWA CI~C.I~~~hop drawings 1. For manufactured and shop-fabricated gravel stops, fascias, copings, and all other sheet metal fabrications. 2. Show profile, joint details, corner details, and types and locations of fasteners. 3. Indicate type, gauge and finish of metal. D. Samples 1. Eight-inch square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finish surfaces. Where finish involves normal color and texture variation, samples shall be selected to show the full range of variations expected. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: ~- 1. Engage an experienced installer with a minimum of five years of documented experience who has completed sheet metal and flashing work similar in nature and -- with arecord of successful in-service performance. B. Reference standards _ , 1. Comply with details and recommendations of the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for workmanship, methods of joining, anchorage, provisions for _ expansion, etc. 1.07 WA,R.RANTY A. Pre-finished metal material shall require a written 20-year non-prorated warranty covering fade, chalking and film integrity. The material shall not show a color change greater than 5 NBS color units per ASTM D2244, or chalking excess of 8 units per ASTM D659. If either occurs, material shall be replaced per warranty at no cost to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a notarized written warranty assuring all sheet metal work, including caulking and fasteners, to be water-tight and secure for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of the building. Warranty shall include all materials and workmanship required to repair any leaks that develop, and make good any damage to other work or equipment caused by such leaks or the repairs thereof. Refer to the sample warranty at the end of the roof membrane section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED EQUIVALENT 105191-1 07620-2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ~! ~~~ - A. Contractor must submit to the Architect/Engineer aminimum a~~~ ~ef~ t~ ~~ date any product not specified in order for product to be considered for approval. The Architect/Engineer will notify contractor, in writing, of decision to a~¢t ~r~request. --- IOt~a~^~ G(TY IOWA 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: 1. Anodized Aluminum Sheet: a. ASTM B 209, 5005-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.0500 inch. B. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet: 1. Zinc-coated, commercial-quality steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 755, G 90 coating designation, coil coated with high-performance fluoropolymer coating as specified in "Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet Finish" Article; not less than 0.036 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. C. counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: 1. Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of the counterflashing lower edge. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. B. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Section 07920. C. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; non-corrosive; size and thickness required for performance. D. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Shop Fabrication 105191-1 07620-3 FI LE a SECTION 07620 -- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 206 MAR, 2$ . AM ~?. ~$ .Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates - C~.I.Y CLERK and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify ~~WA 1~~~! ~('~WA shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 2. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. C. Seams: 1. Space joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Provide joint details in compliance with the recommendations of the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for the thickness, girth, and type of metal. D. Dissimilar Metals 1. Separate flashings from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. E. Attachment: 1. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. 2. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, non-corrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 3. Size cleats as recommended by of the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.05 SHEET METAL MATERIAL A. General: 1. Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. - a. Exposed Trim and Fascia -fabricate from the following material: ` -' 1) Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. 2) Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch thick. b. Counterflashings -fabricate from the following material: 1) Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. 105191-1 07620-4 -' - SECTION 07620 FI ~ ~ ^°-~ SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM I_ I ~J - c. Flashing Receivers -fabricate from the followin~~t~~[~I Z $ A''~ $: 2 $ 1) Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch iQ}i ~ c~ (;~~~~ f~ --- i0lr~fA Cil1', IOWA d. Equipment Support Flashing -fabricate from the following matena 1) Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. e. Roof-Penetration Flashing -fabricate from the following material: -- 1) Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. 2.06 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: __ 1. Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) Designation System for Aluminum Finishes for finish designations and application recommendations. B. Anodized Finishes: 1. Clear Anodized a. Class 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AA-C22A41 Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker complying with AAMA 607.1. 2.07 COIL-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISH A. Organic Finish 1. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: Apply the following system by coil- coating process on galvanized steel sheet as recommended by coating manufacturers - and applicator. a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, - thermo-cured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. B. Color and Gloss: _ _ 1. The Architect/Engineer shall select a color from the manufacturer's premium color _ chart. C. Manufacturers 1. Coil-Coated Steel Sheet Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are -- - not limited to, the following: 105191-1 07620-5 SECTION 07620 ~,~~~ - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM a. Atlas Aluminum Corporation 2UOb MAR 28 Ate 8~ 28 b. Copper Sales, Inc. C'rITY CLERK IOWA CITY IOWA ' c. MM Systems Corporation. d. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. e. Vincent Metals. £ Berridge Manufacturing Corporation. D. Shall be fabricated as shown on the drawings. E. Joint covers, corners, supports, strip flashing at joinings and other accessories shall be included. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the recommendations of the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line ~ -- and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. 2. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in -- waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surface to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. - 3. Roof-Edge Flashing: Secure metal flashing at roof edges according to FM Loss f Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone. 4. In locations where roof perimeter fascia exceeds a vertical face height of 8", fascia shall be installed with formed angles in the face to add rigidity and reduce out of flat appearance. Where vertical face height exceeds 12", a minimum of two formed angles shall be provided. --- 105191-1 07620-6 -- C SECTION 07620 F ~ ~_._, t=^~ ~ SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM -. ~~~6 ~;~~ Z $ l~l"~ ~, ~ 8 Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 ti~ ~ .~~ inches of corners on flashings, and no joints allowed greater than 24 inches from CIT'~ C,LCI~.K -- ICV!Jr'~ CITY, lO~NA intersection of coping caps. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than one inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. Separations: Separate metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. a. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install aslip-sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. b. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. 8. counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap - counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant. 9. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with __ roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: a. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping a minimum of one inch, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. b. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. __ B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07620 105191-1 07620-7 -- SECTION 07920 ~~ ~ ~~ JOINT SEALANTS L~IJd ~~~ ~II A~ 8~ 2$ - PART 1 .GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES CITY vLEHK IOWA GiTY IC7WA A. Provide caulking and sealant systems for all joints shown on the drawings or as specified herein to provide a positive barrier against passage of air and moisture. B. Areas to be caulked and sealed include: 1. All openings and joints as shown on the drawings, and all joints which normally require -- caulking, include but not being limited to the following: a. Joints between metals and brick. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSUASTM D 1056 -Flexible Cellular Materials: Sponge or Expanded Rubber. B. ASTM C834 -Latex Sealing Compounds. - C. FS TT-S-00227 -Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component. D. FS TT-S-00230 -Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component. E. FS TT-S-001543 -Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base. ___ F. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) -Sealant and Caulking Guide Specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330 -Submittals. B. All submittals shall be subject to Architect/Engineer'syeview and approval. C. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and color availability. D. Submit two sets of samples illustrating manufacturer's full range of colors for selection. Color to closely match color of surface to which it is applied. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Submit manufacturer's standard ten-year warranty under the provisions of Section 01780. Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories against failure to achieve airtight or watertight seal -- or loss of adhesion, cohesion, or color stability. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 105191-1 07920-1 SECTION 07920 ~~ ~ C T"`~ - L... ~J JOINT SEALANTS r~ A. ppn~pp ~~pp Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the pttY(~~dt'3"~6c~+tieA~ ~fi~~ction with .- minimum three years documented experience. CITY CLERK B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of thi,t~o~C#r~t'{~I n~i m three years __ experience. C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute and manufacturer's requirements for installation. 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330 -Submittals. - B. Construct field sample, ten lineal feet minimum, illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface. C. Locate where directed. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original unopened packages with manufacturer's labels instructions and , product identification (and lot) numbers intact and legible. B. Store materials protected from the weather, in original containers or unopened packages, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIltEMENTS A. Do not install solvent-curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310. , B. Coordinate the work of this Section with all sections referencing this Section. PART2 PRODUCTS --- 2.01 ACRYLIC EMULSION LATEX: A. Materials 1. ASTM C834, single component; color as selected. B. Products 105191-1 07920-2 ~ - --- SECTION 07920 FI ~ L JOINT SEALANTS f t._ __. 1. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Construction Products Division. ~~~b ~k~ 2 $ {~~ $; 2 $ 2. AS-20; Pecora Corporation. (~~ ~ { GL~RK 3. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Division, Rexnord C~~e~ al P'r~od~ctls;'lh"~ 4. Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk; Tremco, Inc. 2.02 ONE-PART NON-SAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT --- A. Materials 1. FS TT-S-00230C, ASTM C920, Type S, Type II -non-sag, Class A; color as selected. B. Products 1. Chem-Calk 900; Bostik Construction Products Division. 2. Spec 300; Geocel Corporation. - 3. Vulkem 116; Mameco International, Inc. 4. Dynatrol I; Pecora Corporation. 5. Sikaflex lA; Sika Corporation. 6. Sonolastic NP 1; Sonneborn Building Products Division, Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. 2.03 ONE-PART SELF-LEVELING POLYURETHANE SEALANT -- A. Materials 1. FS TT-S-00230C, ASTM C920, Type S, Type I -self-leveling, Class A; color as selected. B. Products ___ 1. Vulkem 45; Mameco International, Inc. 2. NR-201 Urexpan; Pecora Corporation. -- 3. Sonolastic SL-1, Sonneborn BP Division, Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. 2.04 MULTI-PART NON-SAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT A. Materials __ 1. FS TT-S-00227E, ASTM C920, Type M, Type II -non-sag, Class A; color as selected. B. Products 105191-1 07920-3 JOINT SOEALANTS FI L. F 1. Chem-Calk 500, Bostik Construction Products Di~jB~QR Z$ AM e: 28 2. , Dynatrol II; Pecora Corporation. C~~ CLERK 3. Sikaflex 2c NS; Sika Corporation. IOWA CITY IOWA 4. Sonolastic NP 2; Sonnebom Building Products Division, Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. 2.05 TWO-PART SELF-LEVELING POLYURETHANE SEALANT A. Materials 1. FS TT-S-00227E, ASTM C920, Type M, Type II -non-sag, Class A; color as selected. B. Products 1. Chem-Calk 550; Bostik Construction Products Division. 2. Vulkem 245; Mameco International, Inc. 3. Pourthane; W. R. Meadows, Inc. 4. NR-200 Urexpan; Pecora Corporation. 5. Isoflex 880 G.B.; The Harry S. Peterson Company. 6. Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant; Sonneborn Building Products Division, Rexnord Chemical Products, Ina 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Backer Rod: Open cell polyurethane foam or closed cell polyethylene foam, compatible with sealant, sized and shaped to provide proper compression upon insertion in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene, TEFLON or polyurethane foam tape. C. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape. 2.07 OTHER MATERIALS A. All other materials not specifically described but required for complete and proper caulking and installation of sealants, shall be first quality of their respective kinds, new, and as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the ArchitectlEngineer. - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 105191-1 07920-4 ~ •. - SECTION 07920 i - I ~ ~ ~ JOINT SEALANTS j~.i A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive v~~ ~~~ ns~er~~ts as shown on drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. C€T~' C;JERK B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surf/ry C~r~ iO~,~JA 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. All surfaces in contact with sealant shall be dry, sound, well-brushed, and wiped free from dust. -- D. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean rags. E. Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by wire brushing. F. Remove all laitance from the joint cavity. G. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. H. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. -- 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/2 the joint width, 1/4" minimum depth, 1/2" maximum depth, unless otherwise specifically allowed by sealant manufacturer. Avoid stretching, twisting, or braiding the backer rod. -- D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when --- sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Apply sealant under pressure with hand or power-actuated gun. G. Guns shall have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as designed. -" H. Thoroughly and completely mask all joints where the appearance of sealant on adjacent surfaces would be objectionable. -- I. Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, thoroughly filling all joints to the recommended depths. __ J. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. 105191-1 07920-5 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS K. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01780. B. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled. C. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as the installation progresses. D. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. E. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation. B. Protect sealants until cured. 3.06 SCHEDULE Location Type Color A. General Exterior Locations Polyurethane, multi- As Selected component B. Interior non- moving joints Acrylic Emulsion Latex White to be painted C. Under Thresholds Polyurethane single Grey component END OF SECTION 07920 _ O ~ rv _o ° C_7 ~ a ~ C7 ~~ cv ~ ~ rn ss• ~ ~ - ~ ~ °° D na 105191-1 07920-6 - Division 8 Doors & Windows ~~ ~ ~- -- C11~Y C~._t~~K IOV~l~ CITY, iOUVA Division 8 Division 9 Finishes _ Gfl ~C1 Z~06 ~iAR 28 Ali ~~ 28 CI 1 Y CLERK --- cOWa C~YY, 10UVA Division 9 SECTION 08110 Fl ~ C~. ~~ STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES C~ L. PART 1 GENERAL ZOOS PlAft 28 A~9 $~ 28 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES (,;~ j ~(' Cat ~{1 IOt~~lA ~iTY 60WA A. Standard steel doors and frames manufactured in accordance with the Stee Door Institute (SDI) recommended standards. B. Hardware reinforcing, anchorage and accessory items required for the above. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings showing the following minimum requirements: Elevations of each door type; elevations of each frame type; details of each frame type; location in the building for each item; condition at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials; typical and special details of construction, including cross-section of door construction; methods of assembling sections; location and installation requirements for hardware; size, shape and thickness of materials; joints and connections; and methods of anchorage. B. See Division 1 for additional requirements concerning submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Testing Agency a. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) b. Warnock-Hersey (WH) 2. Door Assembly Fire Test a. UL Label or WH symbol permanently attached to frame assembly. b. Exposure: As indicated on the Door Schedule. c. Uniform Building Code Standard 7-2, 7-3, and 7-4. B. Reference Standards 1. All items not specified otherwise in this section shall be in accordance with the latest edition of "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ", SDI 100 by the Steel Door Institute, as well as SDI 105 "Recommended Erection of Steel Frames", SDI 107-84 "Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement Application) ", and SDI 117-88 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames". 2. International Building Code, 2003 Edition. 105191-1 08110-1 ~I,~~j"~ SECTION 08110 - LJ STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ?a~ MAR 28 ~M g: ~~0 doors and frames shall be in accordance with NFPA 80 (ANSI A1.7) "Fire Doors and Windows", and shall bear Underwriter Laboratories, inc. labels indicating their suitability CITY CLERK for the use in the intended situation. IOWA CITY In1NA _ 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage and handling of hollow metal work shall be accomplished in such a manner as required to prevent damage, including deterioration of prime coat finish. B. Doors shall be stored in upright position in a protected and dry area, with bottom edge placed on wood strips over the ground or floor and doors shimmed to provide at least 1/4-inch space between individual units to promote air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Standard Welded Frames Frames (fire rated where scheduled) shall be one of the following products and manufacturers, or an equivalent approved in advance. 1. F-Series by Steelcraft Manufacturing Company. 2. Flush Frames by Curries Manufacturing Company. 3. Series 400 by Amweld. . 4. Series SF 34 by the Ceco Corporation. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION ^ A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strips: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. --, C. Fabrication methods shall comply with requirements listed hereinafter; only minor deviations which will allow manufacturer's standard fabrication methods to be used, and which do not contradict the intent of this specification, will be allowed. D. Request for any deviation from these requirements should be made, in writing, at least ten (10) working days prior to date of bid opening. Lack of such requests will indicate manufacturer's intent to comply with this specification. E. Doors and frames scheduled for label service shall be supplied with proper labels attached. 105191-1 08110-2 ((( [[~~ SECTION 08110 F! L.. fw ~ i STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES - 200 ~~~ 2$. ~~ ~,a>~requirements and conditions are based on availability from one or more manufacturers. Inability of a manufacturer to meet these requirements shall not be justification for deviation from Ci~`~-~ ~~~(~~~equirements of drawings and specifications. i~Wa CI~Y ~~U~ derwriters Laboratories labels shall be of a class as noted on Door Schedule. Labeled doors shall have labeled frames. H. Labels for fire-rated doors and frame shall indicate the temperature rise on the unexposed surface does note exceed 450° F above ambient at the end of 30 minutes. I. Frames shall be preassembled at the factory in the largest size units permitted by shipping restrictions for minimum assembly of related parts at the job site. 2.03 METAL FRAMES A. Frame assemblies shall be of size and profile required by drawings and schedules. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects. Fabricate members straight and true with corner joints well formed, in true alignment. B. Steel shall be 16-gauge. C. Corner joints shall have mitered frame, coped and butted stops, and be continuously welded for full depth and width of frame. All contact edges shall be closed tight, and all welds on exposed surfaces dressed smooth and flush. D. Mullions, horizontal rails, transom bars shall be closed or tubular construction, shall member with heads and jambs, and be secured thereto with butt-welded joints reinforced with concealed clip angles. Members maybe made of two pieces, interlocked at the base of the stops so as to make the joint visible. E. All frames shall be of fully-welded construction; knocked down frames are not acceptable. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth and flush. F. All hardware cutouts shall have a closed metal mortising box welded to frame. G. Provide temporary spreader channel or angle at bottom of frames, or at both top and bottom where required. H. Provide angle clips welded at the bottom of all frames, with punched holes for securing the frames to floor construction. I. Frames shall not extend beneath finished floor. However, in areas where concrete topping occurs, the anchor clips at bottom of frames shall be adjustable type to permit securing to subfloor construction. J. Supports and anchors shall be fabricated from not less than 16-gauge sheet metal, unless otherwise specified. Galvanize after fabrication. 105191-1 08110-3 ~~~~~ SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 2006 MAR 28 AIM 8t 4rrSerts, bolts, and fasteners shall be manufacturer's standard units com 1 n with ASTM A153 " P Yi g ~lTY CLERK Class C or D as applicable. l~WA CITYd..lnWi~Anchor clips for metal stud wall systems shall be 18-gauge minimum welded to the frame and of _-_ type or design compatible to the stud system, so as to provide permanent rigid anchoring. Anchor clips should be located at the top of the jambs, 12" from top, and 24" centers (maximum) throughout the length of the jambs, with a minimum of four per jamb. All jamb anchor clips should be formed to permit anchoring of studs by using screws. M. Frames which are scheduled for labels shall be installed using UL approved anchoring. N. Frames shall have Underwriters Laboratories label attached at the factory, bearing the required rating. O. Frames shall be drilled or punched to receive silencers except where weatherstripping is required. Surface applied silencers are not acceptable. Frames shall be furnished with silencers equivalent to Glynn Johnson #GJ64 in accordance with the following: 1. Single interior doors -three at strike jamb. 2.04 HARDWARE PREPARATION A. Hardware mortises and reinforcements shall be made from templates, furnished and shipped prepaid to hollow metal manufacturer by hardware suppliers. Reinforcing shall be drilled and tapped. Surface applied hardware will be secured to built-up reinforcement, field drilled, and tapped. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A 115, "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware ". B. Minimum reinforcement shall be 9-gauge for butts, 12-gauge plus lock reinforcing unit for lock front and strike, 12-gauge channel at doors and plate at frame for closers, 14-gauge for other hardware, and metal reinforcement unit for locks as required by lock manufacturer. 2.05 FINISHES A. Clean and chemically treat metal surfaces to assure maximum paint adherence; follow with a dip or spray coat or rust-inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc chromate, or synthetic resin primer on all exposed ___ surfaces. Prime coats shall be oven cured. B. Doors shall have all depressions filled with a metallic putty prior to application of primer, and surfaces sanded to provide a smooth, flat finish. _ C. Finish painting of doors and frames will be done at job site under Section 09912 "Painting (Professional Line Products)." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. 105191-1 08110-4 - SECTION 08110 ~r ~ i ~ ~ _ I I STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES --- B. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion o~. Z $ a~~ $: Z C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CITY C~L~~K IowH c-TY Iowa 3.02 INST ALLATION A. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's data, and as specified _ herein. B. Placing Frames 1. Comply with the provisions of Standard 100 of the Steel Door Institute, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and braced securely until perms are set. _ _ 3.03 ADNST AND CLEAN A. Final Adjustments 1. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspections. - - 2. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. 3. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed - or otherwise damaged. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch- __ up of compatible drying primer. END OF SECTION 08110 105191-1 08110-5 - SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors and transom panels with wood-veneer faces. _ 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS FfLF~ 20~b hiAR 28 AN 8~ 29 ci~~~~~~ c~iw~i< IOWA CITY InWA A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 4. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC- accredited certification body. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors and wood paneling from single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252. 1.4 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. 105191-1 - 08210-1 SECTION 08210 Fl!_EC~ -- WOOD DOORS f C. , ,Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used ~~h~~l~~'i~~ 8; 29 CITY CLERK J 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS {~~~ ~~~ ~nWA A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet - , work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134- _ _ mm) section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. --~ PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not _ contain urea formaldehyde. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. C. Mineral-Core Doors: 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire=protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors offire-protection ratings indicated as follows: 105191-1 08210-2 - SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS -- a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking. b. 4-1/2-by-10-inch (114-by-250-mm) lock blocks 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw- holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH O A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: D ~ -c' N ~ 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade Afaces. ---i C.~ ~ ~~ 2. Species: Select white birch. ' ~ ~~y-~ ~,. ! ~ 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). ~ ~ =~ J n ~ 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. D N 5. Transom Match: Continuous match. ~ 6. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Applied wood edges of same species as faces and covering edges of crossbands. 7. Core: Manufacturer's standard for 20-minute fire-resistive rating. 8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 9. WDMA LS.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. 2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048- inch- (1.2-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. -- B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI- WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A 115-W series standards, and hardware templates. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Transom Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber meeting rails. Provide factory- installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. 105191-1 08210-3 SECTION 08210 FI~.E~ - WOOD DOORS l~ I D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. ZOO6 NAR 28 AM $: ~9 - 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and pr~~e~in~a~~ 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factof~h~Ll{~br~~ith applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Filled finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ___ A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION - A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 105191-1 08210-4 ~- -- SECTION 08210 ~ ~ ~ WOOD DOORS - 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and betweeng~s. ~o~ti~ij'8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from °~~ ~~~~P top of __ threshold unless otherwise indicated. ~Q~I~A (~(~! ~n~fA a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in Z inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. - E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be - repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08210 105191-1 08210-5 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT~~~~~~ - PART 1 -GENERAL Z~QS ~~R ZS AM S~ 29 1.01 SUMMARY C~ I ~' CLER!< -- IO~NA CITY InWA A. This Section includes the following: 1. Aluminum-framed storefronts. a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. -- 2. Manual-swing aluminum doors. 3. Aluminum door frames. -- B. Coordinate with Section 08911 -Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls for doors to be installed in curtain walls. C. Entrance systems and curtain walls shall be from same manufacturer. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, -- the effects of the following: 1. Structural loads. - 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. - 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes the following: __ a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements, to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. - g. Failure of operating units to function properly. B. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. 105191-1 08411-1 FI QED ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Z~06 ~Jl~ ~.$St~t~~~est I#erformance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: ~l~ c~~~ERK ,OWA C~ i"C, ,~+n tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection _ exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds. ', E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. Test High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F. b. Test Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F. c. Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F. F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water ` " penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum _~ static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. 1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating systems or appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not considered water leakage. H. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503. I. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503. J. Glazing is physically and thermally isolated from framing members. K. System is reglazable from the exterior. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 105191-1 08411-2 -- -- SECTION 08411 ~~~~~ ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of i~~iQo~~-pcnts:a~9 profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated. ti B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sectio G~~il~~..,,,,~~}~~~ attachments to other work. ~~ i~ 11', f (~}~Jq 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the system to the exterior. 2. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer. _ 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's -- "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.06 WARRANTY 105191-1 08411-3 C SECTION 08411 FlLE~3 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2Q06,~~~8 ~~al~arranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run C~-~ ~L~oirrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. ~O~ABC'~~Spe`c al Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer aggressing to repair or replace components of a glazed aluminum curtain wall system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Structural adhesive failures. 3. Failure of system to meet performance requirements. 4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 5. Water leakage. C. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. D. In addition, welded door corner construction shall be supported with a limited lifetime warranty for the life of the door under normal use. E. Warranty Period Structural Adhesive: Structural adhesive supplier shall warrant for a period often (10) years the structural integrity of the sealant. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: --~ 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer (Tri-Fab VG451T). __ 3. Tubelite Inc. 4. Vistawall Architectural Products. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 2.03 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate framing members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 105191-1 08411-4 ~ l -- SECTION 08411 F~~~l"~ ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRO,~N~~pTS ~~RR tt..__..~~ -. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength alumin'tlii'i~tri`r>?ei~ta~rt~~ ~~ nonferrous shims for aligning system components. Cf~Y CLEr~K _ -_ C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nons~~, ~,'ee~steners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. - D. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection. E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.04 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. Provide profile or shape to accommodate glazing thickness - provided. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. 2.05 DOORS A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 2-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width with 3-1/2-inch width horizontal stile dividing the glass into upper and lower lites. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 2.06 DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty units in sizes and types recommended by entrance system and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. 105191-1 08411-5 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS fC I...~~ ,1. opening-Force Requirements: Z~O6 MQ~ 28 aM 8; ~9 a. Egress Doors: Not more than 301bf (133 N) required to set door in moti~r ~l r~o~iEt~'~than 15 lbf (67 N) required to open door to minimum required width. ~~~A ~+~ '~~A B. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to Section 08710 -Door Hardware. 2.07 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter ofaluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops). D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system. E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. F. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. G. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. 105191-1 08411-6 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTSFI ~.ED H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Pr~~~t~~~g~~SB©~9 Drawings. 2.09 ALUMINUM FINISHES CITY CLERK IOWA CITY IOWA A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. -"- 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint -- Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. 105191-1 08411-7 SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS E: Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp or rack. - F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. ^ 1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight closure. 2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. _ 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware manufacturers' written ~__ instructions. 1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch measured to the leading door edge. END OF SECTION 08411 rn cv Q (~ °D ,~ ~` ~ C ac _- w ~ N J UU _ LL Q ~ ,Q U O `° 4 - 105191-1 08411-8 ~~ ALUMINUM WINDOWS ~~ ~•~ - PART 1 -GENERAL ZCO~ f'SA,~ ~ $ ~~ $'. 2 9 1.01 SUMMARY CI i Y CLcRr{ - 10ti~J,~~ CITY IOU'~fA A. This Section includes the following types ofaluminum-framed windows: 1. Project-out and fixed windows. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. HC: Heavy Commercial. B. Performance grade number, included as part of the AAMA/NWWDA product designation code, is actual -- design pressure in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. _ C. Structural test pressure, for uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of design pressure. D. Minimum test size is smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are of test size indicated below: 1. Minimum size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/LS.2. ___ 2. Minimum size required by gateway performance requirements for determining compliance with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for both gateway performance requirements and optional performance grades. 3. Size indicated. B. AAMA/NWWDA Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of the performance class and grade indicated that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/LS.2. 1. Performance Class: HC. 2. Performance Grade: Minimum for performance class indicated. -- 3. Performance Grade: 30. C. Condensation-Resistance Factor: Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of not less than 53. D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with awhole-window U-value maximum indicated at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503.1 BB. 1. U-Value: 0.59 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 105191-1 08520-1 FILED SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 2oa6 ~R~2~iLA~ifii[r~itSn: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I. /NAFS, Air Infiltration Test. CITY CLER~ 'QWA (;~~( ~(D~num Rate: 0.1 cfm/sq. ft. (2 cu. m/h x sq. m) of area at an inward test pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. _ (300 Pa). F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of units resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, distortion, opening of joints, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads and stresses on glazing and connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project with a minimum of 3 years experience specializing in the installation of aluminum windows. B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/LS.2, "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Provide AAMA certified aluminum windows with an attached label. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA's .___ "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division O1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to aluminum windows including, but not limited to, the following: 105191-1 08520-2 SECTION 08520 F~E.. ~(~~ ALUMINUM WINDOWS pp~~ 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials~~ns~a~~'3' p~Sb~el~ g equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. ~ 2. Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to b~~i<~~t{~the finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish matching. ~ 1; E~~//~ 3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing, flashing, weeping, sealants, and protection of finishes. 4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope. 5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: 1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. Joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Weather-stripping details. 6. Thermal-break details. 7. Glazing details. C. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Main Framing Member: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long, full-size sections of extrusions with factory- applied color finish. 2. Window Corner Fabrication: 12-by-12-inch- (300-by-300-mm-) long, full-size window corner including full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish, weather stripping, and glazing. 3. Operable Window: Full-size unit with factory-applied finish. 4. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finishes. 5. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long sections. D. Qualification Data: For [Installer] [manufacturer] [professional engineer] [and] [testing agency]. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. F. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 105191-1 08520-3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS h I ~.,.,~~ 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS 2006 MAR 28 AM 8; Z9 A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurem~~~ef~~~cation and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. +O~q ~~-~-Y ~~~~ 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.07 WARRANTY -- A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Projecting: a. Basis of Design: Kawneer 8400T.L. b. EFCO Corporation. c. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. B. Projected Awning Windows: Provide the following operating hardware. 1. Hinge: Concealed heavy-duty four- or six-bar friction hinge located on each jamb near top rail; two per ventilator; AAMA 904.1. 2. Lock: Combination lever handle and cam-action lock with concealed pawl and two per ventilator. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL 105191-1 08520-4 SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS ~` ~ ~,.~ - A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum w~tg>~ctr~or~ength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi (150``- Pa) u timate tensile strength, not less than 16,000-psi (110-MPa) minimum yield strength,~t~xos~n 0.062-inch __ (1.6-mm) thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members.I~Wa CE~1; ~n~fA B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. Cadmium-plated steel fasteners are not permitted. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. __ C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Cadmium-plated steel anchors, clips, and accessories are not permitted. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Cadmium-plated steel reinforcing members are not permitted. E. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when aluminum window is closed. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/NWWDA 101/LS.2. F. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. G. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's standard, permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement. 2.03 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units. B. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal and suitable for glass thickness indicated. 2.04 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to - smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows and sized to accommodate sash or 105191-1 08520-5 SECTION 08520 FILED ALUMINUM WINDOWS ?q ~~QQ QQ ~~MM QQ ventilator weight and dimensions. Cadmium-plated hardware is not'~~ftLd~Ho f><~t itS~~l~minum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide nonmagnetj~t~igj~~~tKel. 2.05 INSECT SCREENS. (~ ll~..~,IIAII 1~(~(((;;~! ~(}~(A A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in atight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. 1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Architectural C-24 class. -- 2. Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," for minimum standards of appearance, fabrication, attachment of screen fabric, hardware, and accessories unless more stringent requirements are indicated. -- B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, adjustable rollers, __ and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Extruded-Aluminum or Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Not less than 0.050- inch (1.3-mm) wall thickness. 3. Finish: Match aluminum window members. -~ C. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 (1.1-by-1.3-mm) mesh of 0.011-inch- (0.28-mm-) diameter, coated aluminum wire. -. 1. Wire-Fabric Finish: Natural bright. 2. Openness Factor. ^ 3. Mesh Color. D. Wickets: Provide sliding wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and for durability during handling. 2.06 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/LS.2 for -- performance class and performance grade indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed, low- conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. 1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention. 105191-1 08520-6 ALUMINUM WINDOWS F1 ~._.~~ 2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; dete~~}~ ~l~w~~e~~#~ shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505. 3. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material f rd e mg thermal breaks at frame or vent sash. ~ '~~ ioU~~~, c~ ~~ ~o~.~~A D. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. E. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. F. Provide water-shed members above lines of natural water penetration. G. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for - movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. _ H. subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. Provide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window units. I. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. K. Limit Devices: Provide limit devices designed to restrict sash or ventilator opening. Safety Devices: Limit clear opening to 6 inches (150 mm) for ventilation; with custodial key release. 2.07 FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions; levelness of sill plate; coordination with wall flashings, vapor retarders, and other built-in components; operational clearances;and other conditions affecting performance of work. 105191-1 08520-7 SECTION 08520 F~ ~ ~ ~ - ALUMINUM WINDOWS B. derify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational c?R ~ar~i~esva~lo flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. ((''~~ttnn(,~`~ CLERK C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been co~c~t'eli.' C~~ (nW~1 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components; Drawings; and Shop Drawings. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. E. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware,and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION 08520 105191-1 08520-8 -- SECTION 08710 HARDWARE ~f ~ F . __ PART 1 GE NERAL ~~~~ ~~~ 2 ~ ~~ $~ 3 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES C~T`l~ (J~E~~ - ft~~~ ti~~~, CITY I~Wq A. Hardware for metal doors. B. Hardware for fire rated doors. C. Automatic door operators. --- D. Hardware provided under this contract from Owner's regular suppliers. E. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. F. Thresholds, weatherstripping, seals and gasketing. _ G. Hardware for aluminum and glass doors. 1.02 REL ATED SECTIONS _ A. Section 08110-Standard Steel Doors and Frames. B. Section 08411: Aluminum-Framed Entrances, Storefronts and Curtain Walls. 1.03 REFERENCES - A. ANSUICC Al 17.1-American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council 1998. _ _ B. DHI (LOGS)-Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 1990. C. NFPA 80-Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. D. NFPA 101-Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association 2000. E. UBC Std. 7-2, Part II-Test Standard for Smoke and Draft Control Assemblies; International Conference of Building Officials; 1997. F. UL l OB-Fire Tests of Doors Assemblies; Underwriters laboratories Inc. (UL) G. UL l OC-Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) H. BHMA-Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. I. UL (BMD)-Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 105191-1 08710-1 SECTION 08710 HARDWARE FlL..~D 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1006 MAR 28 AM 8~ 30 A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures. CI.j.Y CLERK B. submittals: IOWA CITY, IOWA - 1. List all doors per set as listed herein with opening number, opening location, hand, fire rating, size and material. 2. List all hardware required for openings with quantity, description, product number, finish and manufacturer. 3. Include any special installation and operational instructions. " " 4. For electrical systems, include operational instructions and riser diagrams. 5. Include manufacturer's catalogue information for all products listed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware supplier to be company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware. _ _ B. Hardware supplier to have a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) as full time employee to oversee submittal completion and be available for consultation during course of project. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Installer and supplier to convene prior to commencing installation of doors and hardware for any special installation instructions, as requested by contractor. 1.07 DELIVER, STORAGE AND PROTECTION -- A. Package hardware items individually, label and identify each package with opening and set number to match hardware submittal. B. Contractor to secure all delivered hardware in a secure, dry location. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Hardware supplier to verify cylinder type, finish, quantity etc. with any door manufacturer that hardware supplier is furnishing cylinders for. B. Hardware supplier to verify electrical voltage, amperage requirements etc. with electrician, fire alarm systems and security systems supplier. C. Any conduit and wiring provided by electrical contractor. D. Hardware supplier to furnish any templates to door and frame manufacturers and installers for door and frame preparation. E. Sequence delivery, installation etc. To ensure utility connections and security are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. F. Hardware supplier to coordinate keying requirements with Owner. f , 105191-1 087] 0-2 ~- SECTION 08710 HARD WARE _ 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Contractor to retain and turn over to Owner any special installation and adjustment tools furnished with hardware. B. Contractor to retain and turn over to Owner any installation, adjustment and operational directions that are furnished with the hardware. C. Contractor to turn over all exit device dogging keys or devices furnished with exit devices to Owner. --- PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS _ ~-s A. Hinges: ~ ~ __ 1. McKinney (MC) ~ -~. rv ~._.-- 2. Hager ~ ~ p j--~-~ m ~ f--, B. Continuous Hinges: ~ -~_! ~ ~--J „} n c~ 1. McKinney (MC) ~' o 2. Pemko C. Locksets: 1. Sargent (SA), 11 Line, LL Design. 2. No substitute. D. Cylinders: 1. Medeco (MEDE) On exterior of door. 2. Supplier to purchase from and have keyed by Freeman Lock & Alarm of Iowa City, IA to --- existing exterior key system. 3. Sargent (SA), LG keyway. For cylinder dogging and removable mullions. 4. To be keyed by Freeman Lock & Alarm of Iowa City, IA to existing interior key system. E. Exit Devices: __ 1. Sargent (SA), 80 Series. 2. Von Duprin 35A Series. 3. Yale; 7000 Series. F. Pulls: 1. Trimco (TR) -- 2. McKinney 3. Pulls to be 1 '/4" diameter solid stainless steel and fastened with 3/8" diameter threw bolts. 105191-1 08710-3 S~~WA>~° FILED __. G. Closers: ZQOb MAR 28 AM 8:30 1. Sargent, 351 Series. CI ~ CLERK 2. LCN, 4041 series. IOWA CITY InWq 3. Norton, 7500 Series 4. Supplier to furnish all drop plates and mounting brackets as required for proper installation. 5. Installer to properly adjust all hydraulic and spring power adjustments for proper operation of closers. 6. Install closers on side of door for least visibility, unless mounting is required for maximum door l swing or to protect from moisture or corrosive materials. 7. Closer bodies and arms attached to hollow metal or aluminum doors and frames to be attached with machine screws, with holes to be drilled and tapped. Self drilling or self tapping screws are not to be used. H. Automatic Operators: % 1. Stanley (STAN), Magic Force Low Energy 2. To be furnished and installed by Automatic Door Group, Des Moines, IA. 3. Furnish all drop plates and mounting brackets as required for proper installation. 4. Supplier to properly adjust all adjustments for proper operation of automatic operators. I: Kick Plates: 1. Trimco (TR) - 2. McKinney 3. Kick plates to be beveled four edges and attached with countersunk oval head screws. J. Wall Bumpers: 1. Trimco (TR) _ 2. McKinney K. Overhead Stops: 1. Sargent (SA), 590 series. 2. Rixson, 9 Series. 3. Supplier to furnish all mounting brackets and shims required for proper installation. L. Weatherstrip: 1. Pemko (PE). 2. No substitution. M. Thresholds: 1. Pemko (PE) N. Door Position Switches: 1. Sargent (SA) - - 105191-1 08710-4 --, - - SECTION 08710 HARDWARE ~~~ .~,':~ __ O. Silencers: Z~~~ ~~,~' ~$ ~~ ~; 3~ 1. All silencers for hollow metal frames to be furnished and installed ~I~~~e supplier. 2. Silencers are not required at frames that are to have gasketing °~v~~ ~rs~t-~t~pi~~~,talled. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS Jf-1 -- A. Finishes: 1. Dull Chrome (US26D) or Brushed Stainless Steel (US32D) as noted in hardware sets. --- 2. Continuous Hinges to be clear anodized 3. Closers painted to match. B. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State and Local Codes. 2. ANSI/ICC Al 17.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 3. Applicable provisions ofNFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 4. NFPA 80, Fire Rated Doors. 5. All hardware on fire rated doors to be listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 6. Electrical hardware to be listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 7. Hardware for positive pressure fire and smoke rated doors to comply with UBC Std. 7-2 Part II 1997 and UL lOC. 2.03 KEYING A. Locks and cylinders to be keyed to existing key system, per Owner's instructions. B. Supplier to meet with Owner's representative to determine keying details and submit key schedule for approval. C. Furnish 10 copies of each Master and Grand Master keys and 4 copies per door of each change key. D. All locks and cylinders to be Yale interchangeable core. E. Stamp keys as required by Owner. F. Deliver all keys, with identifying tags, to Owner or contractor, per Owner's instructions. Person receiving keys to sign for them with copy of receipt to be kept by the receiver and the supplier. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware as specified. B. Verify that frames are level, plum and set at correct dimensioned opening. 105191-1 08710-5 SECTION 08710 ~` ~ C h IJ I l . HARD WARE C... Verify that correct wire gauges are provided to supply correct~~~t~~~ ~~Ive~~ ~e~rQcally operated devices. CITY CLERK D. Supplier to visit project sight to verify all existing conditions v~(t,~~it ai~>~s ~~ntative, as required. 3.02 INS TALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Use templates provided with hardware. - C. Install hardware on fire rated doors and frames in accordance with applicable codes and NFPA 80. D. Mounting heights of hardware to be per DHI recommended locations and accessibility codes. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, applicable codes and as specified, as requested by Architect. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division 1. B. Adjust hardware for smooth and proper operation. . 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work under provisions of Division 1. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or other finished products. 3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. Hardware Sets _ 105191-1 08710-6 - __.. SHARD WARE 0 F ~ ~ . __ SET#01 ~~;~~ ~{~~' 2g ~~ $; 30 Doors: 01 -, _ , r~ a~ il~V~V~'~'' C~'~~ {~~~A 2 Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD 95 CLEAR MC 1 Key Removable Mullion L980A 96 LC 28 SA 1 Stabilizer Kit 651 GRAY SA -- 1 Exit Device 16 8504 J LESS TRIM LC 32D SA 1 Exit Device 16 8510 F LC 32D SA 3 Mortise Cylinder 41 LG KEYWAY 26D SA - NOTE: Cyl. dogging &remov. mullion. 1 Rim Cylinder 10-0400 SERIES 26D MEDE NOTE: Exterior - 2 Pull 1191-4J 3/8" N MTG. 630 TRIM 1 Automatic Operator MAGIC-FORCE W/DROP BRKT FOR 2" FACE AL STAN MTG. LOW ENERGY 2 Activators CIRCULAR PRESS SWITCH HC PTO 32D STAN 1 Closer 351 OZ EN SA 1 Mounting Plate 351-B EN SA 1 Overhead Stop 5985 26D SA -- 1 Wall Bumper 1270WX 630 TR 2 Door Position Switch. 3287 SA 2 Door Sweep 18041 CNB 40" TEK SCREWS pE 2 Weatherstrip 29313CTF 96" TEK PEMK -- 1 Threshold 252 X 3 AFG 84" pE NOTE: Perimeter weatherstrip furnished with aluminum frame. SET #02 -- Doors: 02 2 Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD 95 CLEAR MC ___ 1 Key Removable Mullion L980A 96 LC 28 SA 1 Stabilizer Kit 651 GRAY SA 2 Exit Device 16 8510 F LC 32D SA 3 Mortise Cylinder 41 LG KEYWAY 26D SA - - NOTE: Cyl. dogging &remov. mullion. 2 Closer 351 OZ EN SA 2 Mounting Plate 351-B EN SA _ 2 Overhead Stop 598S 26D SA 2 Door Position Switch. 3287 SA 2 Door Sweep 18041 CNB 40" TEK SCREWS pE 2 Weatherstrip 29313CTF 96" TEK PEMK -- 1 Threshold 252 X 3 AFG 84" pE NOTE: Perimeter weatherstrip furnished with aluminum frame. 105191-1 08710-7 SECTION 08710 HARDWARE Ff LFC~ SET #03 ~ 2OOb MAR 28 AM 8= 30 Doors: 03, 04 (fl~ ~LER~ 1 Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD 95 IOWA C'i~ ~OWA 1 Exit Device 16 8510 F LC 1 Mortise Cylinder 41 LG KEYWAY NOTE: Cyl. dogging &remov. mullion. 1 Pull 1 191-4J 3/8" N MTG. 1 Mounting Plate 351-B 1 Closer 351 OZ SR 1 Wall Bumper 1270WX 1 Door Position Switch. 3287 1 Door Sweep 18041 CNB 36" TEK SCREWS 1 Threshold 252 X 3 AFG 40" NOTE: Perimeter weath erstrip furnished with aluminum frame. SET #04 Doors: 05 2 Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD 95 1 Key Removable Mullion L980A 96 LC 1 Stabilizer Kit 651 1 Exit Device 16 8504 J LESS TRIM LC 1 Exit Device 16 8510 F LC 3 Mortise Cylinder 41 LG KEYWAY NOTE: Cyl. dogging &remov. mullion. 1 Rim Cylinder 10-0400 SERIES NOTE: Exterior 2 Pull 1191-4J 3/8" N MTG. 2 Closer 351 OZ 2 Mounting Plate 351-B 1 Overhead Stop 598S 1 Wall Bumper 1270WX 2 Weatherstrip 29313CTF 96" TEK 2 Door Sweep 18041 CNB 42" TEK SCREWS 1 Threshold 252 X 3 AFG 88" NOTE: Perimeter weatherstrip furnished with aluminum frame. CLEAR MC 32D SA 26D SA 630 TRIM EN SA EN SA 63 0 TR SA PE PE CLEAR MC 28 SA GRAY SA 32D SA 32D SA 26D SA 26D MEDE 630 TRIM EN SA EN SA 26D SA 630 TR PEMK PE PE 105191-1 08710-8 -__ S~~WA>~° Fl L~ D __ SET#05 Z~rUS ~~ Z$ ~~ g~ 3~ Doors:05A ~ ~ CI~iY r~~~~~ ~~~~°I'~ ~~~` I`}~~~~ 2 Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD 95 CLEAR 1 Key Removable Mullion L980A 96 LC 28 1 Stabilizer Kit 651 GRAY -- 1 Exit Device 16 8504 J LESS TRIM LC 32D 1 Exit Device 16 8510 F LC 32D 3 Mortise Cylinder 41 LG KEYWAY 26D _ NOTE: Cyl. dogging &remov. mullion. 1 Rim Cylinder 10-0400 SERIES 26D NOTE: Exterior 2 Pull 1191-4J 3/8" N MTG. 630 -- 2 Closer 351 OZ EN 2 Mounting Plate 351-B EN 2 Overhead Stop 598S 26D 2 Door Position Switch. 3287 SET #06 -- Doors: 06 2 Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD 95 CLEAR - 1 Key Removable Mullion L980A 96 LC 28 1 Stabilizer Kit 651 GRAY 2 Exit Device 16 8510 F LC 32D 3 Mortise Cylinder 41 LG KEYWAY 26D __ NOTE: Cyl. dogging &remov. mullion. 2 Pull 1191-4J 3/8" N MTG. 630 1 Automatic Operator MAGIC-FORCE W/DROP BRKT FOR 2" FACE AL -- MTG. LOW ENERGY 2 Activators CIRCULAR PRESS SWITCH HC PTO 32D 1 Closer 351 OZ EN 1 Mounting Plate 351-B EN 1 Overhead Stop 5985 26D 1 Wall Bumper 1270WX 630 2 Weatherstrip 29313CTF 96" TEK -- 2 Door Sweep 18041 CNB 42" TEK SCREWS 1 Threshold 252 X 3 AFG 88" NOTE: Perimeter weatherstrip furnished from aluminum frame. MC SA SA SA SA SA MEDE TRIM SA SA SA SA MC SA SA SA SA TRIM STAN STAN SA SA SA TR PEMK PE PE 105191-1 -- 08710-9 SHARDWA8RE0 Ff L.C~ SET #o~ ZOOfi MAR 28 AM $~ 30 Doors: osA CITY CLERK 2 Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD 95 IOWA ~''~~ IQVI/A CLEAR 1 Key Removable Mullion L980A 96 LC 28 1 Stabilizer Kit 651 GRAY 2 Exit Device 16 8510 F LC 32D 3 Mortise Cylinder 41 LG KEYWAY 26D NOTE: Cyl. dogging &remov. mullion. 2 Pull 1191-4J 3/8" N MTG. 630 1 Automatic Operator MAGIC-FORCE W/DROP BRKT FOR 2" FACE AL MTG. LOW ENERGY 2 Activators CIRCULAR PRESS SWITCH HC PTO 32D 1 Closer 35102 EN 1 Mounting Plate 351-B EN 2 Overhead Stop 598S 26D 2 Door Position Switch. 3287 SET #08 Doors: 07 I Continuous Hinge MCK-12HD 95 CLEAR 1 Exit Device 16 8504 J LESS TRIM LC 32D 1 Mortise Cylinder 41 LG KEYWAY 26D NOTE: Cyl. dogging &remov. mullion. 1 Rim Cylinder 10-0400 SERIES 26D NOTE: Exterior 1 Pull 1191-4J 3/8" N MTG. 630 1 Mounting Plate 351-B EN 1 Closer 351 OZ SR EN 1 Overhead Stop 598S 26D 1 Door Position Switch. 3287 1 Door Sweep 18041 CNB 36" TEK SCREWS 1 Threshold 252 X 3 AFG 40" NOTE: Perimeter weatherstrip furnished with aluminum frame. MC SA SA SA SA TRIM STAN STAN SA SA SA SA MC SA SA MEDE TRIM SA SA SA SA PE PE 105191-1 08710-10 -- SECTION 087101 ~ ~ r~ HARDWARE 1 __ SET#09 Z~~~~r~~~$ ~~ ~~3Q Do ors: 08 Ci i °~' (~L~ ~K E~~'~A ~O1`~f ~ `; ~ ;Y 2 Continuous Hinge , MCK-12HD 95 CLEAR MC 1 Key Removable Mullion L980A 96 LC 28 SA 1 Stabilizer Kit 651 GRAY SA - 1 Exit Device 16 8504 J LESS TRIM LC 32D SA 1 Exit Device 16 8510 F LC 32D SA 3 Mortise Cylinder 41 LG KEYWAY 26D SA ___ NOTE: Cyl. dogging &remov. mullion. 1 Rim Cylinder 10-0400 SERIES 26D MEDE NOTE: Exterior. 2 Pull 1191-4J 3/8" N MTG. 630 TRIM - 2 Closer 351 OZ EN SA 2 Mounting Plate 351-B EN SA 2 Overhead Holder 598H 26D SA ___ 2 Wall Bumper 1270WX 630 TR 2 Door Position Switch. 3287 SA 2 Weatherstrip 29313CTF 96" TEK PEMK NOTE: Attach to remov. mullion. -- 2 Door Sweep 18041 CNB 38" TEK SCREWS pE 1 Threshold 252 X 3 AFG 80" pE __ NOTE: Perimeter weatherstrip furnished with aluminum frame. SET #10 Doors: 09 4 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC -- 1 Office Lock 11G05 LL LG KEYWAY 26D SA 1 Closer 351 P10 EN SA 1 Kick Plate KO050 10" x 34" B4E C-SUNK-KP 630 TR ___ 1 Wall Bumper 1270WX 630 TR 1 Gasketing S44 W 20' pE SET #11 Doors: 10, 11 - 1 Wall Bumper 1270WX 630 TR 1 Surface Door Position Swi tch 3285 SA -- NOTE: Remainder of hardware is existing to remain. 105191-1 08710-11 S~~WAI~° ~ FIL.~C~ SET #12 2Q06 MAR 28 A~4 $~ 30 doors: ~2 ~~'}~~/{~TY('~C(._E,R(~K I Automatic Operator MAGIC-FORCE W/DROP B1~T'~'OR`2~'~A~E"~~AL MTG. LOW ENERGY 2 Activators CIRCULAR PRESS SWITCH HC PTO 32D NOTE: Remainder of hardware is existing to remain. END OF SECTION 08710 STAN STAN 105191-1 08710-12 --- SEGLAZING 00 I ~~.~~1 __ PART 1 -GENERAL ZL~b ~~~ ~?~ ~~ ~: 30 1.01 SUMMARY ((~~~~~~L~ 1 `'~ CL~Rn(Kttnn//~~ A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, includi'n~g t~o~s~e15p~L~iiri~d'in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: -- 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed entrances. - - 4. Interior borrowed liter. 5. Storefront framing. 6. Curtain wall framing. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between liter of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. -- D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of ___ deterioration in metallic coating. E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. -- F. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, -- delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: heat traps, interior shading, exterior shading, solar exposure, defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass liter in the thickness 105191-1 08800-1 FI~~D SECTION 08800 GLAZING ~a~b ~~~ ~~esa~}p~~ndicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or ea e e required to meet or exceed the following criteria: Ci`~ ~?LE ,j Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to ~QW~ ~~~ ~ L~lowing requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. b. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. c. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. d. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on a114 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less. 1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. 3) For laminated-glass lites. C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing -- components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4-inch. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. Center-of--Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. Include complete description of materials, thickness, color, substrate, inner layers, coatings, etc. ~~ 105191-1 08800-2 -- SECTION 08800 ~ GLAZING F~ L_. L.. B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-)~~irp8les~r j nd of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of~ma`~ ial representative in color of the adjoining framing system. ~ ~ -,~E~`!r~ ~~11~~Cjj~TYrr~~" -~~ C. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) squal~eJ'S~rfi~l~s ~r~~s. 1. Each color of tinted float glass. 2. Spandrel glass. 3. Fire-resistive glazing products. 4. Each type of laminated glass with interlayer. -- 5. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. D. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. F. Qualification Data: For installers. -- G. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products: 1. Tinted float glass. 2. Coated float glass. 3. Insulating glass. 4. Laminated glass. 5. Glazing sealants. 6. Glazing gaskets. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE - A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under __ the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, and insulating glass. C. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where solar-control Low- e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator program is specified, _ obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer. 105191-1 08800-3 SECTION 0880~~~ ~~ .-- GLAZING D.. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obt~Q~l~(~ce~~r~~~ough one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. E. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing~~~ eY c mply with NFPA 80 and that are __ listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency aci~p e to ities havmg~urisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. F. Glazing for Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. G. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with -, certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for __ glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. H. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and -- organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. J. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of 12x12 glass units with clear anodized framing members as directed by Architect. 2. Build glass mockups by installing the following kinds of glass in mockups specified in Division 08 __ Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts, Aluminum Windows, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods: a. Float glass. b. Fully tempered glass. c. Spandrel glass. d. Laminated glass. 105191-1 08800-4 - SECTION 08800 ~~ ~ ~~'~ GLAZING __ 3. Provide mockup in portable sizes to facilitate evaluation under all solar~br~~ ~~ $; ono K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with req~t~~'i~tei~~vision O 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." ~~~+~I/;~ Cj~( ~~U~A 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Store glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall confirm in writing that installation, products, and details for the Project will not void the manufacturer's warranties. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as --- defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 105191-1 08800-5 SE GLAOZING 00 ~~ ~~ 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ZOOb ~9AR 28 AP1 8: 30 A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the~l~+w~rements apply to product selection: ~~~~ CITE! ~(.~Wq 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product specified. 2.02 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated. 1. Ultra-Clear (Low-Iron) Float Glass: Class I (clear); with a minimum 91 percent visible light transmission and a minimum solar heat gain coefficient of 0.87. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated. C. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface ceramic coated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing the fallout-resistance test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048. D. Pyrolytic-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide coating applied by pyrolytic deposition process during initial manufacture, and complying with other requirements specified. E. Pyrolytic-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide coating applied by pyrolytic deposition process during initial manufacture, and complying with other requirements specified. F. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure. b. For cured-resin interlayers, laminate lites with laminated-glass manufacturer's standard cast-in- place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer. 105191-1 08800-6 --- SEGLAZING 00 F~L.F~~ __ 2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce gla~~4~~~g~~~~a$~s and air or glass pockets. Y ~~ __ G. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting °~'~ ~d ~ '' ~~~ ~ separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CB'1~ units a"~id rVrt eq~iYements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. -- 2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated. 3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of -- glass lites at unit's edge. 4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: a. Manufacturer's standard sealants. 5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements: a. Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish. b. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. c. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction. 2.03 FIRE-RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Monolithic Ceramic Glazing Material: Proprietary product in the form of clear flat sheets of 3/16-inch (5- mm) nominal thickness weighing 2.5 Ib/sq. ft. (12.2 kg/sq. m), and as follows: 1. Fire-Protection Rating: As indicated for the fire window in which glazing material is installed, and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Product: "Premium FireLite" (polished on both surfaces) by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products. 2.04 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to --- maintain watertight seal and to fit within aluminum frame and thickness glass units indicated.: Neoprene, ASTM C 864. _ 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 5. Any material indicated above. 2.05 GLAZING SEALANTS ---- A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 105191-1 08800-7 ~~~~~ SECTION 08800 GLAZING ZOOb MAR 2~ k~~np,~bility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they `w'i'{1 contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel ~I~ ~LE strates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer ~O~A C~~ ( on testing and field experience. ility: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid- applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants GS-<#>: a. Products: 1) GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000. 2) Pecora Corporation; 864. 3) Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal. 4) Tremco; Spectrem 3. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating. 2.06 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS 105191-1 08800-8 -, -- SECTION 08800 ~ ~ ! ~ ~-~ GLAZING (.... A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with refer~~~~r~ s~d~x1~~ requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. ~~ff1~ff ~~~-`,~~ V~~~~ B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manlufacture~'',r,.~~ ~~~A C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). -- F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. ____ G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire- resistance rating. 2.08 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.09 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS A. G1: '/4" clear float glass. B. G 1 T: '/a" clear tempered. C. FR1: 3/16" Fire Glass, Firelite NT by Technical Glass Products rated for 20 minutes and impact safety rated meeting ANSI 297.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201. 2.10 LOW-E INSULATING-GLASS UNITS (PYROLYTIC COATING ON SURFACE 3) A. IG-1: '/4" x ''/z" x '/4" floadfloat. 1. Tint Color: PPG Azuria. 2. Visible Light Transmittance: 61 percent minimum. 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum. B. IG-1 T: '/4" x %2" x '/a" tempered/tempered. 1. Tint Color: PPG Azuria. 105191-1 08800-9 SECTION 08800 --, GLAZING F1 LED 2. Visible Light Transmittance: 61 percent minimum. 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum. ZQQ~ $QR 2$ A~ $~ $fl C. IG-2: '/4"/0.60."/'/4" x''/z" x'/4" laminated tinted/clear float lite/float. (il~~ C~.E{~~ ._ 101NA CITY IC7WA 1. Tint Color: PPG Azuria. 2. Visible Light Transmittance: 61 percent minimum. 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum. 4. Interlayer Color: Clear, visible light transmittance: 88 percent minimum. D. IG-2T: '/4"/0.60"/'/4" x''/z" x'/o" laminated tempered lites/tempered. 1. Tint Color: PPG Azuria. 2. Visible Light Transmittance: 61 percent minimum. 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum. 4. Interlayer Color: Clear, visible light transmittance: 88 percent minimum. `" E. IG-3: 1/8"/0.60"/1/8" x''/z" x''/4" laminated float lites/float. 1. Tint Color: PPG Azuria. 2. ___ Visible Light Transmittance: 61 percent minimum. 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum. 4. Interlayer Color: Clear, visible light transmittance: 88 percent minimum. F. IG-3T: 1/8"/0.60"/1/8" x'h" x'/4" laminated tempered lites/tempered. 1. Tint Color: PPG Azuria. -- 2. Visible Light Transmittance: 61 percent minimum. 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum. ,_ 4. Interlayer Color: Clear, visible light transmittance: 88 percent minimum. ~_ 2.11 INSULATED SPANDREL GLASS INSULATING UNITS (HEAT STRENGTHENED) A. SP-1: '/4" x %2" x '/4" float/float. 1. Tint Color: Blue Green (Azurlite). 2. Spandrel Coating: Surface 4 -neutral color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's available colors. B. SP-1 T: '/4" x ''/z" x '/<" tempered/tempered. 1. Tint Color: Blue Green (Azurlite). 2. Spandrel Coating: Surface 4 -neutral color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's available colors. 2.12 LOW-E INSULATING-GLASS UNITS (PYROLYTIC COATING ON SURFACE 3) A. Provide indicated glass types, except provide Solar Control Low-E insulation units at the following locations with PPG Azuria with Sdarban 60 Low-E Glass: 105191-1 08800-10 ~l --- SECTION 08800 GLAZING 1. South wall -Swimming Pool. 2. South wall -Meeting Room B. B. Units shall have the following characteristics: 1. Visible Light Transmittance: 54 percent minimum. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.31 maximum. 2.13 GLAZING TAPES 206 ~QkR ~8 A~ 8~ 30 CI~~Y ~LE~K i~Wq Gf i Y IOWA A. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints ofglass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.03 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. -- C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. 105191-1 08800-11 FI ~..EC~ SEGLAZING 00 ~ setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless 200a MAC 2 ~ QM ~8 ~b - otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel CITYCLER~ad. +~W~' r'CE'~ {`D`d`nbt exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass liter. F. Provide spacers for glass liter where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass liter from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass liter in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.04 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass liter in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 105191-1 08800-12 ~- --- SECTION 08800 ~~ r ~ ~~ GLAZING j_ H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. Zt~tb ~~~t~ 2$ ~~~ &; 30 3.05 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) GC i~f uLEhK 10~/~; Cif' ~~~~1 A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit opemhg y, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a --- weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. _- C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.06 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or __ stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 105191-1 08800-13 - SECTION 08911 c ( ~ GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS E - ~ L~l_..° - PART 1 -GENERAL 2GQb MAR 28 AFi 8~ 30 1.1 SUMMARY ((~~ (~~ ~ ~' CLERK A. This Section includes conventionally glazed aluminum curtain walls instal~e~ as~stic-[cisy teli~'s~i~luding perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of curtain wall framing. B. Coordinate with Section 08411 -Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts for doors. C. Entrance systems and curtain walls shall be from same manufacturer. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: _ __ 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 4. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements, to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. B. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings or code minimums. -~ C. Structural-Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Duration: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 60 seconds. D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. 105191-1 08911-1 `{{ ((``''~~ SECTION 08911 - FI L..~t/ GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS Z~~~~h'~~r~~ I~b~nents: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base CI`~exl~~i}~g calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky IOWA 1S~WA 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. a. Test Low Exterior Ambient Air Temperature: 0 deg F. b. Test Interior Ambient Air Temperature: 75 deg F. F. Air Infiltration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems with maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfin/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 1.571bf/sq. ft. G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum glazed curtain-wall systems that do not evidence water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential static pressure of 20 percent of positive design wind load, but not less than l O lbf/sq. ft. H. Condensation Resistance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems with condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 55 when tested according to AAMA 1503. I. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems with average U-factor of not more than 0.66 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing Work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems including the following. -- 105191-1 08911-2 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS f- ~ ~_.~~ a. Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of ma~{~~'~ ~a'~~ in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies. Cl h'~~ C~EF~}( B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes r`q~u~ements f6r s~tem~s' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. C. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage. e. Failure of operating components to function normally. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal - weathering. Warranty Period: 20 years from the date of Substantial Completion. 105191-1 08911-3 SECTION 08911 (~ GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WS~LJ PART 2 -PRODUCTS ZOQS MAR 28 AM 8~ 30 2.1 MANUFACTURERS C'~rr`~~~-Ly/~ ~WA A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, pr~~~rdd~~t~ b~ one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer. 3. Tubelite Inc. 4. Vistawall Architectural Products. B. Substitutions: 1. General: Refer to Division 1 Substitutions for procedures and submission requirements. a. Pre-Contract (Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written requests ten (10) days prior to bid date. b. Post-Contract (Construction Period) Substitutions: Submit written request in order to avoid curtain wall installation and construction delays. 2. Substitution Documentation: a. Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and drawings modified to suit specific project requirements and job conditions. b. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer (1) attesting to adherence to specification requirements for curtain wall system performance criteria, and (2) has been engaged in the design, manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum curtain wall for a period of not less than ten (10) years. (Company Name) c. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement for curtain wall required by the project. d. Product Sample and Finish: Submit product sample, representative of curtain wall for the project, with specified finish and color. 3. Substitution Acceptance: Acceptance will be in written form, either as an addendum or modification, and documented by a formal change order signed by the Owner and Contractor. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC- PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 105191-1 08911-4 --- SECTION 08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS F~ ~ .E C~~ ____ 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 611. 206 ~~R 28 At'~ ~~ 30 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 570/A 570M. CITY C~LEf~~< _ C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum v~~tst~i~tt~g, {QWA nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turn out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. At movement joints, use slip joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type recommended by manufacturer. E. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in __ material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. F. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. G. Thermal Barrier: Verticals shall utilize Kawneer IsoStrut consisting of a rigid polymer that provides a mechanical and chemical bond between the thermal break material and extrusion. Horizontals shall utilize a -- silicone compatible elastomer thermal break separator which will adhere to silicone sealant. H. Framing Gaskets: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type. I. Framing Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." _ 2.3 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. Provide profile or shape to accommodate glazing thickness provided. 2.4 INSULATED SPANDREL PANELS __ A. Insulated Spandrel Panels: Laminated, metal-faced flat panels with no deviations in plan exceeding 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width or length. ___ 1. Overall Panel Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm). 2. Exterior Skin: Aluminum a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicated. --- b. Finish: Matching framing system. c. Texture: Smooth. d. Backing Sheet: 1/8-inch (3 mm-) thick tempered hardboard. 105191-1 08911-5 SECTION 08911 ~ ~ t y-' ~ --- GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS j~,~,G 3. Interior Skin: Aluminum. ~~~~ MAR 2$ AM $: 3 4 - a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicat~~~(( C,LE(~(~ b. Finish: Matching curtain-wall framing. `OWA ~~-~ ((~~A c. Texture: Smooth. d. Backing Sheet: 1/8-inch (3-mm-) thick tempered hardboard. 4. Thermal Insulation Core: Manufacturer's standard rigid, closed-cell, polyisocyanurate board. 5. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For exposed interior surfaces of panels, when tested according to ASTM E 84 as follows: a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.5 OPERABLE UNITS A. Venting Windows: As specified in Division 08. B. Doors: As specified in Division 08. 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Insulating Materials: Specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to prevent glazing- to-glazing contact and to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for reglazing from exterior. C. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop _, Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 105191-1 08911-6 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS iT ~ ~..~~~ __ B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system establishe~~~ ~h$ni>~$t$~s~~iation for designating aluminum finishes. ~iTY CLER~< _ C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nd~~l~r~al~~; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, c1 a coating O1 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install glazing as specified Division 8 Section "Glazing." F. Install sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." H. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 105191-1 08911-7 SECTION 08911 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m). 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (13 to 25 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25 mm) wide or greater, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length. END OF SECTION 08911 co ~ a ~ t~C C W ~ ~_ ~ N ~ ~ ~ ~ .sa a 0 ~., 105191-1 08911-8 SECTION 09100 F~ ~ ~~.J METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL ~~'`~ ~~'~~ ~ $ ~`~' $' ~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Ci~i,( ~~-Cf'ii~ ~o4~va c~~~ to'~PJA A. Non-Load Bearing Framing Systems 1. Metal stud partition system and accessories. B. Ceiling/Soffit Suspension Systems 1. Gypsum wallboard ceilings and soffits 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 1 for additional submittal requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards 1. Comply with recommendations of Gypsum Construction Handbook, latest edition, as published by U.S. Gypsum Co., unless noted otherwise within this section. 2. For fire rated partition assemblies refer to the Fire Resistance Design Manual, latest edition, as published by the Gypsum Association, Washington, D.C. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Non-load bearing framing systems shall be one of the following products and manufacturers or an equivalent, approved in advance: 1. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago, Illinois 2. Inryco, Inc., Melrose Park, Illinois 3. Gold Bond Building Products, National Gypsum Company, Charlotte, North Carolina. B. Ceiling suspension system shall be one of the following products and manufacturers or an equivalent, approved in advance: 1. United States Gypsum Company, Chicago, Illinois 2. Inryco, Inc., Melrose Park, Illinois 3. Gold Bond Building Products, National Gypsum Company, Charlotte, North Carolina. 2.02 MATERIALS 105191-1 09100-1 C ~ ~ ~ SECTION 09100 _ . f - ~. METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES ~~~~ ~~ 2 $ ~-1~~1 ~earing Framing Systems _ ,. CITY CLERK Channel stud system shall be non-load bearing channel type, roll formed steel, galvanized, `~~A ~~-~ ~~d designed for screw attachment of wall materials. Studs next to door openings shall be 2 -gauge; all other studs shall be 25-gauge unless noted otherwise. 2. Studs shall have prepunched service holes at not less than 24" centers; service holes shall be manufacturers standard size and design. 3. Studs shall be 1-5/8", 2-1/2", 3-5/8", 4", or 6" wide as detailed on the drawings; flange width not less than 1-1/4", unless noted otherwise on drawings and details. - 4. Stud systems shall be complete with all accessories as required for their installation, including top and bottom runner tracks, and fasteners. 5. Runner tracks shall be galvanized steel of same gauge as studs, with flange height not less than one inch. 6. -Steel stud finish shall be ASTM A591, Commercial Quality electrolytic zinc coated steel, Class B. 7. Furring channels shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel. B. Ceiling/Soffit Suspension System 1. Cold rolled 16-gauge steel framing channels or studs with factory applied rust-resistant paint. Main runners shall be two inches deep and cross furring shall be 3/4" deep. 2. Accessories: Provide and install all casing beads, corner beads, expansion joints, clips, etc., required for a complete project. All accessories shall be fabricated from galvanized steel 3. Hanger Wire: 9-gauge galvanized, annealed steel wire. 4. Tie Wire: 16-gauge, annealed-copper alloy wire or galvanized, annealed steel wire. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Non-Load Bearing Framing Systems 1. Top and bottom runner tracks shall be secured with appropriate fasteners spaced not to exceed 24" centers. 2. Studs shall be positioned vertically engaging both top and bottom runner tracks. All studs located adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners shall be anchored to both runner track flanges by screws. All other studs shall be secured to both flanges by stud clinching tool or by screws. 105191-1 09100-2 SECTION 09100 i METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES ~~ ~ ~i.J 3. Spacing of studs shall be 16" centers, except where rfdt~~ Fjtr~{~e ¢~-~'d~s and details. _ Ci! ~~' ~~.~ ~~~ d and 4. Studs shall be one-piece for full length in all location~Q~t~~ terminate at structure above, except where indicated otherwise on drawmg~nd details. 5. Provide two 20-gauge studs on each side of door openings with studs nested open-end to open-end, forming a box column. These jamb studs shall be continuous from floor to structure above under all conditions, including walls which terminate just above the ceilings. These studs shall be securely anchored to bottom runner track and to top runner track or structure above. Studs shall also be secured to each jamb anchor clip of door frames. Provide additional stud above openings on each side at control joints. 6. Provide a section of runner track horizontally over door and borrowed light frames, with track secured to adjacent jamb studs. Cut-to-length studs shall be placed between top and bottom runner tracks at same spacing as other studs. Tracks and studs beneath borrowed light frames shall be provided in a similar manner. 7. Provide a minimum of three studs at corners of stud walls; locate so as to provide surfaces for attachment of wall facings. 8. Provide extra studs, tracks, headers, etc. as required to frame the perimeter of all openings, including openings for recessed equipment. 9. Provide perimeter framing members for openings where recessed wall-mounted equipment requires cutting of two or more vertical studs. 10. Provide reinforcing and supports as required for installation of service lines and fixtures; follow the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Suspended Ceiling Grillage 1. Hangers a. Attach hangers by anchoring to structure above. b. Space hangers at 48 o.c. maximum, and within six inches of the perimeter walls. 2. Main Runner Channels a. Space at 24" o.c., and within six inches of the perimeter walls. b. Lap splices a minimum of 12", and secure near each end of lap with tie wire or acceptable clips. 3. Cross Furrings or Stud Framing a. Space at 16" o.c., and wire-tie to main runners. 105191-1 09100-3 ~~~~~ SECTION 09100 - METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 2006 MAR 28 ANA g' 3 I b. Lap splices a minimum of eight inches, and wire-tie near each end of lap. ~'.~ CLE~K c. Do not continue cross furring across control or expansion joints. t©~A ~'~~' ~~WA d. No suspension grillage to come in contact with abutting walls. ^ e. Frame around grilles, registers, lights, etc. END OF SECTION 09100 105191-1 09100-4 -- SECTION 09250 : ^ ~-~ GYPSUM BOARD ~~ ~_1._ ~_,j -- PART 1 GENERAL ZOU CAi z$ ~ ~ $: 3 i 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CITY C~~i-~I< iOWA CITY 1C)V`JA A. Provide labor, material and supervision necessary to furnish and install: 1. Gypsum wallboard, fire resistant and abuse-resistant. 2. Trim, taping, joint compound and accessories to complete finishing work. - 3. Coordinate placement of related work items including vapor barriers, insulation, and any mechanical and electrical work. -- 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Materials and products proposed for work of this section. B. Certifications: From manufacturer that materials meet or exceed specification requirements. C. Manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of the assemblies. D. See Division 1 for additional submittal requirements. --- 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards 1. Comply with recommendations of Gypsum Construction Handbook, latest edition, as published by U.S. Gypsum Company, unless noted otherwise by this section. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site with manufacturer's label intact and legible. B. Store joint finishing compounds in dry area. Provide protection against freezing at all times. -- 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Installation of materials shall not begin until the spaces have been maintained at a temperature _- range between 50°F to 70°F for 24 hours before, during and after joint treatment application. B. Provide ventilation during and following joint treatment application. Use temporary air circulators __ in enclosed areas lacking ventilation. C. Under slow drying conditions, allow additional drying time between coats of joint treatment. - PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 105191-1 09250-1 ~~~~~ SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 706 MAR 28 A~$' 31Standard Gypsum Wallboard. ~~~ GLER WA 1. All gypsum wallboard shall be a product of one manufacturer. ~~WA CAN ~~ 2. Wallboard shall be supplied in thicknesses as shown on the Drawings per Federal Specifications and ASTM C36. 3. Install at areas above 7'-0" minimum above finished floor. B. Gypsum Wallboard, Abuse-Resistant 1. Wallboard shall meet requirements of ASTM C36. 2. Wallboard shall be abuse-resistive, thickness as shown on the Drawings. 3. Install at areas below standard gypsum wallboard between finished floor and 7'-0" minimum above finished floor. _ C. Joint reinforcement tape and joint compound shall be by same manufacturer as gypsum wallboard. D. Accessories (Metal Trim) 1. Corner beads shall be galvanized steel strips attached to 2-1/8" wide reinforcing tape. 2. Casing beads shall be thickness as required for gypsum wallboard, vinyl; shall be U.S. Gypsum 200-A J-trim, or equivalent typical. E. Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475 and ASTM C 840. 1. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. __ _ 2. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-packaged, vinyl-based factory premixed formulation, all-purpose compound formulated as both taping and topping compound. F. Laminating Adhesives: Products recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer. G. Steel drill screws for fastening gypsum wallboard to steel members: ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, depending on thickness of steel members. Stainless steel or corrosion resistant at swimming pool area. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Placing Wallboard 1. Install panels, plumb, level and with vertical joints on bearing. 2. Install all panels in full height sections as indicated on the drawings. 105191-1 09250-2 -- SECTION 09250 ~- ~ ~ ~ ~~ GYPSUM BOARD - ~ •~ n ~^ . ~ ljnstall gypsum wallboard in accordance with manufacturer's directions and standards Z~~~ f`i1'~ti~ ~~ ~rt ~• v herein above specified. In the event standard and manufacturer is at variance, C~ i Y ~;~_4~ F'~~ manufacturer's directions shall govern. Use wallboard of maximum practical length to 10~,~,i ~~T`~~ ~~ytiy~Aminimize joints. 4. When long dimension of board is perpendicular to furring or framing member, locate all _ end joints over points of support. When long dimension is parallel to furring or framing member, locate edge (or side) joints over points of support. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows of wallboard. 5. Ceiling Wallboard: Install wallboard with long dimension perpendicular to furring members. Space screws not more than 8" on center along edges, and not more than 12" on center in the field of board. Apply fastening to wallboard panels beginning at central portion and proceeding toward sides and edges. B. Double-Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layers and gypsum wallboard for face layers. Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. On partitions/walls, apply base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base layer joints. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. C. Cutting When cutting of wallboard is required, cut by scoring and breaking or sawing, working from face side. Smooth all cut ends of panels as necessary to obtain a smooth joint. 3. For cut-outs in panels for pipes, ftxtures, and other small openings, make holes and cut-outs by sawing or other methods which will not fracture core or tear covering. Make ___ cut-outs with such accuracy that plates, trim or escutcheons will cover edges. D. Fastening Wallboard shall be screw attached using 1-1/4" screws at 12" centers in field, and 8" centers along vertical abutting edges. Stagger joints on opposite sides of same partition. Stagger screws on adjoining edges. Adjust spacing of fasteners for each system as recommended by manufacturer for fire rated partitions. Butt joints shall be located over studs wherever possible. Butt joints that must be made between studs shall be back-blocked. E. Ceilings Float interior ceiling angles. F. Trim 105191-1 09250-3 FI~..EC~ SECTION 09250 l GYPSUM BOARD ~QQ~ ~~~ ~~ Ah 8' ~.~ Install all trim in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, paying particular attention to make all trim installation plumb, level and true to line, with firm attachment to CITY CLERK supporting members. IOWA CITY, iC~WA 2. Provide control joints a. At door jambs from top of door frame to six inches above ceiling. b. At ceiling along partition runs and exterior wall runs, spaced not more than 30'-0" on center. c. At wings of L, U or T shaped ceilings. d. Where partition or furring abuts a structural element or dissimilar wall or ceiling. e. At construction changes within the plane of a partition or ceiling. f. At construction changes within the framing of partitions, exterior walls or ceilings. 3.02 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD A. Surfaces shall have a smooth finish and be left in condition to receive finish painting. B. Joints between boards shall be reinforced with tape except where control joints are required. Tape field joints, interior corner joints and wall to ceiling joints. Fill joints with joint filling compound and taper to feather edge. C. Fill nail head depressions with joint filling compound and feather the edges. D. Cover taped and filled joints and filled nail head depressions with topping compound applied in two coats, permitting the previous coat to dry prior to installing the subsequent coat. E. Sand joint and nail head areas lightly between coats and after the final coat so that a smooth level surface is produced, with the paper surface at the board free of scuffing. F. Metal trim and corner beads shall be finished with filling and topping compounds the same as field joints, except reinforcing tape will not be required. G. Joint treatment in non-fire rated walls is not required above suspended ceilings where surfaces are shown or specified to extend above suspended ceiling. 3.03 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of carpentry and other finish work, repair any cracks, chipped places or defects, including patching, being careful not to injure or deface any of the finished work in the building. All pointing and patching shall match surface being repaired, and the joining shall be uniform in appearance. 105191-1 09250-4 - SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD B. Visible joints, cracks, nail heads, tool marks, waves or other defects must not appear in the finished work, and surfaces shall be left in perfect condition when completed. Dirt or stains on finished surfaces shall be removed by an approved method which will not damage the uniform surface of ___ the finished area. C. At the completion of the work, clean all compound from metal trim, screens, base and other trim, leaving work ready for finishing. END OF SECTION 09250 _ O N ~ ~:- `~ ~ C~ ~ "'tl -~, .~ N ~ r- iil P ~<7 T~ ~ i ^ ,Y.~ ~ ~ \~ ` ~ ~~ 105191-1 09250-5 SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Fi j_.~i-.~ -- PART 1 -GENERAL ~~~~ ~~P ~8 ~~ 8; ~' 1.01 SUMMARY Ci-+- i,,~~-~-Ft~~ A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension syst~Ms~~ c~~i ~s. ~n~A B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices. C. Panel hold-down clips. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Four 6-inch-square samples. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface- burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 105191-1 09511-1 ~(~C ~"'y SECTION 09511 - f CV ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1.O~Q06 ~I[~~~JE~,~T~GE, AND HANDLING (~~ C~(i~r acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, ~O~A C~''~n~~packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be __ protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. ~' 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other devices that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: One carton of full-size panels of each type. _ 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2:01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL 105191-1 09511-2 ' -- SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ~ ~ ~ ~ t"~ __ A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of confii~~te~l~t~h~at 31 comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustica n , light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. ~~-Li 1! \ 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting ~i~i~~1~i~;e ~~ specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Coating-Based Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273. C. Panel-Based Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial solution that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram- negative bacteria. D. Humidity Resistance: Provide manufacturer's standard Humiguard Plus for Type 1 ACT. 2.03 MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products: 1. Armstrong, Basis of Design: a. Type 1 ACT: Cirrus Open Plan (no substitutions) 24"x24"x7/8", angled tegular edge with 15/16" grid. B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: I. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish. C. Color: White. 2.04 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension -- systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance". C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 105191-1 09511-3 F~ ~~~ SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ~~a~ ~A~128 A~-ti%°~~d Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. ~'~ CL}~it~n~t l~C-opper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. f~~A ~~~SGi~e"~ ~e ect wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, ` Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 12 gauge. E. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. F. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in-place. 2.05 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corporation; Architectural Ceilings Marketing Dept. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Ina -- B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web,Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet. Use aluminum in high humidity areas. 5. Cap Finish: Painted to match color of acoustical unit. 2.06 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corporation; Architectural Ceilings Marketing Dept. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 105191-1 09511-4 SECTION 09511 ~~---- ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS FI ~_.l,"- ~"~ -- 4. USG Interiors, Inc. Zuu'6 ~~~ ~~ ~~ s~ 3 B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicate , 'f 'crated, ___ manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoust~' e~ ~` and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same materi~t; i i h,`ahd Co that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. For any lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling or establish layout around existing mechanical and/or electrical devices. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension _- system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 105191-1 09511-5 F~.L..ED SECTION 09511 -- ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS . ZDa6 PEAR 28 A!~ 8: ~I ecure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of GiTY CLERK three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or IOWA CITY InW,~ther devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or therwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated _ fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or post installed anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3.04 CLEANING 105191-1 09511-6 - SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095 I 1 N C? ,' l ~ ~~ y..,,__ y ~~ ~`~ r„~ ~J ~ 1 ~."-. -1-, ! ~ ~'~ ~; ~~ cn .. D w 105191-1 09511-7 SECTION 09651 ~~ ~~ ~~ RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES ~ r '~ PART 1 GENERAL L~Q~ ~~~ ~ ~~~ 8' 3 ~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CITY CL E,sK OWP, CITY, { nIr~JA A. Resilient wall base. B. Adhesives and installation accessories necessary to the installation of the above. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples 1. Submit samples of each product for color selection. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be stored in undamaged condition as packaged by the manufacturer, with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. B. Care shall be taken to prevent damage and freezing during delivery, handling and storage. C. All materials shall be stored at the job site for at least 24 hours prior to installation. Materials shall be kept dry until removed from cartons for installation. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Installation of materials shall not be performed until the ambient temperature of the area in which the work occurs is at least 65°F for 48 hours prior to and during installation. B. Ambient temperature of 65°F shall also be maintained for a minimum of 48 hours following completion of this work; thereafter, the temperature shall be maintained at a minimum of 55°F. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements shown on the drawings and specified, provide products of one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Azrock Industries, Inc. 3. Kentile Floors, Inc. 4. Tarkett, Inc. 5. Johnsonite, Division of Duramax, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS 105191-1 09651-1 Cj~''`'~~ SECTION 09651 FI ~GL_.1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES ~QQ~ ~~~/~$ ~~~fo$s~materials shall be as hereinafter specified. ~I~. ~IwE~~ors of all materials will be selected by the Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's standards. I~~A LGI~ ~{7W b se shall be used at hard surface areas. D. End stops shall be provided where base does not terminate at a vertical surface. E. External corners shall be premolded of the same material, shape, and color as the lineal base. F. Adhesives shall be waterproof of type as recommended by manufacturer of base materials. " 2.03 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Vinyt Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II; 4" high unless otherwise indicated; 1/8" thick. 2.04 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and substrate conditions encountered. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur, and verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing substrate to receive products specified. l B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes and depressions in substrates. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated, according to manufacturer's directions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact of base with horizontal and vertical substrates. Scribe accurately to trim and door frames. 105191-1 09651-2 -, SECTION 09651 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES _.__ D. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. E. Internal corners shall be butted and coped to provide tight hairline joints. F. External corners shall be premolded. Field-formed external corners from lineal base will not be permitted. 3.04 CLEANING - - A. Clean products specified in this Section after installation and prior to inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09651 w 0 Q n ~ cr+ ~ ~~` TV ~- ~. ~ O~ ~-~°~ ~~ f-"~ ~~ ~ ~ G.) 105191-1 09651-3 SECTION 09653 ~~ ~ ~~~ RESILIENT TILE FLOORING L~QS ~ ~ n PART 1 GENERAL ~i~ Z8 ~~ B: 3 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CIT~'~ ~,(_~~~~~ ~ov-,fa c; i~r, ~oWA A. Resilient the flooring, scheduled as vinyl composition the (VCT). B. Adhesives and miscellaneous items necessary to the installation of the above. C. Accessory items required for the above. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples 1. Submit samples for color selection. B. Maintenance Data 1. Submit copies of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding maintenance, stain removal, care, cleaning, waxing, and polishing of resilient tile. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be stored in undamaged condition as packaged by the manufacturer, with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. B. Care shall be taken to prevent damage and freezing during delivery, handling, and storage. C. All materials shall be stored at the job site for at least 24 hours prior to their installation. Materials shall be kept dry until removed from cartons for installation. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Installation of materials shall not be performed until the ambient temperature of the area in which the work occurs is at least 65°F for 48 hours prior to and during installation. B. The ambient temperature of 65°F is to be maintained for a minimum of 48 hours following completion of this work; thereafter, the temperature is to be maintained at a minimum of 55°F. C. Surfaces to receive resilient flooring shall meet the minimum requirements established by the manufacturer of the flooring. D. Concrete slabs shall be cured a minimum of four weeks prior to flooring installation. E. Work shall not be started until work of other trades which pass through resilient floor has been completed. F. Traffic shall be minimized on finished floors. Where traffic is unavoidable, protect with non-staining waterproof paper or other approved covering. 105191-1 09653-1 RESILIENT TOILE FLOORING ~~ ~_~~ G. Protect against indentation of the caused by concentrated loaT ~A~ ~8 A~ $~ 31 PART 2 PRODUCTS CITY C~ERI< 2.01 MANUFACTURERS '~~~ Ci~~Y IC)V~Iq A. Resilient Floor Tile shall match existing in color and appearance and be one of the following approved products and manufacturers or an equivalent approved in advance: 1. Imperial Series Excelon Tile by Armstrong. 2. Custom Cortina Tile by Azrock Industries, Ina 3. Premium Architectural Series by Kentile Floors, Inc. 4. ExpressionsBasics Tile by Tarkett, Inc. 5. Essentials/Inspirations Tile by Mannington Vinyl Products 2.02 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile 1. Flooring shall be vinyl composition floor tile, 12" by 12" square with a minimum thickness of 1/8-inch. Color and pattern shall continue throughout the thickness of the tile. 2. The the shall meet the requirements for vinyl composition floor the of ASTM F 1066, Composition 1 (nonasbestos formulated), Class 2 (through pattern tiles.) 3. Colors and pattern shall be selected from approved manufacturer's colors and patterns. _.__ B. Adhesive 1. Adhesives shall be a waterproof and stabilized type as recommended by the manufacturer of the floor tiles. 2. Asphalt emulsions and other non-waterproof types will not be acceptable. C. Concrete Slab Primer 1. Concrete slab primer shall be a nonstaining type as recommended by the manufacturer of the floor tile. D. Edging Strips 1. Edging strips shall be 1/8-inch homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose type, subject to approval. 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS 105191-1 09653-2 RESILIENT TOILE FLOORING ~~ ~~~~ A. All other materials, not specifically described but required fo~~ii~~~an~~r~e~i~-stallation of the work of the section, shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the resilient materials used and as approved by the Architect/Bngineer. CITY C:l_ERr< ~ol~~a ci-~ ~ Iowa 2.04 REPLACEMENT TILE A. Furnish one full carton to the Owner so that after expiration of guarantee, the Owner may replace any damaged tile. Place the where directed and label carton with color of tile. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBSURFACE A. Clean all surfaces free of all dirt, oil, grease, plaster, and all foreign substances before proceeding with installation. All surfaces shall be thoroughly dry at time of installation. B. Concrete surfaces which have been cured with a curing compound shall be treated in such a manner as required to assure proper bonding of the applied materials. This may require the removal of the curing compound by grinding, acid etching, or other similar treatment. C. Prepare surfaces to satisfactorily receive floor the by filling in control joints, holes, indentations, and low areas with a latex cement underlayment compound. Perimeter edges of underlayment to be troweled to a feathered edge. Bumps and ridges shall be sanded and ground down to a flat surface. 3.02 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVE A. The adhesive manufacturer's directions for mixing and applying adhesive shall be followed. The surface shall be covered evenly with adhesive. __ B. The area covered by one application of adhesive shall not exceed the maximum working area recommended by the manufacturer. Resilient flooring shall be installed within the time limits recommended by the manufacturer. If adhesive film dries, it shall be removed and the area shall be recoated. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Resilient the shall be laid true, level, and even with straight and tight joints placed in alignment in both directions with existing. B. Extend the into all recesses, openings, and similar areas which adjoin areas receiving resilient tile. C. Scribe edges of all the to fit accurately at walls, vertical surfaces, offsets, and at intersection of the with that of other floor finishes. Cut holes for any pipes neatly so that floor plates of flanges cover tile. 3.04 CLEANING 105191-1 09653-3 SECTION 09653 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING A. Remove spots and smears of adhesive immediately from exposed surfaces. Clean surface with neutral cleaner of type and as recommended by the manufacturer so as to remove excess cement, discoloration, and shoe marks. Rinse the floors with clear, clean water. ~~ -- B. Buff floors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations immediately before final inspection. C. Waxing will be by Owner. END OF SECTION 09653 _ © N O ~' ~ ~ a, ~_ ~~ N ~ m ,,,. m ~ ~~ ~ ~ w 105191-1 09653-4 PAINTING (PROFE SIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) ~f ! ~~~ --- PART 1 -GENERAL 7~~lru ~i'kr~ ~$ js,~ ~; 3~ 1.01 SUMMARY C~ ! Y i `EhK i01r~J,'~ C1TY {C~1N~ A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior ate sand surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, -- Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have afactory-applied final finish. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. -- 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross- reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. B. Samples for Verification: Three (3) samples for each color. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in __ material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 105191-1 09912-1 PAINTING (PROF SSIONAL LINE PRODUCI~`~~....C~ 1. Product name or title of material. ZQ~S MAR ~ 8 AID $~ 2. Product description (generic classification or binder typ~~-i-Y CLERK 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufactur~~w~ ~'~~ }~WA ' - 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in swell-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than S deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below: a. Exterior Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each color applied. b. Interior Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each color applied. PART2-PRODUCTS 105191-1 09912-2 ~- SECTION 09912 ~ ~ ~ ~ j PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) L 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Z~~~i ~±s~R 2~ ~i~f $t 3Z A. Products: Sherwin-Williams Co. or approved equal. C{ (G~_~~K 2.02 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL lOV~J~ CITY, InVVA A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Selection of color shall be by the Architect/Engineer. 2.03 EXTERIOR PRIMERS -- A. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. __ 1. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer BSONZ6/BSOWZI: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. B. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate. 2.04 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. I. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. B. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer. 1. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer BSONZ6/BSOWZI: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. C. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer. 1. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate. 105191-1 09912-3 PAINTING (PROFE SIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) ~ (~ ~ ~~ 2.05 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS ZO06 MAR ~$ AM $; 32 A. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss~rl®~r[e(~~ylic-latex enamel for exterior application. ~Q~fA C~~ ~~~A - 1. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2.06 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss alkyd enamel for interior application. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 105191-1 09912-4 r- - SECTION 09912 C i PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) i I L.~ C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according fdl~tpt~r'sJil~r~ 2 instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. ~'+ 1.~~~ ~! ~~ ~~~i~ 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprim~~~~~ ~` ~ Y 17WA 2. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according -- to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, _ _ clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple - coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 105191-1 09912-5 FI ~•-•~~ PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) ZQQ6 MQR ~$ ~~ $`I'j~term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. C,,rI~ CLERK Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired IOWA . CfTY ~O~tection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or "-' lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 105191-1 09912-6 -- SECTION 09912 ~~ PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) Z~Q6 ~~~ ~~' ?~c~rlnided __ D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manu act rer s spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry ~rlr~.thi esS p the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. i ~ ' t~~~ i0V!!,~ GI~~Y IOWA E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.06 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over crust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. B. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal surfaces: 105191-1 09912-7 SECTION 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. 3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Metalatex Semi-Gloss Coating Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. ~- a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal surfaces: 1. Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. ~ - b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. END OF SECTION 09912 _ O ~ C3 ~ a ~' ~~ ~ ~ c~ ~ f__" ~rn ~ ~ ~ ~ °••° D w N 105191-1 09912-8 f HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS ~! ? . ~~~ PART 1 -GENERAL ~~~5 t3~R 28 E'(~1 $; 3Z 1.1 SUMMARY C) I ~f' C~E~~((~~K,,A~//~~ A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performan 1eUWatmg iy ~ei3~1bh't'he following substrates: -- 1. Interior Substrates: a. Steel. 1.2 SUBMITTALS __ A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated. -- 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. D. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting - - Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. -- 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 105191-1 09960-1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS Ff ~E 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS ZOO6 MAR 28 A~4 8; 32 A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch(~i c~'a~i~€~~Is applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing content~~/q C~~ ~n~A .__ 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional gallon of each material and color applied. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Zinc Rich Urethane Primer: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Tnemec Series 90-97 Tnemec Zinc, 3.5 mil dft. 2.3 INTERMEDIATE EPOXY POLYMIDE COATING (2 COATS OVER PRIMER) A. Epoxy, Cold-Cured, Semi-Gloss: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline (3 mil dft). -- 2.4 FINISH COATING (1 COAT OVER INTERMEDIATE COAT) A. High-Build Acrylic Polyurethane Coating: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Tnemec Series 73 Endura-Shield (5 mil dft). 105191-1 09960-2 -- SECTION 09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS ~ f ! . ~ ~~ PART 3 -EXECUTION Z~06 ~~R 2 $ AP'9 $; $,~ 3.1 EXAMINATION ~i~ ~~ ~~~~~~~ A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance ~~ith'fre~q~remen~t~forA maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated. C. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. 1. Clean using methods recommended in writing by coating manufacturer. 2. Blast clean according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 105191-1 09960-3 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS FI~ ~L.J 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 2QD6 MAR 28 AM 8: 32 A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any ti~i ~(d ~as Owner deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied: ~QWA C(TY ~{7WA 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials _~ from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. High-Build Epoxy Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Zinc-Rich Urethane primer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-build epoxy polyamide. c. Topcoat: High-Build Arcylic Polyurethane. ~^ B. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Epoxy Coating System: a. Prime Coat: As recommended by coating manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-build epoxy polyamide. c. Topcoat: High-Build Arcylic Polyurethane. END OF SECTION 09960 105191-1 09960-4 Division 10 Specialties r ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 _ 2~~~ ~~i; za ~~~ s: ~z C{~i~~ CLE~~~K i0'e~1f,~ CITY I~U'JA Division 10 -- SECTION 10210 ~ ~ L.. ~ ~.~ WALL LOUVERS Z6lOb ~,~4 28 A~3 8~ 32 -- PART 1 GENERAL CITY Cl_Ef-~r< i.o1 SECTION INCLUDES I~VI~a CITY ~~~iA A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and supervision necessary to furnish and install: 1. Shop fabricated fixed, extruded-aluminum louver and frame. 2. Head and sill flashing to adjacent work. 3. Bird screening. 4. Attachment hardware. 5. Insulated blankoff panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples -- 1. Provide samples, minimum size 2"x5" of finish selected on the actual louver base metal, and finish color options. -- B. Shop Drawings 1. Clearly indicate, in large scale, profile of frame and installation details, relation to ___ adjacent construction, flashing blade configuration, bird screen, and frame. C. Product Data 1. Provide louver schedule indicating each louver location, size, free area, water penetration, airflow, and associated pressure drop. -- PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Louvers shall be the following product and manufacturer or an equivalent approved in advance: 1. C/S Group B. Louver Schedule (based on C/S Group model nos.) 1. Type 1: Drainable louver, continuous line, 4" depth (Model No. A6155). - 2. Type 2: Conventional louver, mullion type, 4" depth (Model No. A4110). 3. Type 3: Conventional louver, mullion type with center mullion, 4" depth (Model No. __ A4110). 105191-1 10210-1 WALL LOUV ~~ LEC~ ERS 4. Type 4: Chevron lightproof, continuous I~(~~b~'~~)$(11~~~A2282). - 2.02 MATERIALS ~I-i-Y CLERK IOWA CITY IniPVA A. Horizo ntal Line Louver 1. Frame and Blades: 0.080-inch thick. Extruded aluminum, two-inches deep, Type 6063-TS aluminum. 2. Bird Screen: Interior mounted %z-inch mesh, 0.63 aluminum, secured in removable aluminum frame. Install bird screen in segments aligned with vertical supports at louver. Bird screen shall cover entire louver opening. 3. Drainable, where indicated. - 4. Design shall incorporate structural supports to withstand wind loads per local codes. 5. Any intermediate support mullions shall not interrupt exterior appearance, unless indicated otherwise. 6. Louvers to be supplied with 4" (101.6 mm) high by full depth sill flashing formed from minimum 0.050" (1.27 mm) thick aluminum. Sill flashing to have welded side panels. B. Performance 1. The louver shall be licensed to bear the AMCA seal for water penetration and air performance. 2. The louver shall not allow water penetration greater than .01 oz/square foot at _ velocities less than 750 feet per minute. 3. The pressure drop through the louver shall not exceed .15 inches water gauge at 800 fpm (intake). Pressure drops do not include bird screen. 4. Louvers shall have a minimum of 42% free area (based on a 48" x 48" size). 5. Structural supports shall be designed and furnished by the louver manufacturer to carry a wind load of not less than 25 psf. C. Insulated, Blank-off Panels: Laminated metal-faced panels consisting of insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets. 1. Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) nominal thickness. 3. Insulating Core: Unfaced mineral-fiber or foamed-plastic rigid insulation board. 105191-1 10210-2 FI~ _F~~ WALLILOOUVERS Z~~~ ~~~ ~ Q~d~e ~'featment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames, not less than 0.080-inch (2.0-mm) Ci (~( CL~iiiinal thickness, with corners mitered and with same finish as panels. IOWA CITY, IOWA 5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with 1/8-by-l-inch (3.2- by-25-mm) PVC compression gaskets. Panel Finish: Manufacturer's resin flouoropolymer coating in black color. Attach blank-off panels to back of louver frames with stainless-steel, sheet metal screws. Install one blankoff panel at each louver. Panel shall cover designated louver opening. 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs -- and mullions, reinforced with splice plates. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints where indicated. C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. D. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. _ E. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealantjoints. -- F. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. G. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less. 1. Fully or Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed _ behind louver blades so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. 2. Locate mullions at Meeting Room B aligned with vertical mullions of window framing. H. Where indicated, provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers. 105191-1 t 0210-3 ~~~~~~ SECTION 10210 - WALL LOUVERS 5 ~a~ ~~ a~~ s: 3z 2oa Jom frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from ~L~~ iew, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between C y ~ b r IOWA CITY, 1 e mem ers necessary. J. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.04 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish louvers after assembly. 2.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES _, A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. ~- PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPA RATION A. Set sill pan in bed of sealant and seal all penetrations in sill pan. ^ B. Ensure openings affecting this work are properly prepared and that flashings are correctly located to divert moisture to exterior. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Louvers to be supplied with 4" (101.6 mm) high by full depth sill flashing formed from ~- minimum 0.050" (1.2'7 mm) thick aluminum. Sill flashing to have welded side panels. B. Install louvers in openings properly aligned and level. _ _ C. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, architectural details, and mechanical details. D. Secure louver rigid with concealed fasteners ofnon-corrosive metals to suit materials as being encountered. E. Coordinate installation method with application of exterior materials and mechanical work. F. Set and tie into flashings to ensure diversion of moisture to exterior. ~ - 105191-1 10210-4 ~-~ - SECTION 10210 ~~~ ~~~1 WALL LOUVERS 11 -- G. Install removable bird screens. ZQ~S ~l~R 2 $ Q~ ~~ ~ 2 H. Caulk around louvers to form seal with surrounding building materials~e~if~( __ drainage through weep holes following caulking. ~~N//-' (,;~~ ((~WA END OF SECTION 10210 105191-1 10210-5 Division 12 Furnishings ~~~~~ --- 70~~ PEAR 28 A~ 8~ 32 ~IT~' G~.~F~K iowA c~N ~c~wA Division 12 SECTION 12241 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes roller shades. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 21~~b r~;~r? 2 ti ~~ 8~ 3 Z CI I ~ C~C~iI 10'JVA CI ~ , 1~V'JA A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other work, - operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. C. Samples for Verification: 1. For the following products: a. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches (76 mm) square, with specified treatments applied. - Mark face of material. b. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. -- D. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics, finishes, and performance. 3. Operating hardware. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL -- or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. C. Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic - effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial - Completion. 105191-1 - 12241-1 SECTION 12241 ~I1 ~~ ROLLER WINDOW SHADES L. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 2006 ~R~R 2 8 A~ $: ~ 2 A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product namelo~a~i .installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window ~~[~n~a~~lJuµ°JYYj`1 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rollers Shades: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and pattern indicated, full- size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but not fewer than one unit. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ROLLER SHADES A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Lutron Shading Solutions by VIMCO; Sheer Shade fiberglass basketweave 2. B. Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets; with manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade material. Provide capacity for one roller shade band(s) per roller, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller. D. Mounting Brackets: Fascia end caps, fabricated from steel finished to match fascia or headbox. E. Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; continuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators; length as indicated on Drawings; removable design for access. F. TopBack Cover: L-shaped; material and finish to match fascia; combining with fascia and end caps to form a six-sided headbox enclosure sized to fit shade roller and operating hardware inside. 105191-1 12241-2 - SECTION 12241 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES ~~ ~ ~,_~ G. Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum, with plastic or metal cap~t~~~' ~~vi~~c~c~ed, by pocket of shade material, internal-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as required for smooth, properly balanced shade operation. nn11~i`~/ ~I vK H. Mounting: Outside mounting permitting easy removal and replacem~irf'i~1t~o~t' ~laM~~frl^~ roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes. I. Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous-loop bead-chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and bracket lift operator. 1. Position of Crank Operator: Right side of roller, as determined by hand of user facing shade from inside, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Clutch: Capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or provide adaptor. 3. Lift-Assist Mechanism: Manufacturer's standazd spring assist for balancing roller shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. 4. Loop Length: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level. 5. Bead Chain: Stainless steel. 2.2 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade. B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. -- 1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 _ deg F (23 deg C): 1. Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical sepazations between openings. D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting fascia, roller, - and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade - hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use. _ F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. G. Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: Matching or coordinating with shade band color. 105191-1 12241-3 SECTION 12241 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. " - 3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of aluminum framing. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION - A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12241 O ~~ rv o _ ~ 7 ~ C7 C^J ~ rv Q~ ~ m ~ ~ ~~ ~ ?> w 105191-1 12241-4 Division 15 - Mechanical ~~ 1 ~ (~ ~~~~ <<~.R 2~ A~~ ~~ 32 -~~ r ~~ GT''~ t.;~.Crjr Division 15 SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PARTI GENERAL ~t~ ~~ ~~~~ ~;~ 28 A~~ ~~ 32 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES CITY" CAL; ~K IOV"ypA CITY, IOUJA A. The work shall include the furnishings of systems, equipment and materials specified in this Division and as called for on the Mechanical Drawings to include supervision, quality control, operation, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete mechanical installation. The work shall also include the furnishing of necessary hoisting facilities to set materials and equipment in place and the furnishing of any scaffolding and transportation associated with this work. B. Examine the project site and become familiar with existing conditions which will affect the work. Review the drawings and specifications of other trades and take note of conditions to be created -- which will affect the work. All conditions shall be considered in the preparation of bids; no additional compensation will be made on the behalf of this Contractor. C. Provide labor necessary to demolish the existing mechanical system as shown on the drawings, as described in Part 3, Existing Conditions, or as required. D. Where noted on the drawings or where called for in other sections of the specification, the Contractor for this division shall install equipment furnished by others, and shall make required service connections. Verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the installation. This contractor shall be responsible for the removal and installation of railings, piping, ductwork, louvers, etc. as required to install new equipment. Coordinate shipping splits for all equipment provided by this contractor. E. Excavation, Backfill, and compaction of trenches for the work specified in Division 15. 1.02 DAMAGE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the work of other trades, or to the building and it contents, caused by equipment installation. 1.03 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS __ A. Obtain and furnish necessary permits and inspection certificates for material and labor furnished. Permits and certificates shall be obtained from the proper inspection authorities. The cost of permits, certificates and fees required in connection with the installation shall be borne by the __ Contractor, unless otherwise noted in the detailed contractual description preceding these specifications. Where applications are required for the procuring of utility services to the building, see that such application is properly filed with the utility, and that information required for such an application is presented to the extent and in the form required by the utility company. 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Applicable provisions of the following codes and standards are hereby imposed on a general basis for the mechanical work (in addition to specific applications specified by individual work sections of these specifications): 105191-1 15050-1 BASIC MATERIA SAND METHODS ~~ ~~~J ASHRAE/IES 90.1 -Code for Energy Efficiency ~~~~ BAR ~~ A~ 8~ ~~ ANSI Pressure Piping Standards (B31) ASHRAE Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (AI~~`I~" .~~.E~K AWWA Standards o~~~ ClTY, 4C?WA ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and State B ode American Gas Association AWS Standards for Welding National Electrical Code Local and/or State Plumbing, Mechanical and Building Codes Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Uniform Plumbing Code International Mechanical Code NFPA Standards and Pamphlets B. If any work indicated on the drawings or specified herein conflicts in any way with any of the rules and regulations of the above authorities, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing 72 hours before bids are opened. In the event the Contractor fails to notify the Architect/Engineer and changes are required by said conflicts, the Contractor shall make such changes as are required without additional cost to this Owner. C. Installations must be safe in every respect, and must not create a condition which will be harmful to building occupants; to operating, installing or testing personnel; to workmen; or to the public. The contractor for each installation shall be solely responsible for providing installations which will meet these conditions. If the Contractor believes that the installation will not be safe for all parties, report these beliefs in writing to the Architect/Engineer before any equipment is purchased or work is installed, giving recommendations. The Architect/Engineer will work out required changes and adjustments in contract price where adjustments are warranted. 1.05 DRAWINGS A. A complete set of drawings shall be on the site at all times. Prior to installing any of the work, check the drawings for dimensions and see that the work does not interfere with clearance required for ceilings, beams, foundations, finished columns, pilasters, partitions and electrical equipment as shown on the drawings and details. ABer work is installed and it develops that interferences occur which have not been called to the Architect/Engineer's attention before the installation, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make such changes in his work as directed by the Architect/Engineer. B. The contract drawings for mechanical work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangement, the Contractor shall make such changes as directed by the Architect/Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner. C. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings, access panels, and sleeves may not be shown; but where such items are required by other sections of these specifications or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. Rough-in dimensions and locations shall be verified with the supplier of equipment furnished by other trades, or by the Owner, prior to the time of roughing-in. 105191-1 15050-2 - SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS ~ ~ ~~~~ --- D. Equipment specification may not deal individually with m~ ~ Ara. ~~qufYed ~uc~3s components, parts, controls and devices which may be required to produce th~~e,~ ip e _ formance specified, or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Where such itgrti~ ~ ~~ ey shall be -- included by the supplier of the equipment, whether or not s~~d~r¢~11~ IIed E. The drawings and the specifications are cooperative and supplementary. It is the intent of both said drawings and specifications to cover all mechanical requirements in their entirety as nearly as possible. The Contractor shall closely check the drawings and specifications for any obvious errors or omissions and bring any such condition to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to the receipt of bids, in order to permit clarification by means of a mailed Addendum. If there is no question prior to the bid proposal date, the Architect/Engineer shall assume that the drawings and specifications are complete and correct and will expect the intent of said documents to be complied with, and the installation to be complete in all respects, according to said intent. F. Locate equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Minor deviations from the contract drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility, but - changes of magnitude, or which involve extra cost, shall not be made without prior approval. Ample space shall be allowed for removal of parts that may require replacement or service in the future. G. All valves, fire dampers, automatic dampers, smoke dampers, damper operators, reheat coils, etc. shall be accessible for maintenance purposes. Locate items carefully and coordinate with other trades so that each piece of equipment is accessible and functional. Items located above anon- accessible ceiling, chase, or soffit shall be accessible through an access door. Coordinate location of access doors with the general contractor. 1.06 RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor's responsibility shall not end with the installation and connecting of the various apparatus. It shall include the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work, together with the qualified journeymen, helpers and laborers required to properly unload, install, connect, adjust, start, operate and test the work involved, including - equipment and materials furnished by other trades or by the Owner, until such time as the entire mechanical installation functions properly in every detail. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other trades prior to installation. B. No piping, ducts or equipment foreign to the electrical equipment or architectural appurtenances shall be run over the top of any electrical panels or electrical equipment, in accordance with NEC 110-16 and 384-4. This does not prohibit sprinkler protection for the installation. C. The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specifications are completed as an aid, but where discrepancies arise, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide the required quantity. 105191-1 15050-3 ~~ ( ~ ~ SECTION 15050 l.. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Zd~b K~R ~~ ~. g` ~~here the specifications state that equipment shall be furnished, installed or provided, it shall be understood to mean this Contractor shall furnish and install completely, unless it is specifically CITY CLERK stated that the equipment is to be furnished and installed by others. IOWA CITY, inWA E. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between the piping and equipment of the various contractors. Conflicts between the drawings and specifications, or between requirements set forth for the various trades, shall be called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required, and that the Contractor has submitted his bid in conformance with plans and specifications as issued and that no interference exists. F. No piping, ducts or equipment foreign to an elevator hoistway and machine room shall be run inside the hoistway and machine room in accordance with NEC 620-37 and ASME A17.1, 102.2. 1.08 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE A. Materials and equipment shall be guaranteed to be free from defects and to be new equipment; no secondhand, used or salvaged equipment will be allowed. The Owner's existing equipment which is to be relocated or reinstalled under this contract shall be refurbished, cleaned and repaired, and made subject to the guarantee and maintenance as herein specified, unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Keep the entire portion of the work in repair, without additional cost to the Owner, so far as defects _ in workmanship, apparatus, material or construction are concerned for one (1) year from the date of ~ , final acceptance, except as otherwise specified herein. C. Equipment, which fails to meet performance ratings as specified and shown on the drawings, shall be removed and replaced by new equipment that meets the specified requirements, without additional cost to the Owner. D. Materials and workmanship shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, in whose presence various tests shall be made as required by these specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and catalog data for mechanical equipment as called for in Division 1. B. Submittal data for mechanical equipment shall consist of shop drawings and/or catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the material or equipment to include dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance curves, rating, control sequence, and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the item proposed and its operating characteristics. Shop drawings shall be submitted on equipment and materials as required by the specifications. C. Approval of materials, including alternate or substitute items, shall be obtained in writing from the Architect/Engineer, verbal approval will not be considered binding. 105191-1 15050-4 -- {~ ~ ~~ SECTION 15050 ~`~'~` ~'"' BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS ~d~~' ~~~~~ ~ ~t1~i ~fio~ ~rawings shall be submitted and shall have been signed, checked, approved, and initialed by ~ ~ ~ ~..,t e Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer will review C~ E ; 1,~~.CF1~~ho~, drawings to aid in interpreting the plans and specifications, and will in so doing assume that ~Q~1J/y CC ! .~ ~~~op drawings conform to specified requirements set forth in this specification. The approval of the shop drawing by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with elements of the specification. The name of the job, ArchitectlEngineer, location, and specification section shall appear on all pages of shop drawings. Equipment marks (such as EF- 1, RTU-1) shall be indicated for each item. E. At the completion of the job, furnish three (3) copies of parts lists, operating and maintenance instructions, and manuals organized and bound, in three books. F. At the completion of the project, prepare and submit to the Owner record drawings showing the - location of piping and ductwork. Drawing shall give accurate dimensions of such equipment for future use by the Owner. This drawing shall be submitted as soon as work is completed and before authorization of final payment. 2.02 SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIALS ---- A. Submit to the Architect/Bngineer for review, when requested, a list of subcontractors, materials and equipment proposed to be used. The list must be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer before this Contractor may enter into any subcontractual agreement. Equipment, materials, and devices, etc. __- shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, whether or not said items are herein specified. 2.03 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials shall be new, complete with manufacturer's guarantee or warranty, and shall be as listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc., Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA), _"- American Gas Association (AGA), Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI), etc., if a standard has been established by that agency for the type of material. - B. Materials shall also comply with applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, National Board of Fire Underwriters, National Fire Protection Association, National Safety Council, National Bureau of Standards, the National Electrical Code and the Williams- .-- Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. Such standards are hereby made a part of these specifications. C. Work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft, shall be executed in a workmanlike manner, and shall present a neat mechanical appearance when completed. Align, level and adjust equipment for satisfactory operation, and install so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be made readily and so that parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation and maintenance. Methods and techniques of installation shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer. - D. Materials shall be the standard product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific product. Materials of the same type of class shall be the products of one manufacturer. For example, fans shall be from the same manufacturer and pumps from the same manufacturer. 105191-1 15050-5 BASIC MATERIAOLS AND METHODS (~ ~ ~,,,,~~ E. Materials shall be protected from damage, and stored indoors or proteg'~ ~i~w~h~;a~~l times, unless other storage arrangements are approved by the Architect/Engineer. F. Bearing lubrication fittings shall be as recommended by the manufactu s ~~~id,ed, ~Y~I~ERK where necessary, to an accessible location. ivvvv//11 G. Material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.04 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS A. Proposals as submitted shall be based on the products specifically named in the specification or on the drawings. Material or equipment by manufacturers other than those specified may be used only by permission of the ArchitectlEngineer. Such permission for substitution must be requested, in writing, in accordance with Division 1. B. The Architect/Engineer reserves the sole right for the approval of proposed material or equipment, and the phrase, "or approved equivalent", used in these specifications, or on the drawings, shall be interpreted to mean an equivalent approved by the Architect/Engineer. C. Changes required by alternate equipment shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner; and costs incurred by other trades, public utilities or the Owner, as a result of the use of such equipment, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. D. Furnish to the ArchitectlEngineer, when requested, samples of proposed material or equipment substitutions. These samples shall remain with the ArchitectlEngineer aslong asneeded. E. Identify the differences in alternate material or equipment as compared to that specified, and indicate the benefits to the project as a result of selecting the alternative. F. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to refuse approval of equipment which does not meet the specification, in their opinion, or of equipment for which no local experience of satisfactory service is available. The Architect/Engineer further reserves the right to reject equipment for which maintenance service and the availability of replacement parts is questionable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine the existing buildings and grounds and become familiar with the conditions as they exist, or that will in any manner affect the work under this contract. No allowance will be made subsequently, in this connection, on behalf of the Contractor for any error or negligence by the Contractor. B. Existing equipment, such as duct or pipe, in or on the existing building and grounds which is to be replaced, or which interferes in any way with the remodeling of the existing facilities and/or installation of new equipment, shall be removed from the premises or relocated by this Contractor, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Do not remove from the premises, any equipment that may have maintenance value to the Owner without permission of the Owner. Equipment, duct or pipe 105191-1 15050-6 - SECTION 15050 F~ ~ •~ °-~ BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - Z~~Q ~;~~~ 2n~t t~,~e~e~~Ci shall be removed from the premises, unless otherwise noted herein or shown on the drawings. CST ~ ~I~~~ ~, .-- ~~~.~ ~;r~~e~d~g equipment is removed or changed, all duct and pipe no longer in service shall be removed and stubs plugged as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Building surfaces damaged and openings left by removal of equipment shall be repaired by the proper trades and paid for by this __. Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The cutting and fitting shall be done by this Contractor. The cutting of floor, ceiling or wall surfaces shall be done by this Contractor with extreme care, in order to avoid any disrupting or damage of existing utility services which may be encountered. Coordinate with other trades and with the General Contractor, to minimize the damage to the building in order to reduce the amount of patching required. D. Where new openings are cut and concealed piping is encountered, such items shall be removed or --- relocated as required. Where systems to be removed stub through floors, walls or ceilings, openings shall be patched so that no evidence of the former installation remains. - E. Existing active services (water, gas, sewer, electric), when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to remain. If active services are encountered which require relocation, make request to authorities with jurisdiction for -- determination of procedures. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the utility or municipality having jurisdiction. F. The location, size and elevation of underground utilities shown on the drawings are in accordance with data supplied by the Owner and/or the various utility companies. The Contractor shall verify this data and shall report any discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer before submitting his bid. 3.02 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE A. Changes in service shall be made so as to provide a minimum of interference with the operation of services in the building. When changes require shutdown of building services, notify the proper building authorities no less than 24 hours in advance and obtain approval from these authorities before making changes. Such notices shall give duration and nature of shutdown. Temporary arrangements shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner. B. Any and all interruptions to building services shall be in accordance with Division 1. 3.03 OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A. The General Contractor shall coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure, as required for the installation of the mechanical work. B. Furnish to the General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings. This shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that proper size openings are provided. When additional patching is required due to this Contractor's failure to inspect this work, this Contractor shall make arrangements for the patching required to properly close the opening, to - include patch painting. This Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect. C. When cutting and patching of the structure is made necessary due to this Contractor's failure to install piping, ducts, sleeves or equipment on schedule, or due to this Contractor's failure to furnish, 105191-1 15050-7 ~) ~ ~~ SECTION 15050 ---- BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS ZOO6 ~4aR ~ 8 ~~ $or~hedule, the information required for the leaving of openings, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements for this cutting and patching. This Contractor shall pay any ~~~' ~',~,~~~dditional cost incurred in this respect. ~owA c~Y~ ~owA D. Provide cutting and patching and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of the work. Furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. Extent of cutting shall be minimized. Use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. 3.04 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. See Division 2 for requirements for trench excavation, backfill, and compaction. 3.05 CONCRETE AND MASONRY WORK A. Concrete work included herein or shown on the drawings shall be in conformance with Division 3. B. Concrete bases and pads for mechanical equipment shall be furnished by this Contractor. Size bases to extend minimum of 4" beyond equipment base in any direction, and 4" above finished floor elevation. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath base for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge corners. C. Furnish equipment anchor bolts and be responsible for their proper installation and accurate location. 3.06 ROOF OPENINGS A. Roof openings required by this Contractor that are not shown on the Structural or Architectural Drawings shall be cut and (if necessary) reinforced by an experienced roofing contractor. B. Roof penetrations for duct and piping shall be through curbed roof openings. Equipment supports shall be by curbed and flashed runners meeting current National Roofing Contractor Association (NRCA) standards and details. Pitch pockets, pitch pans, and wood blocking are not acceptable. C. All roof work shall be completed such that it does not void any existing roof warranty. 3.07 PAINTING A. The finish of any item that has been marred, scratched or damaged in any way by this Contractor shall be repainted at the expense of this Contractor, and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner. B. Painting and finishing of exposed mechanical systems including piping and duct shall be as shown on the drawings and in DIVISION 9 -FINISHES. 3.08 CLEANING 105191-1 15050-8 SECTION 15050 ~1 ~ ~-' BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS ~ ~ `-" ~`" ~' A. Keep the premises clean of all debris, caused by the work as described in`19~V~S~~I~ ~. ~~ ~ ~~ 3 3 B. At the conclusion of the construction, the site shall be thoroughly cleaned of a~~u~bl~ld~16~A~and unused material and shall be left in good order. Closed off spaces shall be1Qd(~oi''st~~'Z~,as material, cartons, and wood frame members used in the construction. 3.09 SUSPENSION FROM WOOD STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. In general, concentrated or other loads shall not be suspended directly from the bottom of wood structural members, unless approved by the Architect/Engineer. Loads suspended from open web joists or trusses may be transferred to the bottom chord of the structural member at the panel points. Loads suspended from solid web joists shall be transferred to the joists only through the top flange or web. Suspension systems shall be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. 3.10 WIRING FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. The Division 16 contractor will provide power to and connection of motors and equipment furnished by this Contractor. Where disconnect switches are not specified to be furnished with the equipment, the Division 16 Contractor will furnish disconnect switches for equipment furnished by this Contractor. B. Provide integral wiring, alarm wiring, control wiring, temperature control wiring and interlock wiring for equipment furnished, whether or not such wiring is furnished by the equipment vendor. C. Except where other Sections call for starters to be furnished by manufacturers as part of their equipment, the Division 16 contractor will furnish motor starters for motors furnished by this Contractor. D. Furnish to the Division 16 contractor, shop drawings and a schedule for motors and other mechanical equipment furnished, which require electrical services. The schedule shall include the locations for rough-ins, electrical loads, size, and electrical characteristics for services required. - E. Additional costs incurred, where motors or equipment furnished by this Contractor require lazger services or services of different electrical characteristics than those called for on the Electrical Drawings, due to the Contractor furnishing substitute equipment, shall be paid for by this Contractor. F. Review the Electrical Drawings and call to the attention of the Architect/Engineer, prior to bidding, omissions of electrical services required for equipment. G. Mechanical equipment which requires fuse protection, to maintain UL listing, shall be coordinated with the Division 16 contractor to provide such protection. 3.11 MOTORS A. TEFC and ODP motors for equipment supplied by this contractor shall meet or exceed the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT-92). The following table lists the nominal full-load efficiencies for various motor horsepowers at 1800 RPM: 105191-1 15050-9 t~ ~~-1 SECTION 15050 -- [- 1 ~-1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS ODPZUU6 ~~.~884 ~~ 84 • a~ .5 87.5 88.5 89.5 91 91 91.7 92.4 930 930 93.6 94.1 941 94S 950 900 TEFC 82.5 84t ~.,,$,4, eg7 5 87.5 89.5 89.5 91 91 92.4 92.4 93 93 93.6 94.1 94.5 94.5 95 95 ~('~~{~jl-.`1/~Gl.- l~r~i~~6~s that are indicated to be used with Variable Frequency Drives (VFD's shall be inverter TI Vdweuty rated. Coordinate all motor requirements with the electrical contractor. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Special care shall be taken for the protection of equipment furnished by this Contractor. Equipment and material shall be protected from elements such as weather, painting and plastering __ until the project is completed. Damage from rust, paint or scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. B. Protection of equipment during the plastering and painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the contractor performing that work, but this shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. C. Where the installation or connection of equipment requires this Contractor to work in areas previously finished by other contractors, this Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. This Contractor shall arrange with the other contractors for repairing and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged. D. When heavy materials must be placed upon or transported over the roof deck, sheeting shall be placed to distribute the weight and support such materials. Any damage shall be immediately corrected at no cost to the Owner. 3.13 ASBESTOS IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL A. In the event that suspected asbestos containing material (ACM) is encountered during the course of the work, cease operations in the immediate area and promptly notify the Architect/Engineer. Suspected materials will then be sampled and analyzed by the Owner. Should ACM be identified, the Owner's Representative will direct the procedures for abatement, either by subcontract to the Contractor or separate contractor. During abatement operations, cease operations in the immediate area of the abatement. Operations in other areas of the project may be performed, but care must be taken to control dust to avoid contamination of the abatement containment or air monitoring -- samples. The Contractor shall coordinate activities with the asbestos abatement contractor. Should no ACM be identified, operations may be resumed. Delays caused by identification, analysis or abatement may be added to the time of the contract, at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer by Change Order. 3.14 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Be responsible for the installation of all equipment in such a manner as to control the transmission of noise and vibration from any installed equipment or system, so that the sound level does not exceed NC35 in any occupied space. Be responsible for the correction of any objectionable noise in any occupied area due to improperly installed equipment. 105191-1 15050-10 SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.15 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Systems shall be tested and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to the - Owner. B. Prior to acceptance of the mechanical installation, demonstrate to the Owner or his designated __ representatives essential features and functions of all systems installed, and instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. C. Furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstrations and instructions, and arrange to have the manufacturer's representatives for the system present to assist with the demonstrations. The Owner and Contractor shall each sign a certification stating that the training has been performed and the Owner accepts same. 3.16 UTILITY REBATE APPLICATIONS A. This contractor shall be responsible for gathering information necessary for completing local utility rebate applications, and submitting to the proper utility companies for gas and electric rebates. Potential rebates include high efficiency gas boilers, thermostats, timeclocks, motors, and other -- items furnished by this mechanical contractor. END OF SECTION 15050 _ N_ a~ Cis y ~' `11s n -'; N «' ~ ,<t-' r ~ ~;: ~ ~~ ,~ ~ CA D W W 105191-1 15050-11 SECTION 15075 ~~ ~ ~ ~~ MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ~~~~ +~~~ 28 A1~3 8~ 33 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES C~~Y LLE~~ A. Provide materials, equipment labor and supervision necessary to install piping identification products. B. Comply with ANSI A 13.1 for lettering size, length or color field, colors, and installed viewing angles of identification devices. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. W.H. Brady, Industrial Safety Supply, EMED Co., or Seton Nameplate. 1.03 SCHEDULES A. Submit valve and damper schedule for each system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve and damper number, system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve and damper (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves and dampers that are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data. B. Submit sample of each type of identification product and clearly identify the contents in a schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE MARKERS A. Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi-rigid snap-on or self-sticking, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. B. Provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location or self-sticking pipe markers, fastened in the following method: 1. Snap-on application ofpre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Secure to piping and install banding tape on both ends of each pipe label. C. Lettering shall be manufacturer's pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance. D. Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic or on banding tape. 105191-1 15075-1 ~~~~~ SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 2446. PEAR 2~, AM ~r~3each pipe and ductwork marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, integrally with CITY CI.E~~ g system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic or on `~A C~~ ~~ ding tape. 2.02 EQUIPMENT MARKERS A. Provide engraved signage nameplates and tags constructed ofmulti-layered acrylic that has been treated for outdoor use and can withstand temperatures up to 160° F. Nameplates shall have beveled edges with contrasting color core, letters, and border. Minimum size of nameplate shall be 2" high by 6" long. Attachment shall be by screws. For equipment that doesn't allow for direct attachment, furnish sheet metal backing to integrate with equipment such that signage can be read from 5 feet above the finished floor. Unless noted otherwise, signage shall be provided with black lettering, black border, and yellow core. All signage shall include up to 14 characters per line, minimum 3 lines per tag. Furnish signage for the following equipment: 1. All pumps shall include the full name description for system served such as "Primary Chilled Water Pump -1. " 2. All air handling unit filter sections shall be labeled with the exact quantity of filters, size, and type of filter such as "14 - 24 "x24 "x2'; 30% Pleated Filters. " B. All equipment shall be named consistent with the plans and specifications as indicated on the schedules or as directed by the Owner. 2.03 BRASS VALVE AND DAMPER TAGS A. Provide manufacturer's standard brass valve and damper tags with stamped black filled lettering, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high, and with 3/16" hole for fastener. B. Provide 1-1/2" round brass tags with black lettering. Seton 250 BL or equal. 2.04 VALVE AND DAMPER TAG FASTENERS A. Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain or solid brass S-hooks of sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves and dampers, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. 2.05 VALVE AND DAMPER SCHEDULE FRAMES A. For each page of schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSD-grade sheet glass. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion 105191-1 15075-2 - - - .- ~. SECTION 15075 ~~ # ~~°--~ MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION Z~u6 ~e~~ 2 ~f c~~t~ig~~d painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. c»~Y c~LF - - 101~+/r^ (~~~al~~narkers on each system, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. C. Locate pipe markers as follows: wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine __. rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) above lay-in type ceilings and exterior non-concealed locations. 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures, mark each pipe at branch where there could be question of flow pattern. 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, (both sides) or center non- accessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. At each pipe passage to underground. 7. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. 8. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, maximum spacing of 20' along each piping run. 9. Where self-sticking labels are used, the pipe or its covering surface shall be properly prepared. This consists of removal of loose dirt, oil and grease, loose paint or peeling insulation covering. This can be done with a brush and cloth; washing is not required. Use solvent for removal of oil or grease. 10. Banding tape must be used on both ends of all self-sticking labels. The tape shall encircle the pipe completely and overlap itself so the banding tape can adhere to itself. D. Provide valve tags for all major valves 3/4" size or larger. Included are all main, zone and branch valves, valves in all equipment rooms, etc. All types of valves, ball, globe, butterfly, cocks, control, regulating, relief, reducing, solenoid, etc. are to be identified except check valves. Do not identify end use point valves for plumbing fixtures, and similar rough-in connections. E. Provide damper tags on all automatic control dampers, motorized dampers, and smoke dampers. F. List each tagged valve and damper in schedule for each system showing function and location. Provide separate charts for plumbing and mechanical divisions of work. Charts shall be installed on a conspicuous wall in the main mechanical equipment room. Provide unframed copies of valve and damper lists as part of closeout documents. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions. B. Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve schedules. 3.03 PIPING DUCTWORK, AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 105191-1 15075-3 SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Piping systems that shall be identified by their controls (including directional arrows) on this project shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Heating water (supply and return). B. Equipment/Ductwork 1. Exhaust fans. 2. Provide name plates for all equipment scheduled on the drawings. Coordinate nameplate tag with Owner's sequencing system. If the Owner has no preference, the nameplates shall correspond with the equipment schedule. ~- END OF SECTION 15075 _ Q ~ a rn ` ~ C -=-i C` tv ~ G rn ~ a ~'~'} ~ ~~ ?~ m w w 105191-1 15075-4 SECTION 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART1 GENERAL F!y ~o 2G~~ iiAR 28 Ail 8~ 33 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Gf I \~ ~` t~#~ ~o~r4~A c~T~; ~owA A. Provide equipment, materials, labor and supervision necessary to install insulation to hot and cold surfaces of piping, tanks, ductwork, fittings and other surfaces. B. Insulation shall include insulating materials, jackets, adhesive, mastic coatings, tie wire and other materials as required to complete the insulating work. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Insulating materials, jackets and mastics shall meet flame spread, fuel contribution and smoke developed ratings in accordance with NFPA-90A. Flame spread rating in accordance with NFPA 255, ASTM E-84 or UL 723 of not more than 25; smoke developed rating of not more than 50, unless otherwise noted in this section. B. Insulation that has been treated with aflame-retardant additive to meet the flame spread and smoke developed ratings shown above is not permitted. C. Insulation materials shall be noncorrosive to the materials they are applied to, including stress corrosion cracking of stainless steel, and shall not breed or promote fungus and bacteria. D. Insulation shall meet or exceed all requirements of ASHRAE/IES 90.1. 1.03 QUALIFICATION A. Insulating materials by Owens-Corning, Armstrong, Pittsburgh-Corning, Knauf, Rubatex, Schuller, CertainTeed Manson, Pabco, Thermacor or approved equivalent. B. Mastics and adhesives as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, flame spread and smoke development rating, k-value, density, temperature limitations, sound absorption coefficients, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION A. Description Type A: Preformed, sectional, heavy density fiberglass insulation, suitable for operating temperatures form -20° F to +850° F. Equipped with factory-applied, all-service vapor barrier jacket constructed of white Kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn, with pressure-sensitive, self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Thermal conductivity of 0.23 BTU-in/hr-ftz-°F @ 75° F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.02 perms. Schuller "Micro-Lok AP-T" or approved equivalent. 105191-1 15080-1 ~~~~~ SECTION 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION 2aa6 MaR 28 AM ~: ~~ Type B: Flexible, elastomeric pipe and sheet insulation with expanded, closed-cell structure. Suitable for operating temperatures from -40° F to 220° F. Outdoor CITY CLERK applications, and where otherwise noted, shall receive aweather-resistant, protective, (Q~/A (;(~ (()~(A vinyl-lacquer finish. Thermal conductivity of 0.28 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F @ 75° F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.20 perms. Insulation shall be equivalent to Armstrong AP Armaflex; adhesive equivalent to Armstrong 520; finish equivalent to Armstrong WB Armaflex finish. 3. Type C: Flexible, elastomeric thermal insulation with an expanded, closed-cell structure. Pre-slit tubular form with apressure-sensitive adhesive strip for closure and vapor sealing of the longitudinal joint. Butt joints, sealed with 3M-471 tape. White color. Suitable for operating temperature of 40° F to 200° F. Thermal conductivity of 0.28 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.20 perms. Insulation shall be Armstrong Self-Seal Armaflex 2000 or approved equivalent. 4. TYpe D: Dow Tryme-2000 with Saran vapor retarder film and tape or approved equal Type E: Preformed, rigid, cellular glass for operating temperature of -290° F to +1000° F. Thermal conductivity of 0.35 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F @ 75° F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.00 perms. Pittsburgh-Corning "FOAMGLAS" or approved equivalent. TY~: Hydrous calcium silicate, premolded, asbestos-free, suitable for applications up to 1500° F. Thermal conductivity of .46 BTU-in/hr-ft2 °F @ 300° F mean temperature. l Insulation shall have low chloride content such that it will not cause or promote stress corrosion cracking of stainless steel. Schuller "Thermo-12/Blue" or approved equivalent. Type G: Semi-rigid fiberglass board with factory applied foil Skrim-Kraft (FSK) suitable for operating temperature of-20° F to +650° F. Thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU-in/hr- ft2-°F @ 75° F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.02 perms. Knauf "Pipe and Tank" insulation or approved equivalent. Type H: Rigid fiberglass board formed from inorganic glass fibers bonded with thermosetting fibers, 3.0 PCF, with factory applied foil Skrim-Kraft (FSK) suitable for operating temperature of -20° F to +450° F. Thermal conductivity of 0.23 BTU-in/hr-ft2- °F @ 75° F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.02 perms. Knauf "Insulation Board" or approved equivalent. Tvpe I: Fiberglass duct wrap, 1.5 PCF density, fabricated of inorganic glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin with factory applied foil Skrim-Kraft facing, suitable for operating temperature up to +250° F. Thermal conductivity of 0.26 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F @ 75° F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of 0.02 perms. Knauf "Duct Wrap" or engineer approved equivalent. - 10. ~Qe J: Flexible fiberglass duct liner, 1.5 PCF density, fabricated of inorganic glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin, with mat face suitable for air velocities up to 4000 FPM and operating temperatures up to +250° F. Thermal conductivity of 0.25 BTU-in/hr-ft2 °F @ 75° F mean temperature. Knauf "Duct Liner E-M" or engineer approved equivalent. ~. 105191-1 15080-2 SECTION 15080 F ~ ( ~ j .~ MECHANICAL INSULATION L..l 2.02 INSULATION JACKETS GQ~6 ~i~R 2$ k~ $~ 3~ A. 20-mil high impact PVC secured with spray contact adhesive. All PVC j~in~~l~~~-eet the 25/50 SDR. Manville "Zeston 2000" or equivalent. IOV'dA CITY IOWA B. 6-oz/sq yd UL listed cotton canvas fabric secured with Childers CP50 lagging adhesive. C. Fitting and valve jackets shall be premolded PVC with joints and seams sealed with a spray contact adhesive or vapor barrier mastic. Premolded jackets shall be Manville "Zeston 2000" or approved equivalent. D. At wall penetrations and on exterior pipe, provide an additional jacket of 0.010 inch thick, Type 304 stainless steel secured with 0.010 inch thick, 3/8" wide S.S. bands. Metal jacket shall have factory applied moisture barrier. Fitting and valve covers to be preformed of same material as adjacent metal jacket. E. Where PVC or metal jackets are used, delete the factory applied ASJ on pipe and equipment operating above 75° F. F. PVC jackets shall be used in the following areas and systems: 1. Whenever piping is routed exposed through occupied spaces. 2. Exposed piping in kitchens and dishwasher rooms. 3. Premolded PVC at all fittings and valve jackets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Use only experienced applicators regularly engaged in the trade. Rough work will be rejected. Application details shall be in accordance with the insulation materials supplier's recommendations, except where a higher standard is specified. B. Install materials after systems have been tested and approved. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be removed form surfaces to be insulated. C. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry at all times. D. Where pipes and ducts pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, a fire seal shall be provided. E. When flexible cellular insulation is used, it shall be installed with seams and joints sealed with contact adhesive. 1. Wherever possible, the insulation shall be placed over the pipe before it is installed. Seal the butt joints with Armstrong 520 adhesive, or equal. 2. Where the insulation cannot be slipped on, cut the insulation longitudinally and apply it to the piping. Seal longitudinal seam and butt joints with Armstrong 520 adhesive, or equal. In all cases, the insulation, equal to Armstrong Rigid Armaflex, protected with half-round PVC sleeves the length of three times the nominal pipe size, minimum length to be 8 inches. 105191-1 15080-3 ~~~~~ SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION Z04~~~ ~8 1?~~EQLATION INSTALLATION C~-~ GLC~K Insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections and expansion joints with 'O~A ~~~, `~emolded or mitered segments of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering. B. Pipe insulation shall continue through sleeves and hangars with vapor barrier and/or jacket. C. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following: 1. Pipe used solely for fire protection. 2. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures, except exposed hot water supply and trap to fixtures for use by the physically handicapped. 3. Vertical portions of interior roof drains. 4. Sanitary drain lines. 5. Vents and water hammer arrestors. D. Insert to be between support shield and piping but under the finish jacket. Provide an insert at _ hangars not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used. E. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions. 1. On hot systems where fittings are to be left exposed, insulation ends shall be beveled away from bolts for easy access. 2. On cold systems, valve stems shall be sealed with caulking which allows free movement of the stem, but provides a seal against moisture incursion. F. For outdoor pipe insulation, increase pipe insulation thickness by ''/z" from thickness listed in schedule. ~- G. Type E and F insulation, 4" or more thick, shall be installed in two or more layers, maximum of 3" thick each with staggered joints. Insulation segments to be held in place with 16-gauge galvanized wire, 12" o.c., with skim coat of cement applied over the outer layer. H. Exterior metal jackets shall overlap at longitudinal and circumferential joints not less than 2", and shall be secured with bands at not more than 12" centers. Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and shall be located at 4 or 8 o'clock positions. Joints shall be sealed with a moisture barrier. Installation shall include provision for thermal expansion. I. Wherever piping penetrates a floor or is exposed in a finished area such as kitchens, furnish a floor pipe escutcheon and/or PVC (white) jacket to protect insulation and allow for a smooth finish for cleaning. 3.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Do not insulate factory-insulated equipment. B. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring and beveling insulation, if necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires or bands. 105191-1 15080-4 SECTION 15080 r { ~-- ~ MECHANICAL INSULATION ~ ~ ~~"`~ ~ ~'~ C. Fill joints, cracks, seams and depressions with bedding compound to fo~~`!l~~~~'rf. ~~ 3 cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement. ,-~-~; r, r~// C3 ! t ~LEr~ i~~ D. Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with'/4" coat of insulating c~~~a~pil"~-,1A~8~~ layers, if non-faced insulation is used. E. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such. F. When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for maintenance, repair or cleaning such as at manway covers or strainer plugs, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage. Removable insulation shall have avapor-proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. G. Joints shall be sealed with 2" wide vapor barrier tape or strips to match insulation jacket, using a fire-resistive adhesive. 3.04 DUCT LINER APPLICATION A. Apply duct liner with coat or surface designed to be exposed, facing the air stream and adhered with 100% coverage of fire-retardant adhesive. When width exceeds 12" or height exceeds 24", additionally secure liner with mechanical fasteners spaced on 12" maximum centers. Fasteners shall start within 3" of leading edge of transverse joints. Coat exposed joints and edges of transverse joints with afire-retardant adhesive. B. Apply apparatus casing liner same as item A above and apply'/z" mesh galvanized, 16 gauge wire over the entire surface and fasten with speed washers. C. Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions, and sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct lining. 3.05 DUCT COVERING APPLICATION A. Covering shall be cut slightly longer than circumference of duct to ensure full thickness at corners. -- Insulation shall be applied with edges tightly banded, and shall be adhered to duct with fire- resistant adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied so that insulation conforms to duct surfaces uniformly and firmly. B. In addition to the adhesive, the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of ducts 18" or wider by means of welded pins and speed clips. The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off flush after the speed clips have been applied. The vapor barrier facing shall be thoroughly sealed with a vapor barrier mastic and tape where the pins have pierced through. The vapor barrier shall be continuous to prevent condensation. Insulation shall not be compressed at any location so as to reduce insulating characteristics. C. Joints shall be sealed with 2" wide pressure-sensitive tape or vapor barrier tape or strips, using a fire-resistive adhesive. Cuts or tears shall be sealed with strips of vapor barrier jacket applied with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 3.06 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE 105191-1 15080-5 SERVICE SECTION 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION INSULATION TYPE THICKNESS Heating Hot Water g ,~z~~ 3.07 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE SERVICE Air Separators < 28" Diameter Air Separators > 28" Diameter 3.08 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE SERVICE Exhaust Ducts (upstream of EF-1) END OF SECTION 15080 J ''/z., _ C~ ~£ ~ ~ ~' ~ _ ~ ~ C7 ~~ N c~ ~ rn ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ `•" D w TYPE A I TYPE THICKNESS PIPE SIZES Up to 1" THICKNESS 1'/z" 1'/z" 105191-1 15080-6 SECTION 15105 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ t_~ PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 2QJ6 ~i~R 28 Ali 8= 33 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~~U`v~ CITY IQVVA A. Provide equipment, materials, tools, labor, and supervision necessary to furnish, fabricate, and install complete piping system. 1.02 STANDARDS AND CODES A. Pipe materials specified in this Section shall apply to technical sections of Division 15 of the Project Manual where applicable. Special requirements as may be called for in the technical sections, or shown on the Drawings, shall take precedence over General Requirements herein. Piping located in plenums shall be plenum rated for fire and smoke. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. B. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. C. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit piping schedule listing each pipe material used and systems served. B. Submit shop drawings at'/4" per foot scale indicating exact routing and elevations for all piping systems. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL p. Material Service 1. Copper water tube, hard temper, ASTM B88. a. Type L Heating Hot Water B. Fittings 1. Copper water tube, cast bronze or wrought copper, solder joint type. ANSI B16.18 and B 16.22. 105191-1 15105-1 ~IL~a SECTION 15105 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 206 ~9AR 2 ~. ~-~ .~oi ~ ~ CITY CLER Copper water and drainage tube -use 95-5 tin antimony or silver solder, cut pipe square, ~~~~ Ci~ l ~+ ~ ~A clean and polish tube ends and inner surface of fittings, apply flux and solder joint as recommended by manufacturer of solder type fittings. Use same methods for copper refrigerant pipe, except use silver solder with 15% silver content, equivalent to Sil-Floc 15. D. Nipples and Unions 1. Nipples shall conform to size, weight, and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1-1/2", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. 2. For pipe 3" and smaller, use screwed unions; over 3", use flanged unions. For steel and wrought iron pipe, use malleable iron ground joint unions, black or galvanized, to conform to pipe. Cast iron flanged unions are to be gasket type. For threaded brass pipe, use bronze ground joint unions with octagon ends. Install unions on equipment intended to be disassembled. 3. Dielectric unions shall not be installed. Install victaulic "waterway" fittings or brass or bronze transitions fittings between connections of copper pipe and existing ferrous piping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pipe for plumbing and mechanical systems as shown on the Drawings, as called for in other Sections, and as specified herein. B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated, straight, plumb, and asdirect aspossible, --- form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls, partitions, and ceilings, offsetting only where necessary to follow walls and avoid interference with other mechanical items. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. C. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. Branch piping shall come off the tops of mains unless shown otherwise. D. Locate valves within reachable distance from equipment being served for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. E. Check piping for interference with other trades; avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. F. Where rough-ins are required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough-in dimensions with Owner or equipment supplier before roughing-in. 105191-1 15105-2 SECTION 15105 ~l ~~"- ~~ PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS , ~~t~~ ~s G. Install automatic temperature control valves, separable wells, huM'3'fllf es~ ~Y`egssu~re t p s aid other items as called for and furnished by the temperature controls section. ~ , r, GIT ~ ~~.~'FnnK ee__ H. All fiberglass piping located outside shall be coated to protect pip[4~n~Yiarkl~'~~I'roduct shall be approved by piping manufacturer for specific application. 3.02 PIPING TESTS ALL HEATING SYSTEMS PIPING A. Test pressure piping in accordance with ANSI B31. B. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test piping system before insulation is installed whenever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water or air and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time. Required test period is 2 hours. 2. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 25-psi test pressure. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. C. Repair piping systems sections that fail the required piping test, by disassembly and reinstallation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. D. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. E. Heating system pipes are to be thoroughly flushed and cleaned prior to being put into service. The flushing water must not go through any air handler, chiller, boiler, cooling or heating coils, terminal - heating coils, or unit heaters. Strainer screens are to be removed prior to the flushing operation and are to be replaced when the flushing operation has been completed. As soon as possible after the flushing has been completed, the lines are to be filled with treated water to avoid the creation of a corrosive environment inside the pipes. Flushing operations are to be reviewed with and approved by the Owner's representative prior to any flushing operation. Pipe scale, welding slag, and any other debris shall be removed from pipes. The Owner's representative shall determine when the flushing operation is complete. END OF SECTION 15105 105191-1 15105-3 SECTION 15106 `- ~ t .~~~ PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 2006 BAR 28 Aid 8~ 33 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Cil i~(' CLERK iOWA CITY, IOV'JA A. Provide equipment, materials, labor and supervision necessary to install pipe hangers and supports. _ B. Pipe support systems shall secure pipes in place, prevent pipe vibration, provide vertical adjustment for maintaining required grades, and provide for expansion and contraction. C. Where supports are attached to concrete or other structural members, care shall be taken to prevent damage or weakening of the structural members. D. Where concrete inserts are to be used, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to accurately locate and attach inserts to concrete forms. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute, ANSI: _ _ 1. ANSI B31.1: Power Piping. B. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, MSS, 1815 North Fort Myer Drive, Arlington, VA 22209. 1. MSS SP-58: Pipe Hangers and Supports -Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP-69: Pipe Hangers and Supports -Selection and Application. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers and support devices shall be Grinnell, Fee and Mason, Michigan, B-Line or approved equivalent. Figure numbers based on Grinnell. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORTS -- A. Hanger rods for steel, wrought iron and brass pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: __ Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing Up to 1 '/4" 3/8" 8'-0" 1 ''/2" and 2" 3/8" 10'-0" 2 ''/z" and 3" ''/z" 10'-0" 105191-1 15106-1 FI~..~D 2006 l9AR 28 AP4 8~ 33 Pipe Size CITY CLERk~" and 5" I~JV~IA CITY, I ,'A 10" and 12" 14" and 16" 18" 20" and 24" 3.02 SECTION 15106 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing 5/8" 12'-0" 7/8" 14'-0" 7/8" 16'-0" 1" 16'-0" 1 1 /8" 18' -0" 1 '/4" 20'-0" B. if-Ianger rods for copper pipe and tube shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing Up to 1" 3/8" 6'-8" 1'/4" and 1'/2" 3/8" 8'-0" 2" 3/8" 9'-0" 2'/s" ''/2" 9'-0" 3" and 4" %" 10'-0" C. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe with two hangers for each pipe length. Locate hangers close to couplings. D. In addition to the above specified spacings, install additional hangers at change in pipe direction and at concentrated loads, large valves and strainers. E. Where more than one pipe is to be run parallel together, they may be supported on trapeze type hangers. Trapeze bar angles and hanger rods shall be of sufficient size to support the particular group of pipes. Trapeze hanger spacing shall be based on the smallest pipe on the rack. When hanging from light gauge metal trusses, coordinate pipe hanger spacing and hanger rod connection points with the truss manufacturer. F. For suspending hanger rods from brackets attached to walls, use welded steel brackets; Fig. 194 for loads up to 750 lbs; Fig. 195 for loads up to 15001bs; Fig 199 for loads up to 3000 lbs. G. Where pipes are to be racked along walls, use "Unistrut" pipe racks. H. Attach all pipe hangers from support rods using double locknuts tightened to prevent loosening. INSTALLATION -VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS A. Support vertical steel, wrought iron, copper and brass pipe at every other floor line. B. Support vertical cast iron soil pipe at every floor line. C. In addition to the above, support vertical pipes at base of riser with base fitting set on concrete or brick pier, or by hanger located on horizontal connection close to riser. D. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below and support clamp extensions from inserts or other approved attachment. 105191-1 15106-2 SECTION 15106 ~~ ~ PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 3.03 PIPE ATTACHMENTS ~~~~ ~}~~'~ 28 ~~ ~' ~~ A. For horizontal steel and wrought iron pipe, use carbon steel adjustable clevis ~r~g'br,lFi[g@~$~. For floor support or support directly above steel beams, use pipe roll stand, Fi~~~ C~TY ~~~NA B. For horizontal copper pipe and tube, use copper-plated malleable iron split pipe ring with turn buckle adjuster, Figs. CT-109 and 114 combined. C. When thermal expansion for horizontal pipe is in excess of/z" axially, use adjustable swivel pipe roll, Fig. 174, or pipe roll stand, Fig. 177. D. For horizontal cast iron soil pipe, use clevis hanger, Fig. 260. E. For vertical, steel, wrought iron and cast iron pipe, use extension pipe clamps, Fig. 261. F. For vertical copper pipe and tube, use copper-plated extension pipe clamp, Fig. CT-121. 3.04 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS A. Hanger rods: use carbon steel single or double end threaded, Figs. 140, 141, 253, 254 as required. Continuous threaded rod: Fig. 146 may be used wherever possible. B. Chain wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. One pipe shall not be suspended from another pipe. 3.05 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS A. For attaching steel or copper plated hanger rods to reinforced concrete, use galvanized malleable iron concrete inserts; Fig. 282 for loads up to 1140 lbs. B. For attaching steel hanger rods to structural steel beams, use malleable iron C-clamps; Fig. 87 with retaining clip for loads up to 500 lbs; Fig. 229 with extension piece for loads up to 1,365 lbs. For - copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron C-clamps; Fig. CT-88 with hardened point cup set screw for loads up to 400 lbs. C. For attaching steel hanger rods to wood structural members, use malleable iron ceiling flange; Fig. 153 for loads up to 1,270 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron ceiling flange: Fig. CT-128R for loads up to 180 lbs. D. Vertical expansion shields or toggles shall not be used for suspending hanger rods, except with permission in cases where inserts have been omitted or cannot be used. If permitted, use expansion shields; Fig. 117 for rod sizes up to ''/z", 320 lbs. max. load. For larger rods use attachment plate, Fig. 52, with wedge anchors. E. Powder actuated anchoring methods shall not be used. 3.06 PIPE COVERING PROTECTION 105191-1 15106-3 3.07 SECTION 15106 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers and supports for insulated piping shall not injure or pierce insulation. Provide insulation protection shields in conjunction with hanger or roll device. Use Fig. 160 and 161, Protection Saddles, in cases where a vapor barrier is not required. Use Fig. 171 where a vapor barrier finish is required on the insulation. SUPPLEMENTAL STEEL A. Provide supplemental steel required to hang or support mechanical equipment or piping. END OF SECTION 15106 N O p'+ p ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ i ~ ~ m ~y. r ~ ~.iJ 105191-1 15106-4 SECTION 15107 ~ L PIPE SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND GUARDS ~~ ~--I---~-~ PART 1 GENERAL Z~i~a ~;,~~ 28 A~~ ~~ 33 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES C,~' v~~~~{ IC~W;~ ~~TY, IOWA A. Provide materials, equipment, labor, and supervision necessary o costa pipe sleeves, escutcheons, and guards as required by the Drawings and this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data, assembly-type shop drawings, and maintenance data. B. Submit fire stop shop drawings showing each condition requiring penetration seals in dictating proposed UL systems materials, anchorage, methods of installation, and actual adjacent construction. C. Submit a copy of UL illustration of each proposed firestop system indicating manufacturer approved modifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SLEEVES A. Sleeves passing through non-load bearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: For pipes 2-1/2" in size and smaller - 24-gauge; 3 in. to 6 in. - 22-gauge; over 6 in. - 20-gauge. B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings, and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material. D. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, partitions and ceilings, and shall extend 1/2 in. above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1 in. above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water and fill space between sleeves and pipe with graphite packing and caulking compound. E. Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or roofing shall be flashed and sealed. 2.02 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS -- A. Provide pipe escutcheons with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extensions, if any. Furnish pipe _. escutcheons with chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. B. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged. 105191-1 15107-1 ~~~("`~ SECTION 15107 1..~ PIPE SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND GUARDS ~a~6 MA~ 2$ ~~.$' $"Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. . tJC~~ (;L~ Manufacturer: Chicago Specialty; Producers Specialty; or Sanitary-Dash. 14`Z:03 ~j~` GUAvRDS ~, A. Where exposed insulated piping extends through floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation to extend up from floor 60 inches. Guard to be galvanized sheet steel not less than 26-gauge. 2.04 FIRE SAFING A. Metal piping and sleeves passing through floors, roof, partitions and fire walls, shall be provided with firestop by packing space between pipe and sleeve with UL listed non-sag and self-leveling fire safing insulation per manufacturer's instructions. B. Plastic piping passing through fire rated floors and fire rated walls shall be provided with firestop by providing intumescent wrap strip around the pipe, enclosed in steel collar attached to structure. C. Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4" Diameter: Use non-sag or self-leveling putty or caulking, one- piece intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL listed. D. Openings 4" or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test in accordance with ASTM E814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350°F (121 to 177°C), UL listed. E. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective barrier against smoke, fire, toxic and combustible gases. F. Unless protected, from possible loading or traffic, install firestopping materials in floors having void openings or four (4) inches or more to support the same floor load requirements. G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide non-sag and self-leveling fire barrier caulk, wrap/strip, moldable putty and sheet forms of one of the following: 1. 3M Brand. 2. Flame Stop. 3. Dow Corning. 4. Metacaulk. 2.05 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. B. Manufacturer: Thunderline. '. J 105191-1 15107-2 - - SECTION 15107 ~+~~~ PIPE SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND GUARDS I PART 3 EXECUTION ZQD6 ~r~R 28 A~ 8~ 33 3.01 SLEEVES CIT'Y~ (;~~~}~ - ~OUVA CiT1' IOWA A. Install sleeves for piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams, and foun a4ions. B. Install fire-proofing per manufacturer's written instructions. 3.02 ESCUTCHEONS - A. Install escutcheons for pipes entering finished spaces. 3.03 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install mechanical sleeve seals at all pipe penetrations through foundations below grade. __ B. Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe and bolts and pressure plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form watertight seal. 3.04 PIPE PENETRATIONS A. Penetrations shall be free of debris and dirt. Dam the penetration (when required) with an -- acceptable material. Apply firestop material to the penetration per manufacturer's installation instructions. Use a caulking gun, putty knife or other normal trade tools. Remove damming materials where necessary after cure. Clean up with Xylene. 3.05 FIRE SAFING --- A. Install fire safing at all penetrations through walls, floors, etc. per manufacturer's installation instructions as required to meet UL listing. END OF SECTION 15107 105191-1 15107-3 SECTION 15110 F ~ ~ ~ ~~ VALVES - PART 1 GENERAL ~~06 ~t!'t~ 2 $ ~~ $ ~ 3 ~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~(~~ LLE~~ ___ (~W~ C(TY, (OWA A. Provide equipment, materials, labor, and supervision necessary to install valves as indicated on drawings and in schedules, and herein specified. B. As nearly as possible, valves of the same type shall be of a single manufacturer. Valves shall conform to ANSI standard dimensions. -- 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit detailed Shop Drawings and Product Data clearly indicating manufacturer, model, size, - dimensions and pressure rating. B. Submit valve schedule, indicting valve ID, type, size and intended service and location. 1.03 PACKAGING _ A. Valves shall be furnished or provided with protective packaging to prevent damage during shipping or on the job site. 1.04 DEFINITIONS S.P. - Saturated Steam Pressure - W.P. - Working Pressure W.O.G. - Water, Oil, Gas Pressure BR. - Bronze I.B.B.M. - Iron Body, Bronze-Mounted O.S.&Y. - Outside Screw and Yoke --- N.R.S. - Non-Rising Stem R.S. - Rising Stem M.S.S. - Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc. - PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by one of the following, as listed for each valve type, or Engineer-approved equivalent. 105191-1 15110-1 f~ ~ F1! SECTION 15110 -. VALVES . _._ 2~~6 ~~~ ~~ A~ ~; 3 3 Valve T pe Approved Manufacturer ~,~, ~~~R~ Ball Valves Apollo, Milwaukee, Watts, Powell, or NIBCO IOV~o~iTY, AL _ A. Materials: Discs, gaskets, packings, seats, diaphragms and lubricants shall conform to recommendations of the valve manufacturer for the intended use. B. Body materials, unless otherwise stated: 1. Bronze: 125-1501bs., ASTM B62 2. Iron: 200-3001bs., ASTM B61 3. Cast Iron: ASTM A126, Class B 4. Cast Iron: ASTM 448 5. Ductile Iron: ASTM A395 6. Cast Steel: ASTM A216 2.03 BALL VALVES - - A. 2 in. and smaller: ASTM B584 bronze body, 2-piece, full port stainless steel ball, screwed or soldered ends with teflon seats and seals, blow out proof stem, tee or lever handle rated to 150 _- SWP/600W06. ', 2.04 HANDWHEELS, OPERATORS, HANDLES, AND WRENCHES A. Provide suitable handwheels for gate, globe and drain valves. B. Provide one gas cock wrench for every 10 gas cocks sized 2 in. and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each gas cock sized over 2 in. with a wrench, with set screw. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VALVE LOCATIONS -GENERAL A. Unless otherwise noted, shutoff valves shall be provided at all equipment connections (supply and return where applicable) for the following piping: pump suction and discharge, water, air, steam, condensate, fuel and gas and drain lines (except on gravity drains from pans). Equipment connections include such items as coils, condensers, tanks, pumps, heat exchangers, and similar items. B. Check valves of the non-slam type shall be installed at the discharge of pumps unless otherwise shown on the drawings. C. Install isolation valves at each branch off of horizontal mains and vertical risers. - 105191-1 15110-2 -- SECTION 15110 F~ ~,~' ~ J VALVES 2~~~ #~~.~~F 29 A~-A ~~ 34 -- D. All valves 4 in. and larger used for dead end service (future connections) shall be butterfly type (high performance), lugged style with tapped holes in a wafer bodyy.~ ~ ~{ (~1+ __. 3.02 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ~~~~ C~ I ~!' (~U,~A A. Follow the manufacturer's recommended installation instructions concerning soldering, silver ____ brazing, welding, threading, and installation of flanged valves in order to prevent damage to the valve and assure its maximum efficiency. Additional specific installation requirements are as follows: 1. Thread pipe for threaded valves to standard length only, using new block dies. 2. Put pipe compound on the pipe end, not into the valve threads. Securely screw pipe and - - valve together. 3. Blow out or otherwise thoroughly clean pipe sections before they are installed. 4. Close valve before installation. 5. Secure and adjust valves for no leaks and for easy operation. 6. Install valves with stems horizontal or vertical above the pipe and square with building construction. 7. Install valves so piping does not place a stress or strain on the valve body. 8. Install extended-stem valves where insulation is indicated. Stems shall be extended such that the handle moves freely without contact with the insulation. 9. Install drain valves at low points of piping, at each mechanical equipment item, and elsewhere, where indicated. 10. Locate valves, cock, and hose bibbs to allow easy accessibility for operation, maintenance and repair. 11. Lugged butterfly valves with rubber-lined seats shall be installed with the disc(s) partially open. Bolts shall be torqued to the manufacturers recommendations. 3.03 PROVISION FOR WRENCHES A. One operating wrench shall be provided for every 10 valves of each type not equipped with handwheels or levers. A minimum of two wrenches shall be provided for each type of valve. 3.04 SPECIAL OPERATORS FOR 1/4 TURN PRODUCTS A. Special slow closing operators shall be provided for quick closing valves to prevent the destructive fluid action of "water hammer" effects. 1. Steam under 50 PSI and incompressible fluids: As recommended by the manufacturer. 105191-1 15110-3 SECTION 15110 VALVES 3.05 END OF SECTION 15110 _ N Q O O'+ _~ N - .~ m ~ ~ ~ j ~ D w r 2. Steam 50 PSI and over: Gear operators on all valves 10 in. and up. Under 10 in., operators as recommended by the manufacturer. VALVE SCHEDULE Valve Type Service Ball - 2 in. and Under Water for HVAC piping systems; for operation up to 200 psi at 500° F. 105191-1 15110-4 (~ ""- SECTION 15120 ! ~ ~ _~ HYDRONIC SPEC[ALTIES 473 ~~a~ ~~ ~;~3 ~~ 34 -- PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES tiC~~/ C"~~~\ lOt~'J~ CIS, IOWA A. Provide material, equipment, labor, and supervision necessary to install hydronic specialties as required by the Drawings and this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data which shall include product description, manufacturer, model, dimensions, size, and performance data. B. Submit manufacturer's installation and maintenance data. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. AIR VENTS B. Manual air vents shall be equivalent to Spirotherm Spirotop. C. Automatic Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically with float principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated for 125 psi, minimum 3/4" NPS inlet and outlet connections. Equivalent to Bell & Gossett #7 or #87 (#107A for high capacity where noted on Drawings), with copper overflow connection. D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide vent valves by Bell & Gossett- ITT Fluid Handling Division, Hoffman Specialty-ITT Fluid Handling Divisions, Spirax/Sarco, Watson-McDaniel Co., or an engineer-approved equivalent. -- 2.02 FLOW BALANCING A. Calibrated Balance Valves (Ball Type) with Flow Meter Fittings: 1. Provide as indicated, calibrated balance valves equipped with readout ports to facilitate connecting of differential pressure meter to balance valves. Valves shall provide precise _ flow measurement, precision flow balancing and positive shut-off with no drip seat. Valves shall have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and then re- opened to set point without disturbing balance position. Provide calibrated nameplate or division ring scale to indicate degree ofprecision-machined orifice. Valves to be leak tight at full-rated working pressure. All valves to be provided with molded insulation to permit access for balancing and readout. - 2. Circuit setters need not be line size, but shall be sized for specific application. 3. Provide balancing devices designed for low flow applications for flows 1 GPM and lower. 4. Manufacturer: 105191-1 15120-1 SECTION 15120 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide calibrated balance valves by Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Griswold, Taco, Inc., or an engineer-approved equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents for each element of radiation coils at all high points in mains, branches, run outs and at other points likely to entrap air. B. Install automatic air vents in boiler and equipment rooms, at points where supply and return lines rise or drop. Extend '/4" copper overflow line to floor drain and elbow into drain. C. Install calibrated balance valves with flow meter fittings at each terminal unit and elsewhere as indicated. D. Install control valves, flow switches, temperature sensor walls, gauge taps, flow meters, etc., provided by Temperature Controls Installer. END OF SECTION 15120 _ © ~ o ~~ ~ .~ ~~ ca ~ . ~ ~ ~ ~~ T~ ca r 105191-1 15120-2 SECTION 15810 F~ ~ ?^, 1 DUCTWORK " ~ "'`" ~ -- PART 1 GENERAL ~1~h > { ~ 2 $ ~~`i ~' ~ 4 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Li i 1J C1 -~I~r~ __ i~`JV,^ CITE IOWA A. Provide material, devices, labor, and supervision necessary to fabricate and erect ductwork as required by the Drawings and this Section. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Ducts, plenums, apparatus casings, metal gauges, reinforcing, methods of supporting and hanging, and other sheet metal work as called for shall meet all functional criteria defined in Section VII, of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" 1985 Edition. This shall be subsequently referred to as the SMACNA Manual. All ductwork must comply with all local, state and federal code requirements. B. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 91. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Air ducts for air handling systems over 2000 FPM are high velocity duct systems. All other duct systems are low velocity. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for metal ductwork materials and products. B. Shop Drawings: Submit ductwork shop drawings for entire facility, to scale, double line, indicating duct sizes, locations, fittings, equipment, accessories, structural clearances, etc. Do not install ductwork prior to approval of shop drawings by Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Shop fabricated sheet metal work shall be constructed of prime quality resquared tight coat galvanized steel, except where other type material is specified. Manufacturer's name and U.S. gauge number shall appear on each sheet. B. Duct sealant shall be installed per SMACNA Class A-all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. - C. Duct Sealant for Low Pressure Duct: UL labeled non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. Sealant to be Mastic No. - - IG601 as manufactured by Hardcast or Engineer approved equivalent product manufactured by Ductmate or United McGill. 10519]-1 15810-1 SDUCTWORKO f I L..~l_J D. Duct sealing tape and adhesive for high-pressure duct sysf~~,~f~l~st~c.~ir~}gineer approved equivalent. CITY LERK 1. Use Hardcast DT or JT pressureless tape in conjunAvtt~rdc~~esive FTA20 on all fittings and joint connections. 2. Use FTA20 full strength. Dip Hardcast tape in solution until saturated. 3. Apply two wraps of wet tape on duct joint sections and fittings. Stretch tight to assure positive adhesion contact with the duct and to smooth out wrinkles. 4. Follow manufacturer's written instructions. 2.02 DUCT A. Rectangular Duct 1. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from minimum 24 gage galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A527, lockforming quality; with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. 2. Rectangular duct shall be fabricated to the SMACNA functional criteria for the pressure class indicated on the Drawings. 3. Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. All longitudinal seams will be sealed with mastic sealant. Snaplock is not acceptable. 4. Fiberglass ductboard is not permitted. B. Rectangular Duct Fittings 1. Elbows shall be constructed with centerline radius of not less than 1.5 times duct width; where space conditions will not permit this radius or where indicated on the Drawings, square elbows with single thickness streamline turning vanes shall be used. Provide trailing edge extension for elbows in series. 2. Slopes for transitions or other changes in dimension shall be minimum 1 to 3. 3. All duct seams and joints shall be sealed to SMACNA Class A requirements. 4. Rectangular branch taps from mains shall be 45° entry fittings. C. Round Duct 1. Round Duct shall be spiral lock seam type, fabricated of galvanized steel strip with airtight four-ply lock seams Minimum 24 gage. 2. Metal gauges shall be as listed in the SMACNA Standard for the pressure class indicated on the Drawings. 105191-1 15810-2 F~~.. SECTION 15810 DUCTWORK Z~~~~ ~~.'R 28 ~f~ 8~ 34 -- 3. Round duct shall be externally insulated. D. Round Fittings `CI ~ \~ ~ `ll:- ~~fA 1~~'Jr~ GlT ., 1. Elbows for round ducts shall have a center line radius of 1.5 times the duct diameter. 2. 45° and 90° elbows for ducts up to 8" diameter shall be die stamped two-piece with welded longitudinal seams. 3. Elbows for round ducts over 8" diameter shall be formed of segments with welded seams and following numbers of segments: 90 degree elbow 5 segments 60 degree elbow 3 segments 45 degree elbow 3 segments 30 degree elbow 2 segments 22'/z degree elbow 2 segments 4. Tees, crosses and lateral cross fittings for round duct shall be of the conical type. 5. Reducers, increasers, offsets, wyes, crosses, divided flow fittings and similar fittings for round duct shall be one-piece construction with welded seams. 6. Metal gauges for fittings for round duct shall be as listed in SMACNA Standard for the pressure class indicated on the Drawings. 7. Duct and fitting welds shall be painted after fabrication to prevent corrosion where zinc has been burned by welding. 8. No bull headed tees shall be used. 9. Pipe-to-pipe joints for round ducts up to 50" diameter shall be made with male sleeve couplings reinforced by rolled bead. 10. Pipe-to-fitting joints for round ducts up to 50" diameter shall be made by slip-fit of projecting collar of fitting into the duct. 11. Slip-fit joints shall be fastened with sheet metal screws, place %" from fitting or coupling head. 12. Joints shall be sealed with duct sealant installed as recommended by the manufacturer. 13. Duct reinforcing, size of reinforcing angles and spacing shall be as recommended by SMACNA. - E. Flexible Duct: Acceptable in supply ductwork only where shown (not allowed in exposed occupied areas). Flexible duct shall include wire, core, insulation, and vapor barrier and the composite assembly shall meet requirements ofNFPA-90A and UL181 and shall be UL listed for flame spread rating of not more than 25 and smoke developed rated of not more than 50. 105191-1 15810-3 SDUCTWORKO I- I~~~ 1. Minimum length of flexible duct shall be 3 fe~~6 ~~R Zg A~ a~ 34 2. Maximum length of flexible duct shall be 8 feet. Gf-~-~/ ~~...E(~K I~VUA CITY, 40WA 3. Flexible duct shall have a minimum R-value of 4. Flexible duct shall have a maximum vapor transmission rating of .1 perms. 5. Flexible duct shall be rated for operating temperatures between -20 and 250 degrees. 6. All flexible duct shall be connected to metal fittings with cadmium plated galvanized steel strap equal to wraplock. The use of duct tape to secure the core is not acceptable. 7. Flexible duct shall have an operating positive pressure rating of 6" wg for nominal sizes 4 thru 20 inch, and a negative pressure rating of 1" wg for sizes 4 thru 12 inch and .5" wg for sizes 14 thru 20 inch. Duct shall be rated for a velocity of 5,000 feet per minute. Duct shall be equal to Thermaflex G-KM. 8. Flexible duct shall be by Thermaflex, Semco, Wiremold, Flexmaster, or Engineer approved equal. 2.03 PLENUMS AND APPARATUS CASINGS A. Plenums shall be fabricated of same material as duct connecting to plenum and shall be two metal gauges heavier than gauge of largest duct connecting to plenum. Plenums used for connecting to exterior louvers shall have all seams sealed watertight at the floor and 4 inches up the wall. In addition, plenums used for connection to exterior intake louvers shall have the floors sloped to a drain pipe connection and the drain piped to the nearest floor drain. B. Apparatus Casings shall be fabricated of not less than 18 gauge galvanized steel and shall be braced for rigidity. Bracing shall consist of not less than 2" x 2" x''/4 galvanized structural steel angles, spaced not more than 3'-0" on center. Main entry doors shall be provided for access to all apparatus and shall be fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 22 gauge galvanized steel with 1 "thick rigid glass filler. Provide 2" x 2" x'/4" galvanized welded, angle frames, hinges, airtight gaskets and two Young Regulator Co., No. 1335 or 1340 latches. 2.04 DUCTWORK SUPPORT MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 2.05 DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Manual Volume Dampers: Fabricated of same material as ducts, two metal gauges heavier than duct and hammered 1"all around, mounted on 3/8" square rod with saw slot position indicated. Pivot bearings, locking position regulator, Young Regulator Co., Series 443. 105191-1 15810-4 ^' SECTION 15810 r-~ ~ ~' ~~ ~- DUCTWORK r ~,r,.._.-~~ Where positioning regulator is not accessible, provide cot~~~re~e~~~n~od'with regulator for ceiling wall or floor installation, as required. Young Series 301 a_nd 3 J 5 f~o~,c ding, Series 409 for walls, Series 330 and 335 for floors. Ci~ ~ ~~ t-'L'-rj~ IOWA CiT ;; lOV'JA B. Turning Vanes 1. Provide double thickness streamline type, except provide single blade turning vanes with trailing edge at elbows which change dimensions or at consecutive elbows. 2. Provide manufactured turning vanes and vane runners, fabricated from the same material as the duct, and constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Tab spacing shall be SMACNA standard. Rail systems with non-standard tab spacings shall not be accepted. All tabs shall be used, do not skip tabs. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs which align the vanes automatically. Vanes shall be subjected to tensile loading and be capable of supporting 250 lbs. when fastened per the manufacturer's instructions. 3. Manufacturers of Turning Vanes: Aero Dyne; Ductmate; Anemostat; Barber Coleman; Duro Dyne; or Hart & Cooley. C. Flexible Duct Connections: 30 ounce woven glass fiber, double neoprene coated, fire retardant, waterproof and airtight, suitable for temperatures to 200° F, UL approved. Ventfabric, Inc., Ventglass, Duro Dyne, Ductmate or American/Blgin. D. Access Doors and Panels: Shall be of same material as ducts in which they are installed, fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 22 gauge, with 1" thick rigid glass fiber filler. Provide sheet metal frame, airtight gasket and two Young Regulator Company No. 1330 latches. Access doors and panels shall be 2 inches smaller than duct width and square. Maximum size shall be 24" x 24" unless noted otherwise. Pre-manufactured doors shall be hinged and shall be of adequate size to allow easy access to hardware which needs to be maintained. E. Quadrant Locks: 1. Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". 2. Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork. F. Transverse Duct Joints: May be made with the Ductmate Systems or an Engineer approved equivalent. The Ductmate Systems are to be used in accordance with the Ductmate factory installation and assembly instructions, (1-800-245-3188). 1. Ductmate 440 or a Butyl Rubber Gasket which meets Mil-C 18969B, Type II Class B, T- C-1796 A, Type II Class B, and TTS-S-001657 must also pass UL-723. This material, in -- addition to the above, shall not contain vegetable oils, fish oils, or any other type vehicle that will support fungal and/or bacterial growth associated with dark, damp areas of ductwork. The recommended test procedure for bacterial and fungal growth is found in 21CFR 177,1210 closures with sealing gaskets for food containers. 105191-1 15810-5 SECTION 15810 DUCTWORK 2. Ductmate or W.D.C.I. proprietary duct connection systems are acceptable. Duct constructed using these systems shall refer to the manufacturer's guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcements. Formed on flanges (T.D.C./T.D.F./T-25A/T-25B) are acceptable. Formed on flanges shall be constructed as SMACNA T-25 flanges, whose limits are defined on Page 1.36 1985 SMACNA Manual First Edition. No other construction pertaining to formed on flanges, will be accepted. Formed on flanges shall be accepted for use on ductwork 42" wide or less, 2" static positive pressure or less, and shall include the use of corners, bolts and cleat. (Over 42", the reinforcement/joint deflection criteria no longer conform with the UMC). G. Insulated Roof Cap: Provide insulated roof caps with 3 inches of R-5 insulation fastened to the underside of the cap to maintain the thermal integrity of the roof/structure. Roof cap shall be constructed with structural steel reinforcements to prevent damage and shall be continuous across the cap. The cap flanges shall be welded at the seams for a watertight installation. Cap shall be fastened down to curb with a minimum of 4 screws every 24" around the cap perimeter. H. Gooseneck: Provide gooseneck air intake/exhaust where noted on drawings. Duct passing through roof /roof membrane shall maintain the net area through the roof and shall terminate with a 180 degree gooseneck in accordance with SMACNA. Construction shall have waterproof seems and joints. Gooseneck shall include miscellaneous support steel and''/z inch bird screen. Coordinate exact size and roof curb requirements with the General Contractor. I. Backdraft Damper: Furnish and install aheavy-duty counterbalanced bacjuiraft da>~er with steel frame and steel airfoil type 18 gauge steel blades. Blades shall have EPD~~~s atjamb seals and be spaced a maximum width of 7" with'/< inch diameter plated steel he~aring~hall be ball bearings pressed into the frame. Damper shall be Ruskin CBS8 or ~ ed o~ual. PART 3 EXECUTION ~ m, 3.01 INSTALLATION ~~ w A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve airtight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. B. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with form work, as required to avoid delays in work. C. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. D. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block 105191-1 15810-6 -- SECTION 15810 ~~ ~ ~ C~ DUCTWORK -- access for servicing building and its equipment. Install offsets, are~,~at~~t~sit-ro~~-s~'s t~-~y be required to avoid interferences with other work, install streamlined easements around obstructions where necessary to pass obstructions through ducts. Maintain full cap~tif'~da~c~s~'~~bfrfIs~ets, - angles, transitions and easements, except where Drawings indicated u~t",f~r~ic~pga~~~easing transitions. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. E. Limit clearance to ''/z" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1"clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. F. Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal the space between the construction opening and the duct or duct-plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of the same gauge as the duct. Overlap the opening on all sides by at least 1'/2". G. Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, equipment, controls and other associated work of the ductwork system. H. Install manual volume dampers in all supply, return and exhaust duct systems as required for controlling air volumes to trunk ducts, branch ducts, outlets and inlets. Contractor shall install a complete system of dampers as required for balancing air systems. I. Install access panels for inspection and servicing of duct mounted equipment; reheat coils, sound attenuators, and smoke and fire dampers. J. Install flexible connections in ducts at connections to plenums, apparatus casings, fan housings, roof top units, air handling units, exhaust fans and other equipment which could transmit vibrations to the duct systems. Crimp into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibration of connected equipment. K. Each duct section shall be rigidly supported from structure. Attach hangers to structure with - expansion plugs, concrete inserts, beam clamps or other approved means. Rubber-in-shear isolators shall be installed in hangers for ducts in equipment rooms, to prevent vibration transmission to the structure. L. Install as indicated on the Drawings duct mounted equipment as specified in other Sections. M. Duct sizes shown on Drawings are net inside dimensions. Increase duct sizes as required to allow for installation of duct liner, where specified. N. Install turning vanes in all square or rectangular 90° elbows in supply, return, and exhaust air systems. 105191-1 15810-7 SECTION 15810 DUCTWORK O. Application of Duct Sealant: All ducts to be properly sealed. Specified duct sealant to be pumped or painted into all joints and seams on all ductwork systems. Sealant shall be allowed to set 48 hours before any air pressure is applied to system. P. Installation of Flexible Ducts: Flexible Ducts are to be installed only where indicated on Drawings. N 1. Maximum length of flexible duct is 8'-0" OAL. ~ p ~ C? ~ 2. Minimum length of flexible duct is 3'-0" OAL. D ~ ~ --~-~ ~ tv 3. Square to round transition gages to comply with SMACNA rectan~l~duc~min~n 24 ga) ~ ~ ~ 4. Flexible duct must meet UL 181 and be installed per SMACNA u a clams for securing duct to collar and a supplemental clamp for securing the insulatio and vaparrier. 5. Support flexible ductwork with minimum 2" wide sheet metal bands, secured to structure with ductwork support materials. Maximum spacing shall be 4 feet on center. 6. The flexible duct shall be installed with a minimum centerline radius equal to 1.5 times the diameter of the duct. 7. When connecting flexible duct to diffusers, the duct shall be installed with a minimum of 6" straight flex at the diffuser. Q. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. Do not run ductwork above electrical panels. R. Automatic Dampers: Install automatic dampers provided by the Temperature Control Systems Contractor, to include assembly of multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages, shafts and brackets and extend the required number of shafts through the ducts for externally mounted damper motors. Jackshafts will be assembled with sealer roller or ball bearings of stainless steel construction. S. Double walled round ductwork shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All joints shall be sealed. Damaged ductwork shall be replaced. 3.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated; provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. 105191-1 15810-8 SECTION 15810 DUCTWORK B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. C. Balancing: Refer to Division 15 Section, "Testing, Adjusting and balancing" for air distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent during the balancing process. 3.04 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE CRITERIA A. All transverse joints and longitudinal seams shall conform to SMACNA's sealing requirements as defined on page 1-6 of the 1985 SMACNA Manual, First Edition. B. Constant Volume Systems/Supply Ductwork Allowable Leakage --------------------1 % of design cfm C. Constant Volume Systems/Exhaust Ductwork _ _ Allowable Leakage --------------------2% of design cfm END OF SECTION 15810 ~ .~, ~- .~ ~~ C1 ~' ~ -=-~ ~ J m r-_.__. ~..m. iT1 ~; --, ~,...~ D ~ ~,, .c- 105191-1 15810-9 SECTION 15830 ~ i S ..t_....i-~i FANS 2~~& F'~°R 28 ~P~ ~~ 34 PART 1 GENERAL ?-~ r ^-~ C.I t~ 1.~~ ~I'ii~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~Q~/1/~ (;~~~; fC)WA A. The extent of work is shown on drawings and in schedules and by requirements of this section, and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, inline centrifugal fans, propeller fans, fan accessories, motors and drives. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Installer: A firm with at least 3 years of successful fan installation experience. B. AMCA Standards: Comply with air movement and control association standards as applicable to testing and rating fans, including but not limited to, AMCA 99, 210, 211, 261, 300, 301. Provide fans that bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. C. UL Compliance: Provide fan and components which are UL listed and labeled. D. SMACNA Standards: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA duct construction standards. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack components in factory- fabricated protective framing. B. Handle products carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to manufacturer for repairs or replacement. C. Store products in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details. B. Product Data: Product data shall indicate performance data relative to the information scheduled on the drawings. In addition, provide dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, and gauges and finishes of materials. C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. D. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet and radiation at rated capacity. E. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring clearly indicating factory installed and field installed wiring. F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 105191-1 15830-1 SECTION 15830 FIi ~("'1 FANS ~~~~pp 1 t..p. ppV A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, unt~v~etk+~b~~ ct~n,"l l~~ are in -- place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. CITY CLERK 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS IOWA CITY, iC~WA A. Supply two [__] sets of belts for each belt driven fan. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or engineer approved equivalent: 1. Greenheck 2. Barry Blower 3. Trane 4. Cook 5. Twin City Fan 6. Penn Ventilator Company 7. Carnes 8. Jenn Fan 9. Aerovent 10. Acme 11. Buffalo Forge, Division of Howden Fan 12. Howden Fan - 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide fans of type, sizes, ratings and capacities as indicated on drawings and in schedules. 2.03 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Fan housing shall be constructed of continuously welded heavy gauge steel. Housing and bearing support shall be constructed of structural steel members to prevent vibration and rigidly support shaft and bearings. B. Wheel 1. Fan wheel shall be non-overloading backward inclined or airfoil. 105191-1 15830-2 SECTION 15830 ~~ ~_..~~J FANS ., ~~` 2. Fan wheel shall be statically and dynamically bala~4~e~ !i fr~+i~un~esi~A as an assembled fan. CITY' CL~1;K C. Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease lubricated, self-alignin~~e r`'' g~~prl~~illow block type, selected for a minimum of 200,000 hour life. D. Motors shall also be high efficiency [in accordance with section 15050], inverter rated, high power factor type [0.88 or higher] motors for use with A-C adjustable speed drive. Provide Century E plus motors or equivalent 460V, 3 phase, 60 HZ. E. Shaft shall be precision ground and polished steel. F. Motor shall be NEMA standard, normal torqued, 55 degree C rise, ODP of horsepower rating and electrical characteristics as scheduled. Motor shall have service factor not less than 1.15. G. Belt driven fans shall be constructed with motor base plate welded to exterior of fan housing, with motor mounted on adjustable slide rail. Provide OSHA approved belt guard. H. Accessories 1. Provide 1"threaded drain connector with plug to drain fan housing. 2. Provide hinged access door in housing for maintenance. 3. Provide flexible duct connector at inlet and outlet for connection to duct system. 4. Provide mounting brackets for installation as indicated on drawings and in schedules. 5. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with fixed cantilevered inlet guide vanes welded to inlet bell. 6. Discharge Dampers: Parallel blade heavy duty steel damper assembly with blades constructed of two plates formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame. 7. Factory finish before assembly to manufacturers standards. 8. Vibration Isolation: Refer to Section 15070 for vibration isolation requirements. 2.04 PROPELLER FANS A. Propeller: Shaped steel or steel reinforced aluminum blade with heavy hubs, statically and dynamically balanced, locked to shaft, provided with V-belt drive. B. Motors and drives shall be scheduled on the Drawings. On direct drive units, motors shall be resiliently mounted in basket type guards of heavy-duty steel in a concentric ring pattern. On belt drive units, motors shall be mounted on an adjustable motor base. Motor to be equipped with an adjustable pitch sheave. C. Frame: One piece, square steel with die formed venturi orifice, mounting flanges and supports, with baked enamel finish. 105191-1 15830-3 SECTION 15830 - FANS ~~~~~ D. Accessories 20D6 NAR 28 AN 8~ 34 1. Outlet damper: Multiple blade with offset hinge pin, b)~eslir~c~ voltage motor !' ~t drive, power open, spring return. I('~~A CI~ 1~Wi~ 2. Safety Screens: Expanded galvanized metal over inlet, motor, and drive [and outlet]; to comply with OSHA regulations. 3. Hood: Weathershield, to exclude rain and snow. 4. Controller: Solid-state speed controller. PART 3 EXE CUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Installer shall examine areas and conditions under which fans are to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FANS A. Install fans where shown in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, recognized industry practices, and in accordance with National Electrical Code, to insure compliance with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, roof decking, vibration isolation, and electrical work, as necessary to interface installation of fans with other work. C. Temporary Closure: Upon completion of installation, provide protective covering on fan ductwork connection openings to prevent entrance of dust and debris into equipment. D. Install vibration isolators and flexible electrical leads to properly isolate the fan vibration from the structure. E. Install horizontal thrust restraints on fans operating at over 2 inch static pressure. F. Duct Connections: Provide ductwork, accessories, and flexible connections as indicated. G. Provide adjustable sheaves required for final air balance. H. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. I. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated. J. Provide access to adjustable blade axial fan wheels for varying blade angle setting. Adjust blades for varying range of volume and pressure. 105191-1 15830-4 SECTION 15830 FANS K. Provide floor mounted axial fans with reinforced legs. Provide ceiling suspended units with support brackets bolted to casing flange. L. Do not operate fans in normal operation until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. M. Secure wall exhausters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to structure. N. Extend ducts to walls exhausters into louver. O. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittals to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Ensure that rotation is in direction indicated and intended for proper performance. Do not proceed with axial fan start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to centrifugal fan installer. 3.03 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Insure that the fan is wired properly for proper fan rotation and proper interface with associated thermostat, variable speed controller and outdoor air damper. B. Provide positive electrical motor grounding. 3.04 TESTING A. After installation of fans has been completed, test each fan to demonstrate proper operation of unit at performance requirements specified, including, but not limited to, proper rotation of impeller. - When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected at no additional cost to owner. 3.05 WARRANTY A. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. END OF SECTION 15830 N r a ~~ ~ .~ :~., ~ ~ c~ e T} ' n -~ ~° ~: -, u a~ D ca 105191-1 15830-5 -- SECTION 15851 ~~ i ~~~~ DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES PART I GENERAL ~~~~ ~~~ 2 ~ ~'~ $~ 3 ~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES G~ I ~ l~~G~ i~V~~'-w GiTY, 10WA A. Provide materials, devices, labor and supervision necessary for the installation of diffusers, registers and grilles. B. Provide diffusers, registers and grilles as per schedule on Drawings. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. Products by Titus, Krueger, Carnes, Metal-afire, Price, Nailor, or Engineer approved equivalent. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate diffusers, registers and grilles in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate diffusers, registers and grilles in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers and grilles in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for diffusers, registers and grilles including the following: 1. Schedule of diffusers, registers and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of grille, register and diffuser and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of grille, register and diffuser furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of grille, register and diffuser, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. 105191-1 15851-1 SECTION 15851 F) ~~l~J -- DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 88 B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minim ~m06e~m~peZfureA~nd$ e~oc~ ty traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size de,~s i~sT~~.,manufacturer's current data. ~OWA TTC+I.~L~CIi~-~~tt~~~~ C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser. D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity and with accessories and finishes as listed on diffuser schedule. -- 2.02 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling and wall registers and grilles where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. B. Performance: Provide registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data. C. Wall and Ceiling Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent wall and ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall and ceiling construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall and ceiling construction which will contain each type of register and grille. D. Types: Provide registers and grilles of type, capacity and with accessories and finishes as listed on register and grille schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install diffusers, registers and grilles in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions. B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work. C. Install wall mounted grilles and registers plumb and level and flush to surface. Locations may be altered slightly, as acceptable to the Architect/Engineer so as to fit portions of the structure. D. In grid panel type ceilings, lay-in metal pan, acoustical, etc., diffusers, registers and grilles shall be located as shown on the reflected ceiling plan or as directed by the Architect/Engineer typically to minimize cutting of ceiling panels. 105191-1 15851-2 - SECTION 15851 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES E. Coordinate location of ceiling diffusers and registers with Architect's reflected ceiling plan. F. Provide transitions as required for connections to ductwork, including square to round. G. Coordinate wall grilles and registers with thin-line type fire dampers in fire rated walls. END OF SECTION 15851 ~ r.~ r, ,~_ ~. Y ~__ ~~ ~ ~ ~~,~.L~ N ---~ ~ -gy N CJO 1-_.. ' m ~„ T~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ w cn 105191-1 15851-3 SECTION 15910 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Under base bid, the controls work shall consist of: ZCE~~ ?~~R 2B A~ 8~ 35 c~T~r c~_EC~~< f~'J'JA ciT~; fC~V'JA The relocation or replacement of existing fin tube control valves and thermostats, and the reconnection of control wiring and control air tubing. 2. The provision of controls for the exhaust fans. B. Under alternate #2, in addition to the base bid work, the meeting room fin tube controls shall be integrated into the existing DDC air handler controls. The alternate work shall be performed by Quint Company, 309-736-5915. C. Provide materials, labor, and supervision necessary to furnish and install a Direct Digital Control (DDC) system. The DDC system herein specified shall be fully integrated and installed as a complete package by the Direct Digital Control Manufacturer. The system shall include all computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, automation sensors and controls, wiring, piping, installation, supervision and labor, calibration, adjustments and check out necessary for a complete and fully operational system. D. The system shall incorporate an operator's terminal in the new addition. This project shall include any current software updates at the front end operator work station at the District facilities offices. E. General Description: - 1. .The DDC control system shall include all points described and/or indicated in this project and shall be capable of point expansion in the future. The future expansion shall not be limited to less than 1000 points of control. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be through Ethernet. 2. Provide a Network Automation Engine in lieu of typical NCM's (NCU's). 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. The control system shall meet specifications and qualifications as described. The controls contractor shall have a minimum of five years experience associated with variable air volume systems, chilled water systems, steam heating systems, hot water systems, constant volume systems and other systems as required by the sequence of operations. -- B. Pricing shall be based on the State of Iowa Purchasing Agreement. Refer to Paragraph 1.05 for requirements. - C. The contractor may elect to subcontract the installation of the electronic control system but will be responsible in total as outlined above. 105191-1 15910-1 ~~~~~ SECTION 15910 ___ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC ~d06 ~~~ ~$ AD. $~ ~ All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be CIT`( CLERK applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. This installation shall not be used as ~~~A C!-~Y ~~'~Aa test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner's representative in __ writing prior to bid date. Spare parts shall be available for at least 10 years after completion of this contract. 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS A. The following incidental work shall be furnished by the Division 15 Contractor under the supervision of this Contractor. 1. Install automatic valves and separable wells. 2. Furnish and install all necessary valves, pressure taps, flow meters, water, drain and overflow connections and piping. 3. Furnish and install all necessary piping connections required for flow devices, valve position indicators, etc. 4. Install all automatic dampers and minimum outdoor air stations, airflow stations. 5. Provide necessary blank-off plates (safing) required to install dampers that are smaller than duct size. 6. Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. 7. Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air _ volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation and affix and seal permanently in place only after stratification problem has been eliminated. 8. Provide access door or other approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for control of mechanical systems on this project. B. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited only by operator password. Multiple users shall have access to all valid system data. An operator shall be able to log onto any workstation on the _ , control system and have access to all appropriate data. C. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate under control. D. Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over ahigh-speed network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. The operator shall not have to know the panel identifier or location to view or control an object. Application Specific Controllers shall be constantly scanned by the network controllers to update point information and alarm information. 105191-1 15910-2 . , SECTION 15910 ~ ~ ~-. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC Lii~~:1,^R 28 Aft $: 3S E. The documentation is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide t~a~'~ar~r~tware necessary to implement the functions and sequences shown. IOI~'A Cil Y I:)V'JA 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification of Guaranteed Unit Pricing 1. A list of pricing criteria for components that include remote control units, foundation modules, inputloutput modules, expansion modules, stand-alone controller, modems, damper actuators, valves, valve actuators, sensors, transmitters, controllers, relays, EP switches, PE switches, accessories, thermostats, standard software, special software, and any other items necessary for future expansion of the system. 2. Include an hourly rate labor cost for 24-hour on-call service technicians. 3. It is desired to obtain a guarantee on the pricing criteria (including any multiplier) for a period of five (5) years not to exceed cost of living index. The submittal must indicate the guaranteed prices and be signed by an officer of the control company. 4. The pricing criteria list shall be submitted to the Owner for review and approval upon request. 5. A submittal of the owner training program will be required for review and approval by the Owner. 6. An Owner approved guaranteed unit pricing submittal is required upon request. 7. Preliminary wiring/communications hierarchy indicating communication levels between devices containing microprocessors. _ B. Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers' standard specification data sheets on all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until submittals have been reviewed by the Engineer and Owner for conformity with the plan and specifications. All shop drawings shall be done on AutoCAD, and provided to the - Engineer for review and to the Owner. C. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall not relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion. D. Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary to determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting the system to be installed. E. Submit the following within 30 days of contract award: 1. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer and model number. 2. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location. 3. Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the submittal is being submitted to cover. Include: 105191-1 15910-3 ~+ ~ ~ ("~ SECTION 15910 i V AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE 20Qb MAR 28 AP4 8~ 35 CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC a. CITY CLERK Building Controllers, Custom Application Controllers, and Application S if C t ll pec ic on ro ers IC~iNA CITY IOWq b. Operator Interface Computer c. Auxiliary Control Devices d. Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations, addresses, and cabling. e. Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations. Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled. f. Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object names. g. Sequence of operations for each system under control. This sequence shall be specific for the use of the Control System being provided for this project. F. Project Record Documents: Upon completion of installation submit five (5) copies of record (as-built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and include: 1. Project Record Drawings -These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. One set of magnetic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shall also be provided. 2. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual -These shall be as-built versions of the submittal product data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the O & M manual shall include: a. Names, address and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing equipment, and the control systems and service representative of each. b. Operators Manual with procedures of operating the control systems including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing set points and other variables. c. Programming Manual with a description of the programming language including syntax, statement descriptions including algorithms and calculations used, point database creation and modification, program creation and modification, and use of the editor. d. Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Manual(s) that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; preventative maintenance and calibration procedures; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware. e. A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming language including the point database. One set of magnetic media containing files of the software and database shall also be provided f. A list of recommended spare parts with part numbers and supplier. g. Complete original issue documentation, installation and maintenance information for all third party hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors. h. Complete original issue diskettes for all software provided including operating systems, programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software. 105191-1 15910-4 __ _ SECTION 15910 ~ t ~--.. ~ ~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC _ 2sD6 €4~~ 28 iii B= 35 i. Licenses, Guarantee, and Warrantee documents for all equipment and systems. C~ ~ '~' ~I _E~~( j. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components -- ~O~A ~~-("~ ((lWA including a schedule of tasks (inspection, cleaning, calibration, etc.), time between tasks, and task descriptions. G. Training Manuals: The Contractor shall provide a course outline and training manuals for all training classes at least six weeks prior to the first class. The Owner reserves the right to modify any or all of the training course outline and training materials. Review and approval by Owner and Engineer and shall be completed at least 3 weeks prior to first class. 1.06 CODES & STANDARDS A. Input/output devices, specified or future, associated with the DDC control system shall be ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) coded with standard EIA (Electronic Industries Association) interface hardware. B. Wiring performed by the DDC Contractor shall be installed in accordance with all applicable local, state, and national codes. C. Instrumentation hardware shall be supplied to directly interface with Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standards. D. Meet requirements of all applicable standards and codes, except when more detailed or stringent requirements are indicated by the Contract Documents, including requirements of this Section. 1. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed. 2. National Electrical Code - NFPA 70. 3. Federal Communications Commission -Part J. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of twenty-four (24) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control System __ failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours. B. Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, and firmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation of such changes. 1.08 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL A. All project developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These include but are not limited to: Project graphic images, record drawings, project database, job- specific application programming code and all documentation. 105191-1 15910-5 SECTION 15910 ~~ ~ - AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE 1~.. ~ ~.... CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC ~QD6 MAR ~~ ~~ ~; 3S . _ 1.09 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE CITY CLERK A. Performance Standards. The system shall conform to the fclQg:(~I~~Y I~~~ _ 1. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be 30 seconds. Analog objects shall start to adjust within 30 seconds. 2. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation will be current, within the prior 60 seconds. 3. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 45 seconds. 4. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control. 5. Performance. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control ~- loops at a selectable frequency from at least once every 5 seconds. The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency. 6. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within 5 seconds of each other. 7. Reporting Accuracy. Table 1 lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all ._ values reported by the specified system. TABLE I -- REPORTING ACCURACY Measured Variable Reported Accuracy U.N.O Space temperature f 1 °F - Ducted air f2°F Outside air f2°F Water temperature f 1 °F Delta-T f0.25°F Relative humidity f5% RH Water flow f5% of full scale Air flow (terminal) f10% of reading *Note 1 Air flow (measuring stations) f5% of reading _ . Air pressure (ducts) f0.1" W.G. 105191-1 15910-6 SECTION 15910 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC f ~ ~.. ~i~36 iaa~ 28 A~i 8~ 3S TABLE I -- REPORTING ACCURACY Measured Variable Water pressure Electrical power Carbon dioxide (cot) Note 1: 10%-100% of scale C1T~' GL~~K ReportedReported Acc~~~~~ ~C)wA t2% of full scale *Note 2 5% of reading f20 PPM Note 2: for both absolute and differential pressure PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OPERATOR INTERFACE (EXISTING PC) A. Furnish a system to interface with the owners existing PC "operator workstation". The system --- shall include all software and hardware necessary to provide full monitoring and control at the location of the existing operator workstation. Verify the available PC system data and furnish additional hardware to meet the requirements of this section. B. All alarms shall print out on the owner's existing printer. 2.02 SUPERVISED TRAINING A. Provide eight (8) hours of supervised training for up to four (4) of the Owner's representatives _ simultaneously to include system operation, programming, report generation, and construction of graphics. Training shall take place at the project site during the normal work hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. weekdays. Training shall include: 1. Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals. 2. Walk-through of the job to locate control components. 3. Operator workstation and peripherals. 4. DDC custom application controllers, ASC, TEC, SAC operation and function. 5. Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel programming. 6. Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures. B. Provide operator orientation to the overall operational program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system), commands, advisories, and appropriate __ operator intervention required in responding to the systems operation. An Owner's manual prepared for this project by the DDC manufacturer shall be used in addition to the instruction. Five copies of the Owner's manual shall be provided. C. The technical training will also include adequate instruction and documentation tp enable maintenance staff to trouble shoot, repair, and maintain entire system and recreate all programming without factory assistance. 105191-1 15910-7 ~I~~~ SECTION 15910 ~.J AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM DDC Za06 t9QR ~$ SAM 8` ~~ -- D. The technical training will also include adequate instruction and documentation to allow ~,-~Y CLER~ expansion by the maintenance staff of the system in the future to interface with existing `O~A Ci~ i i, ~~~{~ pneumatic, electric, and electronic control systems. This would include activities associated with hardware and software. 2.03 COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEM A. The Temperature Control Contractor shall verify that each analog and binary device and operator responds correctly to the signal given at the control panel by physically changing each parameter and witnessing the correct corresponding reaction. The results of this testing shall be logged in a written report and submitted to the Owner and Engineer prior to final payment. B. The Owner's representative shall witness the commissioning of the system. 2.04 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. Operating System. Furnish a commercially available, concurrent multi-tasking operating system. The operating system shall also support the use of other common software applications that operate under DOS or Microsoft Windows. Examples include Lotus 123, Microsoft Excel, Word Perfect, and Paradox. Acceptable operating systems are Windows NT, Windows 95 (or later version), Unix, and OS/2. B. Text Based Software: The software system shall be text based. Format shall be displayed at the operator workstation with indentations to indicated nested software routines. The program shall include user instructions in the format similar to the sequence of controls that allows the user to easily change the operating parameters of the adjustable inputs. 2.05 SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A. Each workstation shall provide operator interface and off-line storage of system information. Provide the following applications at each workstation. 1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore. Each workstation shall store on the hard disk a copy of the current database of each building controller. This database shall be updated whenever a change is made in any panel in the system. The storage of this data shall be automatic and not require operator intervention. In the event of a database loss in a building management panel, the first workstation to detect the loss shall automatically restore the database for that panel. 2. Manual Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper password clearance shall be able to archive the database from any system panel and store on magnetic media. The operator shall also be able to clear a panel database and manually initiate a download of a specified database to any panel in the system. 3. System Configuration. The workstation software shall provide a graphical method of configuring the system. The user with proper security shall be able to add new devices, assign modems to devices, and obtain a visual riser diagram of the system. This shall ~~ allow for future system changes or additions. 4. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On line help shall be available for all applications -- 105191-1 15910-8 ~I ~ ~ ~~ SECTION 15910 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE ~~~~ ~~~~ 2$ ~`~ $. 35 CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help ~~ l~~Y` C~..LI~i~ information shall be available through the use of hypertext. IOWA CITY, {0~11A Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator's access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto logofftime shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format. 6. Alarm Processing. Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out of normal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits, states, and reactions for each object in the system. a. Alarm Reactions. The operator shall be able to determine what actions, if any, are to be taken, by object (or point), during an alarm. Actions shall include logging, printing, starting programs, displaying messages, dialing out to remote stations, paging, providing audible annunciation or displaying specific system graphics. Each of these actions shall be configurable by workstation and time of day. An object in alarm that has not been acknowledged within an operator specified time period shall be re-routed to an alternate operator specified alarm receipt device. b. Binary Alarms. Each binary object shall be set to alarm based on the operator specified state. Provide the capability to disable alarming when the associated equipment is turned off or is being serviced. c. Analog Alarms. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits and warning limits. Alarming must be able to be automatically and manually disabled. 7. Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to define a custom trend log for any data in the system. This definition shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time. Trend intervals of 1, 5, I5, 30, and 60 minutes as well as once a shift (8 hours), once a day, once a week, and once a month shall be selectable. All trends shall start based on the hour. Each trend shall accommodate up to 64 system objects. The system operator with proper password shall be able to determine how many samples are stored in each trend. Trend data shall be sampled and stored on the Building Controller panel and be archived on the hard disk. Trend data shall be able to be viewed and printed from the operator interface software. They shall also be storable in a tab delimited ASCII format for use by other industry standard word processing and spreadsheet packages. 8. Alarm and Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms and events from any location in the system. Events shall be listed chronologically. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms. All that have not been cleared by the operator shall be archived to the hard disk on the workstation. 9. Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator with proper password protection to view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object and 105191-1 15910-9 SECTION 15910 ~`~,,,,~~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 2006 MAR 28 AM 8~ 35 property in the system. These statuses shall be available by menu, on graphics, or CITY CLERK through custom programs. ~~~A C~~ ~n~~ Clock Synchronization. The real time clocks in all building control panels and workstations shall be synchronized on command of an operator. The system shall also be able to automatically synchronize all system clocks, daily from any operator designated device in the system. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings and standard time if applicable. 11. Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select, modify, or create reports. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval, and date. Report data shall be archived on the hard disk for historical reporting. Provide the ability for the operator to obtain real time logs of designated lists of objects. Reports and logs shall be stored on the PC hard disk in a format that is readily accessible by other standard software applications including spreadsheets and word processing. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer. a. Custom Reports: Provide the capability for the operator to easily define any system data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. These reports shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a report title and the name of the facility. B. Workstation Applications Editors. Each PC workstation shall support full screen editing of all system applications. Provide editors for each application at the PC workstation. The applications shall be downloaded and executed at the appropriate controller panels. Controller. Provide a full screen editor for each type controller and application, that shall allow the operator with proper password to view and change the configuration, name, control parameters, and system set-points. Scheduling. An editor for the scheduling application shall be provided at each workstation. Provide a monthly calendar for each schedule. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clearly on the calendar. Provide a method for allowing several related objects to follow a schedule. The advance and delay time for each object shall be adjustable from this master schedule. a. An operator with proper password level shall be able to modify the schedule. Schedules shall be able to be easily copied between objects and/or dates. b. Occupied/CJnoccupied schedules shall be individually adjustable for each terminal unit. The user shall be able to easily change the schedule of rooms, etc. An occupied space shall automatically start the unit in normal start up mode. Equipment Coordination. Provide a full screen editor that allows equipment to be grouped for proper operation as specified in the sequence of operations. This shall include the coordination of VAV boxes with their associated Air Handling Equipment. 4. Custom Application Programming. Provide the tools to create, modify, and debug custom application programming. The operator shall be able to create, edit, and download custom programs at the same time that all other system applications are operating. The system shall be fully operable while custom routines are edited, 105191-1 15910-10 2@(~b P~~R 28 ~~ 8~ 35 Cl~i `~ ~; ~.~R1~C ~~W~i C~ 1 V ~~~~~ SECTION 15910 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC compiled, and downloaded. The programming language shall have the following features: a. The language shall be English language oriented and be based on the syntax of programming languages such as BASIC. It shall allow for free form or fill in the blank programming. Alternatively, the programming language can be graphically-based using function blocks as long as blocks are available that directly provide the functions listed below, and that custom or compound function blocks can be created. b. A full screen character editor/programming environment shall be provided. The editor shall be cursor/mouse-driven and allow the user to insert, add, modify, and delete code from the custom programming. It shall also incorporate word processing features such ascut/paste and find/replace. c. The programming language shall allow independently executing program modules to be developed. Each module shall be able to independently enable and disable other modules. d. The editor/programming environment shall have adebugging/simulation capability that allows the user to step through the program and to observe any intermediate values and or results. The debugger shall also provide error messages for syntax and execution errors. e. The programming language shall support conditional statements (IF/THEN/ELSE/ELSE-IF) using compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and/or relations (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons. f. The programming language shall support floating point arithmetic using the following operators: +, -, /, x, square root, and xy. The following mathematical functions shall also be provided: natural log, log, absolute value, and minimum maximum value from a list of values. g. -The programming language shall have pre-defined variables that represent clock time, day of the week, and date. Variables that provide interval timing shall also be available. The language shall allow for computations using these values. h. The programming language shall have ability to pre-defined variables representing the status and results of the System Software, and shall be able to enable, disable, and change the values of objects in the system. 2.06 POWER FAIL RESTART A. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of the digital panels and workstation to prevent the loss of data base or operating system software. Non- __ volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery backup shall be provided to support the clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. B. Upon restoration of normal power, the panels shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. 105191-1 15910-11 AUTOMATICOTEMPERATURE ~I ~~~ CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 2005 8AR 28 AM $: 3S C. Should Digital panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the panel via the local RS-232 port, or telephone line dil~}i~(i. ~ ~LERK IOWA CITY IC~VtIA 2.07 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at the operator workstation. B. System Security 1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names. 2. Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager. 3. User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded. 4. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable. C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, night setback, and economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall consist of the following: 1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Provide separate scheduling that is easily edited by the operator to define the occupied hours for each area. a. Each azea served by a heat pump including offices, band and rehearsal rooms, and individual classrooms shall have the option to maintain night setback temperatures or occupied temperatures. 2. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standazd schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the week. a. Specifically label and program "snow day" to keep the building in the unoccupied mode with the option to set back the temperature or to bring it up to the occupied set-point. 3. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period. 4. Optimal Start/Stop. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start/stop algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone - , 105191-1 15910-12 SECTION 15910 F ~ ~---~ ~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC __ 2a0~ rtiAR 28 ~ 8= 35 and start the equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at ~;;~-`y ~;~l;t~i~~ the specified occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating _ _ ' r IOV`JA Ci7Y, IC}WA and cooling rates for zones that have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide the ability to modify the start/stop algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting -- before an operator determined time limit. 5. Alarm Reporting. The operator shall be able to determine the action to be taken in the event of an alarm. Alarms shall be routed to the appropriate workstations based on __ time and other conditions. An alarm shall be able to start programs, be logged in the event log, printed, generate custom messages and display graphics. _ D. Remote Communications. The system shall have the ability to dial out in the event of an alarm. Receivers shall include PC Workstations. The alarm message shall include the name of the calling location, the device that generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. The operator shall be able to remotely access and operate the system using dial up communications. E. Maintenance Management. The system shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based upon user designated run time, starts, and/or calendar date limits. 2.08 BUILDING CONTROLLERS A. General. Provide Building Controllers to provide the performance specified in this section. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand-alone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the global strategies described in System software section. 2. The Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 3. The controller shall provide a communications port for connection of a Portable Operators Terminal. 4. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. 5. Data shall be shared between networked Building Controllers. 6. The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall: a. Assume a predetermined failure mode. b. Generate an alarm notification. B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be rated for operation at 32° F to 120° F. C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. 105191-1 15910-13 SECTION 15910 F1 ~~~ --~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DD~~O~ ~k~ 2$ AM9 gt ~~ ~- . D. Memory. The Building Controller shall maintain all BIQ~,,,~nd ~r~~ra~m~~ming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. (OW4lA~ C~~; ~~~~ E. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage. 2.09 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS A. General. Provide Custom Application Controllers to provide the performance specified in this specification. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand-alone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the local strategies described in System software section. 2. The Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. 4. Data shall be shared between networked Controllers. 5. The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall: a. Assume a predetermined failure mode. b. Generate an alarm notification. B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA Type 4 waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at ~0° F to 150° F. 2. Controllers used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32° F to 120° F. C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. D. Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. E. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage. 2.10 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS A. General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of 105191-1 15910-14 -- SECTION 15910 FI ~~~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC ZQ~~ ~~R 2$ Q~ 8; 3S equipment. They are not fully user programmable, but are customized eration within the confines of the equipment they are designed to serve. ~~ C~ERK __ i01~/A CITY InWA 1. Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network. __ 2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system. B. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA Type 4 waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40° F to 150° F. 2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures, and -- shall be rated for operation at 32° F to 120° F. C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, and communications. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. D. Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days. E. Immunity to Power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80%. F. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type. 2.11 COMMUNICATIONS A. The controls Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers necessary for the inter-network. B. All Building Controllers shall have a communications port for connections with the operator interfaces. C. Communications services over the inter-network shall result in operator interface and value passing that is transparent to the inter-network architecture as follows: 1. Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on the inter-network will allow the operator to interface with all other controllers as if that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for all controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from any one controller on the inter-network. 2. All database values (i.e. points, software variable, custom program variables) of any -- one controller shall be readable by any other controller on the inter-network. This value passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a point name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An 105191-1 15910-15 ~~~C('"'~ SECTION 15910 -- [..t..•' AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC ZDU6 MAR Z$ AM 8~ 35 operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communications services to G~~ CLE ~~A perform inter-network value passing. ~~~AD~'~~~ The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily. 2.12 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE A. Hard-wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Building, Custom, or Application Specific Controllers. B. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself, another point, or ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller. C. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals or from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 ma to be compatible with commonly available control devices. D. Pulse accumulation input points. This type of point shall conform to all the requirements of Binary Input points, and also accept up to 2 pulses per second for pulse accumulation, and shall be protected against effects of contact bounce and noise. E. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 ma), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices. F. Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation, or a pulsed low voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Outputs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation. G. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0-10 Vdc or a 4-20 ma signal as required to provide proper control of the output device. 2.13 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES A. Electronic damper/valve actuators. I . The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. Furnish a separate damper actuator for each damper greater than 48" in any dimension. 2. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. 3. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position. 105191-1 15910-16 _ SECTION 15910 F! ~,~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC L~Q6 ~~~ 28 ~~ $; 3~ 4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-?~Q~r~.~crpl,-~~gnal and provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 ma operating range. +(~,n( ,{~~-~CfI`5ni',\/~/~ 5. All 24 VAC/DC actuators shall not require more t'h~ad "c~ VA fdr A'f.~'~b~i ore than 8 W for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120 VAC or 230 VAC shall not require more than 11 VA. 6. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this _ __ purpose. 7. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing of direction of rotation. ___ 8. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum lm electrical cable and shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical connections. 9. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed. 10. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated torque. Actuators shall include a stroke limiting device. B. Automatic Dampers (low leakage) 1. Dampers shall include the frame, blades, and linkage assembly. Coordinate damper --- sizes and quantities with exhaust air fans, plenums, air handling units, and built up air handling units. General damper construction shall be as follows: __ a. Frames shall be a minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel, hat shaped channel, mechanically joined. b. Operating temperature range shall be 40°F to 200°F. _ c. The blade seals shall include extruded vinyl blade edge seal and flexible metal compression type side seals. d. Blade rotation shall be parallel or opposed. e. Dampers shall be tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 for air --- leakage. f. The axles shall be 1/2-inch plated steel hex or 3/8-inch plated square steel. g. Bearing shall be synthetic or bronze to fit the application. -- h. Maximum blade height not to exceed 8 inches. i. Low leakage damper shall be Ruskin, Johnson Controls, or approved equal. -- 2. Performance type blade dampers for low to medium static pressure, and low to medium velocity applications. __ a. Blades shall be constructed of double piece 22 gauge galvanized steel, mechanically joined. b. Linkage to be located out of the air stream. _ c. Damper shall have a maximum leakage rate of 4.2 cfm per square foot at f - inch static pressure differential fora 48" by 48" damper. C. Control Valves 105191-1 15910-17 ~~ ~~~ AUTOMATICOTEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 2Q06 MAR 28 AM 8~ 3S - 1. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating (~~~ (;(„~(~~ service as scheduled, shown, or as indicated in the sequence of operation. IOWA CITI; IOWA Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings: a. Water Valves: 1) Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head. 2) Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or 100% of total system (pump) head. 3. Water Valves: a. Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design conditions and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating service. b. Sizing Criteria: 1) Two-position service: Line size. 2) Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to the pressure drop through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between supply and return mains, or a maximum of 4 psi. 3) Three-way Modulating Service: Pressure drop equal to the pressure drop through the coil exchanger (load), 4 psi maximum. 4) Valves 1/2" through 2" shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250, spring loaded, Teflon packing, quick opening for two-position service. Two-way valves to have replaceable composition disc, or stainless steel ball. 5) 2-1/2" valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug and Teflon packing. 4. General a. Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as follows: 1) Heating coils. 2) Other applications - as scheduled or as required by sequence of operation. b. Control valves at terminal units shall be non-spring return. D. Sensors: 1. Room and duct humidity sensors shall be of the thin film capacitance type containing a humidity sensitive material that modifies its dielectric constant to maintain accuracy of + 5% RH @ 77° F, range of 20% to 95% RH, including hysteresis, linearity, and repeatability. The sensor shall be rated for operation between 15 to 170 degrees F. 105191-1 15910-18 --~ SECTION 15910 ~~ ~ ~~~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC ZOQ6 -~~R $ • ~ Adz 8.35 2. All temperature and humidity sensors shall be of the electronic e. The temperature sensors shall be resistance temperature device (RTD) or the is~ t~}'pe(<,;~[R'K ~owA c~TY ~~w~ a. Room sensors shall include covers for horizontal or vertical mounting an concealed adjustments. Sensors shall include adjustable slide temperature sensors, and two-hour push button override. b. Room sensors shall have a range of 32-120 degrees F with a factory calibration of 74° F. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 degree F at calibration point. Mounting height of room sensors shall be verified with owner prior to installation. c. Duct Temperature Sensors -accuracy of + 1 ° F @ 77 deg F. Duct air sensors shall be duct single point, averaging probe or averaging bulb as required under sequence of operation. d. Use insertion elements with a brass well with a minimum length of 2.5" e. Outside air sensor shall have watertight inlet fitting and contain a shield from direct sunlight. 3. Duct pressure sensors shall be compatible for use in HVAC air distribution or air -- handling systems and shall have an accuracy of plus or minus .1" w.g. Sensors shall have an operating temperature range from 0-175° F and 10-90% relative humidity. Sensors shall be Mamac Systems or approved equal. E. Differential Pressure Switch (static) -shall sense static differential pressure for negative application (exhaust air duct), positive pressure (supply duct), or a differential pressure switch (filters) and shall be automatic reset type with an adjustable range from .OS-12" WC. F. Low Temperature Detection - 1. Electric low temperature warning thermostats shall have 20 ft low point sensitive elements (not averaging type) installed in parallel or series to serpentine the entire coil face area of the chilled water coil. These thermostats shall be two-position reset type. -- Where coils are in banks, multiple low limit thermostats, wired in series, shall be provided and wired to initiate the freeze condition sequences specified and signal a remote alarm to the facilities management console. -- 2. The low temperature thermostat shall be automatic reset type as described in the sequence of operations. 3. Thermostat shall be adjustable between the temperatures of 35° to 45° F. G. Current Sensing Relays -shall be split core type with adjustable high and low trip settings. Range shall not exceed 175% of expected input. Coordinate special requirements for systems ___ with variable speed drives. H. Flow Switches Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type for proof of flow application. 105191-1 15910-19 FI ~~ ~ SECTION 15910 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE 2006 MAR 28 AM $: ~~ CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 2. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting with ~,!t~ C1..E~K pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA Type 1 ~~W~ ~~~; ~C}Wi~1 enclosure unless otherwise specified: 3. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, solid state, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA Type I enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application, or as specified. Mercoid type switches shall not be used for equipment that vibrates such as chillers, etc. Differential pressure switches shall be by Orange Research or approved equal. 4. Current sensing relays may be used for flow sensing or terminal devices. I. Relays 1. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. 2. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosure when not installed in local control panel. J. Transformers and Power Supplies 1. Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2current-limiting type, or shall be furnished with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service. 2. Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current output shall allow fora 50% safety factor. Output ripple shall be 3.0 mV maximum Peak-to-Peak. Regulation shall be 0.10% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection. 3. Unit shall operate between 0° C and 50° C. 4. Unit shall be UL recognized. K. Local Control Panels 1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA Type 1 construction with hinged door, key-lock latch, removable sub-panels. A single key shall be common to all field panels and sub-panels. 2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-wired with color- coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per controUinterlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control termination's for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings. 3. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection and main air gauge for control power sources to each local panel. L. Auxiliary Devices 105191-1 15910-20 -- (~ ^;~ SECTION 15910 F E ~~-• 5--- ~- ~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 1. Furnish and install all necessary auxiliary electronic devices as appropriate to C~ j `r (;i _ri-;K accomplish the sequence as specified. These totally electronic devices shall include - ~~1~J~~+ry ~'j j Y (.~}~y~fA (but not be limited to) such items as load-limiting controllers, low signal selectors, high signal selectors, remote reset control devices, floating alarm units, staging networks, damper position indicators, unison amplifiers, reversing networks, sequencing __ networks and electronic power supplies. M. Smoke Detectors The smoke detectors for air handling units shall be furnished and installed by the electrical contractor. 2.14 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES A. Variable speed drives shall be provided by the temperature controls contractor in accordance with Section 16441 and installed by the electrical contractor. 2.15 WIRING A. All electric wiring required for the control system and any interlock wiring required for the controls sequence shall be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor. B. All inaccessible line voltage and low voltage control wiring, including wiring in walls, above gypsum ceilings shall be run in conduit. Wiring routed above accessible ceilings may be open cable, provided it is supported per NEC and is routed plumb with adjacent walls, and is plenum rated where applicable. C. Wire shall be a minimum of # 18 gauge, color-coded, stranded wire for all low voltage, electronic circuit with "spares" installed (one for every group of 10 wires) in conduit. D. Coordinate the requirements for 120V circuits for the ASC's. All control transformers shall be the responsibility of this contractor. Reference the electrical drawings for circuit locations. 2.16 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. General 1. Control points (i.e. Indications, Adjustments, Alarms, faults, remote reset, etc.) as -- identified shall be provided as equipment manufacturer's factory options. Where the specified item is not available as a factory option, the equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with the Controls vendor to provide. All non-factory option solutions shall -- be highlighted within the shop drawing submittals of both the equipment manufacturer and the Controls vendor. B. Fin Tube (Base Bid) 1. Game Room: Replace existing 2-position pneumatic control valve with a new 2- __ position pneumatic control valve, reconnect to existing control air tubing. 105191-1 -- 15910-21 SECTION 15910 ~~ ~.~~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 2006I~~R 2$ AI"9 8~ 35 2. Admin Area: Replace the modulating pneumatic control valves and E/P transducers in CITY CLERK each office with new modulated electronic control valves (4-20 mA) and reconnect to IOWA CITY, inW~sting control wiring. 3. Meeting Room A and B: Relocate existing DDC thermostat in each room as shown on plans and reconnect to existing control wiring. Replace existing modulating electronic control valve with a new modulating electronic control valve (4-20mA), and reconnect existing control wiring. 4. Crafts Room: Lower existing electronic control valve and reconnect to existing control wiring. 5. Social Hall: Provide new electric thermostat and replace existing pneumatic control valve with a new 2-position electric control valve. Provide inter connecting control wiring. C. Fin Tube (Alternate #2): At the meeting rooms, in addition to the base bid controls work the fin tube controls shall be integrated into the existing air handler DDC controls as follows: At each meeting room, the fin tube control valve shall modulate open as the stage of heat. If the fin tube control valve is fully open and the space temperature continues to drop, the second stage of heat shall be initiated and the air handler hot water control _ valve shall modulate open to provide additional heating capacity to maintain the space temperature set point. During the first stage of heat, the air handler out water control ~ - valve shall be positioned to maintain 72° F (adj.) discharge air temperature. Provide an indication point for first stage /second stage heat at the operator work station. D. Exhaust Fans: A motorized damper at each fan shall be controlled so that the damper is closed when the fan is de-energized and open when the fan is energized. The fan shall not start until the respective damper is proven open. Each fan shall be controlled by a scheduling program through the BMS. 1. EF-1: A different pressure sensor shall control the VFD to maintain a negative 0.01" S.P. in the exhausted room. The fan shall run at minimum (15%) speed when the fan is indexed on and the space is sufficiently negative. The controls shall be set up with a .O1 " S.P. deal band and shall incorporate a delay of 20 seconds to allow for pressure fluctuations due to opening/closing doors. Provide control wiring between the pressure sensor, UFD, and exhaust fans and also to the existing air handler DDC panel -final termination to existing panel by Owner. The existing DDC system shall initiate the exhaust fan system. The contractor shall provide power to the new controls devices. 2. EF-2: Anew manual switch shall control the fan. Provide interconnecting control wiring. 3. EF-3: (alternate #3): The sequence of operation related to the new VFD is identical to EF-1 except that the fan and pressure sensor are existing. 105191-1 15910-22 -~- SECTION l 5910 r ~ ~ €`~ ~~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE ~~~ ~ ~` - - CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC ,~~ a;~.~ ~8 n~~ 8~ 3S PART 3 EXECUTION Cl~~~ CL_1=~K _ ~0'JU1w C i Y, ~OUJA 3.01 INSTALLATION ___ A. Install wiring in a neat and workmanlike manner. Wiring to finished spaces shall be run concealed. B. All work is to be installed by a qualified person skilled in the installation of electronic control systems. The control company representative is responsible for the proper installation of the control system and will provide supervision of the installation. -" C. Wire the flow switches and other chiller control devices not factory wired. Reference the chiller specification. - D. Install damper actuators for all automatic dampers. E. Install terminal equipment controllers on terminal boxes and provide all necessary control __ wiring. F. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and roughing -in __ drawings, and details and drawings. Install electrical work and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division 16 sections of these specifications. Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights. G. Wiring. The term "wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric control devices. - H. Wiring System. Install complete wiring system for electric-electronic temperature controls. Conceal wiring, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. Provide multi-conductor instrument harness (bundle) in place of single conductors -- where number of conductors can be run along common path. Fasten flexible conductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly. I. Number-code or color-code conductors, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system. 3.02 ON-SITE TESTING A. Provide Engineer and/or Owner approved operation and acceptance testing of the complete --- system. The Engineer and/or Owner will witness all tests. B. Field Test. When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify -- transmission media operation before the system is placed in line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting and final field tests shall be completed by the installer. Provide across-check of each control point within the system by making a comparison between the control command and the __ field-controlled device. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified 105191-1 -- 15910-23 ~I~~~ SECTION 15910 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE ZU~6 MAR ~~ AM 8~ 35 CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power. Submit the results of functional and (~~~ LI..IrRK diagnostic tests and calibrations to the Engineer for final system acceptance. IOWA ~iTY, InWA C. Compliance Inspection Checklist. Submit in the form requested, the following items of information to the Owner's representative and Architect/Engineer for verification of compliance to the project specifications. Failure to comply with the specified information shall constitute non-performance of the contract. The contractor shall submit written justification for each item in the checklist that he is unable to comply with. The Owner's Representative and the Architect/Engineer will initial and date the checklist to signify Contractor's compliance before acceptance of system. 1. Verify to the Owner's Representative and Architect/Engineer in letter form that supplier has in-place support facility. Letter shall show location of support facility, name and titles of technical staff, engineers, supervisors, fitters, electricians, managers and all other personnel responsible for the completion of the work on this project. User Date A/E Date 2. Manually generate an alarm at the remote DDC Controller as selected by the _ -. Architect/Engineer to demonstrate the capability of the workstation and alarm printer to receive alarms within 5 seconds. User Date A/E Date ~ 3. Disconnect one DDC Controller from the network to demonstrate that a single device failure shall not disrupt or halt peer-to-peer communication. Panel to be disconnected shall be selected by the Architect/Engineer. User Date A/E Date 4. At a DDC Controller of the Architect/Engineer's choice, display on the portable operator's terminal: a. At least one temperature setpoint and at least one status condition; i.e.: on or off for a system or piece of equipment attached to the panel as well as for points at another DDC Controller on the network. b. The diagnostic results as specified for a system or piece of equipment attached to that panel as well as for a system or piece of equipment attached to another DDC Controller. c. The ability to add a new point to the DDC Controller with the POT and have it automatically uploaded to the workstation to modify that panel's stored database. User Date A/E Date 5. At the ArchitectlEngineer's choice, disconnect the trunk connection to demonstrate its lack of reliance on a DDC Controller to maintain full control functionality. 105191-1 15910-24 - SECTION 15910 ~E ~ ~ ~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE 4 ``~~'-" ~` CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC p User Date A/E Date ~L~.n~< -- 3.03 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE iC~~H CI 1 ~; {QWA A. General Requirements. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the __ successful operation of the entire BAS System for a period of two years after completion of successful performance test. Provide necessary material required for the work. Minimize impacts on facility operations when performing scheduled adjustments and non-scheduled work. B. Description of Work. The adjustment and repair of the system includes all computer equipment, software updates, transmission equipment and all sensors and control devices. Provide the manufacturer's required adjustment and all other work necessary. C. Personnel. Provide qualified personnel to accomplish all work promptly and satisfactorily. Owner shall be advised in writing of the name of the designated service representative, and of any changes in personnel. D. Schedule of Work. Provide two minor inspections at 6 month intervals and two major inspections offset equally between the minor inspections to effect quarterly inspection of alternating magnitude, and all work required as specified. Schedule major inspections in July and January. Minor inspections shall include visual checks and operational test of all equipment delivered. Major inspections shall include all work described for minor inspections and the following work: 1. Clean all equipment, including interior and exterior surfaces. 2. Perform signal, voltage and system isolation checks of system workstations and peripherals. 3. Check and calibrate each field device. Check all analog points and digital points. 4. Run all diagnostics and correct all previously diagnosed problems. 5. Resolve and correct any previous outstanding problems. E. Emergency Service. Owner shall initiate service calls when the system is not functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service to the complete system. -- Furnish Owner with a telephone number where service representative can be reached at all times. Service personnel shall be at the site within 4 hours after receiving a request for service. Restore the control system to proper operating condition within 24 hours. F. Operation. Performance of scheduled adjustment and repair shall verify operation of the system as demonstrated by the initial performance test. G. Systems Modifications. Provide any recommendations for system modification in writing to Owner. Do not make any system modifications, including operating parameters and control settings, without prior approval of Owner. Any modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and other documentation affected. 105191-] 15910-25 ~y! .~l"~ SECTION 15910 ^~ ! L. I..J AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 2pp6-NAR 28 AM 8~ 35 _. H. Software. Provide all software updates and verify operation in the system. These updates shall C~~( C,~„ER{~ie accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with the system operators, and shall be 101NA~ CITY, IC~i~orated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and software documentation. - 3.04 EXAMINATION A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started. 3.05 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP A. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible. B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and --- equipment. C. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service. D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds. E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices. F. Coordinate with the testing and balancing contractor to adjust low leakage dampers if damper leak rate exceeds specifications. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates. C. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing. D. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air --~ transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings. E. Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of airflow. -- ._ 105191-1 15910-26 SECTION 15910 ~ ~ ~-- `1 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE ~' `""~""~TJ CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC -- 2~Q~ ~~i~ 28 x~ 8~ 3S F. Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the aver-akin txp ;~ Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontall ~~b~ ~ ~~~h -- bend shall be supported with a capillary clip. i~tiNA CiTI; 10UVA G. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature __ sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells. H. Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical and service rooms. I. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated location. 3.07 FLOW SWITCH AND PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH INSTALLATION A. Install using athread-o-let in steel pipe. In copper pipe use C x C x F Tee, no pipe extensions or substitutions allowed. B. Mount a minimum of 5 pipe diameters up stream and 5 pipe diameters downstream or 2 feet which ever is greater, from fittings and other obstructions. C. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. D. Assure correct flow direction and alignment. E. Mount in horizontal piping -flow switch on top of the pipe. F. Pressure differential switches mounted on horizontal sections of pipe shall be installed on the side or top of pipes to avoid accumulation of debris. 3.08 ACTUATORS A. Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions. __ B. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions. C. Valves -Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator ---- manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations. 3.09 WARNING LABELS A. Affix plastic labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the Control - System including all air handling unit fans at doors. Label shall indicate the following: CAUTION __ This equipment is operating under 105191-1 15910-27 C SECTION 15910 (~ I ~~ ~ AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC 2006 8AR 28 AM 8~ 35 automatic control and may start at CI~Y(~~C'~L(ERK /~ any time without warning. 3.10 ,D~~F"iVTIFI~~~ION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING A. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information. B. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. C. Identify control panels with minimum 1 cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates. D. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record _ documents All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not remove the label. _ 3.11 CONTROLLERS A. Provide a separate Controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement. B. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum of 15% spare I/O point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not universal, 15% of each type is required. If outputs are not universal, 15% of each type is required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used. C. Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field wiring, point database definition, and custom software. No additional Controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points. 3.12 PROGRAMMING A. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25% of available memory free for future use. B. Point Naming. System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index. C. Software Programming 1. Provide programming for the system as per specifications and adhere to the strategy algorithms provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in this document shall also be provided by the Control System Contractor. Imbed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations. 105191-1 15910-28 k ~ ~ ~•-~ SECTION 15910 F 1 ~... s~.. P~-.- AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC _ 2~j~ ~ota~ ZB ~~~ ~~ ~5 D. Operators' Interface CII~' ~~.~~'1 k~ _ ~~`~, J1q ~ l ~iJ ~~"~~~controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start- up, and trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface data _. _ base, and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operator interface. 2. As part of this execution phase, the controls contractor will perform a complete test of _ the operator interface. Test duration shall be a minimum of 16 hours on-site. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner or Owner's representative. E. Demonstration. A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and control system shall be performed. The contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 4 hours on- site with the Owner and his representatives for a complete functional demonstration of all the system requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint acceptance inspection, and permits acceptance of the delivered system for on-line operation. 3.13 CLEANING A. This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager or General Contractor. B. At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc. C. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for -- paint damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. 3.14 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused. _ _ B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section. 105191-1 15910-29 SECTION 15910 - AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM-DDC B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported. C. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work. 3.16 ACCEPTANCE A. The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty. END OF SECTION 15910 a C~ ~~ ° ~ ~' ~ ~ ~ .-~G ~~ ~ q, ~ J~ ~ ~ ~ T c» D w a+ 105191-1 15910-30 SECTION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems. C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS ~~~~ 3~~~ 23 ~~°~ 8~ 36 iC~"~'~ Cf i Y IOV'fA A. Testing and balancing shall be performed by an independent certified testing and balancing contractor. The Contractor shall be certified by AABC (American Association of Balancing Contractors), NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau), or SMARTA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning and Roofing Trade Association). The Balancing Contractor shall provide labor, services, and test equipment required to test, adjust, and balance the specified systems. Personnel involved in the execution of the work under the Balancing Contract shall be experienced and trained in the total balancing of mechanical systems, as well as being regular employees of the Balancing Contractor. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. B. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. C. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outline indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. E. Provide reports in soft cover, binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. F. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance. G. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms. 1.04 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems installation and schedule completion of balancing work before Substantial Completion of Project. 105191-1 15950-1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING ~1~~~ B. Do not proceed with balancing work until systems scheduled for t~~jg~in~~n~.b~)~ncing -- are clean and free from debris, dirt, and discarded building materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS CITY CI.ERI< IOWA CITY InWq A. Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 OTHER CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Mechanical and Plumbing Contractors shall cooperate with the balancing agency by: 1. Including balancing dampers as required by the Drawings and Specifications. ~ - 2. Putting complete system into operation during duration of balancing period. 3. Providing up-to-date set of Drawings and advising immediately of changes made to the system during construction. . , 4. Providing labor and equipment and cost of performing corrections such as dampers, belts, and pulley changes, etc. as required without undue delay. 5. Providing complete submittal information for mechanical equipment complete with pertinent engineering information. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following _ conditions. 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Pumps are rotating correctly. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15. Service and balance valves are open. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 105191-1 15950-2 - - SECTION 15950 ~~ ~ ~--• I ' ~....'~_, . TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING L~~3 ~'~~~~ 2~ ta~~ g~ 36 - 3.03 PREPARATION ~ ~,, r-~ A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancin o}~altibn§:'~~, jr}~truments _ _ available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during te' ~~i'-i ~~T ~ I~VV!-i B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust diffusers, registers and grilles in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostat to specified settings. 3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. -- B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. - C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and _. noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. 105191-1 15950-3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING ~I ~.~LJ F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speed(~~~~i~cQ~iv{l~~g~equired. Vary - branch air quantities by damper regulation. CITY CLERK G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quan~f~f~c~~~atutlet or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowance for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide __ required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches (12.5 PA) positive static pressure across the crab's room door. M. Air ducts with electric heating coils shall be adjusted to allow coil to energize at minimum air flow conditions. 3.07 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURES A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. B. Use calibrated fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. G. Three way valves shall be tested and balanced for flow capacities at full coil flow and full bypass flow, as indicated on the drawings or at a maximum coil flow, whichever is less. 3.08 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 105191-1 15950-4 r-. - - SECTION 15950 _ ~ ~ ~ ' ~~ TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING --- - Exhaust Fans L~ t`;~~ 2B ~ti~ ~~ ~~ Fin Tube Radi ation Diffusers, Reg isters and Grilles C ~( ~ I_~~i~~ _ ivU`~1~ CilY IC)V~`A B. REPORT FORMS _ 1. Title Page: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d. Project name e. Project location -- f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor -- i. Project altitude j. Report date -- 2. Summ ary Comments: a. Design versus final performance _-_ b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building _ pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions -- 3. Instrument List: a. Instrument - b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number --- e. Range f. Calibration date 4. Electri c Motors: a. Manufacturer b. ModeUFrame c. HPBHP d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load e. RPM - f. Service factor g. Starter size, rating, heater elements h. Sheave Make/SizeBore 105191-1 15950-5 SECTION 15950 ~I ~~~ - - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 2006 MbR 28 AM 8= 36 5. V-Belt Drive: a. Identification/location CITY CLERK b. Required driven RPM I~WA ~'~~ ~n~A c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual 6. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Air flow, specified and actual f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Inlet pressure h. Discharge pressure i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore j. Number of Belts/Make/Size k. Fan RPM - 7. Fin-tube: a. Unit type, manufacturer, model no., etc. b. Water flow (GPM) 8. Air Distribution Test Sheet (Diffusers, Registers and Grilles): a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type ~_ d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow END OF SECTION 15950 105191-1 15950-6 -- Division 16 ~i ~..~ ` ~ I__.~ Electrical ,; Cl ~~~-l~~ylQUVA 10 JVA Division 16 SECTION 16050 ~ (~ ~ ~ 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ~ ~_.`__ _~ - tC~~ h~~~ 28 r~,~i 8~ 36 PARTI GENERAL CI-~~'~ ~~E~r~ --- 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES iO`f~f f~ Cl~ Y, IOWA A. Basic materials and methods. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Work shall comply with applicable standards of the: 1. Factory Mutual (FM) -- 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 4. National Electrical Safety Code 5. National Fire Protection Association 6. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) -- 7. Uniform Fire Code (UFC) 8. William-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA) 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION __ A. Basic materials and methods are described. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Architect/Engineer for review, prior to the placing of orders for any equipment, a complete schedule of electrical fixtures and materials to be installed. Schedule shall consist of catalog cuts, diagrams, shop drawings, performance curves, or any other descriptive material -- necessary to fully describe the equipment proposed and its operating characteristics. B. Review of the materials, including alternate or substitute items, shall be obtained in writing - from the Architect/Engineer; verbal review will not be considered binding. C. Submittals shall have been reviewed and signed by the contractor, prior to submittal to the ---_ Architect/Engineer. Faxes or copies of faxes are not acceptable. The Architeet/Engineer will review submittals to aid in interpreting the drawings and specifications, and in so doing will assume that the submittals conform to the specified requirements set forth in this specification. ___ Review of submittals by the ArchitectlEngineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with the elements of the specifications. D. Furnish copies of parts lists and operating and maintenance instructions and manuals, and furnish the services of a competent, trained individual thoroughly familiar with the operation of 105191-1 16050-1 F! f «~~ SECTION 16050 t_ BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS '006 Mi~R 28 APi $' ~~ch special system. Special systems shall include electrical and communications equipment requiring operating instructions, inspection or periodic maintenance. The person instructing Ci~Y CLERK he Owner shall see that the Owner is conversant with the operation of the system and its ~Q~f f~ C`~'~(, ~~W~rious controls; the company from whom maintenance service and repairs may be obtained; and the location and function of switches, devices and accessories, contained in the system. E. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be supplied containing the following: 1. Operation, maintenance, recommended spare parts, and renewal parts information for equipment furnished. 2. Set of complete, final, as-reviewed and accepted information required to be submitted for review. 3. As-constructed electrical, equipment, and installation drawings. 4. Index of equipment suppliers listing current names, addresses and telephone numbers of those who should be contacted for service. 5. As-constructed contract drawings permanently marked in red to show departures from _ , original drawings. 6. Submit one (1) copy for review. This copy will be returned. Submit three (3) final revised copies. "~ F. Submit fire stop information and data sheets. 1.05 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Obtain, furnish and include the costs of necessary permits, fees and inspection certificates for -- material and labor furnished. Include costs of permits, certificates and inspection fees required in connection with the installation, unless otherwise noted in the detailed contractual " description preceding these Electrical Specifications. - B. On completion of work, furnish satisfactory evidence that work is acceptable to regulatory authorities having jurisdiction. C. Be responsible to see that the proper inspection authorities are notified when inspections are required by Code, and provide necessary assistance to the inspector during inspection. 1.06 REGULATIONS A. Installation shall conform to or exceed the minimum requirements of the NEC, and federal, state, local and municipal ordinances. B. Work shall be performed in accordance with applicable recommendations of the ADA and OSHA. C. Installations shown on drawings or required in the specifications that exceed the minimum _ requirements of the NEC or other regulations shall be installed as shown or specified. 105191-1 16050-2 - SECTION 16050 ~I ~ t. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ~ ~ v'"~" - 1.07 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7alb ~~lt~ ~~ ~`~ $~ 36 A. Intent of the drawings and specifications is to describe the complete in~lhafion~~.~1 t{e conclusion of construction, the electrical system shall be turned ov~t~' ~h~r c~~te and ready for safe, efficient operation. __ B. Drawings and the specifications are intended to be cooperative and supplementary. Closely check the drawings and specifications for any obvious errors or omissions, and bring any such condition to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to the receipt of bids, in order to permit clarification by means of a mailed Addendum. C. Drawings for electrical work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work, general arrangement, approximate sizes, and locations of equipment and materials. Exact locations shall be determined to best fit the layout of the job. Scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient or accurate for determining these locations. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangement, make such changes as directed by the Architect/Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner. D. A complete set of contract documents shall be on the site at all times. Prior to installing the --- work, check drawings for dimensions and conflicts. E. Rules Where the context requires, the singular includes the plural and the plural includes the singular. 2. The use of "and" in a combined provision means that all elements in the provision must be complied with, or must exist to make the provision applicable. Where compliance with one or more elements suffices, or where existence of one or more elements makes the provision applicable, "or" (rather than "and/or") is used. "Shall" is mandatory and "may" is permissive. 1.08 RESPONSIBILITY A. Examine the project site and become familiar with existing conditions that will affect the work. Review the drawings and specifications of other trades and take note of conditions to be created which will also affect the work. B. No energized conductors shall be exposed at any time except when the immediate area is under the direct supervision of a qualified electrician. C. Provide temporary insulated magnetic covers for open panelboards. Use SP Products (1-800- 233-8595) Type TPC xx-xx or approved equivalent. D. Locate equipment, which must be serviced, operated or maintained, in fully accessible positions. E. Verify location and size of each motor, and properly connect motors. 105191-1 16050-3 ~I~~~ SECTION 16050 ~~ BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 74~~ ~~R 28 FAM $'R~ponsibility shall not end with installation and connecting of various apparatus. Include services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of the work. CITY CLERK Provide qualified journeymen, helpers and laborers required to properly unload, install, ~O~A (~~; ~Q~nnect, adjust, start, operate and test the work involved, including equipment and materials furnished by other trades or by the Owner. 1.09 DAMAGE A. Be responsible for damage to the work of other trades or to the building and its contents caused by the electrical installation. 1.10 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE A. Material and equipment shall be fully guaranteed to be free from defects and to be new equipment. No secondhand, used or salvaged equipment will be allowed. B. Keep entire portion of the work in repair, so far as defects in workmanship, apparatus, material - or construction are concerned, without additional cost to the Owner, for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance, except as otherwise specified. C. Equipment installed which fails to meet performance ratings specified or shown on drawings shall be removed and replaced by new equipment which meets specified requirements, without additional cost to the Owner. D. Material and workmanship shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, in whose presence various tests shall be made as required by these specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Material shall be new, complete with manufacturer's guarantee or warranty, and shall be as listed by UL, if a standard has been established by UL for the type of material. Approved manufacturers shall be firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of equipment of types and capacities required and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three years. B. Methods and techniques of installation shall be subject to review by the Architect/Engineer. C. Material shall be the standard product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific product. Materials of the same type or class shall be the products of one manufacturer. For example, panelboards shall be from the same manufacturer and lighting switches from the same manufacturer. D. Material shall be protected from damage and stored indoors at all times, unless other storage arrangements are reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. E. Material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 105191-1 16050-4 -- SECTION 16050 ~~~~~ BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS !J' F. The equipment manufacturer and installing contractor shall carefully ~~~~~ ~ t ir~i11~~,3 operating equipment can be properly serviced. If the manufacturer or the contractor has any reservations in this regard, they shall state their reservations and suggested~h~ai{i ~fi~~t1 separate letter addressed to the ArchitectBngineer, and shall include tN®r ~~~~t ~~~~ shop drawing submission. Architect/Engineer will work out required changes and adjustments in contract prices where such adjustments are warranted. No adjustment in contract price will be allowed for additions required by applicable code, ordinance, statute, utility regulation or labor regulation. It is the obligation of the contractor to include such items in his original bid. Changes in equipment shall be incorporated in shop drawings. If the contractor fails to call such reservations or suggestions to the Architect/Engineer's attention, in writing, before any work is done or equipment is purchased, it shall be assumed that the contractor accepts the responsibility for providing a safe, coordinated and complete installation. If at a later date, changes become necessary to assure a safe, coordinated and complete installation, the changes shall be made without increase in contract price. - G. Equipment, devices, apparatus, systems and installations shall be entirely suitable and safe for each intended application in every respect, and must not create conditions which would be harmful to occupants of the building, to operating personnel, to installation personnel, to testing --- personnel, to workmen or to the public. The contractor shall be solely responsible for providing installations that will meet these conditions. If the contractor believes that the installation will not be safe for all parties, he shall so report to the Architect/Engineer, in - writing, before any equipment is purchased or work is installed, giving his exact recommendations. __ H. Where the specifications or drawings state that equipment shall be "furnished," "installed" or "provided," it shall be understood to mean that the contractor shall furnish and install that equipment completely, unless it is specifically stated that the equipment is to be furnished or installed by other trades, public utility companies or the Owner. 2.02 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS A. Proposals as submitted shall be based on the products specifically named in the specification or the equivalent. Furnishing material or equipment by manufacturers other than those specified shall only be by permission of the Architect/Engineer. Such permission for substitution must be requested, by the BidderNendor, in writing, at least eleven (11) calendar days prior to bid opening time. The request shall identify the differences in the alternate material or equipment as compared to that specified, and shall indicate the benefits to the project as a result of selecting the alternative. B. Furnish to the ArchitectlEngineer, when requested, samples of proposed material or equipment _ _ substitutions. These samples shall remain with the Architect/Engineer as long as they desire. C. Changes required by alternate equipment shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Re- design costs incurred by the Architect/Engineer and costs incurred by other trades, public utilities, or the Owner as a result of the use of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 105191-1 16050-5 ~~~~~ SECTION 16050 ~ , BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2~~~ ~{~R Z$ l~ $~ ~e Architect/Engineer reserves the sole right for the approval of proposed material or equipment, and the phrase "or an approved equivalent" used in these specifications or on the (^„rl~ CI..ERI'~ drawings shall be interpreted to mean an equivalent approved by the Architect/Engineer. IOVIIA CIT1! IOWA E. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to refuse approval of equipment which does not meet the specification, in their opinion, or of equipment for which no local experience of satisfactory service is available. The Architect/Engineer further reserves the right to reject equipment for which maintenance service and the availability of replacement parts is questionable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine the existing building and become familiar with conditions as they exist, or that will, in any manner, affect the work under this contract. No allowance will be made subsequently, on the behalf of the contractors, for error or negligence on their part in connection with this. B. Existing equipment, devices and conduits in or on the existing building or grounds which are to be replaced, or which interferes with the remodeling of the existing facilities or installation of new equipment, shall be removed from the premises or relocated as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Do not remove from premises any equipment that may have maintenance value to the Owner without permission of the Owner. Items not to be reused shall be removed from the premises, unless otherwise noted herein or on the drawings. C. Exposed conduit and wires that are no longer in service shall be removed and the stubs plugged behind the surface. Existing low voltage (less than SOV) concealed wiring, smaller than 14 AWG, may remain. Building surface damage, and openings left by removal of equipment, devices and conduit, shall be repaired by the proper trades, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Coordinate with other trades to minimize the damage to the building in order to reduce the amount of patching required. D. Where new openings are cut, and concealed items are encountered, the items shall be removed or relocated as required. Where conduit to be removed, stubs through floors, walls or ceilings, patching shall be so that no evidence of the former installation remains. E. Existing conduit or wire shall not be reused. F. Conduit shall generally be concealed in the existing portion of the building. Review plans and specifications to determine where new ceilings and walls are to be installed, and make use of these areas to conceal conduit. Do not use surface raceways unless approved by the Arch itect/Engineer. G. Existing surface raceways that will become concealed due to the work shall be replaced with new conduit and wire. Junction boxes for this modification shall be accessible. 3.02 FIRESTOPPING A. Furnish and install "through-penetration fire stop systems," consisting of field constructed assemblage of products and materials, designed to prevent the spread of fire and gases through _ . 105191-1 16050-6 f SECTION 16050 ~~~~~ BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2U~0 G'~{' 1\ Z 8 Mi'i - fire-rated openings which are commonly made through walls and floors to accommodate ~~ ~ 6 penetrants such as: busway, cable tray, electrical cables and conduits. ~}G!-~'~ v~_C~~~ B. "Through-Penetration Fire Stop" is a material, device or construction in'sta 1e~1 t~'~-~si~st,~~l"~ prescribed time, the passage of flame, heat and gases through openings which penetrate the entire fire resistive construction in order to accommodate penetrating items. Incorporating the use of specific products installed in a specific manner, they shall only be installed in configuration for which they have been specifically tested and listed by UL or FM per UL-1479 or ASTM E-814. C. Where a specific fire stop system is not specified for athrough-penetration, the contractor shall include proposed fire stop system designs in submittals. - D. Where there is no specific UL fire stop system available for a particular application, the contractor shall obtain from the fire stop manufacturer a system drawing to be submitted for approval, prior to installation. E. Holes or voids used to extend electrical installation through fire-rated floors, ceilings and walls shall be fire stopped with a resistant material capable of expanding up to 8 to 10 times, when -- exposed to temperatures of 250 degrees Fahrenheit. It shall have an approved rating to three hours per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479). Fire protection products shall be similar to Chase-Foam, Dow Corning, Thomas & Betts or 3M Fire Barrier Caulk, Putty, Strip and Sheet materials. F. The materials and components of an approved fire stop system shall be the products of a single manufacturer and shall not be inter-mixed. G. Fire stop materials used shall be suitable and compatible with the penetrating item(s) including the surrounding materials. -- H. Fire stop materials used in exposed area shall be paintable and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Each device shall be identified according to the following system: 1. Magnetic motor starters, safety switches, and remote push button stations shall be identified with the starter number, name and number of device controlled, and circuit number, e.g., "MS-l, Air Handling Unit 1, Circuit L1-24". 2. Manual motor starters shall be identified with the name and number of the device controlled and circuit number, e.g., "Exhaust Fan 1, Circuit L1-31". 3. Exhaust fans shall be identified at the disconnect switch with the circuit number. 4. Panel circuit number shall be identified on the convenience outlet and light switch box, or the backside of the plate with embossed lettering plastic tape or indelible marking pen. 105191-1 16050-7 SECTION 16050 - '~Il....~[~ BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 206 ~~,~ 2$ AM4 8.36 Junction and pull box covers shall be labeled with circuits contained within. Mark on - - outside with permanent marker in concealed or mechanical spaces, or inside the cover ~1-f-~r CL~R~ in public areas. - ~~~~ C4~ (w6V.~ Three phase outlet cover plates shall have special 1/8" engraved lettering "208 volt, 3 phase". B. Identification shall be engraved, laminated plastic using black letters on white background, unless otherwise specified. C. Color-coding of branch circuit wiring shall be as stated in the NEC. Color-coding of neutral ~ - conductors in conduit with multi-circuits shall be as stated in the NEC. Wires of sizes larger than No. 8 AWG shall be color coded by a strip around the conductor at junctions, pull boxes and terminating points. -- 1. Color-coding of wiring shall match existing. 2. Color-coding of grounding wires shall be green. 3.04 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT A. Furnish power wiring for the temperature control equipment. B. Cooperate with other trades on the locations of the outlet boxes, switches and controls. ~ . C. Devices or equipment requiring both electrical and mechanical connections shall be installed by the contractor furnishing the device or equipment. Remaining connections shall then be made by the appropriate contractor. D. Where circuits serving specific items of equipment are shown on the electrical drawings, the -- breaker ratings, number of poles, and conductor sizes are nominal for the general class of equipment that includes each specific item. Final sizes shall be coordinated with the Owner or with the contractor furnishing the equipment. 3.05 EQUIPMENT BY OTHER CONTRACTORS A. Verify with other contractors the location of equipment requiring electrical connection, including control devices that are supplied by the other contractors. Make any necessary changes before roughing-in for power and control power circuits. B. Review drawings and specifications and be responsible for the proper electrical connection of equipment. Furnish labor and material, including flexible conduit for movable equipment, to completely connect outlets, receptacles, switches, starters, and limit switches for equipment ~ - furnished by other contractors. C. Review other sections of this specification, and be responsible for connecting the equipment to operate as described. 3.06 EQUIPMENT BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR 105191-1 16050-8 - SECTION 16050 ~~ ~~(~ ~ j BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS QQ ,,tit r ? ~ n ~ Ail t]• 3 6 A. The Mechanical Trades will furnish motors for items supplied by theht'~`l~utrni`s)~necessary labor and material, including wire and lugs, to completely connect the equ}p~~}~t~`-L~1~~ B. Interlock contacts required on starters shall be furnished by the Electri~~ ll~~Jd~t~tb~+, ~~WA C. Review other sections of this specification, and be responsible for connecting the equipment to operate as described. 3.07 INTERRUPTIONS A. Changes in electrical services shall be made so as to provide a minimum of interference with the operation of services in the building. When changes require shutdown of building services, notify the proper building authorities not less than 48 hours in advance and obtain approval from these authorities before making changes. Such notices shall give duration and nature of shutdown. Temporary arrangements shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer or Owner. --- B. Commissioning of security system work shall be coordinated with the Owner. 3.08 DEMOLITION A. Provide labor necessary to demolish the existing electrical system described in the contract documents. 3.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide cutting and fitting necessary to properly install work, unless specifically noted otherwise in these specifications or shown on the drawings. Coordinate with other trades as required to minimize the damage and the amount of patching required. -- B. Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval. Carefully carry out any cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, paving or other surfaces required for the __ installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. C. Patch around holes cut for new work or holes where existing devices are removed. 3.10 PAINTING A. No painting or finishing is to be included under this contract except as noted. The finish of any item that has been marred, scratched, or damaged in any way, shall be repainted to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner. 3.11 CLEANING OF PREMISES A. Keep the premises clean of debris caused by the work at all times. Keep material stored, in areas designated by the Owner, in such a manner so as not to interfere with the progress of the work of other trades or with the operation of existing facilities. B. Interiors and exteriors of electrical panels shall be thoroughly cleaned. 105191-1 16050-9 SECTION 16050 - , BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS C. At the conclusion of the construction, the site shall be thoroughly cleaned of rubble, debris and unused material and shall be left in good order. Closed off spaces shall be cleaned of waste material, cartons, and wood frame members used in the construction. 3.12 RECORD OF CHANGES MADE TO THE WORK A. Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of electrical plans and specifications upon _ which it is clearly and permanently marked in red and noted, in complete detail, any changes made. Include changes to location and arrangement of electrical apparatus or changes made in the electrical system and wiring as a result of building construction conditions or as a result of written instructions from the Architect/Engineer. Such record of changes shall be made daily , and the marked plans and specifications shall be available for the Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time. B. Upon completion of the job, and before final payment is made, transmit the marked-up plans and specifications to the Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION 16050 _ O ~~ ~ 0 C' D~ ~ ~~-4 C~ ~ ~ m ~~ A ~ ;';`~ U u,~ rn 105191-1 16050-10 -- SECTION 16060 F ~ ~ ~ j 'J ( t GROUNDING -. - ~C~b ~~~ 28 M~ 8~ 36 PART1 GENERAL Cj I ~l' ~.l_~i~'it\ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~{~~~~ Cj~; IQVVA A. Electrical System Ground 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). _- C. National Electrical Code (NEC). D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). E. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (LJL). _ 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Grounding provides equipment protection by allowing protective devices to operate during electrical faults. 1.04 SUBMITTALS - 1. None required. 1.05 QUALIFICATION A. Conductors and connectors: see Sections 16120 and 16150. B. Grounding materials shall meet applicable standards and codes. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- 2.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Provide a fully function equipment grounding system. PART 3 EXECUTION __ 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Grounding connection required for electrical equipment including (but not limited to) the following: 1. Conduit and raceways. -- 2. Panelboards. 105191-1 16060-1 SECTION 16060 GROUNDING 3. Motor Starters. 4. Metal, non-current carrying parts of electrical equipment. B. The electrical system ground shall conform to these specifications, but in no case shall it be less than the requirements of the NEC. C. A grounding conductor shall be run in the raceway with the current carrying conductors. D. Check the continuity of ground in the electrical system. This shall include panels, receptacles, switches, outlets, and other electrically operated devices. If continuity does not exist, install additional grounding conductors such that continuity exists. END OF SECTION 16060 Q N C O t~'~ ""~ .~ ` 1 ~r 1 ~ i ~ b' ~ ~ w 105191-1 16060-2 SECTION 16120 F(~ ~~ CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1~~6 t°~~ 2~ ~~~ 8~ 36 PART l GENERAL ; „ ~. r-- ~~ i Y t.~~>/~i~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~d~~,~ ~~I~-Y, IOV!aA A. Wires and cables 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Wire Gage (AWG) B. National Electrical Code (NEC). C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Not used. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information in accordance with Section 01330: 1. List of types of wire and cable to be used including manufacturer and names of suppliers. Information not required for single conductor 10 AWG and 12 AWG. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Copper conductors shall be manufactured by American Insulated Wire Corp., General Cable, Pirelli Cable Corp., Southwire Co., Triangle/PWC Inc., Okonite or approved equivalent. B. All wiring shall be listed by UL. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conductors used throughout this project shall be copper. B. Conductors used for the electrical distribution system at voltages less than 600 volts shall have 600-volt insulation. C. Color-coding shall be as stated in section 16050 Identification. 105191-1 16120-I SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES D. Six hundred (600) volt insulated conductors smaller than 6 AWG, unless shown otherwise on the drawings or approved by the Architect/Engineer, shall be type THWN moisture-resistant thermoplastic (polyvinyl chloride) insulation rated 75° C in wet and dry locations. E. Conductors shall be stranded. F. Conductors smaller than 12 AWG shall not be used on this project. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Wiring shall be in conduit or approved raceways, unless directed otherwise by Architect/Engineer. B. For feeders, no more than three phase conductors per conduit shall be installed, unless specifically shown. C. For branch circuits, no more than six (6) phase conductors per conduit shall be installed, unless specifically shown. D. Where wire is run for a future motor connection, to be connected under a separate contract, at least four (4) additional feet of the feeder wire shall be pulled for future connection. END OF SECTION 16120 _ O N O C ~~ ~ ~~ ~ m s} ~ ~ ~~ ~ w rn 105191-1 16120-2 -- SECTION 16130 Fj ~~- CONDUIT AND RACEWAY ZU~6 ~~e~ 2$ ~~ S~ 36 PART 1 GENERAL Ct-~~+, ,~~-LRK -- 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ,~~~'`~ C~ i Y ~~WA A. Conduit and raceway. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Conduit shall carry the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) label. C. Conduit shall meet the following American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and Federal Specifications (FS) standards: -- 1. Rigid Steel Conduit (RGS): FS WW-C-581 and ANSI C80.1. 2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): FS WW-C-563, UL797, and ANSI C80.3. 3. Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-566, CSA, UL. 4. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: CSA, UL. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION --- A. Not used. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. None required. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be Electri-Flex, Type LA or approved equivalent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit smaller than'/4-inch diameter shall not be used on this project. __ B. Only threaded type connectors and couplings shall be used with RGS. C. RGS, flexible conduit or flexible liquid tight conduit including fittings and hangers used throughout this project shall be galvanized steel. D. Connectors for EMT shall be steel or malleable iron. Fittings shall be capable of carrying ground fault currents of 10,000 amps rms for 1'/2 inch and smaller, and 20,000 amps rms for 2- inch and larger for a minimum of 3 cycles. Fittings shall be Thomas & Betts 5030, 5031, 5120, 105191-1 - 16130-1 SECTION 16130 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY n ~~~_~~ 5123, or 530 series. Die cast metal fittings will not be permitted~g~t~i~~srP~cta~o~pe~r~irs - 1'/z" and smaller shall be compression type. $. Type LA Liquatite flexible conduit, with appropriate fittings whi ~j'~ assembl ,shall be used in a boiler room kitchen exterior locatio~ n ~`is'~ 1 y PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Wiring shall be in conduit or approved raceways, unless shown otherwise. B. Conduit and outlet installation shall be concealed throughout this project, as follows unless otherwise indicated. 1. Conduit or Raceway above suspended ceilings shall be supported from the building structure and not from the ceiling grid hanger wires. 2. Conduit throughout this project shall be EMT installed with steel support straps except for exterior applications. Exterior conduit shall be RGS. C. Conduit shall not be used as the sole grounding means. D. Metallic conduit, cut with a power saw or hacksaw, shall be reamed to remove burrs. E. Conduit bends shall be held to as large a radius as possible for ease in pulling of conductors and to provide a neatly installed appearance. The maximum length of straight conduit runs shall be 200 feet between pull boxes, with 50 feet deducted for each 90-degree bend and 25 feet deducted for each 45-degree bend; reduction of length for all other angle bends shall be calculated on a similar basis. F. No conduits shall be routed in elevator equipment rooms or shafts except those required for the elevator power and communications. G. Suspended type conduit hangers for 2-inch and smaller conduit shall be with mounting devices, similar to Unistrut or Kindorf beam clamps. Hangers for groups of conduit with any size larger than 2-inch shall be channel type structural shapes, with conduits clamped to channel with U- shaped clamps. H. Interferences 1. Conduit runs are not shown to allow this contractor to choose the route to the various electrical devices. However, care shall be taken to coordinate the conduit runs with duct work, beams, joists, plumbing pipes, and plumbing fixtures to be installed by other trades. 2. When interference develops, the Architect/Engineer will decide which equipment will be relocated; regardless of which apparatus was installed first. 105191-1 16130-2 ^- -- SECTION 16130 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY -- I. Install conduit and wiring for electrical devices furnished by other trades or by the owner on this project, unless otherwise shown or specified. J. Insulated Bushings 1. Conduits shall have insulated bushings installed at entrances to panelboards, starters, pull boxes and shall be secured to the enclosure by the bushing (and lock nut, if necessary) on the inside, and by lock nut on the outside. 2. Conduits entering distribution type panelboards and the main switchgear shall have insulated grounding bushings similar to T & B 3800 series, with bushings connected together by means of a continuous copper grounding conductor, sized to meet the requirements of the NEC. K. Connectors, couplings and lock nuts shall be tightened securely by use of the proper tools to assure an effective and continuous path to ground through the conduit system. L. Wherever conduit crosses a building expansion joint and is constrained from relief deflection (i.e. buried in concrete or a straight run anchored in concrete on both sides of the joint), expansion fittings or expansion/deflection fittings shall be provided. M. Surface mounted conduit shall be mounted flush to wall and secured by two-hole clamps. END OF SECTION 16130 _ v ~~ ~-a C.'1 ~~~ _{ _<' ~~ .7 N `_ D w 105191-1 16130-3 SECTION 16421 r ~ ~~ "1 MOTOR STARTERS ~ ~ `-` "-'" ~.1 ZO~~ ~~R 28 ~~~ 8~ 36 PART1 GENERAL CI"1' Cl-Er~K 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES `Q~~fr`~ ~f I~, {~WA A. Starters. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Starters provide control of and protection for electric motors. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information in accordance with Section 01330: 1. Wiring diagrams. 2. Electrical ratings. a. NEMA size. b. Voltage. c. Current. 3. Number of poles. 4. Coil voltage. 5. Physical characteristics including enclosure size. 6. Time -current curves for all breakers requiring settings and fuses. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Magnetic motor starters shall be as manufactured by Allen-Bradley Co., Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. B. Manual motor starters shall be as manufactured by Allen-Bradley Co., Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse, General Electric, or Square D. C. Motor starters shall be by the same manufacturer. 105191-0 16421-1 SECTION 16421 MOTOR STARTERS PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Magnetic motor starters shall meet the following specifications: A. Combination magnetic motor starters shall have a fusible motor circuit protector unless shown otherwise. B. Provisions for locking the disconnecting means handle in either the ON or OFF position. C. Minimum starter size shall be NEMA Size 0. D. Heater element or sensor size shall be based on the nameplate full load current rating of the motor. E. Each starter shall contain a fused control circuit with the fuse properly sized by the Starter Manufacturer to protect the coil of the starter. Control transformers shall be protected by such a fuse in the primary and secondary circuits of the transformer. Furnish 20% spare fuses of each amperage used (minimum of three) to the Owner. F. Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 1, unless shown otherwise. G. Enclosures for wet locations or outdoor use shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel, unless shown otherwise. 2.02 For each magnetic starter supplied, provide ahand-off-automatic (HOA) selector switch, red run pilot light, (2) NO and (2) NC auxiliary contacts, control power transformer with fusing, and heater motor protective elements. Supply additional push buttons, and similar control devices, not specifically furnished by other trades or by the owner but that are required for proper operation of the specific motor. These devices shall be by the same manufacturer as the starters. 2.03 All motors shall have a magnetic motor starter. 2.04 Terminals of the proper size for wire (as shown on the drawings for line, load, and ground) shall be supplied by the motor starter manufacturer. _ O N -- ~~ ~ ~ N ~ ~ ~r~'- ~ ~ " m A» ~ ~I t ~ ~~ a? __ D w rr 105191-0 16421-2 -- SECTION 16421 ~ ~ MOTOR STARTERS ~~ `-"E'r - PART 3 EXECUTION ~~ub ~~ 2$ ~~'~ S' 36 3.01 Furnish and install motor starters and power and control wiring, complete ~~s~'ci~~ess shown otherwise. ~~WA ~~~'~ Y, !C}WA 3.02 Starters shall be mounted securely to walls, columns, or machine frames, and provided with the _ brackets, mounting devices, structural pieces, and expansion type anchor inserts necessary for this purpose. Starters shall not be mounted directly to metal surfaces or to concrete or masonry walls. Structural channels such as Kindorf or Unistrut shall be used to mount starters at least 3/4 inch away from the mounting surface. 3.03 The top of each magnetic motor starter shall be mounted 60 inches above the finished floor unless shown otherwise. 3.04 The top of the box for manual motor starters shall be mounted 48 inches above the floor unless shown otherwise. 3.05 Motor starters furnished with "hand-off-automatic" switches, but not wired for automatic operation, shall have the reference to automatic deleted from the switch label by paint, revised nameplate, or other permanent means. 3.06 Mount motor starters adjacent to or on the equipment served, unless shown otherwise. END OF SECTION 16421 ]05191-0 16421-3 -- SECTION 16441 ~~! ~~~ VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS -- ~~~6 P~~R 28 hM ~~ 37 PART 1 GENERAL IQ CI i ,~ ~,LcnK -- 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Wi-y ~~ ~ ~, IOWq A. Variable speed motor controllers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). -- C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Variable speed controllers provide speed control of electric motors. _ 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information in accordance with Section 01330: 1. Wiring diagrams. 2. Electrical ratings. a. NEMA size. - b. Voltage. c. Current. d. Carrier frequency under normal conditions. e. Drive derating guidelines. 3. Number of poles. -- 4. Coil voltage. 5. Physical characteristics including enclosure size. 6. Listing of settable parameters. 7. Warranty. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. -- 1. Operations and maintenance manuals shall be forwarded two weeks before shipment of the equipment and copies shall be included with the equipment. 105191-1 16441-1 FI ~G~ VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS ZQ~6 MA~ 2$ ~~?$: $'~ The operation and maintenance manuals shall include installation and handling - requirements, initial start-up tests and adjustments, maintenance requirements, CITY CLERK troubleshooting procedures and renewal parts lists. l.~~A ~~ALIF~ATIONS A. Variable speed motor controllers shall be as manufactured by ABB, Square D or Toshiba Corp. _, B. Variable speed motor controllers shall be by the same manufacturer. C. Variable speed motor controllers shall be furnished with equipment, features, and functions as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. In addition, all controllers shall be furnished with any additional equipment required or recommended by the manufacturer to meet the requirements of these specifications such as isolation transformers, input filters, voltage step-up or step-down transformers, or power factor correction capacitors. D. Variable Speed motor controllers shall comply with IEEE Standard 519. - PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Variable speed motor controllers shall meet the following specifications, unless shown otherwise. A. Door interlocked disconnect switch. B. NEMA 1 ventilated enclosure. C. Input fused internally with standard or current limiting fuses. ~-, D. Bypass circuitry for direct line motor operation with a door mounted inverter/line selector switch. E. Start, stop, and speed selection for control of motors. F. Frequency range of 6 to 60 Hertz. G. Input line reactor. H. Thermal overload relays on output for motor protection (down to approximately one-half motor base speed.) I. Short circuit protection, under/over voltage protection, and automatic restarting after a power outage. J. Resonance frequency null with field adjustable potentiometers to lock out any resonant speed. K. Transducer input for 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10 VDC ungrounded signal. __, L. Adjustable offset voltages for increasing starting torque. M. Adjustable acceleration and deceleration control. 105191-1 16441-2 SECTION 16441 r~ ~ ~~ J VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 2~l?6 ~~R 28 N. Adjustable maximum frequency and minimum frequency control. ~~ $: 3 O. Power ON light. C~ ~ r L( ~t~r( ~ov~~a c~; Y iov~rA P. Manual-off-automatic selector switch, to select the speed control source, and a manual potentiometer. Q. Speed indicator and an ammeter. R. Items D, N, O and P shall be mounted on the front cover, exposed. S. Operating ambient temperature shall be 0°C to 40°C. T. Digital operator keypad and display. U. Motor rated voltage 208V, 3 phase. V. Variable speed controller shall be provided with a communications cared for compatil\bility with the mechanical control system (LonMark). Furnish and install a LON card as required 2.02 Supply necessary remote operator control stations as shown on the plans. Remote stations shall be by the same manufacturer as the controllers. 2.03 Variable speed controllers shall be of the power transistor type for motors five (5) horsepower or less and of the current source type using diode bridge rectification on the input for motors greater than five horsepower. A. Pulse width modulated inverters (unless provided with an isolated micro-processor logic power transformer) and voltage source inverters (unless provided with a diode bridge rectifier circuit) shall be acceptable when furnished with isolation transformers and/or filters to limit the interaction among controllers and to prevent interference with other electronics systems such as fire alarm, clock and program, energy management, security, sound, emergency generator, lighting control, etc. B. Controllers with an input power factor of less than 85% (0.85) at maximum rated speed and power output shall be corrected to 95% (0.95) minimum at maximum output. 2.04 Select each variable speed motor controller to agree with the specific motor and motor application it is to control. Prior to submitting shop drawings, obtain information on the exact motor(s) to be supplied and shall select the controller(s) per the manufacturer's recommended procedure. 2.05 Terminals of the proper size for wire as shown on the drawings for line, load and ground shall be supplied by the motor starter manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Controllers shall be mounted securely to walls, columns, or machine frames, and provided with brackets, mounting devices, structural pieces, and expansion type anchor inserts necessary for this purpose. Controllers shall not be mounted directly to metal surfaces or to concrete or masonry walls. 105191-1 16441-3 SECTION 16441 VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS Structural channels such as Kindorf or Unistrut shall be used to mount starters at least 3/4 inch away from the mounting surface. 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 Top of each controller shall be mounted 60 inches above the finished floor unless otherwise noted Free-standing controllers shall be mounted on housekeeping pads. See Section 16050 regarding equipment concrete pad. Variable speed motor controller and control system supplier shall provide factory and field labor for complete calibration testing, and adjustment of the adjustable frequency drives and control components, and be responsible for setting control set points, operating sequences, and alarming systems within the specified control systems to produce the overall system performance as specified. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from date of installation or eighteen (18) months from date of delivery. END OF SECTION 16441 _ O ~ ~ a C7 ~ ~ ti ~ C7 C; ~ 1T m ~ I ~. ~ ~ °•° D w v 105191-1 16441-4 SECTION 16445 [-~ ~ ~ r-~ DISCONNECT SWITCHES I_ t__. -- ZQ~6 ~~t? 28 A~ 8~ 37 PART1 GENERAL CITI~` ~.%i..cRK - 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES I~Uti(A ~~~"'"Y ~n~~A A. Safety disconnect switches. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Disconnect switches provide safe disconnecting of electrical power to equipment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS __ A. Submit the following information in accordance with Section 01330: 1. Outline drawing with dimensions. 2. Equipment Ratings. a. Voltage. b. Capacity. --- c. Horsepower. d. Short circuit withstand rating. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Safety switches shall be NEMA heavy-duty type and shall carry the UL label. Fusible switches shall incorporate Class "R" fuse rejection feature and shall be braced to withstand 200,000 ampere RMS symmetrical fault current. B. Switches shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboards. C. Safety switches used for service entrance equipment shall be UL listed as suitable for service - entrance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Provide heavy-duty type, sheet steel enclosed, safety switches. Type, size, and rating shall be as shown on the drawings or as required by the motor or equipment served. 2.02 Switches shall incorporate quick-make, quick-break operating handles. Mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, and switches shall have a cover interlock to prevent unauthorized 105191-1 16445-1 .. SECTION 16445 ~~ ~~~ DISCONNECT SWITCHES opening of the switch door in the on position or closing of the s~{~~- h~~isr~~i~i~t~e7door open. Current carrying parts shall be constructed ofhigh-conductivity copper with silver-tungsten type switch contact. CfTY CLERK IOWA CITI; {nWA 2.03 Fuse clips shall be positive pressure type reinforced rejection type fuse clips. 2.04 Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 1. Enclosures for wet locations and for outdoor use shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. 2.05 Equip each motor disconnect with auxiliary contacts (1-NO, 1-NC). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Furnish and install safety disconnect switches (fused and non-fused) shown on the drawings. In addition, furnish a safety disconnect switch for motors and equipment which do not have combination starters or integral disconnecting means. 3.02 For mechanical equipment rated for use only with fuses (such as condensing units, compressors, chillers), provide fusible disconnect switches. Such switches shall be one, two or three pole type, with solid neutral for 4- wire service, and shall have the proper current and voltage rating as required. 3.03 Terminals of the proper size for wire as shown on the drawings for line, load and ground shall be supplied by the disconnect switch manufacturer. 3.04 Each motor shall be individually protected. Furnish a safety disconnect for each motor as required by the NEC. 3.05 Disconnect switches shall not be directly mounted to equipment which is mounted on vibration isolation pads or springs, unless a piece of flexible conduit is used between the disconnect switch and the fixed conduit. 3.06 Safety switches shall be mounted securely to walls, columns or machine frames, and provided with brackets, mounting devices, structural pieces and expansion type anchor inserts necessary for this purpose. Switches shall not be mounted directly to metal surfaces or to concrete or masonry walls. Structural channels such as Kindorf or Unistrut shall be used to mount switches at least 3/4 inch away from the mounting surface. 3.07 Switches shall be mounted at a height of 60 inches above the finished floor to the top of the back box. 3.08 Coordinate fusible switches and fuse sizes, with mechanical trades, where required by UL listing for mechanical equipment installation. END OF SECTION 16445 105191-1 16445-2 - SECTION 16491 ~~ ( ~ u FUSES !.._. __ 2~~6 r~;;~ 28 AM 8~ 37 PART1 GENERAL CITY CL~f~K -- 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES (OUV,~ CITY, InWA A. Fuses. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION - None required. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information in accordance with Section 01330: __ 1. List of fuse types and manufacturer. 2. Time- current curves. _ 3. List of spare fuses to be provided. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fuses shall be by Bussmann Manufacturing Division of McGraw Edison Company or by Littlefuse Tracor Company. B. Fuses shall be UL listed for 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting capacity. __ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Fuses shall be capable of interrupting the available fault without rupturing or damaging fuse clips, buswork, cable or switching components, and shall safely contain within the insulated barrel of the fuse the smoke, hot gases, carbon, and other harmful by-products of the fault. 2.02 Fuses rated 600 amperes or less shall be UL Class R rejection type with time current characteristics as - defined by the Bussmann or Littlefuse catalog number shown for each condition outlined herein. 2.03 Fuses not sized on the drawings for motor running protection, 100 amperes or less, shall be as follows: A. Fuses shall be Bussmann Fusetron (or Littlefuse "SLO BLO") dual-element time delay type FRN-R (or FLNR) for 250 volts or less, and FRS-R (or FLSR) for 277 through 600 volts sized __ at 125% of the motor nameplate full load running amperes or the next larger NEC standard ampere size. Exceptions to the preceding are where excessive ambient temperature, high inertia motor loads, special motors, or frequent "ON-OFF" cyclic loads or other special circumstances require a larger or different type fuse to be approved by the ArchitecbEngineer. 105191-0 16491-1 SECTION 16491 --- FUSES Such special circumstances shall be clarified with the Architect/Engineer not less than 72 hours - prior to bid opening time. B. Fuse reducers shall be used where switch fuse clip spacing is larger than the length of the required fuse. 2.04 Plug fuses shall be Fustat Bussmann Type S (or Littlefuse Type S). 2.05 Fuses for protection of each individual ballasted (fluorescent or high pressure sodium) light fixture or ballast shall have 100,000 amperes RMS interrupting capacity, and shall be Bussmann fuse Type KTK mounted in Type HEB (or Littlefuse type KLK in HLB holder) fuse holders. 2.06 Other fuses, unless otherwise noted, shall be dual-element, current limiting, silver link type Bussmann LOW PEAK fuse, Type LPN-R or Littlefuse Type LLNRK for circuits rated 250 volts or less, and ~ -- Bussmann LOW PEAK fuse Type LPS-R or Littlefuse Type LLSRK for circuits rated 277 through 600 volts. They shall have at least 10 seconds time delay at 500% rating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Fuses shall be installed as shown on the drawings after tests, inspections and the installations have been completed. Fuses shall be of the same manufacturer to retain selectivity and electrical coordination as designed. Fuses shall have dimensions and rejection features exactly as defined herein. Fuses having any other type rejection feature are not acceptable. 3.02 Twenty percent spare fuses for each size, including control circuit fuses of each amperage and voltage rating (minimum of 3), shall be furnished to the Owner. END OF SECTION 16491 _ Q ~~ ~ r.s 0 ~' ~ ~ ~ ~ ~n o~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ 3~ w .,,,r 105191-0 16491-2 -~ SE IGHTING 11 ~! ~ __ - 20116 f~,~lZ 28 AM 8~ 31 PART1 GEN ERAL Glj~ C1Lcf~K _ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES IOWA Ci E~`r,' InWA A. Exit signs, with batteries, using light emitting diode (LED) illuminators are included. B. High intensity discharge (HID) fixtures and lamps. C. High intensity discharge (HID) ballasts. 1.02 REFERENCES -- A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). B. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM). C. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). D. Federal Communications Commission (FCC). E. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). -- F. National Electrical Code (NEC) G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 101. __ I. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) J. Exit signs shall be as listed by UL and shall meet UL924 and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA101. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION - A. Exit signs identify exit outlets. LED lighted and self-powered exit signs do not illuminate the floor below. --- B. Ballasts provide power to HID lamps. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information in accordance with Section 01330: 1. Manufacturers' catalog cut sheets for each luminaire including: a. Complete catalog number ordering information. - b. Description and interpretation of ordering information (catalog number). 105191-1 16511-1 FILF~ SECTION 16511 LIGHT ING 2006 MdR ~$ APB $~ 37 c. Luminaire schedule "plan mark" designation. CI-~ ~L~~K d. Candela and candlepower distribution, zonal lumen summary. (~~~ C«; (~~~ e. Coefficient of utilization. f. Physical dimensions and operating voltage. g. Ballast data (Manufacturer, Cat. No., PF, THD, BF, & LCCF) h. Lamp type, quantity and wattage. i. Housing construction and finish. j. Light loss factor data. k. Spacing/mounting height limit. 1. Beam photometric (pattern) (Emergency lights). m. Options. n. If any of the above do not apply, so state. 2. List of Luminaire features differing from that specified: a. Construction of housing and method of access. - , b. Coatings (type and process). ~ -- c. Lens, diffuser. ~ - d. Reflector (material and coating). e. Mounting method. f. Seals, gasketing. - g. Options. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that luminaires meet or exceed specified requirements. 4. Manufacturer's published ballast warranty. " - 5. Ballast Registration Field Service Return Authorization forms as described in Section 16511, Paragraph 3.16. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Luminaires shall be as scheduled and shown on the drawings. 105191-1 16511-2 - - SE IGHTING 11 f' ~ ~ . ~ l...J --- B. Substitution of luminaires will not be allowed unless approve~j~fr }it'EBgi~~r. See Section 16050, paragraph 2.03. C~~~ ~~~~ ___ C. Luminaires shall meet these specifications and be UL Iabeled.~~Re ~ f~ inaire fails to meet or exceed these specifications, equivalent luminaires may a so dev~at" fo'the same amount, but no greater. D. Luminaires shall be tested in accordance with applicable sections ofNEMA LE "Lighting Equipment". E. HID luminaires as manufactured by Daybright, Lithonia, Prescolite, Thomas, or approved F. LED lighted exit signs shall be as manufactured by Dual-Cite, Emergi-Cite, Hubbell, --- Lightalarms Electronic Corp., Sure-Cites, or approved equivalent. G. Lamps shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Osram Sylvania, or Phillips. Special - purpose lamps shall be as furnished by the luminaire supplier. H. Ballasts shall be energy saving, high power factor type. I. Ballasts shall be UL Listed, Class P, ETL certified, and CBM certified by testing per ANSI. J. Ballasts shall meet ANSI C 62.41, C 82.1, C 82.2, and IEEE 587 requirements. K. HID lamp ballasts shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Osram Sylvania or Westinghouse. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HID luminaires (including metal halide and sodium luminaires) shall be of the type and manufacture as scheduled. 2.02 EXIT SIGNS A. General 1. Luminaires shall be white with red letters and directional arrows. Lettering shall be 6" high with a 3/4" stroke. B. Lightsource 1. Light source shall be light emitting diodes (LED's) with a life expectancy in excess of - 20 years. Power requirements are minimum 5 watts per face. LED lamps shall provide 100% illumination in normal operation. LED's shall be high intensity red and shall have a clear lens to deliver optimum illumination of letters. 2. LED lamps shall be mounted inside the exit housing, not on the face. A color rich prismatic diffuser shall be mounted in front of the LED's to provide a full 3/4" letter stroke with even illumination. Brightness shall be equivalent to an exit sign legend illuminated at seven foot candles. 105191-1 - 16511-3 SEL GO ING I I ~) ~.~l...J ._~ 3. Lightsource shall be light-emitting, phosphor ci~~l~~~ ~$ A~ $. 37 __ 2.03 LAMPS ~`-~ ~LERK A. Lamps of a given type shall be of the same manufacturerl~~A ~'~~' ~nWA B. High Intensity Discharge Lamps: Lamps shall have the following average life expectancies: High-pressure sodium, 24,000 hours. ~^ 2.04 BALLASTS A. HID Lamp Ballasts: Ballasts, except those that are an integral part of a luminaire, shall conform to the following requirements. 1. Ballasts for metal halide luminaires shall be pulse start type. 2. Ballasts shall be of the constant wattage autotransformer type. 3. Ballast shall be used for one or two lamps, with the primary protected by a remote fuse - sized according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Ballasts shall have a power factor greater than 0.9 and an LCCF less than 1.7. B. Ballasted luminaires in non-heated areas shall be furnished with low temperature ballasts ~- suitable for operation to minus 20°F. 2.05 Luminaires recessed into insulated ceilings shall be approved for zero-clearance insulation cover, by -- UL. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Furnish and install luminaires and appurtenances, wired and ready for operation. 3.02 Luminaires shall be surface, recessed, or pendant mounted as shown on the drawings. Luminaires are shown in their approximate location and may be moved before installation, as directed by the architect/engineer, without additional charge to the owner. Cooperate with the trades installing the ceiling in locating recessed and surface-mounted luminaires. - - A. Luminaires shall be supported per Article 410.16 of NEC. B. Where HID luminaires and fluorescent luminaires are in the same area, the junction box shall be mounted near the fluorescent luminaire opening and connected to the fluorescent luminaire with flexible conduit. C: Luminaires shall be supported per Article 410.16 of NEC. 3.03 Furnish and install exit signs and appurtenances, wired and ready for operation, as shown on drawings. 3.04 Use HID type 120/240 VAC circuit breakers feeding 120/208 VAC fluorescent and HID lighting circuits. 105191-1 16511-4 r-. SECTION 16511 LIGHTING - 3.05 Furnish lamps for luminaires as shown on the drawings and schedules. 3.06 Lamps shall be fully seated in each luminaire. Sockets which will not permit proper lamp installation - and operation shall be replaced. 3.07 Provide ballasts and mounting with the appropriate luminaires, per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 16511 _ r-a 0 ~~ ~ ` F ~~ ~ 1... ~...J ~ ~ _ ~ CrJ -.1 10$191-1 1651 I-5 XO-01 Dwe DATE I Time 16 21 I 'lJ ..., o '--. CD () .-+ I I Z rn C JJC I ~ ~ ~ ~ ;T. ~ r ~ I~ o 0:0 ~ G) rrl (J) ~ ~~ PJ ~~ ~ ~~~~ ~~ ~ 5; ~ ~ ~ -I ~ ~-c <.0 gg m 00 0 0000 00 -L 0....1 -I "'1"1 0 Z .., ---L. I V 0 I\:) -L ~ VJ I\:) -L I\:) -L I C. ",AJ b :rl ~ rrl gJ~ E[jZ (J) G) 0 PJPJ ~ s:s: ~ ~~~~ G>~ ~ ~ (1)>< g r- -I d (D" m mm r ~~ f:: -f-f-f -f ~-f 0 C::o Z I Z 0 00 ~~~~ Nm 0 :rl~ ~~ EQEQEQ~ ~~ ~ f:: 0 GILBERT GIL ..-+ X 00 00 m::O r ...... (J) ~~ ~~ rm ~ -; r rr rr mr Z EB ~~ c/)"u ~~ R<> 0 Z (f) 0 -I ~z ~~ 6~ ~.., -; 0 000 ~oo , zO ~ 0) 1\, 00 C 00 Z ::0 ,.., m ~ ~ ~ ffi ~ -- - :::!: o Sf) Z 0 -- VAN 0 00 0 0 -0 :::::J ....:D o ~ 0 r ,'" 0 ....I ffi ~ 0 ~ ~ fI1 o F ~ 00 CIJ -< ~ ~ ~ 00 U)::::::... 0 m z 0 ^' 00 0 I ,.., m ~ U Z C U ~ ~ ?:D ::0 ~ o B AI -0 ~ (i) r > N z. (i) > I\) Z ~~ o~ C (f) s: ~ I ::J Q) '--I )> ~ ..CD -g. <....... . \J~ - c.. :::; ':.< r (f) > 2;~~ / 5> - () G) B <0 C/:J ~ /' l ..I... J Z i~~ ~ 0 / -I r " VJ::l. -. ~ -< OJ g} ~ :::; ::J Q) m <" 0 ~ CO <p 11 <D """'0 Q .... m ~O> 0 .-+ >- Ii!" ~~ ~ 0 JJ r 3 VJ ~ /' r--:l -I ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~! ~ ~ t!j )> en :D ~ -- Q. = -I m ()1 r ~ . ;~ -c r > o m ~ m z -I r -< '" '" r <5 '" ~ ..... 8~~ ~ 8~~ I'J ~ ~I o^ '" JtJ ~g ~ 0 c... Q) (I) 0 (I) ::s~~ .., m ~~I~ ~- ..-+ ~~ ~ ~ -- ....... "-"" . ~ \. I' ...... ~ ~ r- ~ 0 -- 0 ....... ..-+ -0 ;;:: 0 Z Ul - ;;:: 0 - -0 ;:: 0 Z Ul -l - ;;:: 0 - - C Ul- . -0 0 (1)(1) 0 !:!2;:: -< )> )> (;) ~)>-<I"'1UlI ~;:: -< )> )> (;) ifi)>-<I"'1(f)I ~)>ZCI 00) n "' -l;;:: Z ;;:: 1"'1 r- "' -i;;:: Z ;;:: 1"'1 ;;:: 0 OJ 1"'1 ~ ..... .... ,::11"'1 C 1"'1 JTJ )> r- oo::u 91"'1 C JTJ r'1 )> r- oo::u (/) 1"'1;;::::u ft..", '-'-:.J en - sn ~ 2 ~ )> fg 55 Hi - sn ~ .. 2 ~ )> fg 55 Hi :;)>::u Vi Hi ..., ::tI '--I !:!2Ul Z ~. ::u (/)00r'1-< S':Ul Z ::u (/) 00 fTI-< ;;:!0;;::5L20-<.-.&.. fIllit. Ci) ,......, OI Ul '?\J.I OC-iO ......I Ul [Tl OC-iO C-<z r--r -I _ .., l\)r::1 JTJ ) Co- "~-oOJ~ ol\):::i JTJ ""~-oOJ~ ~~o ~ __ ex. -i ::u -l JTJfTI::U -i ::u -l JTJfTI::U -o::u (f) en '" -- '" ~O " -- Ul JTJ IC::ur-::J Ul JTJ IC::ur-::J o::u;:gJTJ::J 0 ,., -=- ,., C1, CO Z 1"'1 0 Ul 0 " Z fTI 0 (f) 0 " ::;: JTJ 0 (f) ..., (f) () ~ ',;;J (/) JTJ 0 :;E -< ~ ',;;J ~" fTI 0 :;E -< )> Q -l ~ -< < -lZZ <"ZZ (/) _ C CD 0 ~ ~ ~ ~:::J g f'- ~~f'-~:t g f'- i~f'-~:t r;j~~:t:::J ~ 1"lII _"' ~ :s; 0 1"'10(/)(f)~ :s; 0 JTJOUlUl~ ~J:o~ CD Z (I)...... CD ~ ~ ~ -0 ~ -0 -i ~ ~ ~ -0 ~ -0 -I C o::u CO-i c.. --i ::s.... n Z JTJ _~JTJ~I Z fTI ..". _::UJTJ~I () )>:S;~I en ---L. ~...., ft.. l......l (f) _ ~ ..., ::u "U Vi Ul _ (D f"...' ~ ~ ;u -0 Vi :;:)0 0 ;u !L! 0 fTI r--r I~"" ,......, Ul ... JTJ <)> (f) :;:) \ ~< JTJ < )> '--- 00:;E ~ 8 )>~i2i~2 8...... >~i2i~2 ., 4 ;EZ 25 O-h ....... =t ~~ ~ 0 o~OQ ~ 0 6~OQ ~ Q ;:;1~~~ () ....... ft.. ^ ::u fTI Z OJZ ::u JTJ Z OJZ . OOUlO ..., --1 . \.I ..., 'w 8 ~ f'- ~ -< ~ 8 ~ f'- ~ -< ~ )> ~ ;u ;J Z Z -, ............. s: JTJO;;::- ;;:: JTJO;;::- - zl'll'lO r-n 0 -~....,...., ~ ?g z-iJTJt5 ~ ~ Z-iJTJt5 )> o~;?." VJ 0 -l ::u ~tOo -i ::u ~tOa ~0::U:t -. ;:;0 L-" 0 ;:E ':1 JTJ -i;U 0 ;E ':1 fTI-l;U 0 -i Bi 8 Vi c.. ~. ~ Ul . JTJ C 0 (J) . l'l C 0 I Cii Or (I) IV ;U zC IV ;U zC JTJr-OJ-i (f) 0 C oS: Ul 0 C a;;:: fTI-<fTI fTI 0 JTJ[TI [TI 0 [TIJTJ r- 0 o fIllit. (I) )> 01 6 ;uz )> ..., Zo ::uz )>0;;:: I I r"\ .., ::s r- JTJ -i r- [TI -l :;EIJTJ;;:: . _ \JJ ::u::u )> Ul?l;oO ~ 0 ~ ..... 00;U)> ..... 0 "f'1 r- OO (I) ~ . : ..., ..., - () ~ ~~ N ~ L W 4'-0. I. ~~ - o ro o (j) ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT XReference Files: XR- TITLE> XR- TITLE.Dwg I XR-AP-01 > ,Dwg I . I I P: \Projects\105191-0\dwg\CD-A1.01.DWG I DATE: 03/27/2006 I Time: 17: 20 I .... , .... ~ ~ .... ~ ;:... G) :0 "::I:O '" "".:0 .... )>-0 ~ ..... II 0 (J) (z-o II .,IIJ ..... -f 0 o~ .... m I C . _ ( ~ OZ ;n iT! ~)> 0 ~ 0 m:e 5 ~ :0 I F:>~ '" ~ 0 " "''' -0 -.. e . .;; ':t1 '" en d~ (/)~ .... oN "', 0 ~ m ;;I -< ~ 0 < I!! ~ ~ 0 ~~ ~~ . C < ~";:: r c: Z=, '"=' b m r \2 (J) m :t -I -fz f'TlZ · Z ~ en 0 0 -I )> (/)G') -fG') '" IlJ r;;l :0 . . :E: ~o O::I: C '" -I IlJ O. -10 ;:00 · , -< >>1,. 0 _ \2>l \2~ g ~ -f Vi;::a. 3:: "')> 0 ." ~ f'Tl::::l ~ 0 zZ .... · " Xz ,. ,! o ~ M0 - 0, o ~ ~ ::::: 22)> Z o "~ Z < :~ m -,< r- "'1"1 a:: "" ~ m (/)~ Z ~ ~ ",AJ I m <:tJ: "'0 ~ ~ t"o r;;l~ Z >'" I Z -I>- . o~ rn ' 0.... (/) -I I . "'" )> -If'Tl " -I F ~ g;~ :0 '" ::! m. :0 m M?i)> 8 0 -<. .... ~'^ Z ~ )> o ,. , (/) '" (') (N . '1J ~ ~ Z in.. 0 0 '" ~ ' :t 5: ~ l:J 0 ~ 0 m )>. f'Tl-o o · r z~ Ul 0 m)> . 00 '"' 0 i:l!::::! 0 S; Z · z ~ 0 o ...." ,. ~m ',. q "'w Z ~ mm I · c ~ .;; ~~ I 0 .;; i11~ I "11 do ~ ;:0 ;:0 )> b ." f'Tl f'Tl-O 2 _ " ".. I " 0 0 ~f'Tl " ,,~ zr m ~ ~:o "l. ,~ I' 0 q ~~ 0 )> 5il ~~ d :D )> F:>0 m :0 A::I: m )>0 ~ )> ~ ~ F~ 'q ~a · rZ S :;: r,! B 0 ",r · :tI ;;; '" ^ 0) MM :0 " :;::: f'Tl " 0 Q , ~ ~. 0 . c' · q ;:: i11 ~ i:l ~ -0 ;:0 :I!~ _f'Tl .j>. (/)(') " -f o )> <n CJ> . ~::I: "l. =E (f) )> ;:0 , _ )> c: q 3:: ;-"(') ~ S': o _ · - Z ~ ~ ~ G) '" ~ .,., - ~ v ~ "0 NO. 0 ~ b m oN b 0 ~ " , r · ~ ... " Z ~ ~ m ~ . ~ > " ~ < '-< g ,. m 0 gj ~ C1, f'Tl:o '" I t. ""(') f7j C 0. 0-1>- 2 3:: o " (/) ~ ;;I ~ = f!l ~ > " · c' ~ ~ ~ ~ co ~ "" ~ -I>:. f'Tl 0 .., c , .. q 0 0 ~ ~ '7'- O~ .... ~ 0 E )>f'Tl o 0 . :;::: !::::!~ :;::: -0 Z Z (/) :E")>f'Tl;:O m f'Tl)> 0:::l (/))>c:;:o -O(/)Xf'Tl I -Iz Z ~'O M 5 ~ ~ 5;:0 ;:0 Vi ~ Cl) ~ -f F:> 0 08 m -< 0 0 z m =' m ^ I ." ~ rO Z< "ma 5~ ]x > 0 " d' " f'Tl (/) :E !; f'Tl )> Vi F 22 C1, )>rf'Tl -< ;:O:Ez :;::::::l:E~ ;:o!J1r~ ~ 8f:0 z~ f:z ~~)>~ f'Tl '0 0 ,);! )>' Oz :;::: " )>r;;l (/), -0 o Z (/) -< ;:0 )>)> O:::l (/)(/) 0 )>Zz8 OCO 0) MM < zOG')z Or ":;:::f'Tl a 0f!2~(') :0 0f'Tl q, f'Tlf'Tl .j>. -0)>;:0 m;:O::I: -I Z 0-0 ,. >",-om 0 "'0 c o~ 8" q z-<~;;I 0 m F il1 0:;: ;:oZ -If'Tl =- ~ <_ 0 ", -f xo~ ~ ~ '" >wm> - - ~ "'-0 ..>1 F=,-<'" 0 Z ;;I_ '" z m '" m> ]=' ~"in~ , r;;l >z m -< '" -<0 3:" '" '" c_ ~ @ ./>. ,.... ~=u > ,. .. c'> q ~ dm g ,. ~5 Q ~f'Tl . ~o ~-f zo (')<n,(') -I>:. ~. )> O-l~O , 0.... z~~Z C1, ;dz,,;d ~G')o~ -f)>;:O-l ~ (')(/)0 , ::::I:::l-fA!. 0 0 :;::: O<n . f'Tl:S:;:o ~ fi'l~8 ./>. ::!! ~ (/)f'TlZ " 0 0> Oil q m NO "'" -0 C:z)> I . <.11 ' )> ,",00 " '" "'z Z -< ~ ;;1-< " mm R>;:O ,~ f'Tl c!(/) (/):;::: co::::l dO f'TlZ .j>. ;:or;;l -f0 b ~f'Tl O::I: . ;:ox ;:00 OVi f'Tl22 Z::::I :;::: N -fz ~~ (/)G') Z-f ~o )> o ' Mo :;:::;:0 ./>. " ~ ." (t) C1, ~ '0>- - ;-"0 Z "'0 ....:0 g OW "en ~-I ~ I "" o ~.j>. · "11 ~ <; \':!;l1 ~] ~~ ill;t "l"l '" Z .., Vi;:O::I:O ::I:Z .-oo(/) r- 0 =' "'0 ~,"ma-< O '" zsaVJ-f. f'TlOf'Tl;:o-Ol.. ~ 3:: G')~ I :E0;g~5~;;z O g m ". "I!.f:f'TlXf'Tl:E~:I!-b ~ -f ~ !:d ~ ' ?> -< ~ G') ;:0 0'> s;: :D c: ~ -Z z 0 .-f0:E (')0)> ;:0 .(') "" 0 oxO'> ~ ~)>" f'Tl 'tI Si G) )>_ . .....)>"'-'0;:0(') lip [;l;:,j t-:o ::::I80Cl;-<MF:>rr~)>8 ",.. ;:: C1, 0 oZ.j>.oC:oo~ -f-OZ '" .:E Z 0 <: (/) (') m" 0 mo",,> "r~ -< ~ ~ ~ ,. z~)>rt'I F )>)>f'Tl ~ , 0 ~ d gr@", F'";;I · ! ~ , z "'.. ..... iJ! ~ i'i; c: )> 5:'" . ~ :g !;J -I>:. "" b .... ~. ,~ ~ Z 0 ~. ... 'tI ._ ~ .!!. t- I '" I "1. ~ 8 0 l:J . I ~ ~. I . I (N ," (N ~ 0) " Z ...../>. ~ . m ~ o ~ b ~ ..... m. K ./>. .,IIJ-I ~ " -I o _ i". ::I: Z o ~ ;:: ~ ~ · Y# m ~! :D ~ ,.. 0 Z -I>:. :D 0 G) ~ -I ~ ..... ~ 0 ~ ".,IIJ 3:: g~ 8 ~~ 0 ~ m ~ ~ <r- m ,!:o. Zo 0 (N ""co ' 0 rrt ~ 0- ~ tS g; :E~ ~ t"(') en ~ <: 0- . .j>. 0)> " " 0' ;;: C1, 0) 0' b ~ ~ ;:0 0) ~ ~ , " 0) (/) '" . GS Z .j>. . (/), (/)-0:;::: 0;:0:;::: 8 f'Tl0 -)>0 0f'Tl0 Z ~ f'Tl(') ~ZO 0'0 (') 8 :;:::-1 ,,'::'< ~::'< Rl ~ (f) ~~ ~-l< ~-I< M ;-"(') ::I: 05 (')f'Tla S ~O ~,~ ~d-l ~ '" (')" :E~::I: (/)::I: fjj <r- ~. >~ -<~a 1';0 I q ~~ ':E ::I:" (')" 0 0) o 0 f'Tl co (/) 0 z " " ;:0 -f ;:0. , :;::: -0 I en (') f'Tl ;:0 )>::I: :;::: -)> 0 . ~ OXf'Tl (ID.... ~~ ~~~ ~p ~ g~ ~g2 0" thO ~~ f'Tl)> f'Tl )>0rrl - ~)> ZZ -f,,)> ~ !iJ ~ -I ~O (');:0 5Z5 ~ :;J 0f'Tl :Ec!;:o !2! '" Z-O f'TlCOf'Tl " "" ('), ;:Of'Tlz ~ · ill 1'; m>~ '" i:l 0 m ~ -If'Tl "! Miz)> .i.. '" - <.11 f'Tl, <0, . I ~)> 5~ oQ :E~ "1. )> , II. :D IlJ CJ> )> (/) :::l .... rn-f ,-f - m ""'z AZ <> I -< G') g ~)> G) r- ~." Z :Ef'Tl Z (j )>~ ~ I ~ f'Tlf'Tl ~~ [:J 'x -fz "'co ~Vi 00 I ~ m OW -<=' ~O " ~ ;:OZ f'Tl0 ~ ~ 5 r~~ ~~ @@ 0@eeeeG0ee0~ ~-< f!l ~~ ~ ~~~~: ~u g~ ~ ~~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~u ~~ rri ~~ ~ ~~~~~ 'Zr;;l ~~ r;;l r~r;;l ~8 ~r;;l ~r;;l ~r;;l 5)>r;;l zr;;l en f'Tl , f'Tl' ;:0<]0 (/)<: )>-f c:, (/) :;:::f'Tl ;:OZ)> :Ef'Tl O (/)f'Tl Z X;:of'Tl- 5 )>-If'Tl p:! ~ 50~ S;:z ~8 -f~ x f'TlOz )>~ ~~ ~ Vi~f7j;:05 ~0f7j dO Vi f'Tl<n ~M ~c: ~Vi gVi (/)-0-< F(/)::::I < -I<n ::::I :::If'Tl0 Z;:O:::l :;::::::l ;:OX:::l z;:O.....z ::::I;:o:::l f'Tl)>(/) -0 ~2 ;:0 ~~z~:E 0f'TlZ Rl)> Z !:d~z )>d ~iT! I~ );!~ ~zC: ~~ rn OC 0 ~ 00r;;l(/) )>~0 :;:::~ 0 ~z0 iT!-o ~~ (/) z c:-I~ ~ @:) ~ :D 0-0 * < !:;:; (')O~G') -< Z-ZO ~(/) ::I: ZG')::I: :E 00 f'Tl::!J ~OO (/))>)> f'Tl;; > -" 5 .., ~rm'" O. 0 Z 0 -< > - -0 mz ~ ~O 3:Z - '" r r m Z ~ z>,. X Z . ~ r . "'Z Z >0 omm . 0 " ~ - Z:tI b ~ 8 l" ~F~gj:;1 ~i';2 pi'! 5 ;;12 0' >!?i f'ic' Fi:l >lj';;~ jI Z V >CJ> :E z 0F:>0z(') )>0f'Tl f'Tl:;::::E p:!~ r;;l 0 ~~ ~)> ~ ~ :E ~ 0 ~=E (/) o(/) B5;:O<n0~ Z(/)iT! ~;;:;::: (')' ~ ~c: )>z<n <n5 saz-I )> f'Tl ~- -< . f'Tl-< -fM Z f'Tl ::I:<n -::I:-o -< -I 00" , CO 0 a 3:: ~ z~~6' f'Tlf!2 ~o);! )>~ ~ E:~ ~(/) ~"Z::::IO ' a :03:: ~ ~~~-f 'g ~~' ~iT! '<n;:O ,iT! <~ -I::'<~ ~ .... -z )>~:ECO)>A 0 f'Tl -0 -I :;::: 5:;::: ::I: 5 c'" ?i F>~m 5Z:~ ~ r~ ~ ~'" 2> o'm ~~\':! ~ ~ )> ;:: 16'.2 1/2" $.6 1/2' 0 '" 5 ^ t5 M:;; 51!; ~ 0' '"' 1\ Z ~ ~ a i" > :;, ~ gj i:i "'1"1 VERIFY z ~ z ~ );! )> (') ;:0 f'Tl 0 ~ 5 8 0 ~ ;:0 c: 5 ~ iT! Z );! .,IIJ (/) "'<n, (/);:0 f'Tl" (/) ;:0 (/)f'Tl:;::: (')0 , m -f :Eo-lO' ~~ -0;:0 -< ;;(/) (/) A. -0 Zz (/)-f(/) , )> )> f'Tl ~ )>0 (/) ,:;::: c: 'C: c: Z )> , ;:O,:Eo f'TlZ -:;::: -I '0 -0 )> )>:;:::<1 ;:o=r;M f'Tl ' ^,)> -I Z f'Tl 0 -0 (/) (') ~"f'Tl :E Z . zF-fo ;g~;-l(/):;::: ~::;:l 0 ;:0 f'Tl O~ )>)>, f'Tl -0 ,..... -I "'~;:o < 0' (');:0 0'> :E )>~)>);! 8F f'Tl f'Tl -f 8 5 0 f'Tlf'Tl(') . z (/), .' p:! X~ <n !; :I!;:o~ ;:or;;~ )> ~ -f;;;:o~ (/))> -00, (');:0 (/):E c: c: , C Zf'Tl)>' c! ' f'Tl Z (/))>:;::: c: :;::: ~oo" Z' co ~~)> 0 f'Tl 0'> ;-l;:OZ ~ . ,oc:~ OU) f'Tl 0, 0 " :E · f'Tl(/) Z ~ ':E::O:;::: f!2iT! . 0 ;; 0" ,,)> c: :;::: -I ~)>f'Tl P -I ;:0 Z gz ~ o (/) , f'Tl::I: ~o c;:::;; -f -I)> \gJ = o Z ~ ~ :~ (j) -0 m." (j) ." 0 (j) )> 0 fg 6 ~ F5 6 ~ ~~ ~ i ~ ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER SHIVE ,HATTERY )> 6 i ~~ ~ ~ ~ 8 UJ EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT Cedar Rapids, lA' low:a City, lA' D~S Moines,IA --L m'1J CA ill :'2 :'2 Moline, IL , Bloomington, IL ' Chicago, IL (:) ~ 0 >: ~ 0 '" '" CITY OF IOWA CITY SHIVE-HATTERY, INC. 2834 NORTHGATE DRIVE IOWA CITY. IOWA 52245 -' -U Z b 'I PHONE (319) 354-3040 FAX (319) 354-6921 --L '( >: s;?o '" 220 S GILBERT STREET IOWA CITY, IOWA htlp.//www.shive-hatterycam o Z (J) XReference Files XR- TITLE > XR- TITLE Dwg I I makelch I P \ProJeds\105191-0\dwg\CD-A2 01 DWe I DATE 03/26/2006 I Time 18 37 I . I i- I I +- ~~___ ~~___ I ' I \ _. _.. __~ _ _ .. I I I' i ....- I - -I, I ~ ' -' - - , I ~ ~ I t ......~ ........(IJ . co .- I n -- I ..... Z 'd; n" 0 - - -. '~ m .., I ........ · .... ..1 1 I I ,^ , ex;. 0 .!!. 1- c: .... ., I q Vtl I 14. ' " (IJ q ......J ! i-f b:IJ q-t ...., ; I I: · -I' I :J: .- 1-:- : m j ..,.. m --'{ r-'" :\ .. .. -~ I I ..... -- .. m r m - ~ - I m m .. < 'I ;;U) <1m ! ...... !! ;1 _ s::::l .. 1,#1"".. II I OU) m > ....J \ < l -f I; ::E~ < ......J .. -- ... ...... - _! ~ -l fTl I ...., - J ,#I"".. .- _.- f ~-l '- I fTl)> > I 0 I ::! , 0 I U)!'J -f: Z I 0 z III 2 - I Z ,. II ." O I, II ~ , "t - ~ f'" .... '" Z I... .,. -.. - -. I -- _ : ! ~ ~ .. I 1 ~L I ~ .J I ~ I _., , - -J -' ----- --.- I "t"-"" _ I . - """"'-- --..- -- I i _ ~ ,- '\ <> . ~ .J.________.. ;: _.,.......~ ;;U) zfTl 1 ... . - ofTl I aU) i ::E~ T _..rt ~ ~ i 1 ~...- rrJ> € H _~ ... U)!'J II a . .l i 1 : f'V l ." a i ,-:- H_ __. _ :::0 t "-1-J - I ~ t (, I. _ -~' , - j f <lot' "" - """ -.... i .. -r " _ I _ -; I "1,.1 , ' - . - I j _.. t ....l. I -, -. . - - - - . '.,' .-.-.- . -! ! ! .. . ~ ~ - ---. -" 1 ; \ ! ! ' 11 ! " . I I _. ,. . -- - I, \ I .. J , I' I , I .... ~ -. . I r - ,I> ."-' I I I _. _ .. ... II --, !; . - , J' i I H ~ t I ' I. , I' I 1 I' , . I ~.j 'I , Ii' : 'I' J - - ..' --.. -- -, I I I. "I " _ ,I ;-.. \ I' 11 f''' -- - I. I : I I II. _ _ I i' "- . 1 I I :: . -. .. -".. I I , i I; · : I 1 I: ' J .. - - ji : J.. II 1_; - ':::~ I - . 1 'I .. \ '!~ -.~' j" 1 I_ I r Ii ; t I: t , '! I I I _. · ' , ; - -~ -, , I I -I II. r ..- I . . 1 ! Ii' I I! -, I I I I I , I ! '1 I. I' .......,. I ' , I ' i ~ . 8 .. ~ ,. , -- . . I I' i - J: 4, , I I I - I I . . L. . .: II II I I .. . I I . . / I r r ' I. I I J 11 j I ! I . t I ,. 1 - - .._ -.t 1 ; I I I :: _ . . _ ..l.- --.. I I I ! "--'Lj : .. _7 i ,I ! .. -'-:r- 1 I , i Ii" j - ..~ I I j I '. I :, 'I " I I : . I ~ I l I I I I I -I r- r ..- -. - ,.~ I - - I . ., .. <_ ~ _.... _ _ _ _ ; - I I . ___.... ... - ~ -- -I- - ..... T , - r :: ::-r ' , -j-' I I I I \ 'I I ; I I I \ -,., I - . ; I -.1 I . - l=- . -I -, ." -I II : ...~- ... , I 1 r" " , ; I - - -'r 'I 11 I 1 -', " . I 1 1 \' ~ ~ I I I .. <l - I - .. II II I _ _ :j , - . Ii !I; -" I! ' II I r---- _ frrtl;1';;:1--11l-- I: 'I f ;. -~ -1 If' I I' , .. -1 : j, : : i I ..:....:; I fr' " ~ I: lj I _..~ I" I I:' , . I 'I I " II .....J ' k- ! ' : ! I I I 1- ! I! I ~~ ,,! I I 1 Ii I I ~- I Iii' I ~ I' 'I - ' .. i - .- - 1 ! I - ~ ; .f- .. L.~_ " , I -" ,II I I I I ; , I i. f I I I , , I ii' .. J - I I L I .1 I I I ,I. i , t I r- - ! I " , .- - ,,. '" .-- I I '! I r -. I , . I _ :1--1 1, II - 'I I 1:_..: ;..:,.' . .,- .--.-..------ -...-.--.... ! .. ...l__ i r I : I }~ I : : ~- It j 1 I I I ~ . ..I. ~ ~ I \ h .- 1: .. ! L""":r ~- I I , \ , i I I I '. I I I \ L- I I i I I ~-+ I I I I I . . I I I ! . -t . .,. --:- .1' -I _ T _I . .. ~ ~ T - '-t I ___j t:.-i , -lfTl :::0 Z I , aXfTlfTl I :::oU5~::E I , ~g ri'i ~ . \ )> G') G') I' I I zU)rrlr - -T I J -l ~ fTl ! I ,- I F::J ~ II I \ I' U)r z I .. -. I )> -. G') I' .....- Z I OCIJ 0 I -! . ,- .. (DfTl ;:: r)> C I I I ?;;;:: U) , -lO 0 I . )>0 fg .. zE fTl -^' . 't 0 s: z .._ :::oz~ rrl)> r -oz r )>0 - Z Z -l)> :!! ' SEE , SEE ~" i:'i F 1 SCHEDULE 1 r t.f!" -rSCHEDULE . 1 r;; ~ "' I I ~~ 8 ~l ~ 11~ j ~ ~ c:: rrl :0 I ,^ -to I p:! I I l:;:j ,,(/) q Vtl ~ I m :0 ... ~(/) I -t !" J < ~ 8::::1 t I 9 ~~ ~ m ~ m)>.. .j s fTl o -i J .. gs -r ~ I . _ ___ ~ ~ Z -<, < fTl v SEE V" N --.- m .. , '" .. rrI -l fTl ~ l SCHEDULE l rn ....,: < I f ~ ~ " I ...... \.. U) !'J ~ ~ I CJ D I I ~ __ I ~. j . ~ :E I - I' Z 1['1' ;;~ C Ii I - - o ZfTl I " ::0 0 _... I "I" -' -' -' -' to CXJ "-J OJ OJ ()1 ()1.j:>. VI N -' ~~ 0 I i VI N -' 0 )>)> Z <fTl :E o ~fTl ~~ , rrl fTl )> CD l , x -0 -0 -0 -0 -0 -0 -0 u)!" I : I, (J)rrlrrl :::0 :::0:::0:::0:::0 :::0:::0 2! -l X X m I .... VI z U) U) VI 0-!. VI 0-!. 0-!. 0-!. 0-!. VI VI 0-!. 0-!. ." I ' .' '\ - G) =l =l 1- I ,- , I , I ,- ,- I I ~ ~ m 1""- _ _,' I I z zoo .j:>. .j:>. .j:>. .j:>. 0 0 i'.1 N 0 -- I ..... .. I q;gG)(j)o;VI; -' -' -' -,';-, - J ... I o 0 .......... ........................................ .................... t . _ ~ U m, ...,...,......, ..., .... I ~ I ' : I , I "-J q '! '! 1 j. _I ,- I I , OJ OJ ... I , I __ '! OJ. -' '! '! '! '! VI VI - - ~ \AI.. I ~ , .. ()1 , I 0 I , I I I I ..... \ l' -; oooo.......-'tOtO ,.,." ~ q~~;"; "';s';s" " 0 -0 II! I t I .J:; .f:>:. " " 0 I II IJ' ! - 0 -r' " I I I -to. --lr.--Jr.--Jr. -" -to. -" -",-,,~-"-Ao. :0 ,.,. 1 III /. -t f \ I J VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI :I: I I I' f" .......... ~~~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~~^ CIJ: d /', 1 ... .J:; · · · · · · · - . - . __ 0 r . -. . . II . J ~ ' .f )> :E )>)> )> )> )> )>)>)>)>)> ~ n. ::r:J I L \ : I r 0 r r r r r r r r r r ~ m ..,.'. -:::-:; ,.-:-;-- , . 1 I I m .J I, I ~ I I -1 ! ...., G) (j) (j) (j) G) (j) (j) (j) (j) ">l I . ! 'i2 ~ "',., ,., ,., ,., ,.,,.,,.,,.,,., m 8 .. _ +, J Z . : ~ _. ,I : ::: :::.~ :::-:~:.~.::.._ = G) (;) (j) (;) (j) (j) (;) (j) (j) (j) G>~ ~ --.~l ~ I, ; \ (ID ......:a. ~~-1.--li.--li.-.J.--li.--",.......s.""";1 ",. N -l -l -l -l -l -l -l -l -l -l (f) .... I,' I,: o=::: s: 0 I .... I \: ; . . ::::. : . I )>)> )> )> )> )>)>)>)>)> -t :J: 4 ,!" f:: ~rr r r r rrrrr:tJ m I ,I r, r 'Tl 0 1- 1 t . ~ c: I:r--~T i~ I..,. OJ () () 0 0 0 0 0 0 () () r- - ~- ':: _ r I .... __ ... "... ()1 N -' -' -' -' -' ()1 ()1 VI .j:>. L_ . .......... .................... ............................................................ m m m ,- I t t ---..- r .......... """"")>~)>)>~)>)>)>)>)>)>r 1(; -' ~ !'> ~!'> !'> ~!'> !'> !'> !'> !'> t'J !;2 I , ~ o 00 00 000000 I , N NN NN NNNNNN I ' 1 :I: I. t ...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 .. ,I .. _ _ , ! -'-'-,-, 00 ~ 0 ()1 ...r.".'Nq ~ --1-1 ,.,_ _'_'_. VI N -' -' 0 to CXJ ~ OJ .,.. ..,....,.. - < Ij . _ :tJ --~ , I I L -0-0-0 !! )>)>)> I zzz I -l-l-l I 000 1 ; 000 I '1 t .... 000 _ _ 'l :::0:::0;0 .. ,._ !___ )> )> )> " zzz 000 ~- 1 ...., ...., ...., :tJ - - __ I' :::0 ;0 :::0 m _ _'. _ )> )> )> s: . -.. . ! ~~~ I rrl JTl rrl 5:i .. ! ^ ,. ,. en -: . . .. . :. -.:: '2. 1 ... ,- . - ,.- .. - ..- ..- f "'___'" ~_ 1-'~ ---- I -'- '..../ i - \J:) (f) -0 0 )> m m (f) .." 0 (f) )> 0 Ri 6 ~ g~~~ 6 ~ ~~ ~ i ~ ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER SHIVE ,HATTERY )> 6 i ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ 8 tn EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT Cedar Rapids, lA' lo~a City,IA' D~S Moines, IA " '" () 0.,.., VI OJ G) $: Moline IL ' Bloomington, IL ' Chicago, IL I v ..AJ I 0 r )> , O. 8 ffi ~ ~ ~ ^ CITY OF IOWA CITY SHIVE-HATTERY, INC. 2834 NORTHGATE DRIVE IOWA CITY, IOWA 52245 (!; 6 PHONE (319) 354-3040 FAX (319) 354-6921 -.lr.. I ~ (J) 220 S GILBERT STREET IOWA CITY~ IOWA http://www.shive-hottery.com o r m XReference Files: XR- TITLE > XR- TITLE.Dwg I I glwhite I P: \Projects\105191-0\dwg\CD-A2.D2.DWe I DATE: 03/27/2006 I Time: 16: 37 I 11'-8 1/2" 3'-10 5/8" 9'-2" 9'-0" 1 7'- 3 'I'" tl"-'O" "-7 7/11" ,. -, 3/'" - i -0 13/16" 1'-'" i -11 3/'" I I _ I 1'-,' 2"T ,. 7 't'1'-g 1/11" 1'-g 1/8" 1'-g '/8" l' -g ,/11" " ,'.,' r:- - r;;;=: I - I -- il ^ I...... I - - ~ "- 0 I 0 0 - 0 (.J1 0 '1J, 0 OJ / ~ ~ <: ~ 'I ~ I ~ ~ <: :q ~ I!~I <0/ I,~~ ^ ItA VI < s::: / iTl@ ~ < II "I ~ <~ V W II 11 s:::........... /;=." ~ VI < s::: ~< ~ 2:1)> tN .!!..- "- ..I>- .!!..-~O __ i I _ ~ -l>;, ~< u" - ;;0 0 ~ (.J1 0 cb 1- Z II & 1" Z 0 tv I II / ~ co ~ 'V II" - ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ..1>-, "( Z ~;;o ~ 0 (.J1' ~ 0 ' ~ C il / 0 tv W "( Z V ~ ~ ~ ~ q ~ 0 /~ 8 0 0 - Il ~ 0 o / "0 < -.J < - 0 < . " 0 -;-!. < c:; < < < ~ ..I>- ' < - ", E/ '~ ~ - I -I ~ ......... 0 0 rrl ...." /.... -I -< 0' "1. ~ =~ 0!. V " I V -< "'0 '" '-l ~ Z (/) c!o m G5 ~ m "'0 m 7-0 - --l_' ~G..I>- m ~ ~ i> i> ^ ..I>- Z 1'Tl0 --l, 3! -0 -0 -0 /5!J." " / ::E ;;oz , --, ~ ~ ~ ~ 0 )> 0 6'-10 3/4'.... ^ ~ ~ , / ' ;;0 ~ <0/ <0/ <0/ ^ (/):~V ' -0' 0 0 0 0 /;=." ';'1- ~ / co V/ ~ tv tv tv ~ C1, ~ b ~ , _ ...J - "- - I 0!. ~ ~- ~- <$> ~"-~ 10 ~ I -0 --a. --a. - - - - ~ f'1 CX?, ~ --l --l ~ 0 0 0 ~ " e.... -i 0J U V-I --a. ~ ~ 2 p:l ~ 1'-11 1/8" 1'-9 3/8" 1'-9 3/8" 1'-9 3/8" ~ l.....-. 0 /' !~~ '\.-Y :2iTl~iTl 1 '~ / ~ ~)> ,2:1)>.. ~ ~ ~ ~ 0 0 0 1 / 00(.J1 ...::0 --l - _ _ - -.J N -0 )> Z;;o 0 2 i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 " tN, ~ , iTl::EziTl ,~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ -l>;, .i>.. I 1 I f: J '- '-- 2:1)>(/);;0 I I I ~o~)> --l ~ - 0,-- I 0.... o~ --< , ;;o,~o ::Q _ , '0,;;0 0 1'Tl~< .... ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ki> t- ~ F;;!'- 00 tN ilIA ~ <0/ <0/ <0/ 1 ^ co tN W ~ ~ ~ I V C1, ~ .,,)> 'T-- -0 0 0 0 0 V0, ,,'T-- o I'Tl -0 co' , .... ~ tv tv tv ~N / C1, ex> XITJ :t / ~ -, I"V IS CX?, ~ ~ / 1\ '- '------ - g~ ~ ..--- 00 -0 / Oco tv 0> Co --l , 0!. ~~ q ( ::E~ <$> 0 0 ^ ""')> , Z s::: '0 - - - /5!J." -I>:. ""', cx?'::E )> tN 0 0 0 -0 ' '" Z C)> ~ ' --l tN tN tN "'ij C1, 8 ,- os:::' --lC ex> 0- , ~O)> 1'TlS::: (.J1::EZ --l-O' l.....-. / ~"<€> 0 0 ~ ~ :c~~ - ~~ ~~.p.V -.J -0 rrl Z Z 0 - - -, (/) X0C / ~ ~ ~ ~ (/) )> 1A-.0 U) (/) s::: I'Tl 0 -- , . 0--l~C ~_ x~ " / z>:I><;;O zz' iTl--l - ~ / --l0~~ 0_~ 2:1~ _ ~ ~ 0:C~2 )>~r;;; ~~ "- o ,.--l cos:::o::E)> ~C;;o)> "- )> , tN ;;o1'Tl ......, 0, -0 (/) J' )>--l(/)' z)>,--.... 0' 0 ~ (/) i - ''1. )> C ' Ol --l 0 '=i '~ ~'~~ ~ "~8~ ~ ~ 0 ~ ~ "-:/~ t, --< )> --lS:ao-o I rrl~ oco~ ^ W VI ~ ~ ~ C1, .3 co~~;g ~c -oS:;:2 ~ <0/ <0/ <0/ ^ ex> .,. ;/ -< rrl- I 1 rrl~ ~zo 11-0 0 0 0 0 /r.:" " --lZ~ I I 1 Zz -^C ,.... tv tv N N '\:Y~ 0 .----- / (/)0 * Oc ZI(/) V --l ,------- / XC 00)>-0 (/) I 1 1'Tls::: q 00'-' --l ;;0 Z C ::j ;;0 -0 - - - 0 d, (/) ." 0 .---- rrl--l ;;0)>0 tv ~ ~ ~ 1'Tl0 ' "'0 1- AUGN CENlIRUNE "lH ~ ~ ~ ,; 213 ~ : I 0 0 '" >i ~ ~ 5")>- ENTER OF PANIC BAR (TY ) ;;0 ~ - 2 ~ I'Tl I I ~ ~ ~ 9 I'Tl ~ , (/)::Ezo I 1 I 02 I'TlZ ;;02 , 1'Tl)>--lC I I ;;O::E ,)> rrl0 fTl , ;;0 I )> -l - rCO--l I 0, fTl z::E ~ o ;;0)> I 0' 0- ~~~~ I : r$i ~OOZ <$>: 0- 0 0- ~'Y~ t, _ )> ^ )> 1;;0 -l --l 0l 0l 0l ~ C1, 'orrl, 1 1'Tl::E 21'-10" co :c --l , I ~ ~ V tvS:::--ls::: - (.J1 7'-6 3/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-1 3/4" ';;:-~ 0." - r:: 4'1 ~ 0 ~ (.J1--l ~ "0 . v, I)> 20 ^ I " I ' - ." ~ I~"{ <0/ <0/ ^ tN f- - 3! ~ ,~ ~ ~ /0' ,- _ V --l 1 /1 '\:/ -l>;, I / I 111/ ~ <$>- 0 0 0 <> ..1>-, - tN 0 0 0 /~, , ~ ~ --l tN tN tN '\.-Y C1, "- . ~ .!!.. Z 21'-3"____ <; ~ I ~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ g'1 1'-9" j' 5.-2 1/'" i-2 3/'" t-2 3/'" 2'-2 3/" j' t-2 3/" 1 : 3/" i-s" 8" .r 2'.7" 3 t ~ r ::... - < z z '" I C C ~ -I ~ I ~ I ~~~"";0 ~ ~ A ~ ~ ~ ~ ..1>-, -< ~ ~ ~o ~o ~V ~./ ~ F 6 W ~ W ~ ~3!/ q "'0 II" - 0 N 0 tN cx?, 0 ~ /' ~ V V m "'v Z z /~)> I / 0..1>- ~o I ~ ~ <0/ ~ ~ 0 0 0 0 0 ~~ =- I -I ~ ~ ~ II ~ 0000000 ~ ~ i i. ~ <$>000~~ m \ - ~ (.J10 I ~~ I o(.J1 o(.J1 . .... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . " ':!;;:i:::::::..:.::::::::::::::::::':':':::'.::.:':':'::i~!:' ." _ ':;J (Xl :;:::;:;:;:;:;;;:;;;;;;;:;:;:;;;;;;;:;:;:;:;:;:;:;:;:;:;:::::;: .r 1"''' ) '\ ....... 'T-- 'I .............................. . . .............................' -0, (.J1 )> ~ ex> 1 ;H'":liiililli{t~H~~HWtHtHtHHHH L J~ -l ~)\ 0 ~ . - q ::::~ ~:::::::::::::::::::: '\., Y .:.;.:.;..... J:':':':':':':' '] :;:::;::H:::::: ....... :::::::::::::: --li~V ............... ............ . .............. --< )> I'Tl Ol ~~~HWWm: m~mm~m~H: ~ ~:~:~:~:~:~:~: , ~ ~ ~ <$> 0 ~ 0 ^ ..I>- o 0 x " :~H:nf . '::::::mm~::' ;n:1:1Hn~ .J:o;, )> 9 ~ 0 0 0 / ~ " " ." )> iTl )> ............... '. I: .............. , I --l 0l --l tN tN 0l 'ij 0 rrl -0 1 1 z r m~HHmm: H ~:;.. :~ ~~~~~:~::~~~~~ f'1 --< cb ' X rrl 0 C ............... '. h ..<. '. .............. -0 (.J1)> . ~ ~ : : ~! 11'11'111",111:;; ~ 1~ :;i;i;i;i;li!. !'- ~ 0 0l 00 ~ 0110 0 0 0 0 0 0> ~ <0/ iTl 1.....i.......~.~:4~ 0 0 0 0 - - o 0 (5 0 0 0 0 0" - -;;0 8 ::::;::~);U~ ::':':':"'::::\1f> :::::: '..:';:; - - - - '..J. 8~ ~ ~ I I.... ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ o. ~ ~ 0;;0 <:~D:~/1n::' <<:::.; "::U;J~~> ~ ~ ~ ~ --->.i>. ( - - ~ ~ I I~ --l ~ ~ ;>~~m:r': 'j~[[h--l m::: ': 1:~::1~ . 00 "- _ z ............... . ..... ..... .............. ." )> '" ~ s::: I I ' ~ ~ m~mm~m: .' '.',: :> ummmn ~ I'Tl -0 )> :c;;o .p., ':':':':':':':'1: : :':':':':':':" X rrl <$> ~ 0 ~ ' 0 I'Tl ' ;;0 , ~n~~~:~:~:::~'J::: ~" . . .' :~ ;:~:;::~~::(' --l X - _ _ - ..I>- , I ;;0 s::: "'i~' .........I!. ...............:.......... '. .............. rrl VJ rrl -0 0 0' 0 0 U) , - 0 f'1?E ~:::':;:: ;: y:;:~:;:~n:;:;:~:~:;:: ~: :;:;:;:;:;:;:; . ,- Z 0 tN VI; tN tN ...... 3! / b o I I N r;;; c... .... .... .' ~ . .............. c... ex> 0 --l V ' ! @" .~ "l.m:::i!:::''''''':::,;,,,:;:::i:;:I;lii:I'III~1 ( " ~~ // 1~ ~ (/) --l ~ ............... .' ~ ~.... .' .............. ~ I ;;0 --l \@. ':J .3 ~ ~ ;l~1~1~l~1~l~1~::I:::::::::0W;~::::.. .::;l~1~l;1;1~l;l; ~ ex> ~ ~ ~ ~ == / 'I .................................. ..[0J............... 1,"\ ~ , , ::E I ~ I V-- :~~::~:~:~:~:~:;:;~~:~:~:~:~:~:~:~~;:~:~:~:~:~::::~~: '1 -l>;, F - 00 ( 0 I ~- 00 00 0G) 00 0- 00 0- ~ 8~ ~~8d~88 ~ ~ <$>: ~0 0- ~- ~"\;/0 t, I N ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 0 1'Tl-o rrlz;;O z;;o;;o tN --l --l tN VI tN VI C1, --l . Z 0 --l (/) -l -l rrl ' - --< o(/) g-l~~O~~ ~ C:.. cx?,-O I'Tlrrl --lOZ--l;;Ozz - . '-' 00 > ::E)>~::E::E ~ Oco r~)>OZ)>>--l C ~r:c " ~3 ~ ~~~rs:::~" ~ - 0 0 0 0 0 - )> - - '-. ^ )> rrl --l s::: (/) -.J ~~ ~ ~ ~~~~~~~:2 s s s s s ~ ~ - - t;, .p.--<:C(/)~(/)I'Tl~' ,'r (/)S:::0z--l;;o (.J1__\ ~ ---- C1, 0 ;:::::rrlZ--l)>' )> '-. )> z::j--lco6;8 ~tN -l>;, <$> ~ ~ 0 ~ ~ S:::OO;;O~~ '/ f'1 ~ ~ 0 0 0 ~ t- (/);;0 rrlO-...! ,....... ~V,;a." f;oc; ~o c:... CX1. --l tN VI tN ,i::J/ C1, --l1'Tl Xo --l )>, ^ I'Tl 0(.J1 ~ V ~ s::: iTl ;;0, =i:l (.J1 co rrl ,j>. ,0 ;;o:::ltv '-' o.p. --l r;;; -)> · ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ E 0 /0..... /0..... /0..... /0..... /0..... /0..... 0> - ~ 1- " " - g ~ ~;~ s ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ - = (~~) I, '\~ cx?, - o ;;O's::: ~~ - "- < I'Tl /, - r - "- ' ~ ~ / , I ~~ ~ "~ ~ z / ~ 1 ~)> '-. ^ I ~ 8 @ I 4. A I ,~'".J ~~ ~ :c <$> ~ ~ ~ <V ~ I \@.t! V 8~ I!'- ' /' , // N"~ -- I 0 0 0 0 // -;-!. / -{F= , , ~ I s s s s 0 -!. --=- ~ 0, n / ~ 3! I ~ ---".i>. - " '=== / -- ...... ~ ' 1'-0" 4'-0" 1'-0" "/"" I..............~ "~ ~/ .i>. 01'Tl I 1 9'- /8" , S 0/ z~ ' - _ _ _ _ 0> 7-i ';::, - ;;os::: )> tN - - - - - -I>;. ~ 0 0 0 0 <; '"..., 6./_" ~~ :i~o)>v ~~~ ~~(.J1V Ji <$> ~ ~ ~ <&> q , / 0 I ,j>. "'1'Tl Z ~ ;;0 '0 C " _ L )> s::: ~ 1 )>V - zc)> - - (.J1CO 0S::: (/) o (.J1 rrl :c c-- 7'-0 1/4" ~ 8" 1'-10" ~ 3/41. 1'-9 3/4" z ~ 9'-6 1/4" "I - (/)(/)O--l(/)OO <$>- 0 0 0 0 ..I>- l'Tl(5coccc - - tN 0 0 0 ,\//0" " rrlz~ ~~~ --l VI tN VI tN C1, g --l ~ )> 0 ~ ~ 9'-8 1/t --loz::j~zz )> co ::E )> I'Tl ::E ::E VI ~ r;;o ~ ~ z)>F ~ 7'-01/4" 1/4" 1'-7 5/8" ....... ~ co)>, )> r 0 0 0 0 ~ - NO' s::: -l 0> II - 01 '- o '-.^)>I'Tl--lS:::(/) 0 0 0 0 " ... ," ~ ~~::j>:l~~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C1, b Z <g>.... <g>~ <3>~ tN r- oco)>':C(/), - 0 --l --l ......... " ~O s::: _ N , +-"':cS:aI'Tl(/)1'Tl 0' (/)S:::G)z-l;;o "- 0~Z--l~-o ~ ~ z-l--lCOO;;o VI - s:::00~~~ ~ <$>01 0 0- 0- ~"Y0 t- ."." 000" --l VI VI VI tN q ?J ^ I'Tl II ~ '/ ('T1 -a. 0'> / --l .. .... I" ..'0'........ 0..1>- / . .... ":--..... "'0 / ~ / N m '- 0,,, ~ ~ r- " 3 3~ <g> <g> <3> (.J1 0> ~ 0 0 0 0 ~ ...... ,..r/ 3 3 "'; ~ <$> ~ 0 ~ <0 ~ "- / 2'-01/8" 5'-71/8" 3'-101/2" V 11'-5 3/4" I L- -- - I 7'-01/4" 1/4" 1'-75/8" <g> <g> <3> ~ <$> <$> I ~ <$> <S> ~ o 0 0 tN ~~ ~ =i ~" fllrn N OVl VI< / ' 21'-10" ~ < / - 11- / 7'-6 3/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-0 1/4" 2'-1 3/4" ~ Z /~ - I _ / 00 s::: - - / 0." 8 O / oE (Xl / 0 (/) rr=====iI < 0> ;;o:c U U CID " < ~......" U) E (hd / (.J1 01 ~ ,,~ / ~ " " 2 / . "'" " s::: / ~ Is '> ~ "'0 ~ " 6'-9" / ~ ~ V' m " 2'-7" II - " / 00> ~ Z C · I ;;0 ~ c ~E 01 t- O ~ ~~ ~ < )>)>::E-...! r Fs::: fTl < E E ,~~ VI .... VI ~ ~ S:::S::: 1'Tl' ~. ~ :::J ~ - - xN 0 " 0 tN":z: tN z z --l ' II "II - G) " C C fTI ~ ... OJ... Z tx:!. S:::S::: z> "" v C . v(/) , or I I I rTl "'0 ~ ~ 8~ VI .... ~ :I: ~ ~ ~ < ~ 0 ~ m ;;0 ;;0 I'Tl C ~ ,. I II- .... II" - m 0 r- rrl I'Tl --l X s::: - "'1"1 I 2'-6" ... ,. ... Z )> 0 ." ." C iTl II ",AJ v - )> 0 ." c:... -!. rTl - -!. G) -I 0 II Z ~ ~ fg a28"( -I ~ Zo <g> <g> ~ 0 ~-?' <g>~ E 6;s:;:~:D .i>., ~ -:i ~ .i>., O - - 0 --l --l 0;;0 0 ~ ~ "., --l s::: ,Zco =0 r .,. m 0." d ;;o~ -.... .... --l --l 0 / 2 l::i~;;o ~ )> :::::::... 0 ;;0 ;;0 0 z ",AJ ,.AI 0 )> C (/) I'Tl r- N II> mZ b ii1 ~ ~ ~ ~~ 00 ~::E / " ~V0 h ~ ~~] 't' ~ 't' Z m en < .. 0 z r .... ~ ~2"V =< . g ~~~ cx?, m cx?, ,....,. , .... ::E s::: ::E , > ::E J.1tI :0 - m:::::::'" ~ F O~~ - 0 :0 ~ "'1"1 <g> <g> -0 I'Tl C 0 m -, V ~ ~ rrl(/)rrl Z m --l --l ~x Z > ,. ^ :::;:: 1m (/) 0 2 rrl ." -0 ')> I'Tl rrl (/) ~ 0 -0 ;;0 (/) I'Tl OJ ~ ;;00)> rrlz--l "'" II I'Tl 0 z ;;0 , Z x 0 < ' fTI rrl X .... _ -I -< rrlc ~o)>--<s:::o:c ;;o:2I'Tl)>S::: 1'Tl:C,. ~g -I - < OZ '5~::E2ro)> rrl ;;o~o s:::)> 00 O "tJ ~--l )> z::E)> C ::;;:;;0 -< ~c .... en )> .... , I'Tl ~ ~ 0 0 -l ~ (/) (jj rrl~ 0 )> . (/) O' "'1"1 ~ )> ~ 0;;0 0 1'Tl;;o --l s::: .;;::-, ~ 0 --l " Z",AJ..... :.....J ~ 0 Z rrl I 0 0 I'Tl ." 0")> fTI N 0 - I -, 0-0 <)> < s:::;;o 0 O ..... - 0l ~ C I'Tl r;;;;g z 55;g 2 -0 r 2'-1 7/8" 5'-7 1/8" 3'-10 1/2" I 0 I -lz;:o;;o)> ,--<)>)> r Z O :c I'Tl (/) I'Tl ::E --l Z rrl :0 Z co ~~~ 0 I'Tl P -< l1'-71/t " > g-l>;,o I (f) -u m t"""'\ (f) '1 0 (f) )> 0 ;U \.0 I ::u ~.J I (T1)> (f) -U ;U (T1 (T1 0 rr (T1 r -Ie -U )> < (T1 C-. m)> (T1 0 (T1 (T1 ;U ~ (f) )> i: ~~ i ~ i ~ z ~ ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER SHIVE ,HATTERY rv ~ ~G) r'1 'i'~ ~ ~ I EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT Cedar Rapids, lA, Iowa City, fA' Des Moines, IA o ~ (f) ~ ~ ~ I CITY OF IOWA CITY Moline, IL , Bloomington, IL ' Chicago, IL ~~ w 0 I V --'- (J) SHIVE-HATTERY, INC. 2834 NORTHGATE DRIVE IOWA CITY, IOWA 52245 b 220 S GILBERT STREET IOWA CITY IOWA PHONE (319) 354-3040 FAX (319) 354-6921 I .http://www.shive-hQttery.com XReference Files XR- TITLE> XR- TITLE Dv,g I I I P \ProJec\s\105191-0\dwg\CD-A5 04 DWG I DATE 03/26/2006 I Time 18 59 I 1'-4" ~< ~~ ~~ ~m I" ,^ > CIJ o~ M~ . ~ -, CIJ CIJ o ~ :D m ~ m m ~ m z m~)> Z =E ~N ~ ~ ~ \~- - - - ---- c~ .... ---- -- ---- - ------------------------ i I I I I ,^ I 1I:t I Vtl I I I I - I II m I .... I II ~ I I II,. I .... I II C I t____________ __ ~~_ _ ________________ ____ __ ____ __________ ________________~ ~ (j) () ITI ~ Z -" Z Z () ;;0 ITI )> ;;0 fTl )> ;;0 fTl Z () ;;0 )> 0 x .......... fTl .......... fTl ." s::: ITI ~ ZfTl~ ZITI~ ."S:::!;J zr(ij .J>.::.;: .;1'>::';: -Fcs::: t') 0S:::(j) 0S:::(j) FC=- OC-l 0 -l )>-l )>-l r 0 OJS:::z x r -0)> (j)< Z R{zz R{zz ~~ ';Z0 o.~ :!:,:Z ~fTl 0 -0 I 0 -0 , 0 ;;0 (j) -l (j) ,~ Z ~ ITI ITI (j) :!:': (j) > :!:': (j) 0 FR ~ -i 0 -l N........... -i ITI ~ ~ ;i:l Z)>Z Z)>O Z(ij ;;ofTl .'N ~ :::l C -lz~ -izE :::l fTlF!J -ox ::.;:z 0 gfTl gs::: ~Z ~ ~~ .......... ~0 c! r-j rZ rG') _ Z N r;;o )> 0 )> -i r Z -l..::-' x ITI (j) (j)o , ~ -l -l N x ~ ';::,- x C ~ ~ ? ~< ~ ~ ~CIJ -< -0 - 11- -t-=-t 11m lie ..... ~G) I I 7' ~ ~.... I bz {; oCIJ m I",AJ 0 _ _~ ~-I - -, >- CIJ I" CIJ - C 1/2" 111/2" 0 Z "':D ~ ~ m .... :0 m .... -I Z C ~ ~ ~ ~ . ~ g ( 1 ~ i c.. :D 0: > -I.... : 3: , ~ ~ C I m ~ z ~ I ~ ~ ~~ ~ Z -, 0 ,,. I ~ ;/ f' ~ \J \ m \V s: ~z 0;;0 ~z m ,.-.~~ Z ;;oz 0 ~ (j) Z -o~....... O(j) uJ~f: Z ~R{ ..........ITI 01Tl ..........ITI Ul ~ ", 0> Z E:: ~ I .......... ~ 8 ~ ~ ~ G5 ~ ';~ ';::,- ~ ;i:l C r;:! C :::0 s::: .J>. ::.;: E s::: .;I'> ::.;: .... ~ 'Co- ~ . ~l::l U5 ::I:~CX? C Z Z -0 r;:!"" C;!~ ZZ~ FRO x r s:::~ -0)> C . :zf:: rc. =l:::O& <.n ;elf' !:::! x R{ x (j) 00 ~OZ Z~ 0....... ZITI )>Z O z co O~~;;::: ~.0 .......... ITI....... "" ~ Z -l 0::I: :::OfTlC ::.;: . Z0 -i ~ ", - :z '^ :::0 "... -< <X? 0" ~ .......... ~ ~ ~ fTl -l, fTl 0 s::: )> ", I ~ fTlx -l ~ O:z V<:c )>=--0 . " VJ .J>. ,.," Z :::0 fTl rX N.......... ,_, O ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r;:! ~ ~ G') ~ ~ . -0 r ~ ~ ~~ g : (ij . "N (ij VI > ;::;:l ~F;:; co O)>S::: =ti s::: 0 )> )> 0 (j) C r;:!:::O z:::l -ox ~ .... E ;::gg Ulg ~X '-'r OJ (j) 'Il! E 0 t5 (j) ~ g;;o-l)> ::!lt5 ~~ 0 .......... E:: 0"" V)....... (j) C ..,.., s::: '^' -i-- r Z N C Z ::o:;;! ~.......... -l0 s::: )> _ OJ ~ ITI :::o~Z ro -l~ (j) e (")Z ~ COJ rr Z ITI ITI - ::.;: s::: .......... r;:! x 3: E:: O::E ~ 00 OJ (j) C Z ITI vi 80)> C N ITI N <)> -i (j)-l 0 +i s::: -l r C fTlOr x r 1"'1,:C :r: )> c Z :::o<r ....... Z ::0, @ ;;0 lp -0)> OJ 0 ITI .......... ~ ~~ 0 I '; E l2 :::0:::0;1; N :i:! 0;0 G; I -l ~ -i FR.,,:r! x 1TI(j) I ITI Z Z 0 o c" ;;0 00 s::: ." o o o O ::o~ o ,. eA) ~o ", . :z Z ~ ~.... G) ~< " ~ .... " "'"' " < 110 P I ~O ~- ~ ~C "0 I Z I 1 1 0 0 o 0 ".... " -< -:0 I "'"' m 0 :0 ~ ~ : :t 3: c.. : ~ 1ft -;-" I > I ~ ~, I I ~ : C ~ i m I: > m m ~ ~ ~ CIJ ~ ~ I - - m I .... Z Z : .... G) ~ i =E ~ ! >- Z .... 0 .... m o r-..VI ~ ." "'" (j) 0 )> )> (j) ""';;0 1"'1 ;;0 :::0 -0 ~ ITI 0 ~ ~ - (j):r: ~ O<:fTl 0 r Z::I: <: ITIX ITI ITI)> "x v> ;;::: ;d~ :!J ~ .......... q. ~ ~.......... ~ 5 ~ ~ Vi ~ ~ ~ q 6 0 :b <.n & :::0 ~ )> ;;0 ~ 0 ~ ~ s::: (ij s::: g (:j x (ij C ~ 8 ", ~ F ~ ~ > ~ ~~ ~ ~;~ ~E ~ ~E ~~ :~~ 13; ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ "'1"1 ~ ~ ~~ ~ :. ~ ~ .......... :::0 :r:__. Ul (j) -l s::: -l ITI s::: ~ )> s::: -0 :::0 -i r " OJ s::: r :r: ~ ITI )>:::0 <: ",AJ co ::0 ~ r::J ^ e )> - --, ITI- 0- --,s::: rlTlUl (j) ITI )> -i ~ X )>r ITI <: -I _ _ --, E:: <.n ~s:::)> R{~ OE )> E ."ITI r);!c ::.;:6~ G') )> ;1; ZOJ :::0 s::: (ij zr ~ f: >- 2 ~ ~ f:: > (") o 0::';: Z 10-0 OJs::: Z ~s::: )>;;o);! .........rs::: )>ITIITI =ti s::: 0 Z -l~ ~ 0 :::l 0)> r ~ ~ :i:! V) E e VI - 0 cO r 0 r r Z Ul ITI 0 OJ 0 Z (j))> :z 2 E::::O 6 ~:r! ~ fiF~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~8 ~g) r~~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ 8 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Z ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ;;0 :r:~ () 06 I < ~ ~-l 0 o~ o(j) OJ (j) (j) :::0 ::.;: ." )> ~ Z (j) ~ 8 _ :!:; ~ o (j))> ~ -l;;o ofTl fTl :!:': ;:0 (j)-i OZ 0 -l ~ ~o 0 :::0 F z: c:;i:l , :z ....... F o ;::;r)>;;o 0 ::i:::O :::0 oz )>@:r:o)>c-iooQ;;:-ls:::c: s: ~ 0> Z ~ ITI...". 0::';: :::01Tl :::0 0 ITI ITI ~ =- (j) 0 .......: rTI r . Ul 8j:::j;;o ~~ -0== :::0 <)> 5 ~Ul ~ 0 s::: (j) OJ ITI -< :::l ,. > > 0 ;i:l )> g :g ~ ~:r! g ~ F o>.g ;B ~ G; 5 d ~ ~ .... ~ ~ ~ ?5 Z 0(5 F!J ;1; o(j) ~z 0 s:::.... > :::l 0:::0;;0 -l 00 1T10 2S x -i:r: ~ Z ~ 0 101/4" C ~ ;g ~ ~ 4" 6" ~ OJ~ ~~ 00 -io , VI =1fTl ~ 0 (j1Tl ~ .... ~ I · .... 0" ITI"" I I "'"' s:::~ II C S:::z II 0 1 I II 0,..., 00 -" 0..... ~ r..... .. I ~ .,,5 ( .... "'0 ,- 0 I I b 0 -l~ ~ ...."" c!~ ~ r ~ I " "'1"1 C:::o OJ:::O -n I N ..., ~ITI ~ ITIfTl I ,. I ~ -t - -n c... I. :t Z s: ~ :D ~ CIJ m .... :t CIJ .... _ :t CIJ ~ I o _ ~ .... .... ~ ~ . C I ~ ~ CIJ ~ ~ m ~ ~ J~ ~ N o > ~ OZ' .... 0 C m 3: 0 ITI :r!)> ~ q. Z C ~ (") ;;::: -i~'" "'0> ~ r - > 0 ;;0" e 0::0.......... X X " Ul R{ ~ ~ E S2 -l Z ~ g ~-l>;, U5 M> :::l (j) - Z ;;::: ::!l OJ )> OJ :> :!l M'" g :zE t5 :r:o E 0 Z 8 :::0 Z :::0 0 z l::l OX G) ~~ s::: e ITI::';: ITI ::E M O:z (") 5 0 ;;::: OJ )> )> ~.... >F Q;! a:! ~ ",e o ITI ~ (") :::j ^ i!l F V 2 ~ Ri xE:: Z Ul Z e C)>)>)> -< ..., E:: ~, ;::;:l(") (f) ITI -l ~ :::g s::: r (j) OJ r ::0 ", ~ -l ;::ge -l -l:::O :::0 '> - C :r: ITI C > :z 'c 0::0 ~ Z ~ C Z Z ~ c! z -< ~ ~ rn ~:=g ::o~ o 0 ~ ~ i!l Z OJ 0 ~ Z 0 G) > g 8~ :::l (j) ITI r-)> C fTl 0 C > ~ 0 <> o ITI (j) 0 r- Ul s::: s::: co Z I "'r- Z ~ -< Z ;!; 0 0 G) ~ ::or- )> (j) Z 0 r;:j > ::;!ii Z r;:! 0 -i :i:! -i s::: :c .... ~ ITIOJ." 0 S:::S::: ~ x-r )> ITIO & (7jc!~ Z S:::o " :::lS::::r: -l OJ::;; ZITI :::ORi .... OJ 0ZZ )>0 "'"' :::0 ITI Z ,~ ~ ~::.;: ITIm VI ^ s::: s::: i!l c! )> OJo )>s::: VI VI 0 r ~S2 (j)1TI ~ m .. - C z'" ;!;z II C ~ fTlRi Z II X II Z 0 0 ..... .... ~ .... C d ,- '^ , 1 ..., s::: 0 Vtl 0 ~ -I "~" >- - - Z Z G) ~ :D .... 0 .... 0 -n I ~ Z ~ o G) CIJ o ~ ~ Z 0 m o Z Z ~ ~ m ~ -I I . ~ ~ m : -n Z ~ 0 I 0 m \ > m m '- GO co.q :t 0 o - :::01Tl ITI :::0 s::: "')>"'(j) (j)"'UlZ 0 Ul > OJITI 01Tl OJZ -l-oVl OJ." m ~VI Ul ~ >Z ~~ ~ ~~~~ 0 ~ ~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~~ ~~~~ ~ ~O Z ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~~ ~~ i ~~ ~ ~ O )>~ OJ ~6~:r: c::b:r! CX? ITI~ t5~ ~ s:::~ ~ s:::~ 00 0 ITI 8 t5c)>o =ifTl8~ 8j =i Z0 C0 zg og~ Vi~ ~ S:::s::: -l ;:g :::ls;; R{ )>l"'1co 0 s::::::Or;:! s::: ITI ITI - ITI (j)s::: ::.;: ITI s::: Z-O -lozlTl ~." "'s::: 0 .,,::;; ITI c:< Z )>fTl R.o )> .... ~:< ~ ~fE;:g~ c:b ^ ~)>;i:lc;! ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ f: ~ ~ ~i!l ~~ o~~~ F;; -< ~~ ~ ~8 ~~ ~::.;: ~ x~ OJ : V 0)>)> c:b OJ 1TI0)> )> -l -l ITI." r - s::: 0> =- ." 1TI(j) :r:." :r: -i:::O 0- 0 )> r -< ~ f: G;::J(f)z ~ r~:::o 8(j) r z 0 z S:::iTi 0 t5 ITI c~ G;i!l G;CX?r;:!:r: ITI G5Ri z ~ z:r! C ~ ~ ~ :r: co::.;: -l (j) ITI-o z:r: C 0 C 0 0 0 z;;o-:::l)> -l ITI r C) ZO 0 :::0 C fTl =- OJ ~ R{~E~ ~ ~ z ~ O~ ;i:l~ ~ :!} ~ ~ m Vi ~ ~ ~t5 ()~ ~?S~8 ~ ;;0 ~ ~ :::0 ~ )> C IOrcr fTl (j) (j) ::.;:)> C Z - Z -l ;i:l F)> Z)> Z ~ 0 0 < Z :::0 s::: =1 s::: ~ ~?o ~ ~ @ 8 ~~ s::: c! ~ ~ ~ ?5 ~ ~ ~~ ~ )>~~ ~ < ~ ~ g o 00 .;;: -l ~:::o OJ r Z :::l > Z rZ :::j -0 z- .......: r C ~ (5 0> ITI r 0 (j) 0 ::.;::r: -0 rO ,. Z , z" Z:r: _ ~ ITI-l .... o 0 Z -i (j))> N 0 :r: Ul -0 .... f r ITI (f) \J 0 (f) .,., 0 (f) )> 0 ::u I ::u I 1T1)> (f) \J ;::0 IT1 IT1 0 m IT1 r -Ie \J )> ::;; )> ~ ~ ~ ~ i '"~ i ~ ~ ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER SHIVE,HATTER-t 9'1 0 (j) '" 'I'm fl !2 EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT Cedar Rapids, lA' Iowa City, lA' Des Moines, IA o ~ ~ 0 '" "" CITY OF IOWA CITY Moline, IL ' Bloomington, IL ' Chicago, IL ~ ~ g SHIVE-HATTERY, INC, 2834 NORTHGATE DRIVE IOWA CITY, IOWA 52245 6 220 S GILBERT STREET IOWA CITY IOWA PHONE (319) 354-304? FAX (319) 354-6921 , http, / /www.shlve-hottery.com o WOOA"l104-'^!4,"""//dll4 VMOI 'Al18 VMOI 133l:l18 1l:l38118 8 OGG ~ ~ .,- ll69-v9~ (6l~) xv.:! Ovo~-tg~ (6l~) 3NOHd I ....J ..-- 0 StlZS YMOI "AiIO YMOI 31\'"0 31YOHl"ON .,OZ "ONI ')'"3HYH-3I\IHS Al18 V MOl ::10 Al18 ;;: ;;: 0 ~ <3 ~. 11 'ODBOlllO '11 'uolDUIWOOI8 \ 11 'eu!lo1^J \-/ t:'\NIZ\-/lt:'\ UOIU31X3 <3 <3 (1)~ Z or- 'v'1'saUIOl^j saa, 'v'1'Al!O eMOI ''v'I'sPldel:l repeo 183r08d 1N3V\138\fld38 l3N\fd ON v v v v a a (f) 8 2 8 ~ ~Cf.) ~ ~ ~ ~3:~~VH'3:AIHS 831N38 N011\f38838 33l '\f 183808 ~ I ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ 0:: 1-0 0<(lJ... . I- .....J Cl 0:: 0 lJ...w 0 Z (!J eJCL~ :3 z~<( Z 00 lJ... _ 8 <i ~ I- W Cl 3=(!J I-w 0:: > .....J ..lD W OZ Zo 5 0 I/) I _ ::><( S as 6eJ~ ~ ij5~ 00.. 0:: 0:: 0:: 0:: ~ :::E G: ~^ ::E w I/) Qw lJ...ClI/). ~~ W <( <(Q:; 0~eJlt ~ wOo ~o I=! :::E 5 8 U ~ 0: l5 aJZW u..1- ::> vi ::J ~ 0 iE Cl W <( ::>~>o WZ Oz <( 0I-WN. I- Z- 0:: 0 1-1- Z t5 0:: (7) b ~aJ::E o~ .F <(<( -" I u.. ~W I- :::E- I CL~ 0:: . W __ o::~ 01- o:&:Iuw "<t ~I-cr. 1-3= 00 WI/) .....J _0 0 Zw 0 \.J...u Q:;:::E <(j:!:g:~ W WaJ W(!J U0 51=! ~~z.....J ~ z::E w~ F z W - 0 W 0 ::> Ww..J ..Jo.. <( F 0:: 0 N W ~ I- 0 cr...J~ <(_ as~ W~ iE~O.....J:::E WW 0::0.. :c x 0:: CL 0 :::E U .....J W ~~rt~ ::>0 u W <( 0: I <( lD 3=\,;,1...... I-z I/) j:!: (f) .....J Z vi m ::J Zw 0<( @) Z- Z.....J. OW:::E --- wow W <3 -3: 0<(t3 (f)lDl=!:::E i: z::>cr. I=W lD,...: ~W GOZ Z.....J(f)~ I/) 0..J::> ~~ :::E ~u WZ<( O.....J~\.J... -Ow O~ CJJ ~~ ~~~ g~~~ 8 N ~~g ~~..J l <( uz~ 0 ::>5 I/) 0 wo WI- "'~ ~<<~ffiQ'" 0 [il.c 8mz 00 0 _ _ _ "" 0U ~CL:::E ::J.....J3; :::E 0:::E ..J::>w I-Z Z n \ O Z L5so:: W<(o::o eJ 0::1- ..JI- cr.W <( ( o:gs 0::00 9:::::E0.....J I:)w ..JZO wW ':::;~ O:\.J... f.IlWlJ... CL(f)lJ...lJ... I- ZW <(i:CZ u..aJ .....J~_ Z .c N ,,; " z w <Ii I-c<!l"": W::> ",1\ ~ 11 _ _ o 12 Z <czw cr.1- Z g: :::E .....J F 0 IiJI-W IiJZ ~U eJO ~ I- eJ Z I-w> I-u.. X ~'" :c g: ~ Wit:) Ox~ Ou.. W W I") I- Z W ~ 0:: CL ZW> ZO I- ~ """ :>t I=! g 01/) i- <(f.Il~ ~ <( I-(f) Z oz<( g uobJ o:::i: ~<('-' e:: .....J5 Z wI- .....J\.J...0:: ;a ww It z I ~ try 12 ~ 0:: 0:: 0::0 · I/)::>u 0 "<t z<(<( tl. eJ-;;;- ;;~g: 01 CLZ ~W~ Clo .....JU 3:0f.Il I ~I/) WO::> Cl '" w~W Z~CLI/) ~ ~ 15><(~ 1-0Z tl. I Z .....J <(_ '" 0 W01/) N 1-0:: OJ F - f.IlZ~ J.5z ~~ ~ j ::JF.....J W ,O:::E.....J I 0 (f) ~<(> NF 0::0 .....J <(x z<( 0 W g'E W IW.... <<....i\ jE~O t; F I-zw (f)o::<(w lJ...woz z~ <( (f)':q. is-f.Il wwj:!:O:: I-W.....Jo wg- I I x X"- o::tryj::2 0::3: ::> (f)~o::F ~ 5 WW WI") ow~ ~:30~ ~ ~~ ubJW <(0:: z5:lJ... 0 I/).....J I12::>W 050:: wo <(oz dviz~ [j~:3d dw~ I ~lJ... I-w zZow ~ 0::0::--.. Z g; '" I!! W :s ~ 0 " I:' "' g t:J :s 09i== wCLUW !z!~f2<( I (f)CL O--..W lD 00:: . lDf.Ilw j::2<i!.....J~ ~ "<tQ::wo:: - zO::(f)O u "-5:u::> ---- - -::>-.....J :;! I")I<((f) \.J...~j:!: ~ ~ CLO 0w I CL. I/).....J Zl-Zl- ~Z~~ F:i:-L5 OI")I-W ~u~z I o Xo::~w z w<(:Cf.Il @) o OJ 0 :l::5~", I I , (f- (I:j ~ I W;i 'Tj::2:::E, II I 53 3 ,,~~t;: ~ : : ....-- 'l::5L:i C3W5 I 3 N\.J...W,-, lIllIII::; 11' wj::21/) 0 U ' u O XI I- 12zlt ~ :i I g /" O~ G:O tn III ---- _ 0 / I: ~~ ~j:!:~12~ l I a: I II u:::E -<(<(0 ~ I ~ t::::::L~::::::::: :3 eJ ;?:!z! W ~ 12 I 0 lIllIII::; WI 5:wo::_ (f) _ O I- 0::1- 0f.Il::>::>t;3: ~~ Ow~SwI I .....Ju O a: CLU.....JO::Z . I CLO O<(u z~ .....J JIItI" 0:: CL Z I/) 0 5: U I- a: ~ O(f)W<(u:c I L5~ I 0:: X ,ft I <(W ~ ,...., W 0:: e.i Z:I: bJf2 ~ - I- ~ I- ------, cc g& ~ W ----" I 0 o I ~ W '\ Z I- . ~ \ b0~gs lIllIII::; \ 0 Wz:c 0 \ I z . F .....J I 0 ~ Z (f)':q. lJ... ------:::11 .....J I- ~X"-I- ::::::::::_.J <( . 115z", i:! UWI")<( :::E o::>~"... ~ .... 0 .II-w~ (f)0:: ~ · 0 ~~w.....JlJ... ~ (f)0 o 0:: ,~ u.. '-' gJ 0 (f) b I 0 gj o::t5z I II z f;j ~I/)oo:: .... · F '" 000 ." .z l:::l o.....J 0:: Z Z g Z .z .... :::E ~ ::;gl=!;d .... tl. I-ZXW~ :s '" t5wwu ~ o::(f)~CL~ g, S ~w<(OCl ~ D.. ~ lJ...0::::>0::_ 0. '" ~ -::>~O(f) ~ O(f) Q en (f) 0:: ::> I ~ f;: o 3:wOO::I- - OJ "- '" Wo::OIO u ~ o ZCLOf-f.Il W ~ ~ 01- ~ '" zu p ~ <(W 0 tl. a: z u g, T-- wWz ~ ~~g .....J ~ 0 175S12 ~ ~ -'\ _ 0 wU ~ .....J ~ ..J 12 t5 8 I Q:: 0:: ~ 0:: 05:0 '" <3W LL w-. z:co tl. "... OlD::> .....J 0 I-~O~ F. \.J... !;i 0,...: b z WI (f)"<t tl. ::::!: I- I - 0:: X"-I- tl. . ;?: z 0 W I") <(::> ,^ .... 5: G: (f) z V" o <(F . II Z 0r.:1-~ a: . <(wx _ .... CLW(f)W LL~ ~t5lto I") 0f.Il01- 1-..:.1 <(~ 0i2~ ------~ Cll-:c ------~ z u Z 0:: I <(w F. 0 I Z (f)"<to I w~oz x"-.....J / u~ WI")lJ... / <(~u / CLOO 1"/ (f).....JI-(f) 0 .... WU 3: Z f::::::_ 0t58I :3wf- I , I- 0:: lDZ'" I ' w- . , ::>W"... I " 12 lD 5 g& b I- as ~ I \ Z~WI ,I ~.....J\.J... I \ -zO:: CClJ...W,-, I \ ;?:- 0 \ 5:lJ...l/)z I <(F ::::::::::::::::::~ gj:!: (f) 0::0:: 1-_ 03:0 CL<(WX ZIO O!Z!~W F .....J.....J O::WlJ...O (f)':q.\.J...W o f.Il 0 I- X "-I- GJ WI")<(.....J ~--------------------------------------/~ (!) ........... ,............ I I- (f) Z I .......... _ I W u 3: 0 I- (f) 0:: I ............... ",," I 12 W Wz I .....J 115 Z '" 0 3: 0 I ............... ,," I 0:: - ::> W "... Z I 0 I..... ,," ::> z. b I-:::E I F _ .....J.....J I ............... ,," I 12 j:!: ~ (f) g g& I Z ~ I- I/) ':.t \.J... ~ I ............... ",," I ~ <( .....J <( I to G: w .!:::, ~ ~ ~ ::J I ............... ",," : WUI-120 1 >< ;?: Z Z W ,," .......... I 3: W W (f) 0 ~ ~ 0:: I ",," ............... I g f.Il W It W (f) 0 5: 0 I ,," ............... W f.Il 0 Q:; X Z I:3.....J ",," ............... I CL u ::> ::> W F. \.J... WI"" .......... I 0<(1-00 (f)"<t > I " ..... O::CL~ZWO X"-I-w I """ ............... I Cl(f)lJ...<(O::I- L>.n0<(.....J I ",," .......... I (!) WI- 0 f.Ilw Z wj::21/) 0 0 I- (f)o:: 12zlt ~ .....Jll5z", 03:0 I G:O tn 'O::>~"... ~I:3.....J / ::2j:!:OOx II-W~~. lJ...w / r- zl- . Z.....J ~"<t > / Z W ~G:wlJ... X'I-w ".I _ ~ <( Cl 0 '-' WI") <( .....J --.... ZZWWI- --.... 3:wo::Q:; (f) ~ " gm::>5b3: 05:gs , W~WwI zIO '\ CLU.....J 0:: 2 0:: ~. riG:! \ ~;;:~(f)03: xZI-GJ ~ ~ -::::::::::::::::::::) O(f)W<(U:C WI")<(.....J gj W g J !;;; 0:: , I !;;;::>3: 0 -------. I ,. (f) W ~ ------- I ~ ~ Z Z :>l ,/ 2 O::.....J~ / 0 CLO / ~ .....Jg:try --" ~ <(Z::> --.... Fo<( I ...., Z U I "01- W X "ZU 0:: OW '" '\ \ <( W ~ I- .....J [:J \ Z ~ u \ \ WWZ ~eJ8 3 \ \ uO::o o.....JCL '" \ \ <(~u 0.....J!:, i:i \ -------~ CL 0 0 Z Og: I- 0 51 --- , ------~ (f) 0 _ <( ~ 0 ___=0 ~I-(f) Z I- '" '" W~ 3: 0 (f)Zo ,. OZO~ .....Jwl- XOlJ... Z I-WW...... lDZ""" wu> 8 wO:: . . ::>~"... :;! 12f.Ila~ 'T~w~ ~ Z::>WI - _.....J\.J... ~ -1-0:: CClJ...W,-, Z 0 ~ ~~(f)Z 5 o I <( F 0:: 0:: Cll-I-~ 03:0 CLL5bJ[j ~I:3.....J OZ\.J... 1-. \.J...~'J 0:: W \.J... 0 ~ "<t ~. Cl f.Il 0 I- [j -;;;-~ ~ o zo:: FO ~:3 I ~~ ! O~ W ~ g I- 0:: 0 (f)::> l>; '" r:; 3: (f) _______~ gj N ~I 0 _______~ '" I W .....J ~W.....J I 0 1; ~~~ ~~~~;' m UI").....J (f) I ~ f" 0 H::!itl / 0 0 . (7) t5 0:c1-j::2 ./ GJ~ g I :::E 0. zz ".I 0 -' Eo 0 ~ ':q.~ - G: ""::::.... JIItI" ~ 1 ~ W "-I") j:!: I " ~ ~ W .....J WI")::> I- " W o f.Il WO<( (7). ::> CLI-(f)W \ a: 01- 0::> Z \ 01 O::OOW \ ~b~ ClO::I-f.Il \ JIItI" ~N\.J... \ ~ -::::::::::::::::::::l -------=0 ::::::::::::::::::::::::1 W -------- f / 0 ['5 I I _ z / ILLs / / LL / / / / ./ 0 / " " ./ ./ .... -- <- ~--...., -........, C - , " , 'Z ' \ W \ \ ~ \ \ c(. ~ Z Z \ -------~ W 0 ~:s ,..... -------=0 ____ __~ '" - ------- 0 en \.J..., W 0 '" tl 0t;: '" '" ~'-' 0 Z ~ ['5 ~ D.. .....JI- Z ii ~ ~ _ Z ... b~ JIItI" en "- .1 LU ~ c ~ ..J ~d a: I- W ..J I- ~ Z ~ o <( .....J zo:: ~ Z 5E W F 0 ...J VI a: ~~ < W Z ~ 0 W 0 ;@ g!< ~ Z ::;:: ~ ~ 0 (f) - ~ o..J b 3: I JIItI" ~... ~ WI cr. ~ lIllIII::;!5 LL 2':q. ~ 0 ::E ~ 8 O"-W 0 0 lIllIII::; I- '" o..,~ ...J 0 il C ~ ~ ~ !:; -:::::::::::::::::::::; -:::::::::::::::::::::; CJJw ~ Z b w ~ V" I I ..... 1 a: .....J < I I -". u::: ~~ W / / 3: 0 ~ o I ~ I / // a: 1-. cr. "./" I ~ t; 0 ~ gs 0 I ~::: /' ~::::::.... ,ft ~ W ~ I:3 0 _',', ,...., '" 2 try':q. \.J... ..J ',', o X 'I- u.. \, UWI")<( 0 . \ \ b Z 0 \ \ I ::> I \ \ .... 9 ." -------d :::::::::::::::::::::d { ~ ------ "- (!J.z .... .... - I Ot> :91 :GW!l I 9002:1 alro :31VO I ;:lMO'IO'lVIJ-OJ\5t.1p\O-161<;OI\SpGfoJcl\:cl I ZlGo5oq I I 5MO' < 10-dV-tlX I 6MO'31111-?:lX < 31111-?:lX :SGI!J Goue.lGJe?:lX - TITLE> XR- TITLE,Dwg I , , . I 1 glwhite I P:\Projects\105191-0\dwg\CD-M1.02,DWG I DATE: 03/27/2006 I Time, 17,03 z fT! S::-O fT! z6 0 2:l:j S::-o fT! G) -I )>r .." .." )>r l- ofT! !:1 I I ;0)> I I ;0)> , Z N ~ AZ -I N~ AZ :J: fT! )> Z :::l 0J0J 0s:: Z (f) C G) ~ ~ 6 Z 0)> "- "- fT! ~M U'i -!:>:. -!:>:. -:::::-!a.." fT! =<! (f) C x' x' Z N - ~ 0 M ;d;:g 0) 0J 0J '--' fT! Z fT! -0 r Z fT! fT! C)> )> r r 0r - (f) ~ ~ -I :::lo ." fT! "- "- -0 ;0 0 -l>;,-l>;, ;0 ::;:; ~.." ." 0 c 0 -0 G) C Z )> r ~ ........0 C/) OJ 0))> 0 0 ~O) c!~ ~ 0J fT! m ...; =CJ1 N 0 0 (f) (f) 00 ~Q 0 0 .." 6 fT! s:: 0 :D ~ d=<! 0 0 fT! ;0 ::;: 'U )> :::l C/) ~ ........ r zfT! r 0 .. 0) ;oz 0 p Z 0 ...; N~ ~p ." N N :J:(f) :0 CJ1 CJ1 l>> -0 r (f) - 0 m ~ z '--' 0 G) ~ :J: .." -I "- ~ .." :!J)> - 0) 0) ........ fT! oJ:>. -0 .." ')> ZO C/) CJ1CJ1 -3-1 C ~ ::;: _-I (f)0 :J: :J:;O -I OJ <3 ::::j -< ~ N fT! m N 0 ~ s::Z fT! m 0 OJ (f) :0 o 0) ::;: :z 0 0 . . r :0 bC/) 0 C/) 0 0J :::l (f) ~ '$. ~O -I fT! C )> C (f) ;0 (f) G5 ~ fT! )>J: 0J Z OJ, ~ :J: ........ C );! CJ1 co Z - co co 0 m 0 )> G) '--' ~ fT! fT! ;0 N (f) ~ ~ ~ c ;0 U'i (f) :0 0 C fT! - - (f) 0 r- << G5 r- cc ~ ;0 r r Z OJ '-l m XReference Files: XR- TITLE> XR- TITLE.Dwg I XR-AP-01 > .Dwg I . 1 dmmusic 1 P:\Projects\105191-0\dwg\CD-E1.01.DWG I DATE: 03/28/2006 I Time: 07:51 I rrl()-l Xf110 =ic)> UJz() -0() ~UJf11 \JUJ ())>~ -()co ~~f;i 0 ~-l() 0 -lfTio -l;:O 06 f110 x;:O ~ ,c:====== Z ..... 11",," \ ..... 0......... G) 1:lJ I I II. \ ......... c: - - - - - - - c: = = - - = = = - """. :lJ ~ "^ I I..... , .j>. ------- \ II 0 W II \ II" \ \ ..... C -I I I b , ..... \ , I Z I 11 I I. " I \ \ 9. 0 rO II ".......... 9. \ \ "_ ", 11 0 I I "" r:lJ II '.......... .....::iE;:O 0 I II I % ,.. -- - 0 0"" o y", ~ /'_- ~ c I :lJ II (f) II ,^ -<... I / z," '" 0" V. -<oN ~ , " 0 " ~ 0 0 m < / 8-S m ~ II)>: : 0 o \ <! "ii · > ;:: :: r" c: ~ c: _ m I ~'" en m u ~ u -I ~ I _____ ;:0 rrl Z 0 en ~----- >x -I JJ r n ... '" -I S::Cij 0 n r ... ..... f:: QO f11, 0 II II ..... " ~o m ,. "" g -l rrl 0 ." ;:0 0 s:: ;:0 () Z :::...:s::: II ... · 0",. o~oo Om <;% 0 .... "" "'tI .. ~ ,""';:'" z>co d8 -<rl g ,. "" 0 .... ~ m=l.... glii,"~ oo~o ~z ~-< 0 _ "" O ~ ~ ;:o~ === )>' O~ ~~~g N~ ~-l ~ Z :: II 0 ~z '" '" !;J, Z f;iooz)> ()' -l;:O g)<J)>O -l II III UJ~ > -- 0 ~ m m - -m -<~ O a 0f11 ~~ a)>s:: )>80)> OOJ ~~ m : I r- Z' ;:: \JX f11 "z '0;:0 ZUl (;), "'1"1 rrl Ul 0 -l m () ~ C () g) 0 ~?O 0 )> (;) =I Z I "'1"1 Z ..r.I ;:0=1 ." 0 -lS::0 Cos::;:Oz Z I V "-rrl ~Z X z / Oza ()rrl 00 ;j(;) -I I .........~::iE .... 0'" e' ~cc c!~o"x 0 I.... 0 ..... ~ '" ~ '" '" 0 ~ > 0 m 0 '" !3! I -I =I OJ m -<0 m -I _ doe! "'ri'j ~'" o=i:D I" _ ,,'1 d O-l "'1"1 rrlz 0;:0 -lCC -l0 f11......... II 0 C ~ 0 oN "'" ,"0", 0100 000 "'''',. "" '"~ ~ co;:Q......... UJ-l f11;:O Z-l;:O=i 0(;) Z u U 0f11 o mN,. -<> ,"co rz xa O ~ 0f11 Z Z' f11S::;:O -l =i 0 < o _0 ",r '" 0 <5 n n '" ~ '" UJ ::iE;:O II II ;:0 r- ----f11 ()o 0 ,,-z Z -0 m II ' 00 cf11 II - ffi m~ zO z'" ~~~~~~:f':i "" -I "::)=1 z~ m o~ I zm '" - i:l Z ~ =Ix \ 0..... II I O ~ gj", '" .... "e' \ 8~ ": <:1" 0 ,. ~ ,~ . ", Z ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ',,]~ ::: . - r ..... '" ',~ x ", .... ~~ ~ - "'iD ", ,.. 001 /' f11, II I Z 0 /' f11 II I /' () II II ..... ... / 0 I I ..... "; z "" S ... I 0 II II " c: I. I ~ II II Z - I -l U U 1;] 0 I _______ m c_______ -< 1m c:------- n ~ \ ------- II \ II ... )>()Orrll o~ b01 )> \ B II ):v Z>O"... '> " o ~ Z ~..r.I \, I ;:oz:;dz m 'x I f11 (;) 0 01 I 0 " )> z g ~C!;gj d~ > I [ 0 11 mo-< 0 ,> S rrlcoZ8 co~ 0 ~~o /. S ()f11 0f11p:l;:Q1 I rrlz ~G -l~)> / '" O~ ;:0 -l ;:0(;) 0 ~0g / Z Ul f11 )> -< f11 , (;) f11 I '" :;;1 15 i'j '" 15 '" z '(J i2 I I 0(;) ri'i -<I I <:c ())>- I ' ~ UJ fTl-l :;:;,..... co t:------- ~~ ~ 0 ~ ct10:!J~ gMf;i _______ zf11 i:l q =i=lO f11 0 C ..... f110 il ,~;:: 1 ;:0 , .j:>. ;:0 f11z a ---' )> rrl 0 -l;:Q ~Ul ~ ~ I \ ~8 ~~ x;:O Z' rrl- II (j) (;), xZ II =I ,,-z - - -UJ II Z cf11 ~~ II (;) z::iE zF= II ~::!J (;) II OX ~ "-~ II zc! ~ ~::iE II co~ ' 0 0 U 0f11 ~ r; g 6~ ~ Xo I~~ : ~~ : ~ lo> 0 f11 I ~ ~ Xo I (j) g < I ~ ~ ~ 1;:0 : c:------- F------- 15(;') 0 \ _______ os::();:o ." · , -uO'"rl .> , SJ'QOo siii 0 , >"l<;Z 0, \ -IN.;:-lZ · , Om~m " O~ 0" " ~OO~ ~ ""x 0;:0 '..... 0 ..........__ z ~ ~ 6e''ii~" 0, 0 !lj/_ 0<.N f11;:Orrl II // 0 .". ~ -l'" f11 I \ I f11 0 ~ I I () // ;:0 // Z <;; o-x ...... -l 0 o x_ "" Z /:c o OJ~~ 8 ~:!Jf11 / o f11;:Ozi<:" \Jq::iE I ~ ;:of11(;)~ s;: rrlc() / )> rtl?1 g -lo ~ .;:0 0 I _______ ' s:: C", · \J Z 0 - ":. rrl Z t:_______ )> 0 (;)~ f11Of11 ;:g COUl .'-lo ~ ri'i~" '"1~::iE ig rrl~ ~o~ o ~rrl~ ;:00 UJ()8 r;:j~o ~c -l~;:o s::)>." 0(;) O-lUl <.NCO ri'i~ ""~-l ~UJ;:O 0 0 -lf11 :!J ."x X )>(j) c! Z=I ;:0 Z f11 (;) --------- , II Z I I ... I 1 II I ............... _...... I II EB f11.!.. I ,........... -...... I II XZ I.......... -- I II (j) Ul I ............... --... I I =I ~ ............... -- I I zF= I -:::.:::.......-~---~) II (;) - - ..... - I II "- ~ -><..... I I I C,., -... ............... II z::iE -........ I rrl -z I I () ...-.......... I x =I:!J f11 ...-- ............... I (j) ~ II OX ..... _ ..... I -')> II Z ~ 0)> --... ............... :z I II ;:0..... -- ............... I (;) I II ~ f11 I _--- _ _________.::::::::J "- ~ II x 0 k__________________________ C ,., II ri'i ~::iE ~ =I~ mz oq II ~Ul Zc I (J}-l co~ I ~~ 0"',"0 0 I ",r , 0-<;::0 Xo I z I ~~=i~ \ri'i I e~ I ~%~'" ~ I z< I >"'0>" ~~ I ~-.;:o~ 0 II I F====== \ OX I -0 ", I -< I =I()Ul;:o ,..... II I \ Zc =1-< " " " ~ , "'"g", " 0 ", rom I m=l>o " ~ ", ~o I f11 (;) 0 I I :!J \ I " ~ I '" m z " 0 " "m , 0> '" " m 0 '__ I '>_ ~ , CZ)> II ..... /0 _:::I /'- I ;:Q 0 () II / ,,-- I " I %-< "/ I / I '" U, I ; , n / I I I II / I ! I II Of11z! I I I II ;:Q~Ul J I II f11 ~ ~ t====== II ~z' II (;'), II ~"-z II fTlcf11 Cz::iE I 0~:!J I I 80q I I Zc Z "TI I ~co~ 5l - I m~o ... I m" < _- doN I >m / ,^ ~ I I UJ ;:0 /' '" V. C'l ,,-< ; ~-I 00 II 1/ f;:j .....l, :: ! c: I I _____ II 9lZ "" I c______ r- 00) ~ I O 'tJ I --- 5; I O ... I ~ II .... 0:: II ",AJ ~ Z H Z ~""~0)>f11 g II )>~ =i~(;) ~ ill =I~ II ,. ;o::iEb-lN() "0 ~, II Z :::... :;::00f11!';; II I 'OrTl Zr=.... "-~ II o g,,~~;;! Z 0 ~~m . :;;'" " r- <O"-~,(;) "'~ rrlXX 0 0." II fTl C C "'......... s:: (j) =I _ I I --I ?J=i~~<e ~ O~=I ~ oq II "ofTl Z "'.. <;:OZ '" Zc II - ;:O=l<::3()!'= rrlf11(;) C fil ;:0 II OOfTl-'=I 0 i<: "" OJrrl O czooo c!r . 0 " " '"'"" I' z '" . Xo " "" ZOO co:C ,.. 1rrl II II II X ~ f11-l ill!') ..... ~ ;:0 II II II x . GlOJJ 0)> " "" .... " JJ 0 0 .... r .... U "" ,. , Ozc :J:r m n "" Z 0f11 ~ c-'-I m~ W () II II ~ X (b:-1 m .,., II II ..... " "z)> ~" ~"--...,, C !ll~ DO~ ::E" "''' >; " )>Z i!l -liVi;;;::O O.,,()\J II . U II I -< · " ,^., "' ~ ~ - 0 ~ . ------ ~ I .... 0"'" r"' m~ ~xzo " _ I -~o~~~ I" , m~ ;:os:: ~ O-l() z'" ne'z" " I" I' " i o . 000 < f11;:Orrlo II 0 \ . 8-l Z 0.,., 1.f'10f11 II . I, 0 I .J 0 JJ.... ...."" ~ -< I I, 0 > I --.. ~'" ",:J:g mZ ::;!OJiii I I , , :0.: ....m- DGl "x", I I , I ... 00 0 -I f11~ I I I V u;, "'".... "~8 I 'I, >: 88 ~ ~ m()::IJ 0 ~f11z I I L__ I zo , tll " -<0 I I, z;:o ~ (j)cg m ::iEOC II Z f11- I ~ I Z l'l ~ mdl~ mo<:1 " "ij; I m I '" "8 "~D 0 !'jmO " 0 "'-< I I " "~O 0 0 0 ",iJ( U :;;11': m : Ii:! 0000 Z "'~-l n :D (;)' I -I I .".-- , 3: -< ::0 ()~ 0 I -I "- Z I w f r (f) I cf11 _ n -111 I z::iE Z II m m r 0" 08~ I 1 ;::~ m: :J: =I~ ,.. " co ~ ~~ ;:: D I I " -< .., : : m> zs ~ 0 m C I '" '" " ~. 0 l;:o~ 0", 0 ~ 1 0)> Z I ~~=-n=='.... D'" I ... I o -...j f11'-., 0'-< 1 z r r I I II I "" X 0 I ..r.I I Y 15 '" 0 :;J )> m" I I ':D '" ---- 0 I lri'i~~ f11 I O::IJ ~:: ::/ -I ;:0: 0 I o ~ '" I r 3: _ -" I I I ),/ I ~ " ." /' "" > I I,. , Z 0 )>; " I _/ I ':xI I ;:", I (;) I Z / II I I I I I 8~ I b \J ~ 1 m /:: : I I 0 I m I (j) g:j)> r! II I I I 0 I I co =I 0 Z _ I II Ul I II ~~ 1 t~ p:l \ Z ,. g: :: \2r x ;:", I k 00 _ II II <x " m-< I " 0.,., 1 I ."f11() II X ::o..x..e II o(J}z ~ UJ~ S::-l0 II ~ " C'l zS" f11 I r= 00 8(;)-l II )> ...... zo~ I ;:0 f11 ;:0 g ;0 ;:0 I I Xf11 -()rrl I (j)o -lc I =I~ 0=i8 I Q Z f11 I 1 ~ (;)~ ~~~ II c...() ,S::f11 II ~m C'l '" 00=1 =i>>- I; "" ~ \ m 5l "'" <5"E ffi II I 2UJ ~ f11'" 0 EB =I ZZ'-' II ~=I x ~ "'-<" ~ rrl~ ~ ~ <.N (J) Z zO 0 z n .. c! '" ~ z ;;! '"" 1 0 00 ,,,, ~ 0" · '"~ "" x" ~ m~ ~ 0 ~ _ .... " I ~ ~o · p ~ --... ,. " mm 0 >; " l5 '" g!3! ~ !!. :D " <0 S!:C rrl . m I fTl~ 0)>." b O-l "" C I . ......... f11 0 (J) N ,.. ei 0 O-l ~ @ C ~:;; ." 82 ~ _ __ -,. ~ g Z 8F= - -- ~ -l ~ I f;io I ..... 1:i ~ m UJ ~ 11:11 0::Z ~ ~o ulu ()CO o )> <i~ yt::---'1 ;oZ~ I r - ~ - - .... x '" I -- - - ! -...::... ~ !iJ iii ,-;::;-, r;-. ... ~ I ;::: 0 0 I ~<io ~ l...::/ ..r.I :-"f11 '" l:c-l g 1 1 0 I / f11-l -..... "'----(;);:0 f11 )>.,,;:0 m I / 00....., ~ )><;:Of11X z;:Of11 ... 1/,,)> " Z Cl 0 s:: (j) 0.8 s:: '1 Z J Z-< ~2 \ n 181 ~ l;J e (9 ~ 2 0 ~~~~ ~ ~~~ m:u EB - - ./ =I>'.... LJ - mz-<o.' mZ zO \ )>UJ::iE' 0f11 (;)~ \ ^-lf11- ~ ~-<~ m m n____ m > mz r '" 8 ~ 0 -l _______:::J ;:0 F= z~)> ?; ~ =I Z '" - -<>-< c-z ~=I < ZZ:C,~ Ulri'i(;) 0 Z ~ ~ \Jrrlf111 Ul -l s:: ;:00 m ZO s:: s:: (j) ITI c... zlTl~;J ~C ::::IC )>::iE,,-)>-l.,.,)>0 m m ~~ 0- 0 0 m 0 00 0" ,,00 " " 'il" zoc > >%~ @:) 15~ bm ba >... z!'l -< -<0 g ~ ~ o-l ITIO rrl~ ITI~ J!! p:!o~e~ :z:0~ ..... m < X r oN I 0 0 ~"=I ~'" ~ z Z m z =lz m ~ ..... b'" 1')-< .,m c!!3! '" ... C'~ ~ ~ 'i Iii g ;;Ig ~::l ~'" ~" 0 :ngo~ ~ rl!'j ~ OJ 0" u; ~ v "'''' !'j 0 z ~ zf,1 z~ z~ " o%o~ O~ m q co~ ~=I t 0 tJ~ )> g )> -l OJo )>s::: OZ ox ox -() 8coz~ ~~ r- oo mz z '" ~ z <;: " x "0 iiI'" iile' iile' 000," mm ~ ;:0(;) ~(;) 0 ~~ rrl ~ ~ g ~~ CJ:!] O~ CJ~ j!!: ~XO~ ~?J m f11 , ".. , co S AI =I s:: Z '-' -l X .rrl ITI ,^ () )> x Ul ." '" -- - ",-< m '" -< - oz -< '" 0 0'" '" 'i' 0 .... 0" "0 0 dO 00 '" '< z 0>- Z m" <x m-< z XI 0 -< _ ~ 0" 0 -<", -<z -I m-< " 0 "'~ 0 <5 ilia '" 00 II> 000'-< "'_ ,,~ OJ " .... Oc ~ z "z z 0 =imx" f::'i' ... " x ~ ,. 00", 0 =I" '" r m 0 z oN -< e' ... r;;('i 0 a~ 0" ~"" p ,,> _ 00 ~ oN 0 Z Zr -< 0 Z 0 ili m m 0 iii r" ili j'iz !3! ",0 ......... ~ ())> ITlco-l:c f11z ......... ,.. =I AI ~ Z f;i)> )> , UJ ,.. o ~.v ZC UJ-l r- z 0 " ~.,.,O Ul f11)> <: ;:0 -l ;:0 I ~ Orrl- ~' .!!J, )>Oct5:;; Z)> Z ........ ZfTl-lZ (;) 0 co OZ~- f11); Z ?o ITIO, 8 ~;:Q -I ~ ~-<<.N UJ)> EB .!!J, ~~"!!i~ ~~ m ~~~ ~f11 (JJ ~ )> .. Z r, .... ./ r"'~*' /J) -U lJ m /J) "1 0 /J) )> 0 fJ1 C5 ;Ii ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ i i ~ ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER SHIVE ,HATTERY m 0 6 (J)~ ~ ~ ~ 0 EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT Cedar Rapids, lA' lo~a City, lA' D~s Moines, IA ---l. () 'I' IJJ :;<; ~ Moline, IL , Bloomington, IL ' Chicago, IL (::) 8 F= tJ 0 r ;:: CITY OF IOWA CITY SHIVE-HATTERY" INC, 2834 NORTHGATE DRIVE IOWA CITY" IOWA 52245 ---l. <0 b PHONE (319) 354- 3040 FAX (319) 354- 6921 I '" 220 S GILBERT STREET IOWA CITY, IOWA http,//wwdlvo-hatt"y"com o XReference Files XR- TITLE> XR- TITLE Dwg I I I dmmuslc I P \ProJects\105191-0\dwg\CD-E1 02DWG I DATE 03/28/2006 I Time 07 25 ~." ~." ~:I: ~ a ~ d:I: ~O ~ 0 ~-I a \'! -t '" 0 ~ f;io ~ f;i Z"'I"I ~ v d:I: z." ~o ~~ ~-I a~ f;iO ~O ~-I f;iO z o ~ d ::l o Z lD o z.... X 0 V ~ ~:I: ~ 0 ~O x 0 lD >K ~-I > ~ 1"'10 :;:: ^"U ^ (') ~ z ~ ~ f?~ f? ~ ID rpr", -< z 1"'1 '* 1"'1 =jj= ~ 0-,1 0 Z :;::'*:;::c: ~ '* ~"U~~ ~ .."j R Vi..!..kjo > 0 x <'J ol 0 '" '" tI) ~ ~,~ ~ > :;:0 > ~ > :;:0 f;i :::;: r ~ r::: )>0 G), '''z g." C ~ fj"' :c IV ~ g o ~ p:I , :::;: z I c: r :c o lD s:J I Vi U1 55 01 I o~:r:; 8 ~ fa ~ ~z:::l ::r:' "U W "U oJ ~ G) ~ :!1 ;; ;;;;;; e~ o 000 V'l2 ::D m I./) I./) I./):C C'/) c c:::;:c gO :;:0 :;:0>:;:0 z:r: );! );!F);! ~m z ~ ~ ~ Q ~ ~ ~ d :c ~ Z 0 Z Z ::r:g > ~G; E ~G;~G; ~3 f;i o t5 0 0 -i~ M ~ ~ ~ z o ':::::. 0 1"'1 :;:0 fg :;:0 ~ ~ gog a -l z -l Z I./) 0:::;:0 ~ G5 > > z F f;i I lD :;:0 :;:0 !,Q ~ ~ ~ i:j ~ ~'t1 !,Q a:I: g ",0 ~-I f;i0 Z0 ~." ~m -l:I: ~ G) 0 0 00 ~ ~ ~ ~ c: ~ ~ ~ -I ~:rJ ~ 5 0 ~ ~ f6 o -< I./) 888 :C"U o ogN ~ !Xl:-l!-" ~ _Y1 !"> ;-" 3: Vi IV ~ ?Q -I o:i!~ 0 .." .." >V'I:c C!!l3::""o z8~z:;:o 0 5 0 ^~ o 1"'1 0 C C z::Cz ~"UV'I II ~ !2z_ -l{ll ;s; > .-.of m ~~.f>. ~ ~ ~ ~F~ ~ II II m:il ~:il~ II ~ ~ ~ 0 q q q ~ ?2 P:l ~ ~ ~:?;3:: .lV3::E:g?2 rn~~~la ~ > :xJ -;:;;- ~ ..!.. ~ -i )>0 > Z"U;i -l~~-lW oiTIlTI~ ~ II ~ la a 6 6 2!:(~ II C$:V'I> ~:;:o~~c ~ ~ S30 ~ ~ :rJ ITI _ _ O;:f;V'I -l~~! II :i!a(;!r~ ." "U m z ~ - x z z :;0::1:- ::c:c 0 :;:0 :;:0 ITI 0 G) 0 o ~ ~ ~ 0 S3~ 1TI08.;;> (;!(;!~~ITI ~ ~ ......,. z m 1"'1 z >F >F ~ ITIV'I ~~~.,,8 ~~~ II o.w s: > N Q V'I ::c 0 > > > V'I V'I ITIITI t!!:::I "'0 ::D g ~ 2 \: if ,. ~ ~F iJ~!:l'diJ "''''~~~ !i! ~ 3: ~ ~ t5 'tI ~G)1"'1 ~ ~ ~ g_lD .;;?Q~II';; ~~-<~~ -- II m ~ ~ ~ 5 ~ ~ ... ~-<()'I ....... a2 =iV'lITl ::c;:;:l :!l> COXlTIo (H Z ::r: )>0 a ~ "'" :;:: 0 >. oz - ::O:C:;:o-,l - z>.,,;a ::c ::r: ." 0 0 - o:;:oot5:;:o ~ ~ J::O P>...:OITl~ ~l!l~.;;r I > .... ." ." !:Q ........ OO:;:Oz 0 l'>' ITI :f _:5i-l :-tl-r1c 0 m 0 ,~ -I ~ > ~~~1"'1 ~ =o;a l:lN II :i!~~ II ~~~~~ ~ g CD l:5 ;; ~ ::c1\~ ~ 0 W, m)>o V'I :;:0 > r 0 :il z 0 co 0 co >-l !i8 Q:;:o E O;:f; ~:i!>!:cS >z:c> (H ~ :r: >:- '::::- CJ ~ V'I ~ ITI C %Gj zl1'1 a rClTlo m V< "UOI./)I./) o 1"'11"'1 t5 ~ g!Z! V'I o~:;:o 3:: 002""''''::c ~ ~~Vig > ~~G;~ S3 =i Q 2~ b~~~~ ~~~~ ~ ~ 2 ~ ~ fj"' eO ~ ;d iTl ;:Q I./) -< ~ " z !i8 0 l:l3::'" ." ." 0 0 :il> <n ~ ITI m ITI ,... ~ ~ 1'-' ~ ~ 1"'10:;::-l ITI:;:O c- "':;:OlDr-iT1 -r-X 0 ." m -J r .f>. ~c: Or -< N ~ ~ ~ r;~ 4.~V'I.,,:c ~~o II > ~ t5 x 0, S3=i 0:;:00 Z S3' c ~oll~~ ~>Ol1'1~:;:O Z ,.. o oz f!l 3:: 0:::1 I:':!:;:o ~zx v ~- 0 ;:a, > ~al~1"'1 Z::o ~. o~.r.> a:ilu; S3 ::c 0 3::.."u; 0 (Xl r > -l Z ~::c 2 _ >:::1 l1'1 ." .-.of oc8 -=.. o <n ~:;:o ZlDOZ 0 m -,I<n ~ ~ ~ II ~~ IIIT1 ~-<aSi?:;o II en ~ ~ ~ ~ITI~ 0 ~ ~ ~c::j::C8 >;<.:9Q g ~ ~ )> <: rlao :xJ G') ::g~cz Go II ::j:;:o z '- Z g~-l r------l ~ 5~::d . l1'1 lD ~ G') " .." > 0 >- I 0 I ;a > <n -l ~ ~ 0 ~ II ~ :;:0 ." :::I~~ Z t51 ~~~:!J I ~ F Ffi5~>!~ ~~~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ c Ri l ~~~fg I : ~ ~~~.;;~ ~rol1'1~ ~ __ " m ~ I r I C (H -l :CITI :;:o:c?' ^ 0 L______J i: ':j;:- ?Q~~~r. 1TIi!l 8 g ~ (H IV (H c: ~ -';:;:Ir" 0 SS (;!z > II I I' _ ." ::0 II II II '.:0- ~ II ~:il .." ^ '!l '!l '!l "'0 ~ 3:: ~.,,3:: la:C-> II r= N IV N :!i i: I!I ~ '-~~~ II lDlTI~~ 0) 0 :!: :!: :!: :;:0 m G) r :c ::c-,lV'lco E2 ~ 0 :E I , , ITI Z OI./)~;1~t5 ~ ~Q~i7~ ~~~~. ~;j '!l '!l '!l ~ ~ ~ ggl"'1ooz O:!i1Tl C 0_ .".w IV N IV l1'1 Ol:r!~~~: b:i!~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ en d o ""-,1 >! II 000 0 ~ :;:: -r ~;:2 F. (;! :r: ~ > ~- c . V'I:E m r c Q ITI> 1"'1 -,I u 'U)' ::I Q C o ':-' VI (H 0J Vi !!l ~ c: ~ ~ ~ ~g ,... G) "'-m )> -l oz~~~t5 1"'1 C 001"'150z ~ 1"'1 1"'1 ~u; O~:;:OOCI"'1 I./) 0 Ol:i!o:;:oZ ~ o OIV :;:: ~ 1"'1 1"'1 lDJ:: Z .... '" -<~ 0 v :::I: 1"'1 I./) )> 00 x 1"'1 ~ I./) Vi 1"'1 ~ 0 -I ::l Z :;:0 > ~N 5 ~ g '"0 81./)0 "U :;:: o-lZ > 0 co I :;:OG')1"'1 0 I./) 1./)-<01 r 1"'1:;:0 :;:: ;!. 1"'1 ~ Z 6 > I iTl ~ I./) V'I F:i " Z ~ ~ <0 1"'1 " ~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ I ~ ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER SHIVE ,HATTERY m is i gjb:ti i ~ ~ tJ (fl EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT Cedar Rapids, lA' low,a City, lA' D~s Moines, IA --L. Cr (J) -() '" tIJ ;u CJ Moline IL ' Bloomington, IL ' Chicago, IL · I - )> s:: , o 0 rn ~)> l:i CJ r s:: CITY OF IOWA CITY SHIVE-HAnERY, INC. 2834 NORTHGATE DRIVE IOWA CiTY, IOWA 52245 " ,,~ r I PHONE (319) 354-3040 FAX (319) 354-6921 I V 1 0 a:; 220 S GILBERT STREET IOWA CITY, IOWA htlp.//www.h...-hotlery.com o ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 10 A.M.. on the 2"d day of May, 2006, or at a later date and/or time as determined by the Director of Public Works or designee, with notice of said later date and/or time to be published as required by law. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately. thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Pro- posals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 16~' day of May, 2006, or at such later time and place as may be scheduled. The Project will involve the following: Removing and replacing all exterior glazing and metal panels in phases. Associated elements such as egress and public entry doors are to be replaced. The project will. include modifications of related HVAC system. A Pre-bid Conference to be held on Tuesday, April 18 at 9 a.m., at the Robert A. Lee Recreation Center, in meeting Room A at 220 South Gilbert Street in Iowa City. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and .specifications prepared by Shive- Hattery, Inc. of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and mainte- nance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days until a contract is awarded, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: August 7, 2006 Completion Date: Completion in phases, refer to summary of work in specifications Liquidated Damages: $100 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks. may be secured at the Office of Iowa City Reprographics of Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $50.00 non-refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Iowa City Reprographics. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom. the bidder intends to subcon- tract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the Contractor shall furnish documentation of all reasonable, good faith efforts to recruit MBE's. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721.. By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Reciprocal Preference Act applies to the contract with respect to bidders who are not Iowa residents. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Pweng/adbids/adbids-rectr.doc 3/06 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 10 A.M. on the 2`~ day of May, 2006, or at a later date and/or time as determined by the Director of Public Works or designee, with notice of said latdr date and/or time to be published as required by~ law. Sealed proposals will be opened immediat ly thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. submitted by fax machine shall not be deem a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. ro- posals will be acted upon by the City Coun it t a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harv II at 7:00 P.M. on the 18~h day of May, 2006, r such ter time and place as may be schedu d. he Project will involve the following emoving and replacing all teri r glazing d metal panels in pha s. ssociated e ents such as egress and public entry doo s are to be replace T e project will inclu odifications of r lat HVAC system. A Pre-bi nference to be eld on Tuesday, April 18 at 9 ., at the be A. Lee Recreation Center, in me Roo A t 220 South Gilbert Street in Iowa Ci . All work is to be ne ' strict compliance with the plans and spe i ions prepared by Shive- Hattery, Inc. of ow City, Iowa, which have heretofore been pp ve by the City Council, and are on file for ub 'c exa ation in the Office of the City Cler . Each pro s shall be co leted on a form furnished a City and must accompanied in a seale nvelope, separate from the one contain the proposal, by a bid nd executed by a c poration authorized to contra as a surety in th State of Iowa, in the sum of 10 of the bid. T bid security shall be made paya a to the EASURER OF THE CITY OF 10 CITY, OWA, and shall be forfeited to the City Iowa City in the event the successful ,bidder f s to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar ys and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring faithful performance of the contract and maint Hance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the' provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days until a contract is awarded, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to ~c.`' corF t c~~ ~ "~'~ ~r ~ i ~, S 1 t~`S W'~S r1-~V~r ~y~1\S~ be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: August 7, 2006 Completion Date: Completion in phases, refer to summary of work in specifications Liquidated Damages: $100 per day The plans, specifications and propos contract documents may be examined at the a of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and ifications and form of proposal blanks may a ecured at the Office of Iowa City Reprograph' s f Iowa City, wa, by bona fide bidders. ~`~~$50.00 non-refundable fee is re fired for each set plans and specifications ro ided to bidders or of r interested persons. i h fee shall be in the fo of a check, madefp able to Iowa City Prospec 'Je bidders are ,~ ised that the City of Iowa City `s,ires toe I y minority contractors and subcont o(ors on mi projects. Bidders shal lint on t e Form of Proposal the names of pers rte, ms, companies or other parties with who bidder intends to subcon- tract. This list shal r}clude the type of work and approximate subc t ct amount(s). The Contractor aw rcied the contract shall submit a list o the F rim of Agreement of the proposed sub tractors, ogether with quantities, unit prices extended bllar amounts. If no minority bu ess enterprise `'(MBE) are utilized, the Contr r shall furnish d ~umentation of all reasonab ,good faith efforts to ruit MBE's. A listin of minority contractors ~n be obtained from a Iowa Department Economic Deve pment at (515) 242-4721. By irtue of statutory authority, prefe ` nce will be gi n to products and provisions grow -.,and coal oduced within the State of Iowa, an ` to.Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully quired under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Reci vocal Preference Act applies to the contract with re ect to bidders who are not Iowa residents. The City reserves. the right to reject any or proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Pwengladbids/adbids-rectr.doc 3/06 ~~ ~~~~~ 11 Prepared by: Kumi Moms, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 06-104 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CON- TRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT, ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS, AND FIXING TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: 1. The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above- named project shall be in the amount of 10% (ten percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Bids for the above-named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, until 10:00 a.m. on the 2"~ day of May, 2006, or at a later date and/or time as determined by the Director of Public Works or designee, with notice of said later date and/or time to be published as required by law. Thereafter the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at 7:00 p.m. on the 16"' day of May, 2006, or at a later date and/or time as determined by the Director of Public Works or designee, with notice of said later date and/or time to be published as required by law, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Passed and approved this 4th day of Aril , 20 06 ~J MAYOR ATTEST: J 9`~ CITY ERK pweng/res/app&s-RecCenterGlazing.doc Approved by 3 ~~G ity Atto ney' Office Resolution No. 06-104 Page 2 It was moved by Bailey and seconded by Champion the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: X Bailey x Champion x Correia x Elliott x O'Donnell ~ Vanderhoef g Wilburn ~. DOCUMENT 00491 ADDENDUM NO. 1 DATE: April 26, 2006 PROJECT NAME: Robert A. Lee Recreation Center -Exterior Glazing and Panel Replacement Project City of Iowa City This Addendum forms a part of the bidding and contract documents. This Addendum supersedes and supplements all portions of the original bidding and contract documents dated March 28, 2006 with which it conflicts. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM IN THE SPACE PROVIDED ON THE BID FORM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY SUBJECT THE BIDDER TO DISQUALIFICATION. N I. BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Q -~_ A. Section 00410 -Bid Form ~~~ ~ =~ ~ ~ rv cap 1. DELETE and REPLACE with the attached revised Bid Form. ~-, -~ ~ ~ _:: II. SPECIFICATIONS ~~ ~ f` ~ ?~ -- A. Section 01230 -Alternates "' 1. ADD the following to pazagraph 1.06: "D. Alternate Bid No. 4 -Provide perforated panels at west elevation office azea. ~--- r E. Alternate Bid No. 5 -Provide coating repairs at post-tension anchorage points in 48 locations in the swimming pool azea. Following removal of existing translucent panel glazing system, remove existing paint system on existing steel anchorage system members located within 12" of interior face of glazing. Provide special coating primer and fmish system on all prepared azeas. F. Alternate Bid No. 6 -Provide structural repairs for roof single-t members. Provide structural brace per supplemental drawings S 1.1 and S 1.2, Addendum No. 1. Following installation, provide special coating finish system on all exposed steel components. Remove and repair existing roofmg system as needed to provide weathertight installation." B. Section 01520 -Construction Facilities ADD the following to pazagraph 1.05: "C. Temporary enclosures shall be constructed to withstand the wind loads for an exterior wall." C. Section 02419 -Selective Structure Demolition ADD the attached new section. 105191-1 00491-1 DOCUMENT 00491 ADDENDUM NO.1 D. Section 05400 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing 1. DELETE this section in its entirety. E. Section 05590 -Formed Metal Fabrications 1. ADD the attached new section. F. Section 07210 -Building Insulation 1. REVISE pazagraph I.OIA to read as follows: "Rigid insulation." 2. In pazagraph 2.01 A, DELETE the words "Perimeter insulation" and REPLACE with "Rigid insulation." 3. In paragraph 2.01 A 1, DELETE the words "Tongue & Grove." 4. REVISE pazagraph 2.02A to read as follows: "Rigid Insulation." G. Section 07260 -Vapor Retarders ~ s N ~.~ ~:n ~ ~ R_~, 1. DELETE this section in its entirety. "~} ~ n -~ ~ N ~l -~ ~ ~ H. Section 07410 -Metal Wall Panels ; ~ ;-~-~ ~,~ DELETE this section in its entirety. 1 ~~ ~ '~ `.° . Y - I. Section 08411 -Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts `~ 1. REVISE paragraph 1.02B1 to read as follows: "Wind Loads: Design for 90 mph wind load." J. Section 08520 -Aluminum Windows 1. REVISE paragraph 1.OSD to read as follows: "Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of this section and who is acceptable to manufacturer." 2. ADD the following to paragraph 2.02: "H. Break Aluminum Enclosures: 1/8" aluminum plate bent to shape as shown on the Drawings. Finish as specified for aluminum window framing." 105191-1 00491-2 DOCUMENT 00491 ADDENDUM NO. 1 K. Section 08710 -Hardware 1. ADD the following hardware set: "SET # 13 4 Hinges TA2314 4 %s x 4 '/z US32D MC 1 Entrance Mortise Lock Body 8556 US26D Accurate 1 Set Working Trim LNL Design US26D SA 1 Cylinder 41 US26D SA 1 Closer 351-0 SRI AL SA 1 Mounting Plate 351-A SRI AL SA 1 Wall Bumper 1270WX US32D SA 1 Sweep 18041 CNB 36" TEK PE Perimeter weatherstrip furnished by aluminum frame supplier." L. Section 08911 -Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 1. REVISE paragraph 1.2B1 to read as follows: "Wind Loads: Design for 90 mph wind load." 2. DELETE paragraph 1.6B in its entirety. 3. REVISE pazagraph 2.2G to read as follows: "Thermal Barrier: Thermal sepazator shall be extruded of a silicone compatible elastomer that provides for silicone adhesion." 4. DELETE pazagraph 2.4 in its entirety. 5. REVISE paragraph 2.SA to read as follows: "Venting Windows: Basis of Design - Kawneer 1600 Glassvent or equivalent by other approved manufacturer." 6. ADD the following to paragraph 2.6: "C. Break Aluminum Enclosures: 1/8" aluminum plate bent to shape as shown on the Drawings. Finish as specified for aluminum curtain wall framing." N_ 0 M. Section 09670 -Epoxy Flooring System ~ n x ~~ -„ 1. ADD the attached new section. C7 ~ rv ~C7 ca ~r `~~ ~~ III. DRAWINGS ...~ :'-' -.~, r-t A. Sheet A1.01 -Floor Plan & Enlarged Plans ~ ~ ~'? J 1. ADD the following note: "14. Provide resin floor patch full width of openings for windows or doors. Extend from edge of existing floor finish to face of new curtain wall framing." 105191-1 00491-3 DOCUMENT 00491 ADDENDUM NO. 1 2. ADD the following note to Door I 1 on Area E plan: "Paint existing door and frame." 3. ADD the following note to C/Al .O1 Area C First Floor -Social Hall: "Remove existing sheet metal bulkhead below bottom of existing concrete tees the entire width of new curtain wall and over storage room south of new curtain wall." 4. ADD the following note to F/A1.01 Area F -Balcony over Pool Area: "Remove sheet metal bulkhead on west wall from northwest corner to outside of new curtain wall. Cap exposed end of sheet metal bulkhead to remain." B. Sheet A2.01 -Exterior Elevations and Door Schedule DELETE the new angle located on the west elevation (1/A2.02). Provide under Alternate Bid #4 performed aluminum panels as shown on attached supplemental drawings ADD-OI-A4, ADD-01-A5, ADD-01-A6, and ADD-0l -A7. C. Sheet A2.02 -Glazing Elevations REVISE size of perforated aluminum panel sign on elevation C1/A2.02 per attached supplemental drawing ADD-OI-A 1. 2. REVISE size and location of perforated aluminum panel sign on elevation C3/A2.02 per attached supplemental drawing ADD-OI-A2. 3. REVISE size of perforated aluminum panel sign on elevation D2/A2.02 per attached supplemental drawing ADD-01-A3. 4. ADD the following note to Window Type A5.1: "Verify dimensioned shif~Sertical framing to route around pipes at window jambs. Provide metal trim enclosura:e~~p aru~sides of window. Refer to detail CS/A5.01." ~' ~ %_~ - ~ ~ -.~ tU .ff._.~ =.~a ~ ~] tr D. Sheet A5.04 -Details „< ~1 ,~ ! i1 1. REVISE details BI/A5.04, D1/A5.04, and A2/A5.04 per attached sut~~en~bdrawmgs ADD-01-A5, ADD-0l -A6, and ADD-O 1-A7, respectively. y -- -r E. Sheet M1.01 -Mechanical Plans 1. ADD the following note to the Pool Filter Room in Ground Floor Key Plan: "Extend 90x24, 42x26, and 44x26 ducts connected to existing louver approximately 6" to connect to new louver." 2. ADD the following note to the Receiving Room in Ground Floor Key Plan: "New exhaust fan EF-3. Refer to Sheet A2.01 for louver location and elevation." ADD the following note to the Chlorine Room in Ground Floor Key Plan: "New exhaust fan EF-4. Refer to Sheet A2.01 for louver location and elevation." 105191-1 00491-4 DOCUMENT 00491 ADDENDUM NO.1 4. REVISE the elevation reference note on enlarged plan D to read: "Refer to elevation on Sheet M 1.02." F. Sheet M1.02 -Mechanical Schedules, Details, and Enlarged Plan 1. ADD EF-3 and EF-4 to the Fan Schedule. See the attached supplemental drawing ADD-O1- Ml. 2. ADD the details as shown per the attached supplemental drawing ADD-OI-M2. G. Sheet E 1.01 -Electrical Plans 1. REVISE per the attached supplemental drawing ADD-01-E1. H. Sheet E1.02 -Electrical Photos and Schedules 1. REVISE per the attached supplemental drawings ADD-Ol-E2 and ADD-OI-E3. Prepared By: Shive-Hattery,`Inc~. ~ ~' I• - Douglas J. DuCharme, AIA License No. 5003 My Registration Expires: 06/30/06 END OF DOCUMENT 00491 N c; :'7 c~a J .~ ^ c~+ ~ -•~ C 1 ~ C^" ~ ~-- ~ ~~- ITl C,_? . ,-~ ---- ,.~ a D -- 105191-1 00491-5 DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM _ O ~~ 4 ~_ ~ ,>~ PROJECT: Robert A. Lee Recreation Center ~ -~: N _ _ Exterior Glazing and Panel Replacement Project ~ i ~--? ~ !- ~Y City of Iowa City `y` Ci of Iowa City ~ ~ ? ~ u BID TO: ty Civic Center ~' _ -J 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, IA 52240 BID FROM: (Legal Name) NOTE: Submit one original and one copy of this Bid Form. All blanks shall be completed. Only bids on this form will be accepted. Submit Bid Security, if required, in sepazate envelope. Bidder shall cazefully review the Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders prior to completing this form. 1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perfonm and famish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid Price and within the schedule indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement for Bids and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 30 days after the day of Bid opening. 2. If a Notice to Proceed or if a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the 30-day period, the undersigned will, within ten days of such receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award and will execute and deliver the Agreement, the Performance, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, the certificate of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before the date indicated in the Advertisement for Bids. 3. The undersigned Bidder submits, herewith, bid security in accordance with the terms set forth in the Advertisement for Bids. 4. The Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged: Date Number 5. BIDDER has visited the site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. 6. BIDDER is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. 105191-1 00410-1 DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM BIDDER will commence on-site construction work at Phase 1 days in advance of August 6, 2006. 8. BIDDER will complete the Work in accordance with the Bidding Documents as follows: BASE BID: TOTAL PRICE 1. All work indicated in the Bidding Documents $ 2. Contingency Allowance $25,000 TOTAL BASE BID $ (sum of Items 1 - 2) TOTAL BASE BID (sum of Items 1 - 2) in words: Amount shall be indicated in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount indicated in words shall govern. ALTERNATE BIDS: Bidder agrees to perform all the work for each Alternate as described in the proposed Contract Documents. Amount shall be indicated in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount indicated in words shall govern. ALTERNATE NO. 1: Provide Area F (balcony) enclosure as identified in the Contract Documents. ADD the Sum of DOLLARS ($ 0 .-_~ C'7 ALTERNATE N0.2: Integrate fin tube controls in meeting rooms with existing digitalE~con~rol s~lstem-n C': ~-; ~ ~".- ADD the Sum of: ~ ~ m ;-'("~ ~.~ =~ O } .. Y .~ ~ DOLLARS ($ 105191-1 00410-2 DOCUMENT 004 ] 0 BID FORM ALTERNATE NO. 3: Provide a variable speed drive, related controls at the existing pool exhaust fan. ADD the Sum of: DOLLARS ($ ) ALTERNATE N0.4: Provide perforated panels at west elevation office area. ADD the Sum of: DOLLARS ($ ) ALTERNATE NO. 5: Provide coating repairs at post-tension anchorage points. ADD the Sum of: N DOLLARS ($ ~ ~~ - ~y ~. ~` ~ N ~ ALTERNATE N0.6: Provide structural repairs for roof single-t members. ~ `1 c~ i~" .~ ~^=, .~ ADD the Sum of: ~ j ~'~ 4~ ~~ DOLLARS ($ Required Base Bid quantities of the item listed below can be determined from the Bidding Documents. If adjustments in the quantities occur, per Owner's Representative direction, the Contract Price shall be adjusted by Change Order on the basis of the following: Item Name in Unit for Adjustment Price Specifications Adjustment Per Unit Coating repair at post-tensioned Per end of precast `T' anchorage points (2 locations) Adjustment prices are subject to acceptance by OWNER, and rejection of one or more adjustment prices will not invalidate acceptance of this entire Bid or any portion thereof. 105191-1 0041.0-3 DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM 9. This Bid is submitted on , 2006. 10. State Contractor License No. 11. BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the times specified in the Agreement. The parties hereto expressly stipulate and agree that time is of the essence of this contract. In the event that the work and the fmal completion items as stated in the Supplementary Conditions aze not completed within the time herein before stipulated, or within such extension of time as may be granted as provided in accordance with the General Conditions, it is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall pay to the Owner as agreed as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, $100.00 for each day which may elapse between the date as herein provided and the date of actual completion of the work, said sum being expressly agreed upon as a measure of damage to the Owner by reason of delay, and it is further expressly agreed that to estimate the actual damages sustained by the Owner in such event would be impractical and difficult, and the Contractor agrees and consents that the amount of all such liquidated damages may be deducted and retained by the Owner from any monies then due or thereafter becoming due to the Contractor. 12. Bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, without collusion or in connection with any other person, organization or corporation bidding on the work. Bidder certifies that this proposal is made in conformance with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between the conditions of the bidder's proposal and the Contract Documents prepazed by Architect/Engineer, the provisions of the latter shall prevail. 13. The following documents aze attached to and made a condition of this Bid: a. Required Bid Security in the amount often percent and in the form of a bid bond from a corporate surety satisfactory to the Owner SUBMITTED IN A SEPARATE ENVELOPE. 14. The bidder shall not make any revisions to the bid forms or the Schedule of Bid Prices and shall not devise any alternates other than those provided. Any such notes, revisions, or comments shall be grounds for rejection of the bid as not being responsive. 15. The bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids, waive irregularities or technicalities in any bid, and accept any bid which meets the requirements of the bid documents. 16. The undersigned bidder certifies that a) the bidder's detailed examination of the drawings and specifications has turned up no ambiguities which need clazification, b) only authorized data have been used to arrive at the bidder's bid figure, and c) the experience and capabilities of the bidder's firm, the bidder's workmen and the bidder's subcontractors are particularly well-suited to the construction of this type of project. 17. Complete the applicable item(s) listed below. If this Bid is submitted by an agent of BIDDER, attach a current Power-of-Attorney certifying the agent's authority to bind the BIDDER. O <~ ~ ~_> _ v; -~~, = .-.. (.~ ..'`~ ;,7 .''1 .- ~~`~ ~ ~~.~ ~i 105191-1 ~,~ ,..~ ~ ? 1-~ 00410-4 j~ `? v DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM If BIDDER is: An Individual By (Signature oflndividual) Doing Business As Business Address Phone No. A Partnership By (Signature of General Partner) Business Address - o ~._~ ~.. ~~-~~ Phone No. c. n ~-~ - - ~ ~ ~.,~ -~.. ---~ C) N CX~ _.....- ~-~. A Corporation ; ~ f- ;~ {~ J"~ ?~ ti By _ _ ~ . „ (Corporation Name) `y;, State of Incorporation "'~ By (Signature of Person Authorized to Sign) (Typed or Printed Name and Title) Attest Business Address (Firm Name) (Secretary) Phone No. END OF DOCUMENT 00410 (Typed or Printed Name) (Typed or Printed Name) 105191-1 00410-5 SECTION 02419 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.O1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Demolition and removal of selected portions of building. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. 6. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. B. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. _ ~ t.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE O ~~, A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced fine that has specialized in demo ; ~ , ort~~similar 'n material and extent to that. indicated for this Project. ~-,, -~ ~ -- c~ ~~ i___.. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. = ~ ~T S,• ~' I~- -~ ~~ -~- .. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS `~ ~ ~ `~' A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to areas where demolition occuts! Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. I . Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section "Summary." 1O5I91-1 02419-1 SECTION 02419 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Due to storm damage on the south elevation of a natatorium, the upper portions of the glazed area have been replaced with plywood over wood studs. The lower portion of the wall is plywood panels inserted into the existing glazing frames. This work is by others. 2. Plywood may be reused in temporary enclosures required in this construction project. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. ~; O Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition opera~~ 1 _u ^; . ~ - ; ,--, PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) r~ ~" co f-' ~~ -T1 PART 3 -EXECUTION ~ -4- % 3.01 EXAMINATION y - A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in fmal Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 105191-1 02419-2 SECTION 02419 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 3.02 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division O] Section "Summary." B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Building manager will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. N a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be re>~ved wigremoval of ti the wall. :;.~ C7 :~- 3.03 PREPARATION C-`` ~ rv ~ j ,~ cry ~' A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-remova~ 6~erati~ns t~ure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occup~e~,~~d us`~e~d fac~ili~les. ] . Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division O 1 S~tion "T~porary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division O1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 105191-1 02419-3 SECTION 02419 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 3.04 A B C SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Vdork within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 5. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 6. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. r 7. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. ~. C7 ~.,, _~. ! Y' -~ Removed and Salvaged Items: -% _ rl N `~ ~ ~ r~ l . Clean salvaged items. rn ~, ~ 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. ~ -;~ =- ~i 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. _~. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site. D 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. ~"'~ Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functiona! for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 105191-1 02419-4 SECTION 02419 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 3.05 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division O1 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02419 o w c; ? ~ ~n ~~ ~ ~' ~...~ ~ ~. ~ < r-.~ ~ . _-_' N - _ i ~"'~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ (i ~j ~. i~ .,o ~ - 105191-1 02419-5 SECTION 05590 FORMED METAL FABRICATIONS PART] GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Perforated aluminum panels with and without letter cutouts. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for review showing elevations, bending locations, letter cutouts attachment locations, and attachment details. B. Samples: 1. Provide "SWIM" panel as a sample. 2. Approved sample panel may be installed in final location. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver to site and store in a manner to prevent damage during handling and storage. B. Keep materials dry and dirt free. ~ ~`~ N ' PART 2 `J PRODUCTS Y~_ ~ 01 2 Z> _`~ f. J MATERIALS -< . ~~ ~ S 1 1 A. n 0.125 mill fmish aluminum. ~- ; ~• ,._~ " B. ''~ 3/16" diameter holes on 5/16" staggered centers for panels.' ?> - C. Unperforated 3"x3"xl/8" plates for connections. D. '/4" mill fmish aluminum and stainless steel connection plates as noted on the Drawings. E. '/z' stainless steel bolts and washers. F. 1/16" neoprene pads. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Panels shall be as fabricated by ASI Custom Sheet Metal, 315 West Cherry Street, North Liberty, Iowa 52317. Phone 319-626-3880; contact Emily Linden. B. Fabricate as detailed on the Drawings. C. Where shown on Drawing, cut letters in perforated panels to size and shape shown. PART 3 EXECUTION' 105191-1 OS 590-1 SECTION 05590 FORMED METAL FABRICATIONS 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Field verify all conditions prior to fabrication. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all support brackets plumb and level. B. Weld stainless steel bent plates to steel columns as indicated on the Drawings. C. Bolt bent aluminum plates to support brackets as shown on the Drawings. D. Bolt perforated panels to support plates. Provide neoprene pad between panel and plate on both sides of panel. E. Exposed square plate on exterior shall be installed plumb. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean panel after installation. END OF SECTION 05590 N ~ ~_ ~ .. ~~ zti r .~ (-'~ _ ~. (`- ~ ~ ~ N ---1 ;-~ :-=- ~-~ 1 , ;~~, i "'~ J ~. s~ ~ lIJ D - c~ 105191-1 05590-2 SECTION 09670 EPOXY FLOORING SYSTEM PART1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Furnish necessary material, labor, and equipment required to prepare designated areas and install a 1/8" Decorative SlurryBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications Obtain 1/8" Decorative S1urryBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System materials from a single manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years verifiable experience providing materials of the type specified in this section. B. Contractor's Qualifications 1. Installation must be performed by a manufacturer certified Contractor with skilled mechanics having not less than three (3) years satisfactory experience in the installation of the type of system as specified in this section, and must be certified in writing by the manufacturer of the 1/8" Decorative S1unyBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System. 1.03 WARRANTY A. The Contractor and the manufacturer shall furnish a standard guarantee of the l/8" Decorative S1urryBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System for a period of one year after installation. The labor and material guarantee shall include loss of bond and wear-through to the concrete substrate from normal use. B. Not included in the warranty are damage due to structural design deficiencies including but not limited to slab cracking from lateral, vertical or rotational movement, and gouging or other damage due to fork lifts, other equipment, delamination caused by vapor transmission, Acts of God, or other elements beyond the scope of protection of this system nor causes not related to the system materials. C. In case of a warranty claim, the owner will notify the manufacturer and Contractor in writing within 30 days of the first appearance of problems covered under this warranty. The owner will provide free and unencumbered access to the area during normal working hours for warranty rework. Property protection is also the owner's responsibility. Remedy is limited to direct repair of the 1/8" Decorative SlunyBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System. ~~ o C~ 1.04 SUBMITTALS ~ ~ ~' _ ~ ~ A. See Section 01330 for additional submittal requirements. ~ ~ ~ ;~` ~~_ B. System Data ` `' ~ ~ .~-, ~ ~ ~~ D -- ao 105191-1 09670-1 SECTION 09670 EPOXY FLOORING SYSTEM I . Submit manufacturer's specifications on cured system and individual components of the 1/8" Decorative SlunryBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System, including physical properties and performance properties and tests described in part 2.02B. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets. 3. Manufacturer's standard color chart. 1.05 MATERIAL DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Provide equipment and personnel to handle the materials by methods which prevent damage. B. The Contractor shall promptly inspect direct jobsite material deliveries to assure that quantities are correct, comply with requirements and are not damaged. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for materials furnished by him, and he shall replace, at his own expense, such materials that are found to be defective in manufacturer that hie become damaged in transit, handling or storage. ~ ~ ~ T M.~ --~ D. Store material(s) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals apd gels act ~ and legible. Maintain temperatures within the required range. Do not use mate~~ whim ~~~ exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended shelf life. ' `' r ; :r,. I ~ t- ~~ ~~ 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS D `•~ A. The Contractor shall visit the jobsite prior to the installation of the 1/8" Decorative Sl ~rryBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System to evaluate substrate condition, including substrate moisture transmission, quantity and severity of cracking, and the extent of repairs needed. Substrate imperfections should be repaired only after mechanical preparation of the substrate. Surface preparation reveals most imperfections requiring repair. Concrete substrates shall be tested to verify that the moisture vapor transmission of the substrate does not exceed the 1/8" Decorative S1unyBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System manufacturers' recommendations. Cost associated with repair, leveling and remediation of the substrate are the responsibility of the provider of the substrate. B. The Contractor should exercise care during surface preparation and system installation to protect surrounding substrates and surfaces, as well as in-place equipment. The Contractor shall prepare the substrate to remove laitance and open the surface. This shall be achieved by light brush grit blasting. Surface profile achieved shall be similar to medium grit sandpaper and free from bond-inhibiting contaminants. C. System must be protected by the General Contractor or, as a separate bid item, by the installing Contractor until it is inspected and turned over to the owner. D. The minimum slab temperature must be conditioned to 60 degrees F before commencing installation, during installation, and for at least 72 hours after installation is complete. The substrate temperature must be at least 5 degrees F above the dew point during installation. E. Maintain lighting at a minimum uniform level of 50 or more foot candles in areas where the 1/8" Epoxy Flooring System is being installed. It is the recommendation of the manufacturer that the permanent lighting be in place and working during the installation. 105191-1 09670-2 SECTION 09670 EPOXY FLOORING SYSTEM PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: General Polymers Ceramic Carpet #425 2.02 MATERIALS A. System Overview The 1/8" Decorative Slurry/Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System consists of 3579 Standard Primer /Binder as the primer, 3561 Epoxy Resin Glaze as the binder resin, 5350 Trafficote Filler, 5900F ESTES Colored Quartz Aggregate, and 3744 High Performance CR Epoxy as the grout. Select seal coat to match existing: 3744 High Performance CR Epoxy 4618/5555 Hi-Solids Polyurethane Enamel with Flattening Agent 3594S Epoxy Satin Coating 4685 POLY-COTE 100% Solids Urethane B. Typical Physical Properties Color Hardness @ 24 hours Shore D ASTM D 2240 Compressive strength ASTM C 579 Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 ASTM D 638 Abrasion Resistance ASTM D 4060, CS-17 Wheel, 1,000 cycles Flexural Strength ASTM C 580 ASTM D 790 Adhesion ACI 503R Flammability Resistance Elevated Temperatures MIL-D-3134) ASTM C =Mortar system ASTM D =Resin only Pre-Blended Standard Colors Custom Color Blends Available 70/65 11,000 psi 2,500 psi 6,000 psi 70-90 milligrams lost 4,500 psi 10,000 psi 0 t C~ =~' -=-1 ,,-~ -~ ~, ~` N t .~ N ao a 350 psi 100% concrete failure Self-extinguishing over concrete No slip or flow at required temperature of 158°F 105191-1 09670-3 TI ~:~ iTl SECTION 09670 EPOXY' FLOORING SYSTEM PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Cut edge of existing epoxy flooring to create straight clean edge. B. Prepare surface as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General Apply each component of the 1/8" Decorative S1urryBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System in compliance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and strictly adhere to mixing and installation methods, recoat windows, cure times and environmental restrictions. The 1/8" Decorative S1unyBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System is to be installed directly over non- moving control joints and cracks which have been treated with EPO-FLEX epoxy, and the 1/8" Decorative S1urryBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System will terminate at the edge of isolation and expansion joints as designated by the Architect, Engineer or Design Professional. Integral cove base shall be installed where specified in the drawings. B. Cracks 1. After preparation, evaluation of quantity and severity of cracks in concrete will determine the needed repairs. For information pertaining to the treatment of cracks in concrete substrates, see manufacturer's instructions. C. Isolation/Expansion and Other Joints Subject to Movement All expansion joints must be honored through the flooring system. For information pertaining to the above, consult Manufacturer's publication, Concrete 105. D. System Primer 1. 3579 Standard Primer /Binder E. SlunryBroadcast ~ N -~ ~. ?! ~ -~ 1. 3561 Epoxy Resin Glaze ~ ~ N `n 2. 5350 Trafficote Filler ~{ ~ cn ~-° 3. 5900F ESTES Colored Quartz Aggregate ~ r___ ~ (~ ;-, ~~ ` ' ~ r A ~ F. Grout Coat ~ i~ ~? D 1. 3744 High Performance CR Epoxy °0 105191-1 09670-4 SECTION 09670 EPOXY FLOORING SYSTEM 3.03 G. Select Seal Coat to match existing 1. 3744 High Performance CR Epoxy 2. 4618/5555 Hi-Solids Polyurethane Enamel with Flattening gent 3. 3594S Epoxy Satin Coating 4. 4685 POLY-COTE 100% Solids Urethane CURING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cure the 1/8" Decorative SlurryBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System materials in compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent contamination during stages of the installation and prior to completion of the curing process. B. Protect the 1/8" Decorative S1urryBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System from damage and wear during other phases of the construction operation, using temporary coverings as recommended by the manufacturer, if required. Remove temporary covering just prior to final inspection. C. Clean the 1/8" Decorative SlurryBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System just prior to final inspection, using materials and procedures suitable to the system manufacturer. D. Some cleaners will affect the color, gloss or texture of your polymer floor surfaces. To determine how your cleaner will perform, first test each cleaner, in a small area, utilizing your cleaning technique. This precaution will demonstrate the effect of your cleaner and technique. If no deleterious effects are observed, continue with the procedure. If deleterious effects do occur, modify the cleaning material and/or procedure. For recommendations regarding types of cleaners, contact the 1/8" Decorative S1unyBroadcast Epoxy Flooring System manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09670 N C::? o c~ ~- ~~ ~; ~ -~ N --~ ~-_ !~ ti ~ ~~ 1> ca 105191-1 09670-5 z 1 .~ ~ .. 0 .. ~ ~' E ~ ~- ;o ~~ ~~ N ~ ~ _ <t J `~ ~~ . Q ~~ -~ ,~ 0 ~. ~„ ;~ 3 J 'J I i ~ _ ~ C7 u m o .a ~i _a ~, o -Y _-~- ~}~ I ~ NEW PANEL TIES (5) ~ i ~~ ~II II ' ~~ ~~ I I 1 ~ ~ REPAIR DELAMINATED ~ ~ ~( S1 2 I I CONCRETE AT WELD TIE q II III II (2) PER DETAIL 2/S1.2 ~n ~~ ~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~ ~~ ~~~ ~~ 2 ~~ ~~~ ~~ S1.2 ~ I ~ ~ ~~ ~ 8'-0" WIOE, 36" STEM ~ ~ I (~ ~ ~ PRECAST CONCRETE o ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ SINGLE TEES ~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~~ III I I COLUMN BELOW TO BE REMOVED IN WINDOW II III II REPLACEMENT PROJECT - II III II REPAIR DELAMINATED CONCRETE AT COLUMN II III II CONNECTION TO TEE WEB I ~ II III III I I II SIMILAR TO 2/S1.2 II III II II III II ~` ~' ~ 2s o II III II `v ~ ~'' i f I I I I ~, __ ~ .~ i~ ~: -~ [ i EXTERIOR WALLS ~--~ ~ `~.~ S ~ D ~. PA RTIAL R OOF ao PLAN N ~ SHIVE ~HATTERY Cedar Rapids, IA ~ Iowa City, IA ~ Des Moines, IA • Moline, IL ~ Bloomington, IL ~ Chicago, IL ROBERT A LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT IowA clrv, IowA DATE 4-2E-OE SCALE D~A`,Vh KLH ~IEU_ ECOK G••PPRC'';EC; ~C6 RE'+'iSiC%^d PROJECT NO. 105191- 0 i~SUECi FGY ADD-01 S1.1 ,~- ss R 1/2"x12"x1'-o" 4-80LT PATTERN 9" SQUARE JJ 'L ; ~ L , v PAINT AS PER SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXPOSED METALS PANEL TIE SECTION C5 THUS T C i J J J ~~ ~o 0 ~ ~' . c ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~~ ~ N 7 ~ ~o ~~ .a _~ - c~ ~o = N J 'n ~~ 3 ~ j c ~ r- _ ;n - o j ~~ ~~ ~~ o - ~; Y E ~: c y __ IO N W G I G O O " ~ ~ r LATION OF FOLLOWING NSTA ROOF G LATION AND PAIR NSU RE j PANEL TIES. ` ~ f•~"1'1'~ s" ~ rn /''~ ..J.. /~ ) ti./ S / ~ 1. EXISTING WELD BAR ~-,~ ?~' ~ ANCHOR ROD ~ r- REMOVE LOOSE CONCRETE ~ a ~ a J/ // O O G ~` ~-- ~" ANGLE x 0'-6" REPAIR MATERIAL EMACO S88C1. APPLY BOND COAT TO SUBSTRATE AS PER SAWCUT AROUND 1/8 MANUFACTURER'S SPALL PERIMETER P.ECOMMENDATIONS FINISH PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING WELD TIE REPAIR 3"=1'-0" SHNE ~HATTERY Cedar Rapids, IA ~ Iowa City, IA ~ Des Moines, IA Moline, IL ~ Bloomington, IL ~ Chicago, IL h t tp; ,! i w:vv='. shJve-~! ~1t t Er'`r. COm ROBERT A LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT IowA clrv, IowA D%: ~E 4-t6- Oo ' SCNLE FRFRO`.'ED 5~6 ; R=\'ISOt` F'EFEREM1S;[ DRF.1*;NG PROJEC? N0 105191-0 ISSUED FGR ADD-01 S1.2 30'-8" -6" 6'-6" 6'-6" 3'-5' W/ EXTENDED EXTERIOR COVER 5 0 OD O N (D O 0 N 0 a 0 3 0 N O - N Q~Q 3 I O ~ ~~ ~o X. I n ~ W ~ O ~ / I ~ ~' V x .~, 0 N ~ N d d a~ U c ~ a~ .r ~ 3 ~, X_ -..-.~~ - IG1 ~ 1 'V W IGl ALUMINUM LOU VE R .............. O ~I -1 G ~~ i`'7 ~ ~I I # O - - I} = wi.~a.wcww•.vw.wiw~:.wc~w• '~~~'~~.~~ .w~rnx•.weww.MV.wi.•.w.•~w•w~•.w~.wiwr. ~rvw~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --- ~~ _-_-------_-~f :r--~_-- ~---_----- T-lU" CAP EXPOSED BOTTOM OF L CURTAINWALL SUPPLIER PROVIDE CURTAINWALL MFR'S EXTENDED CURTAINWALL STANDARD SUNSCREEN ATTACHMENT BRACKET TO ATTACH D3 COVERS (TYP) PERFORATED METAL SIGN TO CURTAINWALL, PLATES AND 5.0 BOLTS FOR ATTACHMENT OF PERFORATED METAL SIGN TO BRACKET BY SIGN MFR, SEE DETAIL B2/A5.04 WINDOW TYPE CPARTIAL~ } ;~ ~ ^~ ~ N ~ ~7 ~ ~1 ~ -~ `~~ D ~ ROBERT A LEE RECREATION CENTER PROJECT NO. EXTERIOR dLAZINQ AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT 105191-0 u SHIVE ~HATTERY 2bw Cm5 O LEA DATE 3- O6 C A ISSUED FOR Cedsr & IA ` IOWS Cny, IA ~ Dee MOI/166, IA DRAWN GLW FIELD BOOK ADD-01 MONne, IL ` BiloominOton, IL ` Chicago; ~ APPROVE http://www.shive-hattery.com REFERENC C GlW REVISION E DRAWING CI/A2.0 2 Al A4 {Gt 15.0 IGt PICAL CURTAINWALL MFR'S STANDARDESUNSCREE dd o i ili ~. E cn 0 0 N N d- 0 0 3 0 N 0 -N ,Q I 0 rn 3 0 I 0 U .2~, 0 a d s 3 rn of N M M 0 W 1 ~4" E.J. " vY'~ PERFORATED METAL SIGN TO CURTAINWAL PLATES AND BOLTS FOR ATTACHMENT OF t /4" E.J. IG1 1 /4" E.J. PERFORATED METAL SIGN TO BRACKET Bl ._ ............................................................................ _ - ::~::<. SIGN MFR, SEE DETAIL B2/A5.04 IG1 6" ALUMINUM CURTAINWALL W. '-'' --' ~~ EXTENDED EXTERIOR COVER ~--~ _~ rv --- 1 /4" E.J. ...~ ~°= rn r't 1 ~ IG2 ~ ~ ~D O D r 64 IG2T A5.0 O IG2T IG2T CAP EXPOSED BOTTOM OF EXTENDED CURTAINWALL CAPS (TYP) C3 WINDOW TYPE CPARTIAL~ 3/8"=t ~-0" SHIVE ~HATTERY Cedar RaPlds, IA ~ Iowa Clty, IA ~ G?es Moines, IA Moyne, IL ~ Btoorr~nptor~ IL ~ Chicago, IL http: //www.shive-hattery.com ROBERT A LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZINB AND PANEL REPUICEMENT PROJECT IOWA CriY, IOWA PROJECT N0. 105191-0 DATE 3-25-06 SCALE ISSUED FOR DRAWN GLW FIELD BOOK ADD-QI APPROVED GLW REVISION REFERENCE DRAWING C3/A2.02 /q2 IGt IGt IGt IGl IG1 s'-r ~'-~ t/2' , , Y s'-a' IG1~ _~ I ,~,~, M IG1 IG2T 1'-7 IG1 IGt IG1 w IG1 L CURTAINWALL SUPPLIER PROVIDE ® CURTAINWALL MFR'S STANDARD SUNSCREEN ATTACHMENT BRACKE 0 p~D ATTACH PERFORATED METAL SIGN CURTAINWALL, PLATES AND BOLTS FOR ATTACHMENT OF PERFORATED METAL SIGN TO BRACKET BY SIGN MFR, SEE DETAIL 62/A5.04 IG2T ~ IG2T dd 0 ;; At E 5.0 i- co 0 0 N '~ O V N p C.~ LJ f" ~ ~ ~T` ?~, o y_ ~ 3 ~ N o ~ WINDOW TYPE CPARTIAI ---j : ~ =~ ~; C>D ~. E '~ -N Q . ~ ' _ _ D i CA O O c"J.> ROBERT A LEE RECREATION CENTER PROJECT N0. a~ 'o EXTERIOR C3LAZq~G AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT 105191-0 j 7T T'~ u IOWA CITY, ~YVA ATTERY s~ ~ 6 a. 1 ~ ,~. ii GATE 3-25-0 SCALE ISSUED FOR Cedar Rapids, IA `Iowa City, IA ~ Des Moines, fA DRAWN GLW FIELD BOOK ADC)-01 3 MOHne, IL ` BI001RIRQtOt~ IL ~ Chbapo, It_ APPP.OVED GLW REVISION o+ http: //www.shive-hattery.com REFERENCE DRAWING D2/A2.02 A3 D 'v 0 0 N O N o LLi 0 d' O _tn ~~ O a+ 3 I ° WEST U1 ~ 3~ m ~ ~-~» O U .~. 0 SHIVE ~ ATTERY ,~ Cedar Rapids, IA ~ Iowa Cily, IA ~ Des Moines, IA 3 Moline, IL ~ Bloomington, IL ~ Chicago, IL b+ http: //www.shive-hattery.com tt A2 M 5.0 N 'ALL HEAD ~-- EXISTING STRUCTURE ~~ REMOVE EXI rn CMU SCREEIN~ ~"' INFlLL ~ ~ "('~ ':1 N m y. iT1 ~^? ~ ~~ D EXISTING STEEL COLUMN TO REMAIN- SANDBLAST AND REPAINT SEE NOTES DETAIL A2/A5.04 R08ERT A LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL. REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA PROJECT NO. 105191-0 DATE 3-25-06 SCALE ISSUED FOR DRAWN GLW FIELD BOOK ADD-01 APPROVED GLW REVISION REFERENCE DRAWING B1/A5.04 ~~ SEE NOTES DETAIL A2/A5.04 REMOVE EXISTING "" CMU SCREEN WALL INFILL EXISTING COLUMN TO REMAIN- SANDBLAST AND REPAINT N M '~ I" ~ ADD 1 ll) a` 0 N O (V O ~' F" _ { / Q D ~' ~ ra rn ° C7 "yj '~ v' ''''(~~ ~ 1 1 ~~~ . Y ~ CA 1 I ~ , ~ y ~j 1 1 t ~ ry ~+yl { } / _ } W y ~ O _~ ~¢ I U O+ 3 ° WEST SCREENWALL SILL I 0 ~ ROBERT A LEE RECREATION CENTER PROJECT ND. .o EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROTECT 105191-0 IOWA CITY, IOWA ATTERY ' ~ SH UED FOR ~- iZ j ~ j;~ GATE 3-25-06 SCALE ISS ~ C~Sf ~~ IA ~ 1o1MH City, IA ~ Gles MOi<1A6, IA DRAWN GLW FIELD BOOK ADD-O1 L MOAne, IL ~ BIOOniblQt0~1, IL ` C+I1IC8fl0. It_ APPROVED GLW REVISION 3 v+ http://www.shive-hottery.com REFER'cNCE DRAWING Dt/A5.04 EXISTING ANGLE TO REMAIN- SANDBLAST AND REPAINT N O O v+ n A D ~ --n ~ r7 ~ ,--- f ` n (~1 ?~ ~ { Y ~ EXISTING 5TE1=L COLUMN - SANDBLAST AND REPAINT EXISTING STEEL ANGLE NEAR BOTTOM OF COLUMN - SANDBLAST AND REPAINT REMOVE EXISTING CMU SCREENWALI INFILL M 0 a~ E co 0 0 N N 0 4; ~- a 0 3 0 0 - iri ,¢ I 0 3 O O .~ a a L 3 v+ ADD 1/4" X 3" STAINLESS STEEL STRAP PAINT WITH COLOR OF EXISTING STEEL COLUMN - NADTH OF COLUMI ONLY 3" X 3" X 1/16" NEOPRENE PAD 1/8" PERFORATED ALUMINUM P 3" X 3" X 1/4" STAINLESS STEEL PLATE 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL BOLT _ ._ _IVIDE PERFORATED ALUMINUM PANEL AND CONNECTION TO EXISTING STEEL COLUMN UNDER ALTERNATE #4 WEST SCREENWALL COLUMN -PLAN 3' = 1'-0" R08ERr A LEE RECREATION CENTER PROJECT N0. EXTERIOR (3LAZIN(i AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT 105191-0 SHIVE ~HAZ-rrERY ~A`~'~A DATE 3-25-06 SCALE ISSUED FOR Ceder Rapids` !A ~ Iowa City, IA ~ Des MOif108, IA DRAWN GLW FIELD BOOK ADD-O~I MOllfl~ IL ~ ~~ ~ ~ Ct11C8~ ~ APPROVED GLW REVISION http: //www.shive-hottery.com REFERENCE DRAWING A2/A5.04 A7 N 0 d E E_ 0 0 N O Q 3 0 N 0 -~ ,I Q U ~+ 3 O I rn O N U .~ 0 a` a 'n ~ 'n 'n D D ? N "I 7 T~ Z N ~ o ~ ~ N ° (n ° ~ ° Z r m mzl0 ~~NS m D m D m a rn ~ ~ v o~~m r ~ ~ ~ m w~ N'n' O ~ O '0 O ~ C O O = Z ~ vDv r {' o ~ 5 o o ~ = ~~~o 0 0 0 o z m m m m ~ cn cn cNi+ uNi w ~ z~=~ O ~m ~ Dno zg~ 0 0 ~ ~ ~ '~ D~z ~ N ~ a ~~ 0 0 0 0°0 Z o ~ ~ SOD O mW~ g~~ w ~ ~ ••AA V/ . ~ m D 0 O °~~ a = ~c~ ~ m m m ~ rn n ~ D ~ -r-i ~ r-I r~1 z z~ C r -~ r ° m z;:z o 0 0 o ~ G7pm nZn O _ _ to ~° o v' N w °° m x og ~„ cn ~ 0 z r^m a m m m z ~~~ r n Z Z Z Z N ~ o D ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ a N ---{ ~ +~ mmo j j W N N -~ ;'~ N r- ~n~ I I I ~ ~ ~{~ ~ ~ i A Z ~ _ ~ ~ N $ rri Sn _ ~ n N N ~ I i'1 ...t7 ~ ` J ~ ZND ~ ~ I ~ O .. ~ t.~ ~+ v z ° ~ ~ ~ O ~ ~D .'0 n ~ ~ D ~ ~ O N C Z ROBERT A LEE RECREATION CENTER PROJECT N0. E>RERIOR ~~ A~ ParE~ I~PLACEI~tENT °T 105191-0 '~ 7~ ~ ' ~ C~ ~ A ERY SHl ~ ~ ~ ATT 25 6 CA LE F R - DATE 4- ISSUED O C9def Repid8, W ~ IOwH Gty, IA ~ Des Moines, IA DRAWN SMD FIELD 800K ADD-O~) MoMne, IL ~ Bloam(rgton, il. ` Chk,ago, iL gppROVED TRF REVISION http: /~www.shive-fiattery.com REFERENCE DRAWING M1.02 M1 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM GRILLE (3 15/16") - ao M r%-i E i= 0 0 N N 0 a 0 3 0 N 0 _~ ,I 0 ~, 3 O I rn 0 i .~ 0 a` a 0 a~ v :_ 6" 1" 4" 1 ADD HEAVY DUTY CUSTOM FIN TUBE ENCLOSURE WITH 1/8" BREAK ALUMINUM EXTERIOR AND CONTINUOUS ALUMINUM SLOT GRILL NOTES: 3/16" THICK STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURE AS REQUIRED. 3/16" X 1 1/2" BRACKET STOCK. 7/16" X 1/4" CONTINUOUS 14 GA. /16" X 1" VERTICAL SLOTS o ~ ANGLE, VULCAN TO PRE-PUNCH WITH 3/8" X 1/2" VERTICAL SLOTS FOR SECURING TO BRACKET. LOCATE SLOTS 6" C-C. 1/4" COUNTERSUNK HOLES BY VULCAN CUSTOM ENCLOSURE FOR FT-11/8" LIP o ~_ 3"=1'-0" ~' --i ~7 ~ 1. ENCLOSURE SHALL RUN WALL TO WALL UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON PLAN$.~ -G N 2. PROVIDE CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH TO ENCLOSURE EXTERIOR. _ pO j~ EXTRUDED ALUMINUM GRILLE (8 15/16") 7/16" X 1 /4" CONTINUOUS 14 ~. 10' ANGLE, VULCAN TO PRE-PUNCH 1" 6" 1• WITH 3/8" X 1/2" VERTICAL SLOTS FOR SECURING TO BRACKET. LOCATE SLOTS 6" C-C. X1/4" COUNTERSUNK HOLES BY WLCAN HEAVY DUTY CUSTOM FIN ~~'. TUBE ENCLOSURE WITH 1/8" .-.-. BREAK ALUMINUM EXTERIOR AND CONTINUOUS ALUMINUM SLOT GRILL 0 0 NOTES: 3/16 THICK" STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURE AS REQUIRED. 3/16" X 1 1/2" BRACKET STOCK `O EXPOSED PART OF BRACKET TO BE CONCEALED BY BRACKET LEG BOX. BRACKETS MTD. ON 3'-0" MAX. 1/4" COUNTERSUNK HOLES BY WLCAN 1/8" LIP CUSTOM ENCLOSURE FOR FT-2 3"=1'-0" - 1. ENCLOSURE SHALL RUN WALL TO WALL UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON PLAN 2. PROVIDE CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH TO ENCLOSURE EXTERIOR. SHIVE ~HATTERY Ceder Rapids. IA ~ Iowa City. IA ~ Des tvloines, IA NloNne, IL ~ BloomingtorL IL ~ Chicago, IL http: //www.shive-hattery.com ROBERT A LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZWG AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT IONfA CITY, IOWA DATE 4-25-06 SCALE DRAWN SMD FIELD BOOK APPROVED TRF REVISION REFERENCE DRAWING M1.02 PROJECT N0. 105191-0 ISSUED FOR ADD-01 M2 EXISTING UGHT FIXTURE t5 5 4 ~TO BE REMOVED 1.0 1.0 1.0 EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE TO BE REMOVED ~^ RANDRALL COURT lO~tC136 ROOY ~__~1111~~~~~~•~ I /~ E o EF-4 4 /1 r DN 1 \/ 1 0 0 ui E ~- co 0 0 (V _~ ,o a O 3 0 0 4, ,o i rn i 0 rn 0 U .~' 0 i a U .~ E E EXISTING MOTORIZED DOOR OPERATOR TO BE DISCONNECTED EXISTING SECURITY SYSTEM Q CONTROL PANEL ADD a. ;~ C7 ~o. ~~ ~ ~ - LouNCS ~ HabY N ~ C`. ~ ~.. GYIlNAffiUY '~ ~--- ~. i~ '~ ~ D ~~ ~ ~ y ~ I P i I ~i I 91f00@iG POOL NATATORIUI[ V I n I / \ I I ~ I j \~ I / \ I I / \ I / \ I / \\ I / I \ I / \ I / ( \ I I / \ I ~ I ~ ~ I -Lam or swLC°en''e°ve NEW VFD FOR EXISTING ~ ~ I POOL EXHAUST FAN ~ ~ I ~~\ "EF" (ITEM 3) ~I A 5 EF-4 p R2 A .o.m 2 ~ ~ E1.01 EXISTING PANEL P EXISTING UGHT 1.0 n ~oYeN~s LoctaR FIXTURE (I TO BE REMOVED fNSTALL NEW FIXTURE OVER '°°'" EXISTING JUNCTION BOX .,,~ NEW DOOR ALARM SHNE ~HATTERY cedar >~ w ,Iowa cry, IA • oes Manes, la Mdine, IL ~ Bloomington, IL ` CMcaOo, IL http: ,~/www.shive-hottery.com ROBERT A LEE i~CREATION CENTER ExTERIOR c~I.AZINCi AND P'aNEL REPUCEt~ENT ~to,~CT IOWA CrrY, IOWA PROJECT N0. 105191-0 DATE 3-25-06 SCALE ISSUED FOR DRAWN DMM, FIELD BOOK ADD-O1 APPROVED RAC REVISION REFERENCE DRAWING E1.01 E1 M N O Gi E t0 O O N N d' O H Q 3 N O _ W ~ p , / I ~ 1 ~ 0 ~~ ~~ .~ 0 d :a .~ .~ .E a m gg~~ ~~ Q oo~r~ 'y~Z SN W W O r` O N~~~ SHNE ~HATTERY Cedar Rapids, IA ~ Iowa City, IA ~ Des Moines, IA Moyne, IL ~ Bioornirptort, IL ~ Chicago, IL http: //www.shive-hattery.com ~ ~ y W 0 H N W O WZ 8~N ~~~a~~ N 0 N Z N ~ ~ N ~~SSjj C ~~LJi~~O C7 ~-----~_ C~~Z I W I ~~~a ~ ~ L___"__J ~~~oW I f ~~~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ W 0 F W V1 m N W O c~ Z N X W 0aN oCo ~o?Q N LL O Z 3 W N Z N Q U Q O U ZZ 2 O y~j Y 3 K ~O Z C9 ~ ~N ~~ O W ( I I I I I I i qqz 8~ ~ ~~ o ~i N ? W O o° a < ~Z 6 J mm Q 2 OU ~ <W z ao Z < ~+ ~ 3 ~ co a ~ Z~ x ~app~ d W ~OZG W W 000 U . C a m6W~ ~d K G~~W ~_3 -/G~., I L J . T ?i~' y rW ~/ Q rWA _/ '~'A `(V/ ^/~~~r Y~ W ~ to ~ ROBERT A LEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR QLJ1ZIWta AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CRY, IOWA DATE 3-25-06 SCALE DRAWN DMM FIELD BOOK APPROVED RAL REVISION REFERENCE DRAWING E1.02 N D CO CT ~p ~ 1 1~__ /; ~ 1 PROJECT N0. 105191-0 ISSUED FOR ADD-01 E2 ~' O N E tD O O 0 Q 3 0 N O W ~o :v O~ 1 ; 1 ~ O I rn ~ o ~/ U .~ 0 .~ U .~ .E .E I i n ~ o °' ~ z n Y N I O z z a W W I ao 25 ao m i z F z i 6 ~`~j N ~ ~ V~ W .~m W W W Z Z a m W W r X W W W ~ e ~ Ol M M M M M ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ c N N N N N DIY Ma r DIY ~R W l M ~ ~~ Z N N N ~~ M W ! i ~ x c~ 2 o 0 t N W F ~ ~ Oz J 0_ W 2 Z \ \ \ \ \ N N N N N s _ _ _ _ ~ N O ~ z F N i N X W M d W W W W N ~ ~fJ SHNE ~HATTERY Ceder Rapids, IA ~ Iowa Ctty, IA ~ Des Mdrlea, IA Mdirle, IL ~ BlooMnpton, IL ~ CMcago, IL http: //www.shive-hattery.eom ~~ ~ ;~ ~ I 3 ~ ~~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ $~ ~ a~~ ~'; ~ \ ~~ d a<~~ >~ ~~~ o ~ ~~ ~ ~p < W F < ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ M1 ~ ~ `~ ~ ~~~~ ~~~ ~ ~r 2 1 ~~~ ~ ~ ~~r ~y • m < ~ ~~ ~ <~ ~W ~ < W~ < ~ ,fir ~ ~ ~~i~m `~~~~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ W~~ r /V M~ ~f rf'~ ri ~ rv c~ 0 Q +~~-., n ~ !'7 -`' N ~,: OO .:-G ~ x.> .~.,? ~ ~` ~, p~, N ~ ~~ ~~ c~i ~ O ROBERT A lEE RECREATION CENTER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PALL REPLACEMENT PRO,~CT IowA CITY, IOWA DATE 3-25-06 SCALE DRAWN OMM FIELD BOOK APPROVED RAG REVISION REFERENCE DRAN7NG II i('---~ t I 1 PROJECT N0. 105191-0 ISSUED FOR ADD-01 Ei.D2 E3 0 x .. z O f~D -~+ O O •t A~ y A W d b G a ., .. y o, ~„ ~ w `'' ;- Cam" C o ~ °- to m ~ v a d ~ b a ~ n b o ~ tri ~ Y ~ p ~ bd ~ ~ ~ Cam" °< °< °< ~. 5. w ~ a~ ~ 5 - ~ r' ~ c: ~ ~ cAo cAo' ~ ac cAo' o ~ ~ ~ ~ Y y ~ ` '~ ~ ~ Y Y fn ~ ~ o ~n ~ ^c ~ ° o ~ ~ o ~ H ~ ~ ~ ~ Y o o .. a C7~ ~ a' ~ o~ w w • ° ~ c ~ ~ ~ c d ~ ~ ~ ~' ~ o ~ C ~ ° w ~ ~ ~_ ~ c o ~ ~ MMe W ~ w ~ ~ ~ ~ y n 0 ~ ~'~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ a C7 ~ .;' ~ co ~ m a o • , o .~ :; ~ ~ ~ ~' ~ o ~ o ~ ~ ~ ~ y ~ o ,..y ~ .-. co ~ C ~3 ~ ~ ~ a. °.`; ~ ~ ~ ~ ~' ~' " ~ °o ~ a: 0 0 0 ~ ~ ~ . ~ o ~ ~ ~ ~ ~. ~ ~ ~ ~ w ' coo ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~i o b M ^~ E E m o ~ o ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ O N 6A 619 ~ 01 69 ~ O~ .» _ N ~ J ~ A A ~ ~ O N A O O O ~ ~ J A O O O O .~i ¢, d O O O a °°~ '~ ~ o a ~ o ~' o ~ w ~ ~ c o ~ c c ~ . ~ ~ O o J 00 b9 N 6A r+ fig N 619 ~-+ 619 b9 N ~ 01 00 6A N ~ Q~ O~ N b W ~ W 11 r+ Ui O ~ ~ A ~ O O O O O O O O O O ~ O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O ~~~ ~ g+~ ~ZI ~ n r~ `~ ~ M lJ i"i O O /A7 Q1 l 1 7d O C -s Y n •t A~ 0 a f~ -~ Cr1 YC O ^t A7 QQ A9 '~ a ~d ~. 7d fD .d A~ A fD '~ ~~ A e~f Gd d r y h~l J..~ ~ ~~1'~1n~~ ~~ ~.~~J Z- ~~~ 900Z ~~~~ .~., Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) ? ®o HOME OFFICE `~ w '~ 2100 FLEURDRNE ~ ~ DES MOINES, IA 50321-1158 (515) 243-81'71 • (515) 243-0344 FAX Bond No.: IAC 47146 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we 6705 Hwy F 17 W, PO Box 308, Baxter, IA 50028 as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) .-+ Robinson Energy Efficient Produ~,~c. C7 -~ C.-? C ~'~ _') ~~ a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State. of Iowa y as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound. unto City of Iowa City as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of .Ten Percent of Bid Amount Dollars ( 10.0% :..c N -n N tx~ for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. ' WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for Robert A Lee Recreation Center -Exterior Glazing & Panel Replacement Project, Waterloo, Iowa NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and materials furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 27th day of April 2006 PRINCIPAL: ins. Witness B enda Robinson Witness am s o inson, Yres SU>~ETY: Mer/rchantsBjanding Com~ny (Mutual) Kirk 1GI. Rathj en "'fl rC1 Attorney-~n-I''act CON 0365 (12/99) Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) POWER OF ATTORNEY for Company Employees Bond #: IAC 47146 Know All Persons By These Presents, that the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and having its principal office in the City of Des Moines, County of Polk, State of Iowa, hath made, constituted and appointed, and does by these presents make, constitute and appoint the following company employees Kirk M. Rathjen of Des MolneS and State of Iowa its true and lawful Attorney-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver in its behalf as surety any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances or other written obligations in the nature thereof, subject to the limitation that any such instrument shall not exceed the amount of: Unlimited and to bind the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond or undertaking was signed by the duly authorized officers of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), and all the acts of said Attorney-in-Fact, pursuant to the authority herein given, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power-of-Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following Amended Substituted and Restated By- Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) on November 16, 2002. ARTICLE 11, SECTION 8 -The Chairman of the Board or President or any Vice President or Secretary shall have power and authority to appoint Attorneys-in-Fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contrails of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof. ARTICLE II, SECTION 9 -The signature of any authorized officer and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or Certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company, and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually fixed. In Witness Whereof, MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) has caused these presents to be signed by its President and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed, this 1st day of January 2006 STATE OF IOWA COUNTY OF POLK ss. •...... Oo~oRPOq 'O9y. •y:i ~; .ti.._ -o- a••. 1933 ~~ c: .s •c~. Jd~W... , • •~~d,• ••...... MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) ey ~~ President On this 1st day of 7anuary 2006 .before me appeared Larry Taylor, to me personally known, who being by me duly sworn did say that he is President of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), the corporation described in the foregoing instrument, and that the Seal affixed to the said instrument is the Corporate Seal of the said Corporation and that the said instrument was signed and sealed in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its Board of Directors. In Testimony Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Des Moines, Iowa, the day and year first above written. !~/~j,~j ~ CINDY SMYTH (N~. . • ~ Commission Number 173504 My Commission Expires March 16, 2009 Notary Public, Polk County, Iowa STATE OF IOWA COUNTY OF POLKss. I, William Warner, Jr., Secretary of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), do hereby certify that the above and foregoing id MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), Nich is d b t y sa e is a true and correil wpy of the POWER-OF-ATTORNEY execu still in full force and effect and has not been amended or revoked. O `_~ c~ ` In Wdness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seal of the Company on ~ • ~0`NG CO~I•'• this 27th day of April 2006 . • •' ~!~ . ~' ~ 00.pgP09 A9y• s~rary f ,---- • y ~ C) tV i~ X933 •ti ~ ~ ; ~ , : ~~ • ~ . ~Y {I .• POA 0005 EMP (1/06) •••....•• ~ UD DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM pRO.TECT: Robert A. 1Lec Recreation Center Exterior Glaztz-g and Panel Replacement Project City of Iowa City BID TO: City of lows City Civic Center 410 East 'UVashin~*ton Street Iowa City, ]A 52240 BID FROM REEP, Inc (Legal Nar'ne) Z C7 3'' C7 cf ..-- J ~~ r N -v N t `T1 t' NOTE: Submit one original and one copy oI'this Bid- Form. All blanks shall be eorrrpleted. Only bids on this form will be accepted. Submit Bid Security, if required, in separate envelope. Bidder shall carefully review the (nstn~etions to Bidders and. Supplementary Instructions to Bidders prior to cornpletirrg this form. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, ifthis Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with OWNER in the form included lri the Contract Documents to perform and furrrislr all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the 13id price and within the scheduletndicated in this Bid and i« accordance with the outer terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Bidder accepts all of the terms and coriditions of the Advertisement for Bids and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 30 days after the day of Bid opening. 2• If a Notice to Proceed or if a prepared Agreement provided- by the Owner is received at the business address identified below wrtltn the 30-day period, the undersigned. will, within ten days of such receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award and wilt execute and: deliver the Agreement, the Performance, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, the certificate of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with regairerrrents of the Contract Documents for this project and have the Project at Substantial Completion. on or before the date indicated in the AdvertiserTrent for Bids. 3. The undersigned Bidder submits, herewith, bid security in accordance with the terms set forth in the Advertisement for Bids. 4• The Bidder has exami[ted and carefully studied the Bidding Documents and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged: .bats Number S. BIDDER has visited the sits and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost; progress, perfortnanec and furnishing of the Work. 6. BIDDER is familiar with and is satisFed as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress,• performance and furnishing of the Work. IOS191-1 00410-1 DOCUMENT 004 } 0 ~ BID FORM ~ C7 ~.~ ~ ~ '7. BIDDER will commence on-site construction work at Phase 1 One days in advan~f~,ugt}~6, Z1~06, Cr--~ 8. BIDDER will. comp}etc the Work in accordance with the Bidding Documents as follo~acs~; b ~' ~f~ 9 j~ tV BASE BID: ~ TOTAL PRICE 1. All work indicated in the Bidding. Documents X29 9 6 O B $ ~ Z. Contingency Allowance X25,000 'l`OTAL BASE $ID ~ 6 5~ 9(O ~ ~ (sum of Items 1 - 2) TOTAY. BASE BID (sum of Items I - 2) in words: SAX 4e.A.1~, ~0~ -~ ~p~ ` S c.r!-yr Der (Q ~, s ~H~ C~~s --~_ v Amount shall be indicated in both words and figures. In ease of discrepancy, the amount indicated in words shall govern. AT:.TERNAT.E )gIl)S: Bidder agrees to peeforni all the work for each Alternate as described in the pt'oposed Contract Documents. Amount shall be indicated iii both words and Bgures" In case of discrepancy, the amount indicated in words shall govern. ALTERNATE NO. 1: Provide Area F (balcony) enelosuce as identified in the Contract Documents. ADD the Sum of: -rte ~.,;s. ~.~.~,,,~ VJd (~a.t S ~ ~ v ~° ..~'f DOLLARS ($ ~~', S`'S~-~ ALTERNATE NO 2: Integrate En tube contKOls in meeting rooms with existing digital conaro} system. ADD the Sum of: DOLLARS ($ Z °_v L05191-1 00410-2 nOCIIMIrNT 0.0410' BIT) FARM ALTERNA'T'E NU~3: Provide a variable speed drive, related controls at the existing pool exhaust fan. ADD the Sum of: ~~ ~~ DOLLARS ($_ ~ 57~'~ ALTI;,RNAT1/ Nn_ 4: Provide perforated patlels at west elevation office area. ADD th4 Sum of; w~. cep S/~ S~e,,.,,, ~r ~ n u ~~(`S DOLLARS ($ ~ (~Q'7 °O ~ ALTERNA'T'E NO. S: Provide coating repairs at post-tension anchorage points. ADD the Sum of rU DOLLARS($ _ ~' ALTERNATE NO. 6: Provide structural repairs for roof single-t mettibers. ~ ' ~"~ ~ N ' ;-- ~ r-- ~; ; -a ADD the Sum of ~~ _~ ~ t --~ ti rv ~~ D .c- DOLLARS ($ d ~Z ~N>.;~rzrCES: Required Base- Bid quantities of tlae item listed-below can be determined from the Bidding Documents. Tf adjustments in the quantities occur, per Owner's Representative direction, the Contract Price shalt be adjusted by Change Order on tb:e hasis of the following: Item Name in Unit for Specifications Adjustment Price Adiustm,ent _ Per Unit Coating. repair at post-tertsioncd Per end of precast `T' ~a ~~ anchorage pints (2 locations) '' Adjustment prices are subject to acceptance by OWNER, attd rejection of one or more adjustment prices will not invalidate acceptance of this entire Bid or any portion thereof. 105191-1 00410-3 DOCUMENT 00410 BID 1^ORM _ C~ 9. This Bid is submitted on May 2 , 200~i:`' n a ~;~ ~ -n 10. State. Contractor License No, 1-05 `~ ~ rv ~ -_~ C~ rn ;G~ -fl s 1 I . BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as ca ligtridated damages in the ew~fal~ to IcZSfttplete the Work within the times specified- in the Agreement. The parties hereto expressly s Mate ar~Lagree that time is of the essence of this contract. In the event that the. work and the final cornplet't"ott items~b Stated in the Supple-raentary Conditions are not completed within the time herein before stipulated, or within such extension of tittle as may be !;ranted as provided in accordance with the General Conditions, it is understood grid agreed that the Contractor shall pay to the Owner as agreed as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, $100.00 for each day which may elapse between the date as herein provided and the date of actual completion of the work, said suns. being expressly agreed upon as a measure of damage to the Owner by reason of delay, and it is further expressly agreed that to estimate the actual damages sustained by the Owner in such event would. be impractical and difficult, and the Contractor agrees ~rnd consents that the amount of all such liquidated damages may be deducted and- retained by the Owner from any monies then due or thereafter becoming due t0 the Contractor. 12. Bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, without coll.usiort or in connection with any othEr person, organization or corporation bidding on the work. Bidder certifies that Chris proposal iS n7ade in; confonnatlCe with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between Che conditions of the bidder's proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by ArehitectlEngineer, the provisions of the latter shall prevail. 13. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid: a. Required Bid Securiiy in the amount often percent and in the form of a bid bond from a corporate surety satisfactory to the Owner SUI3MiTTEI) IN A SEPAIL4TE ENVELOPS. 14. The bidder shall not make any revisions to the bid forms or the Schedule of Bid Prices grid shall not devise any alternates other than those provided. Any such notes, revisions, or comments shall be grounds for rejection of the bid as not being responsive. 15. The bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids, waive irregularities or technicalities in any bid, and. accept. any bid which meets the requirements of the bid docurnettts. 16. The undersigned bidder certifes that a) the bidder's datailed examination of the drawings and specifications has turned up no ambiguities-which need clarification, b) only authorized data have been used to arrive at the bidder's bid figure, acrd c) the experience and capabilities of the bidder's fum, the bidder's workmen and the bidders subcontractors are particularly well-suited to the construction. ofthis type of project. 1?. Complete the applicable item(s) listed below. If this Bid is submitted by an agent of BIDDER, attach a current Power-of-Attorney certifying the agent's authority to-bind the BIDDER. I05191-1 00410-4 DOCUMENT 00410 8ID FORM If BIDDER is: An Individual By (Signature of Indivi ual) Doing Business As Business Address Plto~ne No A Partnership By (Firm Name) (Signature of General. P Business Address Phone No, A Corporation By State of Incorporation By (S Attest Business Address 6705 Hwy (Corporation Name) (Typed. or Printed Nartle) v.~~ rn ~~ =~"~'7 ~ ") N ~ N ~ ,~_ tD (Typed or Printed. Name) I e of Person Authorized to Sign) ames C. Robinson i or Printed Name and Title) Brenda Robinson 7 W (Secretary) Phonc No. _ (6411 227 - 3191 OF DOCUMENT 00410 105191-1 00410-5 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS ,. o AIA Document A310 ~ ~ a -- Bid Bond ~' ~ ~` ~' ~~7~~ ~, KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we ~~ N u UNZEITIG CONSTRUCTION COMPANY .- P.O. BOX 1028 CEDAR RAPIDS, IA 52402 ~' ~ as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and United Fire & Casualty Company, P.O. Box 73909, 118 Second Avenue SE, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52407-3909, 800-343-9130 a corporation,duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Iowa City 410 E. Washington Street Iowa City, IA 52240 as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Ten Percent of the Bid Amount Dollars (10% ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for Robert A. Lee Recreation Center, Exterior Glazing & Panel Replacement Project, Iowa City, IA NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accor- dance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and suf- ficient surety for the faithful performance of such ConVact and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution there- of, or in the event of [he failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 1st day of May 2006 ~1 Y 19~)~lJ (Witness) United Fire & Casualty t:ompany (Surety) (Seap (Witness) C stal M Darlin - Attorne -In-Fa (title) AIADOCUMENTA310 ~ BID BOND ~ AIA ®~ FEBRUARY 1960 ED ~ THEAMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 UNZEITIG CONSTRUCTION COMPANY UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY Bond # BID BOND - 00002720 Home Office -Cedar Rapids, Iowa Certified Copy of Power of Attorney Obli~~-~, City of Iowa City (Original on file at Home Office of Company -See Certification) 410 E. Washington Street Iowa City, IA 52240 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That the UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Iowa, and having its principal office in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa, does make, consti- tuteand appoint., MARTY SMITH; OR STEVEN C. KING, OR THOMAS D. KING, OR LINDA WILCOX, OR SANDRA RIHA, OR JENN(FERA. URBANEK, OR CRYSTAL M. DARLING, ALL INDIVIDUALLY of PO BOX 3100, CEDAR. RAPIDS, IA 52406 its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute in its behalf all law- ful bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature as follows: ANY AND ALL BONDS. and to bind UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY and all the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given are hereby ratified and confirmed. The Authority hereby granted shall expire August 30th, 2006 unless sooner revoked. This power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority. of the following By-Law duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company on April 1$ 1973. , "Article V -Surety Bonds and Undertakings" Section 2, Appointment of Attorney-n-Fact. "The President or any Vice president, or any other officer of the Company, may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attorneys-in-fact to act in behalf of the Company in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instru- ments of like nature. The signature of any officer authorized hereby, and the Corporate seal, may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either authorized hereby; such signature and seal, when so used, being adopted by the Company as the original signa- ture of such officer and the original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. Such attorneys-in-fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal of the Company thereto. The President or any Vice Presideht, the Board of Directors or any other officer of the Company may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney-in-fad. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY has caused these ~~su~ "ctt,~!zo presents to be signed by its vice president and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this ~~~ ''?~~'~ 1st day of May; , 2046 CO1YO1i~ UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY ~~ - SEAL t Vice President State of, owa, Count) of Linn; ss: On this 1st day of Maya , 2006 before me personally came Geoffrey G. Lakis to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and s1~'! that he resides in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa; that he is a Vice President of the UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporation. ,~' ~C49~5510N"M1~i~EA'~f~'!1# Notary Pu lic My Commission expires October 26, 2007 CERTIFICATION I, the undersigned officer of the UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit, and the copy of the Section of the by-laws of said Company asset f~i in said Power of Attorney, with the ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID COMPANY, and tl~the sarr~re correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that the said Power of Attorney has not ~e~volc°.e~ and is now in full farce and effect. ~'' ~ ~• .,~ In testimony whereof I liave hereunto subscribed my nameu nd affixed the corporate seal of the ~omp~ny ~. this ' 1st day of May , 2006. ,`, rc.~+stt~ze, ~ C~; N ~ p oo ; Sure y ; -~) W CORPOttATE '~ ~ T. ("~[ seAL e UND-3156 (1-03) 2 ~r111°~~~~ ~ DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM PROJECT: Robert A. Lee Recreation Center Exterior Glazing and Panel Replacement Project ^' ° City of Iowa City _- n ~ v Q'' . ~ ~ .~, ~ "' BID TO: City of Iowa City - [. ~ ~ ~ -- Civic Center ~ ~ N ~~ 410 East Washington Street t ~ Iowa City, IA 52240 ~ n BID FROM: Unzeitig Construction C~mpan~i ~ (Legal Name) NOTE: Submit one original and one copy of this Bid Form. All blanks shall be completed. Only bids on this form will be accepted. Submit Bid Security, if required, in separate envelope. Bidder shall carefully review the Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders prior to completing this form. 1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and famish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid Price and within the schedule indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement for Bids and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 30 days after the day of Bid opening. 2. If a Notice to Proceed or if a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the 30-day period, the undersigned will, within ten days of such receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award and will execute and deliver the Agreement, the Performance, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, the certificate of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before the date indicated in the Advertisement for Bids. The undersigned Bidder submits, herewith, bid security in accordance with the terms set forth in the Advertisement for Bids. 4. The Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged: Date Number 4-26-06 1 BIDDER has visited the site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. 6. BIDDER is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. 105191-1 00410-1 DOCUMENT 00410 SID FORM BIDDER will commence on-site construction work at Phase 1 30 days in advance of August 6, 2006. BIDDER will complete the Work in accordance with the Bidding Documents as follows: SASE BID: 1. All work indicated in the Bidding Documents 2. Contingency Allowance TOTAL BASE BID TOTAL PRICE $ ro ~ y. 6a'I~ . ~ $25,000 $ ~8'9.~~ (( m of Items 1 - 2) TOTAL BASE BID (sum of Items 1 - 2) in words: Amount shall be indicated in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount inciri~,ated in words 0 shall govern. O CJ ~ ~ N 4 -= ALTERNATE BIDS: r--- rn Bidder agrees to perform all the work for each Alternate as described in the proposed~trae~oc~m nts. Amount shall be indicated in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the mind sated in words shall govern. y o ALTERNATE NO. 1: Provide Area F (balcony) enclosure as identified in the Contract Documents. ADD the Sum of: a~ DOLLARS ($ aTD ~ 8~-a • ~ ) ALTERNATE NO. 2: Integrate fin tube controls in meeting rooms with existing digital control system. ADD the Sum of: 7 ' DU 7.c.t,~-e DOLLARS ($ .~, ..~OCJ . ) 105191-1 00410-2 DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM ALTERNATE NO. 3: Provide a variable speed drive, related controls at the existing pool exhaust fan. ADD the Sum of: c~~'~u~-~- ~~-c-~ DOLLARS ($ /~, D~-Z7 . o`o ) ALTERNATE NO. 4: Provide perforated panels at west elevation offtce area. ADD the Sum of: v DOLLARS ($_ ~, 099 • ,~, ) 0 O ~' ALTERNATE NO. 5: Provide coating repairs at post-tension anchorage points. ~"~ ~ ~ ~- ADD the Sum of: ~ ~-} tv ~-- DOLLARS ($ L~ _ ?l~D • ~~ ALTERNATE NO. 6: Provide structural repairs for roof single-t members. ADD the Sum o£ ~ , UNIT PRICES: DOLLARS ($ al, o~~ • ~ ) Required Base Bid quantities of the item listed below can be determined from the Bidding Documents. If adjustments in the quantities occur, per Owner's Representative direction, the Contract Price shall be adjusted by Change Order on the basis of the following: Item Name in Unit for Adjustment Price Specifications Adjustment Per Unit Coating repair at post-tensioned Per end of precast `T' anchorage points (2 locations) Adjustment prices are subject to acceptance by OWNER, and rejection of one or more adjustment prices will not invalidate acceptance of this entire Bid or any portion thereof. 105191-1 00410-3 DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM 9. This Bid is submitted on S - 2 - 2 00 6 , 2006. _ o O 10. State Contractor License No. 9 ~ 8 ~ 9 - 0 5 ~ ~_? ~ ~'~! ~ Tl 11. BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the ev~~failq~ to complete the Work within the times specified in the Agreement. The parties hereto expressly s ' ~e anc6,agr e 1 at time is of the essence of this contract. In the event that the work and the final complet~ms~'s sta ed 'n the Supplementary Conditions are not completed within the time herein before stipulated~ithii~3uch extension of time as may be granted as provided in accordance with the General Conditions, it is~tnderstd~'d and agreed that the Contractor shall pay to the Owner as agreed as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, $100.00 for each day which may elapse between the date as herein provided and the date of actual completion of the work, said sum being expressly agreed upon as a measure of damage to the Owner by reason of delay, and it is further expressly agreed that to estimate the actual damages sustained by the Owner in such event would be impractical and difficult, and the Contractor agrees and consents that the amount of all such liquidated damages may be deducted and retained by the Owner from any monies then due or thereafter becoming due to the Contractor. 12. Bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, without collusion or in connection with any other person, organization or corporation bidding on the work. Bidder certifies that this proposal is made in conformance with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between the conditions of the bidder's proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by Architect/Engineer, the provisions of the latter shall prevail. 13. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid: a. Required Bid Security in the amount often percent and in the form of a bid bond from a corporate surety satisfactory to the Owner SUBMITTED IN A SEPARATE ENVELOPE. 14. The bidder shall not make any revisions to the bid forms or the Schedule of Bid Prices and shall not devise any alternates other than those provided. Any such notes, revisions, or comments shall be grounds for rejection of the bid as not being responsive. 15. The bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids, waive irregularities or technicalities in any bid, and accept any bid which meets the requirements of the bid documents. 16. The undersigned bidder certifies that a) the bidder's detailed examination of the drawings and specifications has turned up no ambiguities which need clarification, b) only authorized data have been used to arrive at the bidder's bid figure, and c) the experience and capabilities of the bidder's firm, the bidder's workmen and the bidder's subcontractors are particularly well-suited to the construction of this type of project. 17. Complete the applicable item(s) listed below. If this Bid is submitted by an agent of BIDDER, attach a current Power-of-Attorney certifying the agent's authority to bind the BIDDER. 105191-1 00410-4 DOCUMENT 00410 BID FORM If BIDDER is: An Individual By (Signature of Individual) Doing Business As Business Address (Typed or Printed Name) Phone No. A Partnership By (Signature of General Partner) Business Address Phone No. N a cn ~, C~ ~ ~ ] ~ rv ~__... t- fT " ! ~ ~ p ~ 1 ~ ^ ~ D cn A Comoration p By Unzeitig Construction Com~anv (Corporation Name) State oratio I a • , By ~ (Si ature o n Authorized to Sign) David F. U ti resident ~ n ~` ped o rinted Name and Title) Attest . (Firm Name) (Secretary) Address 1619 F Ave . N . E . Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52402 Phone No. ~ 1 9 ~ h ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 END OF DOCUMENT 00410 (Typed or Printed 105191-1 00410-5 Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering Div., 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 {319)356-5044 RESOLUTION N0. 06-166 RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT AND AUTHORIZING : HE IIfICAYOR TO SIGN AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST A C ~ NTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CE TER EXTERIOR GLAZING AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT. WHEREAS, REEP, Inc. of Baxter, Iowa, has submitted the lowest respo, sible bid of $654,960 for construction of the above-named project. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL O THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: 1. The contract for the construction of the above-named project is h reby awarded to REEP, Inc., subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate pe ormance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program sta ements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign and the City Clerk t attest the contract for construction of the above-named project, subject to the conditi n that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, nd contract compliance program statements. Passed and approved this 23rd day of MaY , ~p 06 YOR Approved by ~. ATTEST: - ~ r/ 7/d4 CITY C RK City Attome ' Office It was moved by Champion and seconded by Vanderho f the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll caU there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: x Bai x Ch; x Coi x Ellis x O't x Val x Wit pwmplrosla~rrd reep.doc ~~,~ - 2e 1 Prepared by: Kumi Morris, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. nR-i ~~ RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE ROBERT A. LEE RECREATION CENTER WINDOW AND PANEL REPLACEMENT PROJECT. WHEREAS, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the Robert A. Lee Recreation Center window and panel replacement project, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and Reep, Inc. of Baxter, Iowa, dated June 5, 2006, be accepted; and WHEREAS, the Engineer's Report and the performance and payment bond has been filed in the City Clerk's office; and WHEREAS, the final contract price is $629,960.00. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this i 'ith day of ATTEST: ~ CITY LERK It was moved by Champion and seconded by adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: x x X x x X 20~~. Wilburn the Resolution be ABSENT: Bailey Champion Correia Hayek O'Donnell Wilburn Wright W :\wpdata\PW ENG\RES\08RecCtr-window8~panel-acptwk.doc 5/08 ~CGCu /~2~~~~~~ City Attorney's Office ~-/~~o ~